pacha tnt wernt apnsbone nomen pmenene ate be tate Neier w2e7 8 Son snypibainenemore are home setae P48. iw hete™ BMS Papal Pa ed ce 4: r Me i ’ N ature ILLUSTRATED JOURNAL OF SCIENCE eoNian INST/ TOSS = % A) ; i| \ &> * § yey So MATIONAL WY Nature ee NNT ESIC Pees tRABED JOURNAL OF SCIENCE VOLUME LXVI MAY to OCTOBER 1902 “To the solid ground Of Nature trusts the mind which builds for aye.’—WorDSWOR1H 173689 Pondon Veweovunn LAN AND CO., LimitTep NEW YORK: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY ~ RICHARD CLAY AND S LONDON AND BUNG Deol Giudiug Company 3957 St. Clair Avenue Cleveland 14, Ohio SI BINDING AND LETTERING INSTRUCTIONS 51 vols. of this title Stamping Gold: =... < Black=.=- =< Special Color... --- Color of Labels — Top ------ Bottom... --- Leather_--_-- Follow rub---- Sample---- New title... -_- We have rub_.--- The following necessary for new titles Top Horizontal Title . only or if change in instructions. es B BINDING INSTRUCTIONS PUIMCOVGNSHOUL (2 siete = oo cca = ne NATURE Bromt cover Only)... 2252 5.5<- 8 66 Keep first cover for title page ------ MAY-OCT Bindrailicovers in) so. 222<,.<22.2.0.- . Remove all adds if possible _--_____- 5 pole ~ Bind everyting, in .%.....-.=22.. 3 E 505). rim. = ..= - Yess< =< No_---| # "is ee 2 Imprint.... Yes. -X- No==-.- : iieso please list 2. - 52.2 se 2 F Special Instructions | REBIND. : = o 5 J 3 8848 Bottom Material Color No.----_. oy w-eae Hostel : pane | ; i annecbonine -_ ae 4 everl pW Ck... alti wel a altiT istnosi1oH. qor ny * ' 7 tc. oe | : van | aavtan a a8 : | TOG=TAM . ; soer 2 { | ‘ 7 Z t oe =| | id . Y ~~ Pe - ere Fo rolod IsixetaM | mostoa ; wes, ve - , INDEX. ABEL (SIR FREDERICK), Death of, 483; Obituary Notice of, 49 Abel (Henrik Niels), the Abel Festival in Christiania, 552 Abercromby ‘Hon. John), on the Oldest Bronze Age Earthenware Vessel, 663 Ackroyd (W.), on the Telluric Distribution of the Elements in Relation to Their Atomic Weights, 662 Acoustics: Interference of Sound, the Right Hon. Rayleigh, F.R.S., at the Royal Institution, 42 ; Studies in Auditory and Visual Space Perception, Arthur Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 733; Resultant Tones and Harmonic Series, Prof. Silvanus P. Thompson, F.R.S., 6; Margaret Dickins, 78; Coast Fog Signals,’ E. Price Edwards, 115; the Vibration of the Violin, W. B. Coventry, 150; the Transmission of Sound Through Solid Walls, F. L. Tufts, 212 ; Earthquake-like Vibrations Caused by the Firing of Heavy Guns at the Mouth of the Medway, | 230; Wellenlehre und Schall, W. C. L. van Schaik, 268 ; the Study of Resonance by Means of Oscillographs, M. Armagnat, 307 ; Observations on the Smallest Perceptible Musical Tone- difference as Examined in the People of Scotland and of the Torres Straits, Dr. C. S. Myers, 666 Actinometer, a New Registering, G. de Fontenoy, 401 Adams (the late Prof. J. Couch), the Discovery of Neptune by, $4 Adams (W. S.), the Spectroscopic Binary 8 Cephei, 352 Adeney (Dr. W. E.), Chemistry of Respiration in Bacteria, 167 Aéronautics: Death of M. Severo and His Assistant, 65 ; Meteorological Results of the Balloon Ascents of February 6, Dr. Hergesell, 66; Results of International Balloon Ascents of March 6, 329; French Naval Balloon Accident, Lieut. Baudic Drowned, 183; Dr. Miethe and Lieut. Hildebrandt’s Uncomfortable Balloon Voyage, 254; Aéronautical Congress Resolution Negativing Unprotected Ascent Above 7 or 8 Kilometres, 279; the Use of Oxygen Inhalers in Con- nection with High Balloon Ascents, Dr. Siiring, 306; Project for a Navigable Balloon with an Interior Keel, M. Torres, 422; Comte de la Vaulx and M. Heureux, 447; Stanley Spencer’s Airship, 539; M. de Bradsky and M. Morin killed, 610; the Position and Promise of Aérial Navigation, Dr. S. P. Langley, 635 ; Captain Ferber’s Experiments in Aérial Gliding, 635 Africa: Coral Reefs of Zanzibar, C. Crossland, 166 ; Further Discoveries in the Great Ruins at Zimbabye, 397 ; Animistic Beliefs Among the Yaos of British Central Africa, Rev. A. Hetherwick, 514; the ‘‘ Sleeping Sickness” of Uganda, 484; Trypanosoma Thetlert, New Parasite in the Blood of Cattle in South Africa, 15; Lieut.-Colonel Bruce, F.R.S., 84; Cold Weather in South Africa, J. R. Sutton, 247; Cape | of Good Hope Department of Agriculture Marine Investiga- tion in South Africa, Observations on the Temperature and Salinity of the Sea around the Cape Peninsula, J. D. F. Gilchrist, 260 ; Gold Seeking in South Africa, a Handbook of Hints for Intending Explorers, Prospectors and Settlers, Theo Kassner, 440; the Great Granite Mass of the Matopos, Frederick P. Mennell, 449 ; Geodetic Survey of South Africa, vol. ii., Report on a Rediscussion of Bailey's and Fourcade’s Surveys and their Reduction to the System of the Geodetic Sur- vey, Sir David Gill, K.C.B., F.R.S., Major C. F. Close, 457 ; Gold Production and Life of the Main Reef Series, Witwatersrand, T. H. Leggett and F. H. Hatch, 659 Agamennone (Dr. G.), a New Form of Seismograph, 260 Agricultural Hall, the Tramways Exhibition at the, 272 Agriculture: Ammonia, Nitrates and Chlorine in Rothamsted Rain Water, Dr. Miller, 22; Nitrates and Chlorine in the Drainage through Uncropped and Unmanured Land, Dr. Lord | Miller, 22; Culture o. the Forage Beet at Grignon, P. Dehérain and C. Dupont, 47; Colorado Potato Beetle at Tilbury, 134; Manufacture of Oil Cakes from the Seeds of the Sunflower, 232; Manual of Agricultural Chemistry, Herbert Ingle, 245; Cape of Good Hope Department o: Agriculture Marine Investigation in South Africa, Observa- tions on the Temperature and Salinity of the Sea around the Cape Peninsula, J. D. F. Gilchrist, 260; the Failure of Pea Crops, 280; Agricultural Use of Volcanic Dust, 306; the Use of Hail Rockets, E. Vidal, 312; Experiments with Tobacco and Potatoes at St. Kitts-Nevis, 448 ; on the Soils of Dorset, D. A. Gilchrist, C. M. Luxmoore, 486 ; Agricultural Teaching in West Indian Islands, 539; Indigo Cultivation in British India, 636 Aiming Guns under Cover, an Instrument for, 493 Alaska, a Holiday Cruise to, 176 Alcohol: Manual of Alcoholic Fermentation and the Allied Industries, Charles G. Matthews, 1; Preparation of Absolute Alcohol from Strong Spirit, Dr. Young, F.R.S., 70; Pro- perties of Mixtures of the Lower Alcohols with Water, Dr. Young, F.R.S., and Miss E. C. Fortey, 70 ; Properties of Mix- tures of the Lower Alcohols with Benzene and with Benzene and Water, Dr. Young and Miss E. C. Fortey, 70; Alcohol as a Motive Power for Automobiles, 307 ; the Nutritive Value of Alcohol, Messrs. Atwater and Benedict, 450; Alcohol as an Illuminant, L. Denayrouze, 486 Alectorolophus, Monographie der Gattung, Dr. Jakob von Sterneck, 4 | Alexander, (Prof. Thos.), Thin Floating Cylinders, 6 ; a Cubic and Submerged Cubes, 127 Algebra, H. G. Willis, 149 ; College Algebra, L. E. Dickson, 4 Algol Variable, New, 115; Mrs. Fleming, 331; A. Stanley Williams, 515, 635 Allbutt (Prof. I. Clifford, F.R.S.), the Rise of the Experi- mental Sciences at Oxford, Boyle Lecture at Oxford, 90 Alliot (Henri), New Proof of the Cellular Resistance of the Saccharomyces and on a New Application of this Property to Indusiry and the Distillery, 288 Altitudes at Sea, Method of Observing, during Night-Time, Prof. Joly, 186 Aluminium and its Alloys, Prof. E. Wilson, 655; W. Murray Morrison, 655 America : British vevsws American Locomotives, 42 ; Pisciculture in the United States, Earl Grey, 65; the Birds of North and Middle America, the Fringillidz, R. Ridgway, 75 ; American Journal of Science, 93, 212, 310, 408, 571 ; American Journal of Mathematics, 93, 455; Bulletin of the American Mathe- matical Society, 118, 165, 382, 455; Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, 165 ; Cyclopedia of Ameri- can Horticulture, L. H. Bailey, 147; a New High-speed Record on the Burlington and Missouri Railroad, 184; the Smithsonian Institution, its Documentary History, 226; the Pittsburg Meeting of the American Association, 299, Address by Prof. C. S. Minot, 300; the Eocene Primates and Rodents of North America, Prof. H. F. Osborn, 379 ; What the United States of America is doing for Anthropology, Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., 430; Education in the United States of America, 453 Anvesthesia by Electric Currents, Stephane Leduc, 336 Anatomy : Death and Obituary Notice of Dr. Henri Filhol, 133 ; an Introduction to the Study of the Comparative Anatomy of Animals, G. C. Bourne, 314; Death and Obituary Notice of Alexander Kowalevsky, Prof. E. Ray Lankester, F.R.S., 394 | Ancient Ruins of Rhodesia, the, R. N. Hall and W. G. Neal, Prof. A. H. Keane, 34 vi Lndex Nature, _Dec: 18; 1902. Anderson (Prof. R. J.), on the Relation of the Parietal Bone in Primates, 641 Anderson (Dr. Tempest), Royal Society Report on the West Indian Eruptions, 402 Andrée (M.), the Fate of, 255 Andrews (Thomas, F.R.S., and Charles Reginald), Microscopic Effects of Stress on Platinum, 213 Andrews (Wm.), Stopping Down the Lens of the Human Eye, 31 Anglesey, Jaspers of South-Eastern, Edward Greenly, 95 Angus (Herbert F.), German Progress in Optical Work, Paper Read at the Optical Society, 138 Animal Forms: a Second Book of Zoology, Dr. David S. Jordan and Prof. Harold Heath, 605 Animal Intelligence, L. C. Hurt, 459 Animal Life, the Story of, B. Lindsay, 173 Animali, la Protezione degli, N. Lico, 414 Animals, an Introduction to the Study of the Comparative Anatomy of, G. C. Bourne, 314 Annandale (N.), Bipedal Locomotion in Lizards, 577 Annandale (Nelson), the Wild and Civilised Tribes of the Malay Peninsula, 664; the Human Souls and Ghosts of the Malays of Patani, 664 Annelids, Collateral Budding in two, Dr. H. P. Johnson, 86 Antarctica: Royal Geographical Society, President’s Opening Address, Current Arctic and Antarctic Expeditions, 113 ; the First Fruits of the German Antarctic Expedition, 223; the Morning, the Auxiliary Ship of the National Antarctic Expedition, 255 ; the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, W. S. Bruce, 255; Report on the Collections of Natural History made in the Antarctic Regions during the Voyage of the Southern Cross, R. B. Sharpe and F. J. Bell, 322; Pro- gress of the Swedish Polar Expedition, 421; the Scottish Antarctic Expedition, W. S. Bruce, 631 Anthracite Coal Industry, the, Peter Roberts, 50 Anthropology : the Peoples of Malacca, Frank F. Laidlaw, 47 ; the Tribes of the Brahmaputra Valley, L. A. Waddell, 91 ; the Coorgs and Yeruvas, an Ethnological Contrast, T. H. Holland, 91; Trephining in the South Seas, Rev. J. A. Crump, 136; the Ruling Races of Prehistoric Times in India, South-Western Asia and Southern Europe, J. F. Hewitt, 145; History and Chronology of the Myth-making Age, J. F. Hewitt, 145; Savage Island, an Account of a Sojourn in Niué and Tonga, Basil Thomson, E. Sidney Hartland, 347; What the United States of America is doing for Anthro- pology, Anthropological Institute Presidential Address, Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., 430; Animistic Beliefs among the Yaos of British Central Africa, Rev. A. Hetherwick, 514; Prehis- toric Man in Burma, R. C. J. Swinhoe, 541; the Neglect of Anthropology in British Universities, ‘* Anthropotamist,” 654; Right-handedness and Left-brainedness, Prof. D. J. Cunningham, F.R.S., 659; see a/so Section H, British Asso- ciation. Ants, Descent of Winged, on Teplitz and Brussels, 396 Ape-House, the Zoological Society’s New, 406 Applied Mechanics, the Roorkee Manual of, Stability of Struc- tures and the Graphic Determintion of Lines of Resistance, Lieut.-Colonel J. H. C. Harrison, 340 Arabia, Legends of Palestine and, 517 Arachnidz : the Common Spiders ot the United States, James H. Emerton, 630 Arbor Low Stone Circle, Derbyshire, Excavations at, H. Balfour, 663 Arboricultural Society, Visit of the English, to Compicgne, Prof. W. R. Fisher, 450 Archeology: the Wiltshire Archeological and Natural History Magazine, Stonehenge and its Barrows, William Long, F.S.A., Stonehenge Bibliography Number, W. Jerome Harrison, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 25; the Ancient Ruins of Rhodesia, R. N. Hall and W. G. Neal, Prof. A. H. Keane, 34; Discoveries in the Churchyard of St. George the Martyr, Southwark, 39; the Farmers’ Years, | 1. Carnac and its Environs, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 104; Preliminary Report on a Journey of Archeeo- logical and Topographical Exploration in Chinese Turkestan, M. A. Stein, 284 ; the Older Civilisation of Greece, Further Discoveries in Crete, 390 ; corr. 424; Further Discoveries in the Great Ruins at Zimbabye, 397; the Early Christian Monuments of the Isle of Man, P. M. C. Kermode, 424 ; Archzeological Remains on the Summit of the Nevado de Chai, Dr. Erland Nordenskiéld, F.R.S., 440 Archibald (E. H.), Decomposition of Mercurous Chloride by Dissolved Chlorides, 233 : Architecture ; the Left-handed Spiral Staircase in the Chateau de Blois Modelled from Volta vespertilio, Theodore Cook, 39; Photography as applied to Architectural Measurement and Surveying, J. Bridges Lee at Society of Arts, 235; Naval Architecture, the Proposed Experimental Tank for Testing Ship Models for Kesistance, 128; Les Bateux Sous-Marins et les Submersibles, R. D’Equevilley, 290; Death and Obituary Notice of Benjamin Martell, 305 Arctica: Royal Geographical Society, the President’s Opening Address, Current Arctic and Antarctic Expeditions, 113 : Expedition Norvégienne de 1899-1900 pour I’Etude des Aurores Boréales, Resultats des Recherches Magnetiques, Kr. Birkeland, Dr. C. Chree, F.R.S., 227; the Fate of M. Andrée, 255; Year's Work of the Baldwin-Ziegler Arctic Expedition, Evelyn B. Baldwin, 349; Flora Arctica, C. H. Ostenfeld, 490 ; Return of the Arctic Expeditions, 542 Arithmetic, a First Step in, J. G. Bradshaw, 491 Arithmetic for Schools, an, J. P. Kirkman and A. E. Field, 491 Armagnat (M.), the Study of Resonance by means of Oscillo- graphs, 307 b ““Armorl ” Electro-Capillary Relay, the, 151, 175 Armstrong (Dr. E. F.), Synthetical Action of Enzymes, 662 ; Recent Synthetical Researches in the Glucoside Group, 662 Armstrong (Prof. Henry E., V.P.R.S.), Persulphuric Acids, 45 ; Opening Address in Section L at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 589 Armstrong-Orling System of Wireless Telegraphy, 327 Arnold (D. J.), New York Central Railway to be Worked Electrically, 398 Arnold (Prof. J. O.), Constituents of Hardened Steel, 63 Arnold-Forster (Mr.), the Duties of the State towards Science, 62 Arrhenius’s (Prof.) Theory of Cometary Tails and Aurore, Prof. John Cox, 54, Dr. J. Halm, 55 Arsenic, Decompesition of Compounds of Selenium and Tel- lurium by Moulds and its Influence on the Biological Test for, Dr. Rosenheim, 214 Biscnle as a Normal Constituent of Animals, Armand Gautier, 21 Arsenic in the Organism, Gabriel Bertrand, 216 Arsdale (M. B. van), Physical Experiments, 458 Auiacl Mineral Waters, the Evolution of, William Kirkby, 02 Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis for the Use of Students, Chemists and Assayers, E. L. Rhead and Prof. A. Humboldt Sexton, 628 Assheton-Smith (G, W. Duff), Marine Biology in Wales, 282 Astralium, Two Species of, from Port Jackson, H. Leighton Kesteven, 96 Astrographic Chart, the, Prof. H. H. Turner, F.R.S., 273 Astronomy: a Remarkable Lunar Halo, Prof. E. E. Barnard, 5; I. W. Croome Smith, 85; Signals from Mars, Percival Lowell, 18; the Orion Nebulz and Movement in the Line of Sight, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 18; Radial Velocity of the Orion Nebula, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 309; Our Astronomical Column, 18, 40, 68, 87, 115, 186, 208, 233, 258, 281, 309, 331, 352, 380, 401, 425, 450, 486, 514, 541, 557, 613, 638, 662; Changes on the Moon’s Surface, Prof. William H. Pickering, 40; Changes on the Moon, Prof. W. H. Pickering, 223 ; Theory of the Motion of the Moon, Ernest W. Brown, F.R.S., 356; Prof. Arrhenius’s Theory of Cometary Tails and Aurore, Prof. John Cox, 54. Dr. J. Halm, 55; Elements of Comet @ 1902 (Brooks), 68; Reduction of Measures of Swift's Comet (a 1899) from Photographs with a Portrait Lens of 30- inch Focus and 5-inch Aperture, Mr. Filon, 238; the Periodical Comet Tempel- Swift (1869-1880), 258 ; Ephemeris for the Searchof the Comet Tempel-Swift, F. Bossert, 557 ; another New Comet, John Grigg, 514, 557; Comet 1902 4, 515, 614; Observation of Perrine’s Comet 1902 4, 558; Photograph of, 638; Colaba Observatory, 68; New Variable Stars, 68, 234; the Naming of New Variable Stars, 425 ; Variable Stars, 309; Notation of Variable Stars, 208; Ob- servations of the Variable Star x* Cygni during 1899, 282; Qbservations of Fifty-eight Long-Period Variables, Nature, ] Index V il Dec. 18, 1902 638 ; Observations of Variable Stars of Long Period, Prof. Pickering, 486; New Algol Variable, 115; Mrs. Fleming, 331; A. Stanley Williams, 515, 638; 2 Remarkable Solar Talo, Rev. T. C. Porter, 76; the Discovery of Neptune by the late Prof. J. Couch Adams, F.R.S., 84; the Search fora Planet beyond Neptune, T. Grigull, 614; Saturn Visible through the Cassini Division, C. T. Whitmell, 87, 296: the Satellites of Saturn and Uranus, Dr. J. J. See, 380; Spec- tral Researches on the Rotation of the Planet Uranus, H. Deslandres, 572; Catalogue of North Polar Stars, Prof. Pickering, 88 ; Royal Astronomical Society, 94, 238; Visual and Spectroscopic Observations of the Sun-spot Group of May and June, tgor, Father Cortie, 94; the Sun-spot Curve and Epochs, 186; the Farmers’ Years, ii., Carnac and its Environs, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 104; Astronomical Occurrences in June, I153; in July, 208; in August, 331; in September, 425; in October, 541; in November, 662; the Equatorial Current on Jupiter, W. F. Denning, 138; a Dark Spot on Jupiter, Theodore Phillips, 401 ; Leo. Brenner, 487 ; the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, Prof. Barnard, 662; Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses, Francis Cranmer Penrose, 149; Spectroscopy of the Solar Eclipse of May 18, 1901, J. W. Humphreys, 331 ; the Dutch Eclipse Expedition of 1901, 380; Search for an Intra- Mercurial Planet during the Total Solar Eclipse of 1901, Prof. Perrine, 662; the Royal Observatory Visitation, 161; Connection between the Photographs of the Solar Corona and of the entire Solar Chromosphere obtained on the Same Day, H. Deslandres, 167; Astronomy in the University of London, Prof. Karl Pearson, F.R.S., 174; Method of Observing Altitudes at Sea during Night-time, Prof. Joly, 186; Astronomischer Jahresbericht, Walter F. Wislicenus, Dr. W. J. S. Lockyer, 198; a la Conquéte du Ciel, F. C. de Nascius, 199; the Anna Bredikhine As- tronomical Prize, 208; Occultation of W Leonis, 208; | a Remarkable Bolide observed at Lyons on March 19, 208 ; Other Worlds, Garrett P. Serviss, 221; Delay of the Minimum of U Cephei, 234; the Spectroscopic Binary 8 Cephei, Prof. Frost and W. S. Adams, 352; Remarkable Naked-eye Nekulosity, W. H. Robinson, 233; a Theory of Volcanoes, A. Taquin, 233 ; Periodicity of Volcanic Eruptions and Earthquakes, Rev. T. E. Espin, 353; the French Geodetic Mission to the Equator, 233 ; Observations of Nova Persei, 233, 282; Discoverer of Nova Persei, 282; the spectrum of Nova Persei, Prof. Campbell and Mr. Wright, 425 ; the changes in the Nebula Surrounding Nova Persei, Prof. Louis Bell, 426 ; Distribution of the stars in the Cape Photographic Durchmusterung, Dr. Downing, 238; Reduction of Photo- graphs of Eros for the determination of Solar Parallax, Mr. Hinks, 238; Reappearance of Eros, 557: Influence of the photographic magnitude of Stars upon the scale of Reduction of a Negative, Prosper Henry, 240; Death of M. H. Faye, 245; Obituary Notice, 277; Mr. Tebbutt’s Observatory at Windsor, N.S.W., 258; Extension of the Kathodé Radiation Hypothesis to Nebulae, 259; Personal Equation in the Measurement of Spectroscopic Negatives, M. Hasselberg, 259: Apparent Deformation of the Sun’s Disc near the Horizon, 259 ; Bright Meteor on July 13, 281. 309; a Bright Mcteor, W. Lascelles-Scott, 638; a Rema:kable Meteor, Archibald McDougall and W. E. Rolston, 557; Meteor Radiants, M. Eginitis, 557; the August Meteoric Shower, W. F. Denning, 309; a Possible Meteor Shower on October 4, G. Percy Bailey, 577 ; Hong Kong Double Star Observations, W. Doberck, 282; Double Stars, Rev. T. E. Espin, 353 ; Catalogue of New Double Stars, W. J. Hussey, 450; Rotation of the Brighter Fixed Stars, as a whole, with Kespectto the Fainter Stars, Sir David Gill, 282 ; Photographic M-gnitude of Stars, Prosper Henry, 282 ; Motions of the Pole, Dr. J. C. Chandler, 309; Photographs of the Perseids in Ig0I, 309; the Perseid Meteoric Shower of 1902, W. F. Denning, 406; Radiant Point of the Perseids, Prof. Alexander Graham Bell, 440 ; the Recent Fireball, Walter E. Besley, 320; Report of the Cape Observatory for 1901, Sir David Gill, 331; Light of the Galaxy and Bright Stars, C, Easton, 353; Minor Planets, 353; a New Minor Planet, 614; New Minor Planets, Prof. Max Wolf, 543; Method of Spectrum Analysis Furnishing the Still Unknown Law of Rotation of Planets of Feeble Brightness, H. Deslandres, 360 ; Rotation Periods of the Superior Planets, M. Deslandres, 350 ; a New Registering Actinometer, G. de Fontenoy, 401 ; Solar Phenomena during 1901, 4or; the ‘* Rotaplane,” Rev. C. Thomas, 422 ; New Discoveries of Variable Velocities in line of Sight, 425; Hypothesis on the Nature of Sola- Prominences; Prof. W. H. Julius, 450; the Lick Photor graphs, Prof. Pickering, 487 ; Sir David Gill’s New Theory of Stellar Movement, 515 ; Report of the Melbourne Obser- vatory for 1901, 541 ; Instructions on the Observation of the Sun, 557; Corrections to the Right Ascensions of the Princi- pal Stars ofthe Berliner Jahrbuch, Senor Campos Rodriguez, 557; a New Transiting Device, M. B. Snyder, 613 ; Auto- matic Spectrographs Registering the Radial Movements and the Thickness of the Solar Chromosphere, H. Deslandres, 624 ; the Leonid Shower, Prof. Pickering, 662; R. B. Taber 662 ; Observations of ¢ Geminorum, F. P. McDermott, 662 Astro-Physics: the Kinetic Theory of Planetary Atmospheres, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 54; Dr. E. Rogovsky, 222 Athénes, Annales de l’Observatoire National d’, Démétrius Eginitis, 331 Athens, the Annual of the British School at, 390 ; Corr., 424 Atlantic, North, Pilot Chart for May, 15 ; for June, 114, 206 ; for August, 307 ; for November, 635 Atomic Weights, on a General Numerical Connection between the, C. A. Vincent, 143 Atoms and Valencies, J. Fraser, 68 Atwater (Mr.), the Nutritive Value of Alcohol, 450 Aubel (Edmond van), Electrical Resistance of Iron Pyrites, 544 Auden (Dr. H. A.), Catalogue of the Educational Collection of Minerals at West Ham, 137 Auditory and Visual Space Perception, Studies in, Arthur Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 73 Auerbach (Dr. Felix), Die Weltherrin und ihr Schatten, Ein Vortrag tiber Energie und Entropie, 414 Auger (V.), Arsenic Anhydride and its Hydrates, 72 Aurore, Prof. Arrhenius’ Theory of Cometary Tails and, Prof. John Cox, 54; Dr. J. Halm, 55 Aurora Borealis, an Attempt to Reproduce an, Prof. W. Ramsey, F.R.S., 204 Aurora Borealis, Investigations into the Connection between the Magnetic Currents in the Earth and the, Prof. Kr. Birke- land, 328 Australia: Australian Children’s Games, Walter E. Roth, 380 ; Australian Entozoa. New Distomum from the Sawfish-Shark S. J. Johnston, 516 ; Earthquake in South Australia, 538 | Automobiles : Storage-Battery to Enable Automobiles to Run 100 Miles without Recharging, Thomas A. Edison, 134; Alcohol as a Motive Power, 307; . Schule des Automobi. Fahrers, Wolfgang Vogel, Mervyn O’Gorman, 313 Avebury (Lord), Nature Study, 326 Avian Organogeny: on the Intestinal Tract of Birds, P. Chalmers Mitchell, 235 Ayrton (Hertha), the Electric Arc, 124 Bacteriology : 7yfanosoma Thetler?, new Parasite in the Blood of Cattle in South Africa, 15 ; Lieut.-Colonel Bruce, F.R.S., 84; Microbiological Study of the Steeping of Flax, L. Hauman, 120; Chemistry of Respiration in Bacteria, Dr. W. E. Adeney, 167; the Aérobic Fermentation of Manure, C. Dupont, 216; on the Parasitism of Pseudomonas destructans (Potter), M. C. Potter, 238; Gummosis of the Sugar Cane, R. Greig Smith, 264; Coccidia Found in the Kidney of Rava esculenta, A, Laveran and F. Mesnil, 312; Traite de Bacteriologie Pure et Appliquée a la Médicine et al’Hygiene, P. Miquel and R. Cambier, Dr. E. Klein, F.R.S., 316; the Bacillus of Beri-beri, Major Rost, 378 ; Action of Alcoholic Fermentation on the Baczl/us typhosus and the Bacillus Colt, E. Bodin and F. Pailheret, 384; Antiparamcecious Serum, M. Ledoux-Lebard, 384; the Thermal Death-point of the Tubercle Bacillus in Milk, Bovine Tuberculosis and Milk Supplies, H. L. Russell, 399; Thermal Death-point of a Micrococcus Isolated from Milk, H. L. Russell and E. G Hastings, 423; Mechanical Treatment in the Milk Industry M. F. Bordas and Sig. de Raczkowski, 456; Chemical Composition of Tubercle Bacilli, De Schweinitz and Dorset, 540; Recent Studies of Immunity with Special Reference to their Bearing on Pathology, Prof. Welch, 611; Foul Brood of Bees, 636; Causes of Salmon Disease, Dr. J. Hume Patterson, 640; the Rinderpest Serum, 659 Baddeley (J. F.), Glacier Disaster in the Caucasus, 328 Baddeley (John), Colours between Clouds at Sunset, 370 Viil ‘Bahama Islands, the Evolution of Snails in the, Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, 56 Bailey (G. Percy), a Possible Meteor Shower on October 4, 577 Bailey (L. H.), Cyclopedia of American Horticulture, 147 Baker (Edmund), Notes on Indigofera, 21 Baker (J. G.), Rosa stellata and R. minutifolia, 229 Baker (Dr. J. L.), Action of Ungerminated Barley Diastase on Starch, 214 Baker (M. M.), Municipal Engineering and Sanitation, 173 Baldwin (Evelyn B.), Year's Work of the Baldwin-Zieglar Arctic Expedition, 349 Baldwin Arctic Expedition, Return of the, 542 Balfour (H.), Excavation at Arbor Low Stone Circle, Derby- shire, 663 Balfour (Mr.), on Technical Education at Manchester, 633 Ballistics : Tir des Fusils de Chasse, Journée, 545 Ballooning : Meteorological Results of the Balloon Ascents of February 6, Dr. Hergesell, 66; Dr. Miethe and Lieut. Hildebrandt’s Uncomfortable Balloon Voyage, 254 Baly (E. C. C.), Variation with Temperature of the Surface- Tensions and Densities of Liquid Oxygen, Nitrogen, Argon, and Carbon Monoxide, 118 Bandar Abbas, Earthquake Shock at, 306 ee Composition of the Volcanic Dust at, on May 7 and » 204 Barnard (Prof. E. E.), a Remarkable Lunar Halo, 5; the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, 662 Barnes (Dr.), Experiments on the Critical Velocity of Flow of Water through Tubes, 618 Barnett (S. J.), Gauss’s Theorem, 611 Barometric Height at Stations on the Eastern Side of the Atlantic, on the Correlation between the, Miss F. E. Cave- Browne-Cave, Karl Pearson, F.R.S., 311 ‘Barron (G.), on the Prolongation of the Highland Border Rocks into County Tyrone, 619 Barron (T.), Geology of the Eastern Desert of Egypt, later Physical Changes, 660 Barton (J. K.), Digestive Tract of Salmon and Sea-Trout Kelts, 257 Basis of Social Relations, the, Dr. G. Brinton, 221 Basset (A. B., F.R.S.), Symbol for Partial Differentiation, 577 Bateson (W., F.R.S.), Mendel’s Theory of Heredity : a Defence, 5733 Reports to the Evolution Committee of the Royal Society, 573 Baths, the Climates and, of Great Britain, 629 Baud (E.), Combinations of Hydrogen Sulphide with Anhydrous Aluminium Chloride, 216 Baudic (Lieut.), Naval Balloon Accident, Death of, 183 Baudoin (M.), Method of Concentrating Wine, 360 Bauer (D. L. A ), Magnetic Disturbances during the Eruption of Mont Pelée on May 8, 421 Bauxite, Dr. H. Lienau, 539 Bay (J.), Saponification of Nitric Esters, 624 Bayard (T. C.), English Climatology, 215 Beattie (Prof.), the Leakage of Electricity from Charged Bodies at Moderate Temperatures, 119 Beaulard (¥.), Elastic Parameters of Silk Fibres, 672 Beauregard (H.), Matiére médicale zoologique, Histoire des Drogues d’Origine animale, 363 Beddard (F. E.), the Cambridge Natural History : Mammalia, 3 Beechen Hedges on Elevated Ground, Jul. Wulff, 32; W. Gee, 32; G. W. Bulman, 56; P. T., 56 Beer (Rudolf), Coemanstella Alabastrina, 118 Bees, Foul Brood of, 636 Beetle, Colorado Potato, at Tilbury, 134 Beever (Sir H.), Financial History of a Four Acre Mixed Plantation, 283 Beilby (George), Film Structures in Metals, 84 Belfast Meeting of the British Association, the Forthcoming, J. Brown, 8 ' Belfast, Geology of the Country Round, Prof. Grenville A. Ne Cole, F.R.S., 619; Post-Glacial Deposits of the Belfast District, R. Lloyd Praeger, 619; see a/so British Association Belgian Botanical Investigations, I7I Belgian Royal Academy, Prize Subjects, 113 Bell (Prof. Alexander Graham), Radiant Point of the Perseids, 440 Bell (fF. J.), Guide to the Coral Gallery in the British Museum lndex Natwe, Dec. 18, 1902 (Natural History), 322 ; Report on the Collections of Natural History made in the Antarctic Regions during the Voyage of the Southern Cross, 322 Bell (H. Hesketh), the Effects of the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent, 306 Bell (Prof. Louis), Changes in the Nebula Surrounding Nova Persei, 426 Bell (Dr. Robert), Geological Survey of Canada, 86 Bellows (John), Death of, 113 Bell-Ranske (Jutta), Health, Speech and Song, a Practical Guide to Voice Production, 388 Benedicks (B.), Electrical Conductivity of Steel and Pure Iron, 160 Benedict (Mr.), the Nutritive Value of Alcohol, 450 Benham (Charles E.), William Gilbert of Colchester, a Sketch of his Magnetic Philosophy, 270 Benischke (Dr. Gustav), Die Schultzvorrichtungen der Stark- stromtechnik gegen atmospharische Entladungen, 573 Ben Nevis Observatories, Sir Arthur Mitchell, 349 Benson (Arthur Christopher), the Schoolmaster : a Comment- ary upon the Aims and Methods of an Assistant Master in a Public School, 366 Berg, (D. C.), Memoir of, Seiior A. Gallardo, 184 Bergholz (Prof. Dr. Paul), the Hurricanes of the Far East, 51 Bernard, (H. M.), the Structure of the Retina of the Eye, 308 Bernese Oberland, the, G. Haslar, 440 Bernoulli's Numbers, a Series related to, J. R. Sutton, 492 Berthelot (Daniel), the Graduation of Thermoelectric Couples, 47 Berthelot (M.), New Researches on Batteries Founded on the Reciprocal Action of Two Liquids, 240; Limit of Intensity of Current from a Battery which Corresponds to External Electrolytic Work Apparent in a Voltameter, 623 Bertrand (Gabriel), Arsenic in the Organism, 216 ; Poison of the Toad, 288 ; Bufonine, 288 Besley (Walter E.), the Recent Fireball, 320 Betton (C. Steuart), the Murchison Falls, 188 Bial (Dr. M.), Antiseptic Properties of Dilute Solutions of Acids, 137 Biblical Criticism at its Best and Worst, Rev. T. K. Cheyne, and J. Sutherland Black, 193 Bier (L.), Spectrum of Haemoglobin, 230 Biology: Organographie der Pflanzen insbesondere der Archegoniaten und Samenpflanzen, Dr. K. Goebel, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 51; the Life of Thomas Henry Huxley, Edward Clodd, Sir W. T. Thiselton-Dyer, F.R.S., 121 ; Regeneration in Saméa alianthus, H. H. Brindley, 142; the Foraminifera, an Introduction to the Study of the Protozoa, Frederick Chapman, 196; Enzymes and _ their Applications, J. Effront, Dr. F. Mollwo Perkin, 197 ; Variation, Germinal and Environmental, J. C. Ewart, F.R.S., 209; the Relation of Biology to Medicine, Dr. Rose Bradford, 2313 Statistical Methods in Biology, Biometrika, 234; Les Limites de la Biologie, J. Grasset, 293; Archiv fiir Protistenkunde,”’ 627; Mode of Action of Carbonic Acid in Experimental Parthenogenesis, Yves Delage, 671 ; Marine Biology, Aggregated Colonies in Madreporiform Corals, Dr. J. E. Duerden, 257; in Wales, G. W. Duff Assheton Smith, 282; New Hydroid Pelayohydra Mirabilis, Dr. A. Dendy, 330; Studies onthe Distribution of Animal Life on ‘‘Storeggen” and ‘‘Shetlandseggen,” North Sea, Dr. Johan Hjort, 351; Degeneration-Process in Larval Ccelenterates of the Genus Gonionema, 612 Biometrika, Statistical Methods in Biology, 234 Bipedal Locomotion of a Ceylonese Lizard, E. Ernest Green, 492; Rose Haig Thomas, 551 ; N. Annandale, 577 ; W. Saville Kent, 630 Birds: More Tales of the Birds, W. W. Fowler, 4; Bird Hunting on the White Nile, H. F. Witherby, 52 ; the Birds of North and Middle America, the Fringillidz, R. Ridge- way, 753; Protection of Birds Useful to Agriculture, 137; Bird-Migration Observed from the Eddystone, W. E Clarke, 185 ; on the Intestinal Tract of Birds, P. Chalmers Mitchell, 235 ; Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322 ; Notes on Young Gulls, Prof. R. V. Lendenfeld, 415; Birds in the Garden, G. Sharp, 444; Upland Game-Birds, E. Sandys and T. S. Van Dyke, 652 Birkeland (Kr.), Expédition Norvégienne de 1899-19co pour P’Etude des Aurores Boréales, Résultats des Recherches mag- Nature, ] Index ix Dec. 18, 1902 nétiques, 227; Investigations into the Connection between the Magnetic Currents in the Earth and the Aurora Borealis, 328 Bishop (S. E.), the Lava-Lake of Kilauea, 441 Bituminous Fuel, the Smokeless Combustion of, W. H. Booth, 645 ; J. S. Raworth, 645 Black (J. Sutherland), Encyclopzedia Biblica, a Critical Diction- ary of the Literary, Political and Religious History, the Archeology, Geography and Natural History of the Bible, 19 Blake (Rev. J. F.), Remarkable Inlier among the Jurassic Rocks of Sutherland, 23; on the Original Form of Sedimentary Deposits, 620 Blanchard (A. A.), the Decomposition of Ammonium Nitrite in Aqueous Solution, 637 , Bleekrode (Dr. L.), a Simple Telephonic Receiver for Wireless Telegraphy, 343 Bliss (H.}, Stopping down the Lens of the Human Eye, 56 Blondlot (R.), Action of X-rays on very Small Electric Sparks, 263 Blood, the Electrical Resistance of the, Dr. Dawson Turner, 127 Blount (B.), on the Proposed Standardisation of Methods of Chemical Analysis, 662 Bodin (E.), Action of Alcoholic fermentation on the Baci//us typhosus and the Bactllus Colz, 384 Bodmer (G. R.), the Inspection of Railway Materials, 244 Bolas (T.), the Lens, a Practical Guide to the Choice, Use and Testing of Photographic Objectives, 75 Bolide, observed at Lyons on March 19, a Remarkable, 208 Bonney (Prof. T. G., F.R.S.), Alpine Valleys in Relation to Glaciers, 239 Booth (W. H.), the Smokeless Combustion of Bituminous Fuel, 645 Bopp (Prof. C.), Chart of the Metric System, 630 Borchers (D. W.), Apparatus for the Electrolytic Separation of Calcium from the Fused Chloride, 636 Bordas (F.), Variation of the Phosphoric Acid in Cows’ Milk with time after Calving, 384: Influence of Cream Separation on the Principal Constituents of Milk, 432 ; Mechanical Treat- ment,in the Milk Industry, 456 Borel (Emile), Lecons sur les Séries 4 Termes Positifs, 5 Borneo, on the Ethnography of the Nagas, Dr. W. H. Furness, 664 Bose (Prof. Jagadis Chunder), Xe Vegetable Electricity, 549 Bossert (F.), Ephemeris for the Search of the Comet Temple- Swift, 557 Botany: Monographie der Gattung Alectorolophus, Dr. Jakob von Sterneck, 4; Absence of the Pine in Western Asia, Herr Hugo Bretzl, 15; the Pines of Western Asia, Sir J. D. Hooker, F.R.S., 535; Journal of Botany, 21, 118, 213, 310, 571; Linnean Society, 22, 47, 94, 263; Notes on Indigofera, : David Prain and Edmund Baker, 21; Welwitschia Mirabilis, Prof. F. E. Weiss, 23 ; Daniella and their Secreting Apparatus, L. Guignard, 23; Die Vegetation der Erde, Sammlung pflanzengeographischer Monographien: (1) Grundziige der Pflanzenverbreitung auf d. iberische Halbinsel, Moritz Willkomm, 27: (2) Grundziige d. Pflanzenverbreit. i. d. Karpathen, F. Pax, 27; (3) Grundziige d. Pflanzenverbreit. i. d. Kaukasuslindern, von der unteren Wolga ueb. d. Manytsch-Schneider bis z. Scheitelflache Hocharmeniens, Dr. Gustav Radde, 27; (4) Die Vegetationsverhiltnisse d. Illyrischen Lander, Dr. Giinther ritter Beck v. Mannagetta, 27; (5) Die Heide Norddeutschlands, P. Graebner, 27; the Sweet Briar as a Goat Exterminator, Sir W. T. Thiselton- Dyer, F.R.S., 31 Beechen Hedges on Elevated Ground, Jul. Wulff, 32; Wm. Gee, 32, G. W. Bulman, 56; P. T., 56; Retention of Leaves by Deciduous Trees, 344 ; Prof. W. R. Fisher, 370; D. T. Smith, 631; Decorative Plants for Gardens, Dr. Nicola Terraciano, 36; Organo- graphie der Pflanzen insbesondere der Archegoniaten und Samenpflanzen, Dr. K. Goebel, Prof, J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 51; Elements of Botany, W. J. Browne, 52; the Culture of Greenhouse Orchids, Frederick Boyle, 59 ; Germination of the Pollen Grain and the Series of Events Leading to Fertilisation in Two Species of Zamia, Dr. Herbert J. Webber, 67; the Book of the Rose, Rey. A. Foster-Melliar, 74; Poisonous Fodder-plants and Oriental Drug-plants, Prof. Wyndham R. Dunstan, F.R.S., 83; New South Wales Linnean Society, 96, 264, 312, 384, 516; Practical Botany for Beginners, F. O. Bower, F.R.S., Dr. J. Gwynne- Vaughan, 101; Blue Puya in Flower at Kew Gardens, 112; *Coemanstella Alabastrina, Rudolf Beer, 118; the British ‘‘Capreolate” Fumitories, Mr. Pugsley, 118; A7n- keliba, E. Perrot and G. Lefevre, 120; Mechanism of the Chemical Variations in the Plant under the Influence of Sodium Nitrate, E. Charabot and A. Hébert, 144; Flora der ostfriesischen Inseln, Dr. Fr. Buchenau, 149; the New Botanical Laboratories at Liverpool, 155; Kentucky Blue- grass Seed, 159; Recueil de 1'Institut Botanique (Uni- versilé de Bruxelles), L. Errera, 171; De Vriesian Species, Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, 174; the Trinidad Experiments in Cacao Culture, 185; Report of Royal Botanical Gardens, Ceylon, J. C. Willis, 185; Rennet in Plants, Maurice Javillier, 192 ; International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, M, Botany, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 217; Rosa Stellata and &. Minutifolia, J. G. Baker, F.R.S., 229; Death of A. D. Hogg, 254; Gummosis of the Sugar Cane, R. Greig Smith, 264 ; Distribution of Pithophora, Kumagusu Minakata, 279; Prof. G. S. West, 296; Curious Development of a Foxglove (Digitalis), 306; Campanulate Foxgloves, Dr. Maxwell T. Masters, F.R.S., 344; the Zymase from Zuro- tiopsis Gayont, M. Mazé, 312; the Chelsea Physic Garden, 321 ; the Textile Fibres of Commerce, William S. Hannan, 338; Regeneration in Plants, 379; Prof. Goebel, 514; Experimental Demonstration of the Decomposition of Carbon Dioxide by Leaves Exposed to Light, P. P. Dehérain and E. Demoussy, 383; the Influence of Varying Amounts of Carbon Dioxide in the Air on the Photosynthetic Process of Leaves and on the Mode of Growth of Plants, Dr. Horace T. Brown, F.R.S., and F. Escombe, 620; the Hepaticze of the British Isles, William Henry Pearson, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 385 ; Relations of Plant Growth to Ionisation of the Soil, A. B. Plowman, 408 ; Germinative duration of Seeds, Jules Poisson, 408 ; the Primrose and Darwinism, by a Field Naturalist, 409, 575; the Writer of the Review, 575; the Progress of Scottish Botany, J. C. Druce, 447 ; Experiments with Tobacco and Potatoes at St. Kitts-Nevis, 448; Two Chemical Constituents from the Eucalypts, Henry G. Smith, 456; Types of British Plants, C. S. Colman, 458: Death of Theodor v. Heldreich, 538; Mannan in Sugar-maple Trees, Prof. F. H. Storer, 541 ; Cultivation of the Yellow Lupin,. P. P. Dehérain and E. Demoussy, 544 ; a Tentative List of the Flowering Plants and Ferns for the County of Cornwall, including the Scilly Isles, F. H. Davey, 547 ; Gutta-percha in the Balata fields on the Amazon, 555 ; Das botanische Practi- cum, Dr. Eduard Strasburger, 605 ; the most Effectual Plan for Starting the Germination of Spores of Agaricus campestris, Dr. Margaret C. Ferguson, 612; Examination and Estima- tion of Extract of Chestnut Wood mixed with Oak Extract, Ferdinand Jean, 624; Utilisation of Mineral Substances by Grafted Plants, Lucien Daniel and V. Thomas, 624 ; Theories of Heredity, Hugh Richardson, 630; the Fertilisation of Linum, Prof. T. D., A. Cockerell, 631; Composition of Some Reserve Hydocarbons in the Albumen of some Palms, M. E. Lienard, 648; Methyl Ester of Methyl- anthranilic Acid in the Vegetable Organism, Eugene Charabot, 648: Phosphorus zvevsws Lime in Plant Ash, Dr. P. Q. Keegan, 655; Recent Works on Systematic Botany in Germany, 657; the Germination of Pollen Grains in the Presence of Stigmata, Pierre Paul Richer, 672 Bouchard (Ch.), Local Treatment of Rheumatism, 288 Boudouard (O.), Alloys of Cadmium and Magnesium, 216 Bouffard (A.), Action of Sulphurous Acid upon Oxydase and on the Colouring Matter of Red Wine, 192 Bougault (J.), the Oxidation of Morphine by the Juice of Rossu/a delica, 192 Boulenger (G. A.), Les Poissons du Bassin du Congo, 339 Boulouch (R.), Mixtures Formed by Sulphur and Phosphorus at Temperatures Below 100° C., 336 Bourne (Dr. G. C.), Traité de Zoologie Concréte, Yves Delage and Edgard Hérouard, 267 ; an Introduction to the Study of the Comparative Anatomy of Animals, 314 Bourquelot (Em.), New Glucoside Aucubine, 216 Bouveault (L.), Method of Gradual Synthesis of Aldehydes, 120; Synthesis of Fatty Aldehydes, 137 ; Condensation of Nitromethane with Aromatic Aldehydes, 288; Action of Nitrous Acid in Alkaline Solution on g-Substituted 6-Ketonic Esters, 384 Bouzat (M.), Constitution of the Ammoniacal Copper Salts, 144 3- B x Index Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Ammoniacal Copper Oxide, 168; Ammoniacal Anhydrous Copper Chlorides, 384 Boveri (Dr. Th.), Das Problem der Befruchtung, 74 Bower (I. O., F.R.S.), Practical Botany for Beginners, 101 Boyle (Frederick), the Culture of Greenhouse Orchids, 59 Boyle Lecture at Oxford, the Rise of the Experimental Sciences at Oxford, Prof. T. Clifford Allbutt, F.R.S., 90 Bradford (Dr. Rose), the Relation of Biology to Medicine, 231 Bradley (Mr.), Apparatus for the Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen, 611 Bradley (Prof. O. C.), Instances of Abnormality in Mammals, 351 Bradshaw (J. G.), a First Step in Arithmetic, 491 Bradsky (M. de), Fatal Accident to, 610 Brahmaputra Valley, the Tribes of the, L. A. Waddell, 91 Brain Centres, on the Mechanism Connecting the Muscular eparats with the, for Willed Movement, Prof. Schifer, 665 Brame (J. S. S.), Liquid Fuel for Steam Purposes, 186 4 Branch (Dr. W. J.), Effects Observed at St. Kitts During the Volcanic Eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent, 378 Branford (B.), Helmholtz on the Value of the Study of Philosophy, 550 Branley (Edouard), the Receiver in Wireless Telegraphy, 143 Brauner (Prof. Bohuslav), Position of the Rare Earths in Mendeleeff’s Periodical System of Elements, 66 Bredikhine (the Anna), Astronomical Prize, 208 Brenner (Leo), the Dark Spot on Jupiter, 487 Bretzl (Herr Hugo), Absence of the Pine in Western Asia, 15 Breuil (M.), Reproduction des Figures Paléolithiques Peintes sur des Parois de la Grotte de Font-de-Gaume, Dordogne, 452 Bridges, Railway, on the Deflection and Vibration of, Dr. F. Omori, 332 Brigham (Albert Perry), a Text-book of Geology, 75 Bright Points and Curves, Study of, 208 Brindley (H. H.), Regeneration in Sama atlanthus, 142 Brinell’s Researches on the Influence of Chemical Composition on the Soundness of Steel Ingots, Axel Wahlburg, 63 Brinton (D. G.), the Basis of Social Relations, 221 Brioschi (Francesca), Opere Matematiche di, 221 Britannica, the Encyclopedia, 97, 361 ; Prof. Arthur Smithells, F.R.S., 289 ; vols. xxviii. and xxix., 625 British versus American Locomotives, 42 British Association, the Forthcoming Meeting at Belfast, T. Brown, 8 ; New Path along the Goban’s Cliffs, R. Welch, 417 British Association : Meeting at Belfast, 462, 494, 521 ; Sectional Arrangements, 344; Inaugural Address by Prof. James- Dewar, M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.RS., President of the Association, 462 Section A (Mathematics and Physics).—Opening Address by Prof. John Purser, M.A., LL.D., M.R.I.A., President of the Section, 478; Solutions of the Partial Differential Eguations of Mathematical Physics, E. T. Whittaker, 618; Accurate Conservation of Weight in Chemical Reactions, Lord Rayleigh, 618 ; Experiments on the Motion of a Detached Thread of Liquid in a Capillary Tube, Prof. Morton and Mr. Hawthorne, 618; Experi- ments on the Critical Velocity of Flow of Water Through Tubes, Dr. Barnes, 618; Temperature of an Animal Surrounded by a Saturated Atmosphere Hotter than Itself, Lord Kelvin, 618; on the Application of the Method of Entropy to Radiant Energy, Dr. J. Larmor, 618; on the Production of a Standard Light, Mr. Petavel, 618 ; Experi- ments to Determine Whether Double Refraction was Pro- duced in Isotropic Transparent Bodies by their Motion Through the Ether, Lord Rayleigh, 618; on Substituting for Huyghen’s Wave Surface a Wave Film of Finite Thick- ness Within which the Phases of the Disturbances were given Proper Values, Dr. Johnstone Stoney, 618 ; Experiments on the Use of a Magnetic Detector in Space Telegraphy, Prof. E. Wilson, 618 ; on the Phosphorescence Produced in Partially Exhausted Tubes by the Passage of an Alternating Current Round Them, Mr. Butler-Burke, 618 ; on a Bolo- meter Arranged to Record Solar Radiation, Dr. W. E. Wilson, 619; Sunspots and Magnetic Storms, Rev. A. L. ‘Cortie, 619; Report of Committee for Investigating the Upper Atmosphere by Means of Kites, 619; on Radiation in Meteorology, Dr. Shaw, 619; Recent West Indian Eruptions and Earthquake Recording Instruments, Prof. Milne, 619 ; Nebula Surrounding Nova Persei, Mr. Hinks, 619 Section A (Subsection of Astronomy and Cosmical Physics.— Opening Address by Arthur Schuster, F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Chairman of Subsection, 614; on Difficulties which are Caused in the Geodetic Survey of India by the Attraction of the Mass of the Himalayas and the Thibet Plateau and by the Existence of an Underground Chain of Excessive Density which runs across India, Major S. G. Burrard, 640; an Attempt made at Oxford to Verify the Suggestion that the bright Stars asa Whole are Rotating relatively to the Fainter Stars, Prof. Turner, 640 Section B (Chemistry).—Opening Address by Edward Divers, M.D., D. Sc., F.R.S., V.P.C.S., Emeritus Profes- sor of Chemistry in the Imperial University of Tokyo, Japan, President of the Section, 495 ; Amount of Carbonic Anhydride absorbed from Sea Water, Prof. E. A. Letts and Mr. W. Coldwell, 662 ; Corrosion of Copper by Sea Water, Prof. E. A. Letts, 662; Action of Distilled Water upon Lead, Prof. F. Clowes, 662; on the Decomposition of Urea, Dr. C. E. Fawsitt, 662 ; on the Telluric Distribution of the Elements in Relation to their Atomic Weights, W. Ackroyd, 662; on the Proposed Standardisation of Methods of Chemical Analysis, Mr. B. Blount, 662; on the Alkylation of Sugars, Prof. T. Purdie, F.R.S., and Dr. J. C. Irvine, 662 ; Synthetical Action of Enzymes, Dr. E. F. Armstrong, 662; Recent Synthetical Researches in the Glucoside Group, Dr. E. F. Armstrong, 662 ; Report of the Commit- tee Appointed to Collect Statistics Concerning the Training of Chemists Employed in English Chemical Industries, 663 ; Crystallographic Study of the 1 : 3-dichloro, chlorobromo- and dibromo-benzene 5-sulphonic chlorides and_bro- mides, Dr. Jee, 663; Colour of Iodine-containing Com- pounds, Miss Ida Smedley, 663 ; on Colloids of Zirconium, Dr, J. H. Gladstone, F.R.S., and Mr. W. Hibbert, 663 Section C (Geology).—Opening Address by Lieut.-General Charles Alexander MacMahon, F.R.S., F.G.S., President of the Section, Rock Metamorphism, 504 ; Geology of the Country round Belfast, Prof. Grenville A. J. Cole, F.R.S., 619; Geological Structure of Ireland, Prof. Grenville A. J. Cole, F.R.S., 619; Proof Sheet of the ‘* Drift” Edition of the Geological Map of Ireland Exhibited by Mr. Teall, 619 ; Post-Glacial Deposits of the Belfast District, Mr. R. Lloyd Praeger, 619; Madame Christen on the Recent Work of the Belfast Field Club on the Drift Deposits of the District, 619; Results of Exploration of various Irish Caves, 619; Mr. Joseph Wright on the Discovery of Marine Foraminifera in Boulder Clay from various Districts in Ireland and Elsewhere, 619; on the Prolongation of the Highland Border Rocks into County Tyrone, Mr. G. Barrow, 619; Mr. McHenry, 619; Mr. Teall, 619; Mr. Kynaston on a series of Volcanic Rocks in the District extending from Glen Coe to the Black Mount, Scotland, 619 ; Dr. W. Mackie on the Conditions Attending the Precipitation of Manganese Dioxide in the Elgin Sind- stone, 620; Dr. W. Mackie on the Results of a Series of Determinations of the Soluble Chlorides and Sulphates in the Elgin Sandstone, 620; Mr. Horace B. Woodward on Bagshot Strata at Combe Pyne Hill, Dorset, 620; Mr. P. F. Kendall on the Pennine Faults in the Vale of Eden, 620 ; Mr. W. G. Fernsides on New Fossils from Pen Morfa, near Tremadoc, 620; Dr. R. H. Traquair on Fishes From the Lower Devonian Roofing Slate from Gemiinden, Germany, 620; Prof. H. G. Seeley on Cretaceous Strata found by Mr. E. G. Fraser on the Shoulder of Sekasar, India, 620; Dr. Smith Woodward on Lower Carboniferous Fish Fauna from Broken River, Victoria, 620; Prof. J. F. Blake on the Original Form of Sedimentary Deposits, 620 Section D (Zoology).—Opening Address by Prof. G. B. Howes, D.Se., L.L.D., F.R.S., President of the Section, the Morphological Method and Progress, 522; British Fisheries Investigations and the International Scheme, Prof. McIntosh, 640; Proposed Programme for the International Investigation of the North Sea as Passed at the Recent Meeting of Delegates at Copenhagen, Mr. W. Garstang, 640; Some New Points in the Development of Achznus esculentus, Prof. E. W. MacBride, 640; Series of Wax Models Illustrating the Transition from Larva to Adult in Cribretla Octlata, Dr. A. T. Masterman, 640; Causes of Nature, J Dec. 18, 1902 Index xi Salmon Disease, Dr. J. Hume Patterson, 640 ; Photographs of the first Segmentation Stages of the Zygote of the Native Cat (Dasyurus) up to the Period of first Formation of the Endoderm, Mr. J. P. Hill, 640; onsome Recent Intercros- sing Experiments with dogs, Prof. J. C. Ewart, 641 ; onthe Relation of the Parietal Bone in Primates, Prof. R. J. Anderson, 641; on the Errant Habits of the Onuphide (Polycheta), Mr. A. T. Watson, 641; on an Accelous Turbellarian Inhabiting the Common Heart Urchin, Mr. R. T. Leiper, 641; on the Atlantis Problem, Dr. R. F. Scharff, 641 ; on the Avifauna of Ireland as Affected by its Geography, Mr. R. J. Ussher, 641; on the Breaking up of Coral Rock by Organisms in the Tropics, Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner, 641 ; on the Early Development of Muscles and Motor Nerves in Lepidosiren, Mr. J. Graham Kerr, 641; on the Insect Fauna of some Irish Caves, Mr. G. H. Carpenter, 641 ; Discussion on Natural Selection, 641 Section E (Geography).—Opening Address by Sir Thomas Holdich, President of the Section, 642; the Geography of Southern Persia, Major Molesworth Sykes, 642; on Hilly Yiinnan, Capt. Ryder, 642; Sakhalin, Mr. Hawes, 642 ; Plans of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, Mr. Bruce, 642; World-shaking Earthquakes, Prof. J. Milne, 642; Evolution of the Jordan Valley, Prof. Libbey, 642 ; on the Windings of Evenlode, Mr. Herbertson, 642; Origin of the Valleys of County Cork, Mr. Porter, 642; Charn- wood Forest, Prof. W. W. Watts, 642; on Geographical Plant Groups in the Irish Flora, Mr. Lloyd Praeger, 642 ; on the Distribution of Peat Bogs in Ireland, Prof. Johnston, on 643; Colonisation and Irrigation in Uganda and the British East African Protectorate, R. B. Buckley, 643 Section F (Economic Science and Statistics).—Opening Address by Edwin Cannan, M.A., LL.D., President of the Section, 507 Section G (Engineering).—Opening Address by Prof. John Perry, M.E., D.Sc., F.R.S., President of the Section, 530; Mr. H. A. Humphrey on Recent Progress in Large Gas Engines, 643; Hon. C. A, Parsons on Steam Turbines, 643; Report of the Committee on the Resistance of Road Vehicles to Traction, 643; Dr. Mill’s Map of Ireland, showing Distribution of Rainfall, 644; Mr. Dick on the Available Water Power in Ireland, 644 ; Mr. J. E. Kingsbury on the Future of the Telephone in the United Kingdom, 644; Sir William Preece, 644; Prof. E. Wilson on the Effect of the London Atmosphere onthe Electrical Con- ductivity of Aluminium Alloys, 644; Dr. Glazebrook, 644 ; Mr. W. Taylor on the Science of the Workshop, 644; Mr. J. R. Wigham on a new Flashing Lighthouse Light, 644 ; Joint Discussion with Section L on the Training of Engineers, Prof. Perry, 644; Sir William Preece, 645; on the Smokeless Combustion of Bituminous Fuel, Mr. W. H. Booth, 645; Mr. J. S. Raworth, 645; Prof. G. Forbes on his Experiences in South Africa with a new Range Finder, 645 Section H (Anthropology).—Opening Address by A. C. Haddon, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., M.R.1.A., President of the Section, 561; Irish Flints, Mr. W. J. Knowles, 663; Palzolithic Implements from Knowle, Wiltshire, Messrs. W. and W. A. Cunnington, 663; Important Stone-axe Factories Discovered near Cushendall, Co. Antrim, Mr. W. J. Knowles, 663; Report on the Excavations at Arbor Low Stone Circle in Derbyshire, Mr. H: Balfour, 663; on a Prehistoric Cemetery-Cave in Palestine, Mr. R. A. S. Macalister, 663 ; on the Oldest Bronze Age Earthenware Vessel, Hon. John Abercromby, 663; Bronze Objects of the Hallstatt Culture Phase in Ireland, Mr. G. Coffey, 663 ; Report on the Pigmentation Survey of Scottish School Children, Mr. J. F. Tocher, 663; on the Psychology of Primitive Man, Miss A. Amy Bulley, 664; Mental and Moral Characteristics of the People of Ulster, Dr. W. Graham, 664 ; on the Ethnography of the Nagas, Dr. W. H. Furness, 664; the Lolos and Other Tribes of Western China, Mr. A. Henry, 664; the Wild and Civilised Tribes of the Malay Peninsula, Messrs. Nelson Annandale and H. C. Robinson, 664; the Human Souls and Ghosts of the Malays of Patani, Mr. Nelson Annandale, 664; on the Sacred Initiation Ceremonies Undergone by the Lads of the Papuan Gulf, Rev. J. H. Holmes, 664; on the Religious Ideas of the Elema Tribe of the Papuan Gulf, Rev. J. H. Holmes, 664; on the ‘‘ Lia Fail” of Tara and Election of Kings by Augury, Mr. E. S. Hartland, 664; on Tallies, Mr. E. Lovett, 664 ; on the Classification and Arrangement of Anthropological Museums, Dr. W. H. Holmes, 664 Section I (Phystology).—Opening Address by W. D. Halli- burton, M.D., F.R.S., Professor of Physiology in King’s College, London, President of the Section, the Present Position of Chemical Physiology, 567 ; on the Regenera- tion of Nerves, Prof. Halliburton and Dr. Mott, 664; on the Mechanism Connecting the Muscular Apparatus with the Brain Centres for Willed Movement, Prof. Schafer, 665 ; on some New Features in the Intimate Structure of the Human Cerebral Cortex, Dr. John Turner, 665; Prof. Schafer, 665; on the Movement and Innervation of the Stomach, Dr. Page May, 665; on the Diuretic Action of Pituitary Extracts, Dr. Magnus and Prof. Schafer, 666; Fatigue and Nerve, Prof. Gotch, 666; on the Distribution in the Retina of the Photo-sensitive Pigment, the Visual Purple, Dr. Edridge-Green, 666; Researches on Glycogen, Dr. Osborne and Dr. Zobel, 666 ; Observations on the Smallest Perceptible Musical Tone-difference as examined in the People of Scotland and of the Torres Straits, Dr. C. S. Myers, 666 ; Section K (Botany), Opening Address by Prof. J. Reynolds Green, M.A., Sc.D., F.R.S., President of the Section, 82 Siete L (Educational Science), Opening Address by Prof. Henry E. Armstrong, LL.D., Ph.D., V.P.R.S., President of the Section, 589 British Association Meetings, 550 British Coasts, Sea Temperature Variations on the, 452 British Honduras, Earthquake in Guatemala and, 553 British Liverworts, a Monograph of the, William Henry Pearson, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 385 British Medical Association, Pharmacology at the, 353 British Museum : Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322; Guide to the Galleries of Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural History), 329 ; Guide to the Coral Gallery in the British Museum (Natural History), R. Kirkpatrick and F. J. Bell, 322 British Plants, Types of, C. S. Colman, 458 British Surface-Feeding Ducks, Natural History of the, J. G. Millais, T. Digby Pigott, C.B., 266 Broeck (Prof. van den), the Iguanodons of Bernissart, 231 Brooks’ Comet, 1902 a, Elements of, 68 Brooks (H. J.), the Elements of Mind, 317 Broom (Dr. R.), Shoulder-Girdle of Dasyurus and Perameles, gy Brotherhood (Peter), Death of, 635 Brown (Prof. Alex. Crum, F.R.S.), Studies in Auditory and Visual Space Perception, Arthur Henry Pierce, 73 Brown (Ernest W., F.R.S.), Theory of the Motion of the Moon, 356 Ae (George E.), the Lens, a Practical Guide to the Choice, Use and Testing of Photographic Objectives, 75 Brown (Dr. Horace T.,F.R.S.), the Influence of Varying Amounts of Carbon Dioxide in the Air on the Photosynthetic Process of Leaves and on the Mode of Growth of Plants, Lecture at Royal Society, 620 Brown (J.), the Forthcoming Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 8 Browne (Sir James Crichton), the ~é/e Played by Flies in the Propagation of Disease, 397 Browne (W. J.), Elements of Botany, 52 Bruce (Lieut.-Colonel), 7ypfanosoma Thetleri, New Parasite in the Blood of Cattle in South Africa, 84 Bruce (W. S.), the Scottish Antarctic Expedition, 255, 631 ; on the Plans of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, 642 Briickner’s Cycle and the Variation of Temperature in Europe, Alex. B. MacDowall, 77 Briihl (Jul. Wilh.), Roscoe-Schorlemmer’s Lehrbuch der Organ- ischen Chemie, 546 Brun (A.), Caucasian Snow, 16 Bruner (L.), Rate of Bromination of Carbon Compounds, 613 Brunton (Sir Lauder), Factors which Tend to render Medicines Ineffective or Productive of Unusual Effects, 353 Bryan (Prof. G. H., F.R.S.), the Kinetic Theory of Planetary Atmospheres, 54 ; the Royal Visit to the University of Wales, 61; Elementary Principles in Statistical Mechanics, J. Willard Gibbs, 291 ; Sunset Effects, 390 Xi Buchanan (J. Y., F.R.S.), Hydrographical Observations of the Princess Alice, 376. Buchenau (Dr. Fr.), Flora der ostfriesischen Inseln, 149 Biichner (L.), Last Words on Materialism, 29 Buckley (RK. B.), on Colonisation and Irrigation in Uganda and the British East African Protectorate, 643 Building Stones in-Egypt, on the Disintegration of, A. Lucas, 379 Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, 118, 165, 382, 455 Bulley (Miss A. Amy), Psychology of Primitive Man, 664 Bulman (G. W.), Retention of Leaves by Deciduous Trees, 56 Bunting’s Nest, Cuckoo’s Egg thrown out of, 151 Burma, Prehistoric Man in, R. C. J. Swinhoe, 541 Burnside (Prof.), Groups in which every Two Conjugate Opera- tions are Permutable, 71 Burrard (Major S. G.), the Attractions of the Himalaya Moun- tains upon the Plumb-Line, 80; on Difficulties which are caused in the Geodetic Survey of India by the Attraction of the Mass of the Himalayas and the Thibet Plateau and by the Existence of an Underground Chain of Excessive Den- sity which runs Across India, 640 Burroughs and Wellcome’s Soloid Microscopic Stains, 87 Burrows (Dr. H.), Pinene Nitrocyanide, 238 Butler-Burke (Mr.), on the Phosphoresence Produced in Partially Exhausted Tubes by the Passage of an Alternating Current round Them, 618 Butterflies: Butterflies of Chile, H. C. Elwes, 214; Variation of Common Copper Butterflies, 459, 555 Butters (J. W.), Decimal Coinage and Approximations, 513 Cables Sous-Marins, les, Alfred Gay, 148 Cacao Culture, the Trinidad Experiments, 185 Cadeac (M.), Production of Glycose by the Muscles, 216 Calder (Captain), Eruption in St. Vincent, 373 Caldwell (W.), Amount of Carbonic Anhydride Absorbed from Sea Water, 662 ‘Californian Climate, the, Note on a Statement in the Article on Francis Drake in the Dictionary of National Biography, 256 Callaway (Dr. Anglesey, 239 Cambier (R.), Traité de Bacteriologie pure et appliquée a la Médicine et a VHygiene, 316 Cambridge Natural History, the, Mammalia, F. E. Beddard, Charles), the Plutonic Complex of Central 373 ‘Cambridge Philosophical Society, 142, 166 Cammon (P.), Refraction of Light from an Iron Mirror Magnet- ised Perpendicularly to the Plane of Incidence, 384 Campanulate Foxgloves, Dr. Maxwell T. Masters, F.R.S., 344 Campbell (Prof.), the Spectrum of Nova Persei, 425 Canada: Tides in the Bay of Fundy, W. Bell Dawson, 85; Geological Survey of Canada, Dr. Robert Bell, 86’, Universities in Relation to Research, Prof. James Loudon at Royal Society of Canada’s Meeting at Toronto, 358 ; Snow Waves and Snow Drifts, Dr. Vaughan Cornish, 453 ‘Canal Lift, Novel, Gordon C. Thomas, 350 -Cancani (Dr. A.), Record of Italian Earthquakes, (1891-1900), 66 ; Periodicity of the Great Earthquakes of the Marches and Romagna, 66; Improved Seismograph, 308 ; Distribution in Intensity of the After-Shocks of Three Hundred Italian Earth- quakes, 513 Cannan (Edwin, M.A., LL.D), Opening Address in Section F at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 507 Cantone, (Prof.), the Royal Prize of the Reale Accademia dei Lincei for Physics Awarded to, 377 Cape Breton, New Marconi Signalling Station at, 485 Cape of Good Hope Department of Agriculture Marine Investigation in South Africa, Observations on the Temperature and Salinity of the Sea around the Cape Peninsula, J. D. F. Gilchrist, 260 Cape Observatory, Report of the, for 1901, Sir David Gill, 331 Capitan (M.), Reproduction des figures paléolithiques peintes sur les parois de la grotte de Font-de-Gaume, Dordogne, 452 Carbon, Chemical and Physical Properties of, in the Hearth of the Blast Furnace, W. J. Foster, 63 Carbon, Fusion of, Dr. A. Ludwig, 206 Carbon Dioxides, Solid Carbon Dioxide obtained from Sparklets, Prof. R. W. Wood, 15 ; Experimental Demonstration of the Decomposition of Carbon Dioxide by Leaves Exposed to Index Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Light, P. P. Dehérain and E. Demoussy, 383; Can Carbon Dioxide be ‘‘ Vitalised”? Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S., 492; the Influence of Varying Amounts of, in the Air on the Photosynthetic Process of Leaves and on the Mode of Growth of Plants, Dr. Horace T. Brown, F.R.S., and F, Escombe at the Royal Society, 620 Carmody, (Prof. P.), Elementary Chemical Analysis, 575 Carnac and its Environs, the Farmers’ Years, ii., Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 104 Carnegie Institution of Washington, D.C., the, Dr. Daniel C. Gilman, 548 Carpenter (G. H.), on the Insect Fauna of some Irish Caves, 641 Carruthers (J. B.), Fungal Diseases of the Tea Plant, 136 Carslaw (Dr. H. S.), Application of Contour Integration to the Solution of General Problems in the Conduction of Heat, 71 ; on the Use of Fourier’s Series in the Problem of the Transverse Vibrations of Stretched Strings, 485 Carvallo (M. E.), L’Electricité (déduite de l’Expérience et ramenée au Principe des Travaux virtuels), 575 Cassini Division, Saturn Visible through the, C. T. Whitmell, 87, 296 Cattle-Disease: Screw Worm in Cattle at St. Lucia, Mr. Maxwell-Lefroy, 400 Caucasian Snow, A. Brun, 16 Caucasus, Glacier Disaster in the, J. F. Baddeley, 328 Cave-Brown-Cave (Miss F. E.), on the Correlation between the Barometric Height at Stations on the Eastern Side of the Atlantic, 311 Celebes, the Geography and Geology of, Dr. Paul Sarasin and Dr. Fritz Sarasin, 3 Celtic Mythology, Lady Gregory, 489 Centrosome, the Morphological Value of the, Dr. Th. Boveri, 74 ; U Cephei, Delay of the Minimum of, 234 B Cephei, the Spectroscopic Binary, Prof. Frost and W. S. Adams, 352 Cerebral Commissures in certain Marsupialia, a Peculiarity of the, Prof. G. Elliot Smith, 165 Cerebral Cortex, Human, on some New Features in the Intimate Structure of the, Dr. John Turner, 665 ; Prof. Schafer, 665 Cesaro (E.), Limitations of Constants in the Analytical Theory of Heat, 159 Ceylonese Lizard, Bipedal Locomotion of a, E. Ernest Green, 492; Rose Haig Thomas, 551; N. Annandale, 577; W. Saville Kent, 630 Chalon-sur-Sadne, Cyclone at, 305 Chandler (Dr. J. C.), Motion of the Pole, 309 Chantemesse (A.), Pathologie Générale et Expérimentale, Les Processus généraux, 363 Chapman (Frederick), the Foraminifera, an Introduction to the Study of the Protozoa, 196 Chapman (Dr. H. C.), the Flying-lemur, 351 Chapman (Mr.), Decomposition of Water Vapour by the Electric Spark, 637 Charabot (E.), Mechanism of the Chemical Variations in the Plant under the Influence of Sodium Nitrate, 144 ; Study of the Simultaneous Distillation of two Non-miscible Substances, 336; the Methyl Ester of Methylanthranilic Acid in the Vegetable Organism, 648 Chart of the Metric System, Prof. C. Bopp, 630 Chassy (A.), the Influence of the Voltage in the Formation of Ozone, 168 : Chaumet (M.), Action of Light on Precious Stones, 119 Chavanne (G. W.), Pyromucic and Isopyromucic Acids, 216 Cheadle, Slight Earthquake at, 254 Chelsea Physic Garden, the, 321 Chemistry: Manual of Alcoholic Fermentation and the Allied Industries, Charles G. Matthews, 1: Preparation of Absolute Alcohol from Strong Spirit, Dr. Young, F.R.S., 70; Pro- perties of Mixtures of Lower Alcohols with Water, Dr. Young, F.R.S., and Miss E. C. Fortey, 70; Properties of Mixtures of the Lower Alcohols with Benzene, and with Benzene and Water, Dr. Young, F, R.S,, and Miss E. C. Fortey, 70; the Nutritive Value of Alcohol, Messrs. Atwater and Benedict, 450; Action of Alcohols upon the Sodium Deriva- tives of other Alcohols, Marcel Guerbet, 336; Solid Carbon Dioxide obtained from Sparklets, Prof. R. W. Wood, 15; Synthesis of Carboxylic Acids by the Action of Carbon Dioxide upon Magnesium Alkyl Halogen Compounds, Messrs. Houben and Kesselkaul, 308: Experimental Demonstration Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 Index Xill of the Decomposition of Carbon Dioxide by Leaves Exposed to Light, P. P. Dehérain and E. Demoussy, 383 ; Can Carbon Dioxide be Vitalised? Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S., 492; Chemical Society, 22, 70, 118, 191, 214, 238; Influence of Acidic Oxides on Specific Rotations of Lactic Acid and Potassium Lactate, Drs. Henderson and Prentice, 22; Ammonia, Nitrates and Chlorine in Rothamsted Rain Water, Dr. Miller, 22 ; Reactions between Acid and Basic Amides in Liquid Ammonia, Messrs. Franklin and Stafford, 541 ; Dimercurammonium Nitrite and its Haloid Derivatives, Dr. P. C. Ray, 22; Preparation of Sulphamide from Ammonium Amido-sulphite, Messrs. Divers and Ogawa, 541; the Pre- cipitation of Ammonium Vanadate by Ammonium Chloride. F. A. Gooch and R. D. Gilbert, 571-2; Preparation and Properties of a Silicide of Vanadium, MM. H. Moissan and Holt, 312; a New Silicide of Vanadium, H. Moissan and M. Holt, 624; Nitrates and Chlorine in the Drainage through Uncropped and Unmanured Land, Dr. Miller, 22; Com- position of the Hydrate of Chlorine, M. de Forcrand, 48 ; Union of Hydrogen and Chlorine, V. and VI., Dr. Mellor, ~238 ; Case of Molecular Rupture by Bromine, R. Fosse, 23; Derivatives of Fumaric Aldehyde, R: Marquis, 23; the Transformation of New into Stale Bread, L. Lindet, 23; Chemical Instruction and Chemical Industries in Germany, Prof. T. E. Thorpe, F.R.S., 32 ; Death and Obituary Notice of Prof. H. von Pechmann, 37; Death and Obituary Notice of John Glover, 37; Instantaneous Chemical Reactions and { the Electrolytic Dissociation Theory, Prof. Kahlenberg, 38; Persulphuric Acids, Prof. Henry E. Armstrong, V.P.R.S. and T. Martin Lowry, 45 ; an Introduction to Chemistry and Physics, W. H. Perkin, jun. and Bevan Lean, 52; the Oil Chemists’ Handbook, Erastus Hopkins, 52: Does Chemical Transformation Influence Weight? Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S., 58 ; Position of the Rare Earths in Mendeléeff’s Periodical System of Elements, Prof. Bohuslav Brauner, 66; Atoms and Valencies, ]. Fraser, 68 ; Preparation of Highly Substituted Nitroamino- benzenes, Dr. Orton, 70; Atomic Weight of Tellurium, Dr. Scott, -F.R.S., 70; Fractional Distillation as a Method of Quantitative Analysis, Dr. Young and Miss E. C. Fortey, 70 ; Vapour Pressures and Boiling Points of Mixed Liquids, Dr. Young, F.RS., 70; on an Oxycarbide of Cerium, Jean Sterba, 72; Glucose and the Carbonates of Cerium, Andre Job, 72; Derivatives of Pyruvylpyruvic Ester, L. J. Simon, 72; Addition: of Hypochlorus Acid to Propylene, Louis Henry, 72; Arsenic Anhydride and its Hydrates, V. Auger, 72; Decomposition of Compounds of Selenium and Tellurium by Moulds and its Influence on the Biological Test for Arsenic, Dr. Rosenheim, 214: Research by W. C. Heraeus with Modified Form of Electric Resistance Furnace, 85 ; Products of the Catalpa Fruit, A. Piutti and Dr. E. Comanducei, 87; Lithium Silicide, Henry Moissan, 95 ; Conditions of Formation and Stability of the Hydrides and Nitrides of the Alkaline Earths, Henri Gautier, 96 ; Synthesis of Menthone, Georges Leser, 96 ; Variation with Tempera- ture of the Surface-tensions and Densities of Liquid Oxygen, Nitrogen, Argon, and Carbon Monoxide, E. C. C. Baly and F. G. Donnan, 118; Comparison of Bromonitrocamphane with Bromonitrocamphor, Dr. M. O. Forster, 119; -2 : 4- Dibromo - 5 - nitro- and 2 : 4 - dibromo- 3:5 dinitrotoluenes and their Behaviour on Reduction, W. A. Davis, 119; Purification of Hydrochloric Acid from Arsenic, Dr. Thorne and E. H, Jeffers, 119 ; Radioactivity of Thorium Compounds, Prof. Rutherford and Mr. Soddy, 119; Radioactivity of Uranium, Mr. Soddy, 119: Redetermination of the Atomic Weight of Uranium, Prof. T. W. Richardsand Mr. Merigold, 208 ; the Addition of Hydrogen to Ethylenic Hydrocarbons by the Method of Contact, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 119; Volumetric Estimation of Iodides in the Presence of Chlorides and Bromides, V. Thomas, 120; Method of Gradual Synthesis of Aldehydes, L. Bouveault and A. Wahl, 120; the Laboratory Companion to Fats and Oils Industries, Dr. J. Lewkowitsch, 126; Commercial Fixation of Nitrogen, 135; Synthesis of Hydrazoic Acid, 137; Antiseptic Pro- perties of Dilute Solutions of Acids, Dr. M. Bial, 137; Syn- thesis of Fatty Aldehydes, L. Bouveault and A. Wahl, 137; ** Chemical” Theory of Petroleum Formation, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 138 ; on a General Numerical Connection Between the Atomic Weights, C. A. Vincent, 143; Bio- chemical Action of Extract of Kidney on Certain Organic Compounds, E. Gérard, 144 ; Physical Properties of Hydrogen Telluride, MM. de Forcrand and Fonzes-Diacon, 144 ; Mechanism of the Chemical Variations in the Plant under the Influence of Sodium Nitrate, E. Charabot and A. Hebert, 144; Constitution of the Ammoniacal Copper Salts, M. Bouzat, 144; Ammoniacal Copper Oxide, M. Bouzat, 168; Chemistry of Respiration in Bacteria, Dr. W. E. Adeney, 167 ; the Influence of the Voltage in the Formation of Ozone, A. Chassy, 168; Preparation of the Anhydrous Chlorides of Samarium, Yttrium and Ytterbium, Camille Matignon, 168 ; Action of Monochloraceto Acetic Ester upon Diazo Benzene Chlorides, G. Favrel, 168 ; Elementary Inorganic Chemistry, James Walker, F.R.S., 170; Experimental Chemistry, Lyman C. Newell, 170; Elementary Experimental Chemistry, W. F. Watson, 170; the Manufacture and Uses of Sodium, James D. Darling, 189 ; Some Excessively Saline Indian Well Waters, Dr. J. W. Leather, 191; Influence of Solvents on the Rotation of Optically Active Compounds, Dr. T. S. Patterson, 191; Action of Sulphurous Acid upon Oxydase and on the Colouring Matter of Red Wine, A. Bouffard, 192 ; a New Isomerism in Asymmetric Nitrogen, E. Wedekind, 192; the Oxidation of Morphine by the Juice of Rossula deltca, J. Bougault, 192; Benzene-azobenzoic Aldehyde, P. Freundler, 192; Apparatus for Liquefying Hydrogen, Dr. Morris W. Travers, 204 ; Fusion of Carbon, Dr. A. Ludwig, 206 ; Decomposition of Oxalacetic Hydrazone in Aqueous and Acid Solutions, and a New Method of Deter- mining the Concentration of, Hydrogen Ions in Solutions, H. O. Jones, O. W. Richardson, 214; Constituents of Gambier and Acacia Catechus, A. G. Perkin and E. Yoshitake, 214; Action of Ungerminated Barley Diastase on Starch, Dr. J. L. Baker, 214; Decomposition of Chlorates, W. H. Sodeau, 214; Phosphorus Tetroxide, C. A. West, 214; Com- binations of Hydrogen Sulphide with Anhydrous Aluminium Chloride, E. Baud, 216; Conditions under which Aluminium is Obtained by the Electrolytic Method, Messrs. Haber and Geipert, 424; Alloys of Cadmium and Magnesium, O. Boudouard, 216; Polymerisation and Heat of Formation of Oxide of Zinc, M. de Forcrand, 216 ; Pyromucic and Iso- pyromucic Acids, G. Chavanne, 216; New Glucoside Aucubine, M. Bourquelot and H. Hérissey, 216; Identity of the Acid Obtained by the Oxidation of Benzylidene-menthone with Potassium Permanganate with the Dihydrocamphoric Acid, G. Martine, 216 ; Decomposition of Mercurous Chloride by Dissolved Chlorides, T, W. Richards and E. H. Archibald, 233 ; Lead Dioxide Produced Electrolytically from a Solution of an Alkali Chloride in which Litharge is Suspended, 233 ; Dinitro-f-anisidine, Prof. Meldola and J. V. Eyre, 238; Pinene Nitrocyanide, Prof. Tilden and Dr. H. Burrows, 238 ; Preparation of Pure Chlorine and its Behaviour Towards Hydrogen, J. W. Mellor and E. J. Russell, 238; Molecular Condition of Borax in Solution, H. S. Shelton, 238; Absorption Spectra of Phloroglucinol and its Trimethy] Ester, Messrs. Hartley, Dobbie and Lauder, 238; Melting Point of Pure Tribromophenolbromine, E. W. Lewis, 238 ; Amorphous Sulphur and its Relation to the Freezing Point of Liquid Sulphur, Prof. A. Smith, 239 ; Causes which Determine the Formation of Amorphous Sulphur, Prof. Alexander Smith, 383 ; Dissociation of the Compound of Iodine and Thiourea, Dr. Hugh Marshall, 239; Chlorinating Properties of a Mix- ture of Hydrochloric Acid and Oxygen, Camille Matignon, 240; Acidity of Pyrophosphoric Acid, H. Giran, 240; Di- benzoyl-hydrazobenzene, P. Freundler, 240; Manual of Agricultural Chemistry, Herbert Ingle, 245; Spring Waters from Petroleum Districts Contain no Sulphates, Prof. Hofer, 256; Liquid Hydride of Silicon, H. Moissan and S. Smiles, 263; New Properties of Amorphous Silicon, H. Moissan and S. Smiles, 263; Silicon not an Element, Th. Gross, 484 ; Combination of Silicon with Cobalt, P. Lebeau, 572; Magnetic Properties of the Ferro Silicons, Ad. Jouve, 264; Gummosis of the Sugar Cane, R. Greig Smith, 264 ; an Improved Machine for the Economical Production of Liquid Air, Georges Claude, 264 ; Constitution of the Aloins, N. E. Léger, 264; Action of Carbon Bisulphide on the Polyvalent Amino-alcohols, L. Maquenne and E. Roux, 264; the Atomic Weight of Iodine, Prof. Ladenburg, 281 ; Polonium, Dr. W. Marckwald, 281; Gaseous Antimony Hydride, A. Stock and W. Doht, 281 ; Electrolysis of Silver Nitrate, A. Leduc, 288 ; Oxidising Properties of Dinaphtho- pyranol, R. Fosse, 288 ; Condensation of Nitromethane with Aromatic Aldehydes, W. L. Bouveault and A. Wahl, 288 ; XIV Index iaevataae New Proof of the Cellular Resistance of the Saccharomyces and on a New Application of this Property to Industry and the Distillery, Henri Alliot, 288 ; Death and Obituary Notice of Prof V. Safarik, 305 ; the Rate of Hydrolysis of Sulphonic Acid Esters, B. Wegscheider, 308 ; Quantitative Examination of Atmospheric Air, MM. Henriet and Pécoul, 308; the Action of Copper Sulphate upon Iron Meteorites, O. C. Farrington, 311; the Direct Hydrogenation of Acetylenic Hydrocarbons by the Method of Contact, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 312; on a New Organic Vapcur in Atmo- shee Air, H. Henriet, 312 ; Junior Chemistry and Physics, Jerome Harrison, 317; Synthesis cf Tartaric Acid for Tae ona Large Scale, Prof. Zinno, 330 : Comparative Economic Study of the Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid by the Anhydride and the Modern Lead Chamber Processes, Messrs. Niedenfiihr and Luty, 330; the Phallic Sulphates and Double Sulphates, Dr. Hugh Marshall, 335; Study of the Simul- taneous Distillation of two Non-miscible Substances, Eug. Charabot and J. Rocherolles, 336 ; Atomic Weight of Radium Mme. Curie, 336; Action of Hydrochloric Acid upon the Sulphates of Aluminium, Chromium and Iron, A. Recoura, 336; Mixtures formed by Sulphur and Phosphorus at Tcmperatures below 100° C., R. Boulouch, 336; Cerium Silicide, M. Sterba, 336; Magnetic Dichroism, (Quirino Majorana, 360; Mannite, the Nitrates and the Alkaloids of Normal Urine, S. Dombrowski, 360; Reduction of Nitro- derivatives by the Methcd of Direct Hydrogenation in contact with finely divided Metals, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 360; Chemische und Medicinische Untersuch- ungen, Festschrift zur des Sechzigsten Geburtstages, Max Jaffé, 363; Essays in Historical Chemistry, T. E. Thorpe, F.R.S., 365 ; Statue to Pasteur at Dole, 377 ; Direct reduction of Oxides of Nitrogen by the Contact Method, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 384 ; Ammoniacal Anbydrous Copper Chlorides, M. Bouzat, 384 ; Action of Nitrous Acid in Alkaline Solutions on a- Substituted B-Ketonic Esters, MM. Bouveault and René Locquin, 384; Variation of the Phos- phoric Acid in Cow’s Milk with time after Calving, F. Bordas and Sig. de Raczkowski, 384 ; Influence of Cream Separation on the Principal Constituents of Milk, F. Bordas, Sig. de Raczkowski, 432; the Preparation of Cells for the Measure- ment of High Osmotic Pressures, Messrs. Morse and Frazer 401 ; Electrochemical Equivalent of Silver, Messrs. Richards and Heimrod, gor ; Chemisch-Analytisches Praktikum, Dr. Carl Anton Henniger, 414; the Effect of Light on Cyanin, P. G. Nutting, 416; Relationships between the Atomic Weights of Allied Elements, Arthur Marshall, 424; the Composition of Pennsylvania Petroleum, C. F. Mabery, 424; International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, Prof. Herbert McLeod, F.R.S., 436 ; a First Course of Chemistry (Heuristic), J. H. Leonard, 439; a Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry, Dr, A. F. Holleman, 440 ; Two Chemical Constituents from the Eucalypts, Henry G. Smith, 456 ; the Electrolysis of Mixtures of Salts, Anatole Leduc, 488; the Chemical Laboratory of the Royal Institution, 460: Death of Sir Frederick Augustus Abel, 483; Obituary Notice of, 492; Death of Prof. John James Hummel, 511; Obituary Notice of, 520; Latest Apparatus for Rendering Air Respirable in a Closed Space, M. Desgrez, 513 ; a New Acidimetric Indicator, L. J. Simon, 516; the Elementary Principles of Chemistry, ACV. Young, 519; Death of M. Damour, 538 ; Chemical Compo- sition of Tubercle Bacilli, De Schweinitz and Dorset, 540; Mannan in Sugar-maple Trees, Prof. F. H. Storer, 541; Roscoe-Schorlemmer’s Lehrbuch der Organischen Chemie, Jul. Wilh. Brith], Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S., 546; an Intro- duction to Chemistry, D. S. Macnair, 547; Elementary Chemical Analysis, Distinguishing Tables and Tests, Prof P. Carmody, 575; the Evolution of Artificial Mineral Waters, William Kirkby, 602 ; a Junior Chemistry, E. A. Tyler, 606 ; Apparatus for the Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen, Messrs. Bradley and Lovejoy, 611; the Decomposition of Urea, C. E. Fawsitt, 613; Rate of Bromination of Carbon Com- pounds, L. Bruner, 613 ; Dinaphthopyranol, R. Fosse, 624 ; on Nitro-pyromucic Acid and its Ethyl Ester, and on Dinitro- furfurane, R. Marquis, 624; Saponification of Nitric Esters, Leo Vignen and I. Bay, 624; Examination and Estimation of Extract of Chestnut Wood Mixed with Oak Extract, Ferdinand Jean, 624 ; Pectic Fermentation, M. Goyaud, 624 ; Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis for the Use of Students, Chemists and Assayers, E. L, Rhead and Prof. A. Humboldt L Dec. 18, 1902 Sexton, 628; Apparatus for the Electrolytic Separation of Calcium fron the Fused Chloride, B. V. Borchers and L. Stockem, 636; Iodine TPentafluoride, Henri Moissan, 637 ; the Decompositionof Ammonium Nitrite in Aqueous Solution, A. 79, 132, 153, 178, 203, 635, Prof. J. Milne, 56, 107, 151, 370; Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Robert T, Hill, 370, Prof. Israel C. Russell, 372 ; Royal Society Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Dr. Tempest Anderson and Dr. J. S. Flett, 402; Recent Volcanic Disturbances in the West Indies and Elsewhere, 229; Mont Pelée Eruption and Dust Falls, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 53; Fresh Eruptions of Mont Pelée, 278, 580; Notes on the Recent Eruptions of Mont Pelée, Dr. H. A. Alford Nicholls, 638; Rocks of Mont Pelée, J. S. Diller, 372; Last Days of St. Pierre, Very Rev. G. Parel, 372; Eruption of Martinique, MM. Schule des Automobil Fahrers, Wolfgang Vogel, Mervyn O’Gorman, 313 Locomotives, British versus American, 42 Locquin (René), Action of Nitrous Acid in Alkaline Solution on a-Substituted 8-Ketonic Esters, 384 Lodge (Sir Oliver, F.R.S.), Marconi’s Results in Day and Night Wireless Telegraphy, 222 Londe (Albert), Contribution to the Study of the Magnesium Light, 168 London: the Colleges of the University of, 10; University College and the University of London, 59; the Electrification of, 296 ; Science and the London Matriculation Examination, A. Irving, 320 Long (William, F.S.A.), the Wiltshire Archeological and Natural History Magazine, Stonehenge and its Barrows, 25 Longfield (Mrs. R. W.), Cuckoo Heard on August 18, 421 Lorentz (H. A.), Sichtbare und Unsichtbare Bewegungen, 489 Lortet (M.), the Black Coloration of the Rocks Forming the Cataracts of the Nile, 95 Lory (Charles A.), Simple Electric Thermostat, 135 Loudon (Prof. James), Universities in Relation to Research, Address at Royal Society of Canada’s Meeting at Toronto, 8 pee (Mr.), Apparatus for the Fixation of Atmospheric Nitrogen, 611 Lovatt (E.), on Tallies, 664 Lowe (E. Ernest), ‘‘ Fox Shark” or ‘* Thrasher” (AJ/opectas vulpes) in the English Channel, 272 Lowell (Percival), Signals from Mars, 18 Lowry (T. Martin), Persulphuric Acids, 45 : Lucas (A.), on the Disintegration of Building Stones in Egypt, 79 Lwig (A.), Fusion of Carbon, 206 Lunar Halo, a Remarkable, Prof. E. E. Barnard, 5; H. W. Croome Smith, 85 Luty (Mr.), a Comparative Economic Study of the Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid by the Anhydride and the modern Lead Chamber Processes, 330 Luxmoore (C. M.), on the Soils of Dorset, 486 Lydekker (R., F.R.S.), a Rare Wild Sheep, 32 Mabery (C. F.), the Composition of Pennsylvania Petroleum, 424 Macalister (R. A. S.), Palestine, 663 Macaulay (Dr. F. S.), Some Formule of Elimination, 71 MacBride (Prof. E. W.), Some New Points in the Development of Achinus esculentus, 640 McClendon (J. F.), Life-History of U/ula hyalina, 257 MacCond (Prof. C. W.), Velocity Diagrams, their Construction and Uses, 269 McDermott (F. P.), Observations of ¢ Geminorum, 662 on a Prehistoric Cemetery-cave in Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 Index XXVII McDonald (T. McGregor), Eruption in St. Vincent, 373 Macdougal (D. T.), Elementary Plant Physiology, 76 McDougall (Archibald), a Remarkable Meteor, 557 MacDowall (Alex. B.), Briickner’s Cycle and the Variation of Temperature in Europe, 77; Sun-spots and Wind, 320 McHenry (Mr.), on the Prolongation of the Highland Border Rocks into Co. Tyrone, 619 McIntosh (Prof.), British Fisheries Investigations and the Inter- national Scheme, 640 Mackenzie (J. S.), Elements of Metaphysics, 198 Mackie (Dr. W.), on the Conditions Attending the Precipitation of Manganese Dioxide in the Elgin Sandstone, 620; on the Results of a Series of Determinations of the Soluble Chlorides and Sulphates in the Elgin Sandstone, 620 McLeod (Prof. Herbert, F.R.S.), International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, 436 MacMahon (Lieut.-General Charles Alexander, F.R.S., F.G.S.), Opening Address in Section C at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, Rock Metamorphism, 504 Macenair (D. S.), an Introduction to Chemistry, 547 MacRitchie (David), Prehistoric Pygmies in Silesia, 151 McWilliam (A.), Constituents of Hardened Steel, 63; Control of the Silicon in the Acid Open-hearth’Bath, 63 Madeira, Remarkable Sunsets at, F. Krohn, 199, 540; A. R. Tankard, 254 Magic Squares, J. Willis, 78 Magnesium Light, Contribution to the Study of the, Albert Londe, 168 Magnetism: Practical Exercises in Magnetism and Electricity, Hi. E. Hadley, 5; Diagramme der Electrischen und Mag- netischen Zustinde und Bewegungen, F. W. Wiillenweber, 76; Magnetic Perturbation on May 8, Th. Moureaux, 96; Phenomena Observed at Zi-Ka-Wei, China, during the Mar- tinique Eruption, M. de Mordrey, 408; Magnetic Dis- turbances during the Eruption of Mont Pelee on May 8, Dr. L A. Bauer, 421; Magnetic Observations Made in Central Madagascar, P. Colin, 192; Expédition Norvégienne de 1899-1900 pour l’Etude des Aurores Boréales, Resultats des Recherches Magnetiques, Kr. Birkeland, Dr. C. Chree, F.R.S., 227; Investigations into the Connection between the Magnetic Currents in the Earth and the Aurora Borealis, Prof. Kr. Birkeland, 328 ; the First Magnetician, Prof. S. P. Thomp- son, F.R.S., 249, 272; William Gilbert, of Colchester, a Sketch of his Magnetic Philosophy, Charles E. Benham, 270 ; Magnetic Properties of the Ferrosilicons, Ad. Jouve, 264 ; Mathematical Investigation of the Effect of an Infinite Plane- conducting Screen on the Magnetic Field Produced by an Electrostatic Charge Moving Uniformly Parallel to the Plane, Prof. T. Levi Civitas, 280; Erdmagnetische Untersuchung- ung im Kaiserstuhl, G. Meyer, 324 ; the Relation between the Solar Protuberances and Terrestrial Magnetism, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 4563; the Dissipation of Energy by Electric Currents induced in an Iron Cylinder when Rotated in a Magnetic Field, Ernest Wilson, 334 ; Note ona Magnetic Detector of Electric Waves which can be Employed as a Receiver for Space Telegraphy, G. Marconi, 334; Change of Resistance of Nickel due to Magnetisation at Various Temperatures, Prof. C. G. Knott, 335, 383; a Note on the Effect of Daylight upon the Propagation of Electromagnetic Impulses over Long Distances, G. Marconi, 335; Cross Magnetisation in Iron, James Russell, 335 ; Magnetic Shield- ing in Hollow Iron Cylinders and Superposed Magnetic In- ductions in Iron, James Russell, 383; Magnetic Double Refraction, Quirino Majorana, 336; Magnetic Dichroism, Quirino Majorana, 360; Reflection of Light from an Iron Mirror Magnetised Perpendicularly to the Plane of Incidence, P. Camman, 384 ; Novel Magneto-optic Phenomena, Dr. Quirino Majorana, 398; Magneto-optical Rotation in the Interior of Absorption Bands, Prof. Zeeman, 622; an Ele- mentary Book on Electricity and Magnetism, Profs. D. C. and J. P. Jackson, 439 ; Magnetic Work of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, Outlined for July 1, 1902-June 30, 1903, 666; Thin Metallic Films obtained by Kathode Projection, L. Houllevigue, 672 Hepat: (Dr.), on the Diuretic Action of Pituitary Extracts, Maignon (M.), Production of Glycose by the Muscles, 216 Maillet (Edmond), the Prediction of the Minimum Yield of the Sources of the Vanne, 95 Major (Dr. Forsyth), Brussels Okapi Specimens, 185 Majorana (Dr. Quirino), Magnetic Double Refraction, 336; Misenese Dichroism, 360 ; Novel Magneto-optic Phenomena, 39: Making of Citizens, the, a Study of Comparative Education, R. E. Hughes, 604 Malacca, the Peoples of, Frank F. Laidlaw, 47 Malarial Fever, its Cause, Prevention and Treatment, Ronald Ross, F.R.S., 269 Malarial Fevers, Treatment of, by Latent Arsenic, Armand Gautier, 47 Malay Peninsula: the Human Souls and Ghosts of the Malays of Patani, Nelson Annandale, 664 ; the Wild and Civilised Tribes of the, Nelson Annandale, H. C. Robinson, 664 Malay Type of Sea-going Boat, 114 Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural History), Guide to the Galleries of, 322 Mammalia, the Cambridge Natural History, F. E. Beddard, 373 Mammals, Instances of Abnormality in, F. Howe, Prof. O. C. Bradley, Elliot Smith, 351 Manaar, Gulf of, Pearl Fisheries in the, Prof. Herdman, 486 Manchester, Mr. Balfour on Technical Education at, 633 Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, 23, 47, 95, 648 Manchester Sanitary Congress: the Treatment of Smoke, a Sanitary Parallel, Dr. W. N. Shaw, F.R.S., 667 Mansel-Pleydell (John Clavell), Death and Obituary Notice of, 6 5 Mannagetta (Dr. Giinther ritter Beck v.), Die Vegetations- verhaltnisse d. Illyrischen Lander, 27 Manuelli Effect, the, Action of Sunlight in Facilitating the Passage of Electric Sparks, Prof. Garbasso, 448 Maquenne (L.), Action of Carbon Bisulphide on the Polyvalent Amino-alcohols, 264 Marchi (Luigi de), Effects of Solar Eclipses on the Motion of Air-Currents, 159 Marchlewski (L.), Spectrum of Hemoglobin, 230 Marckwald (Dr. W.), Polonium, 281 Marconi (G.), New Form of Magnetic Detector, 182; the Recent Transatlantic Signalling, 182; Marconi’s Results in Day and Night Wireless Telegraphy, Prof. J. Joly, F.R.S., 199; Sir Oliver Lodge, F.R.S., 222; Note on a Magnetic Detector of Electric Waves which can be Employed as a Receiver for Space Telegraphy, 334; a Note on the Effect of Daylight upon the Propagation of Electromagnetic Impulses over Long Distances, 335 ; New Marconi Signalling Station at Cape Breton, 485; Prof. A. Righi on Mr. Marconi, 581 ; Marconi Experiments on the Carlo Alberto, 610 Marine Biology : Aggregated Colonies in Madreporiform Corals, Dr. J. E. Duerden, 257; Marine Biology in Wales, G. W. Duff Assheton-Smith, 282; New Hydroid, Pe/agohydra mirabilis, Dr. A. Dendy, 330; Studies on the Distribution of Animal Life on ‘‘Storeggen”’ and ‘‘ Shetlandseggen,” North Sea, Dr. Johan Hjort, 351; Degeneration-process in Larval Ccelenterates of the genus Gonionema, H. F. Perkins, 612 Marpmann (G.), Distinguishing between Plewrosigma angu- latum and P. balticum under Low Powers, 39 Marquis (R.), Derivatives of Fumaric Aldehyde, 23 ; on Nitro- pyromucic Acid and its Ethyl Esters, and on Dinitrofurfurane, 624 Mars, Signals from, Percival Lowell, 18 Marshall (Arthur), Relationships between the Atomic Weights of Allied Elements, 424 Marshall (Dr. Hugh), Dissociation of the Compound of Iodine and Thiourea, 239: the Thallic Sulphates and Double Sulphates, 335 Martell (Benjamin), Death and Obituary Notice of, 305 Martine (G.), Identity of the Acid obtained by the Oxidation of Benzylidene-menthone with Potassium Permanganate with Dihydrocamphoric Acid, 216 Martinique: Volcanic Eruption in Java, Brilliant Sunset Glows in 1901, and Probable Glows from the Eruption in, Henry Helm Clayton, ror ; Effects of the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent, H. Hesketh Bell, 306 ; the Mission to Martinique, M. Lacroix, 336; the Eruption of, MM. A. Lacroix, Rollet de Isle and Giraud, 488, 516 Mason (Dr. Otis T.), the Harpoon, 232 Mason (Prof. William P.), Water-supply, 458 Masterman (Dr. A. T.), Series of Wax Models Illustrating the Transition from Larva to Adult in Crzbrella osculata, 640 XXVIll Index Nalure, Dec. 18, 1902 Masters (Dr. Maxwell T., F.R.S.), Campanulate Foxgloves, | 44 Piererial fo. Natural Selection, Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, 607 Materialism, Last Words on, L. Buchner, 29 Mathematics : College Algebra, L. E. Dickson, 4; Legons sur les Séries a Termes Positifs, Emile Borel, 5 ; Rearrangement of Euclid i. 1-32, T. Petch, 7; J. M. Child, 31; the Elements of Euclid, Book xi., R. Lachlan, 171; Death of Prof. J. L. Fuchs, 14; Obituary Notice of, 156; Experi- mental Mathematics, F. M. Saxelby, 30; Quaternion Inte- grals Depending on a Single Quaternion Variable, Prof. Chas. J. Joly, 47; Mathematical and Physical Papers, Sir G. G. Stokes, Prof. Horace Lamb, F.R.S., 49; Symbol for Partial Differentiation, Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., 53, 271, 5203 Dr. Thomas Muir, F.R.S., 271, 520; A. B. Basset, F.R.S., 576; Mathematical Society, 71, 215; some Formulz of Elimination, Dr. F. S. Macaulay, 71 ; Groups in which every Two Conjugate. Operations are Permutable, Prof. Burnside, 71; Application of Contour Integration to the Solution of General Problems in the Conduction of Heat, H. S. Carslaw, 71; Use of Fourier’s Series in the Theory of Conduction of Heat, Dr. Ganesh Prasad, 71; 0n the Use of Fourier’s Series in the Problem of the Transverse Vibrations of Stretched Strings, Dr. H. S. Carslaw, 485; Magic Squares, J. Willis, 78; American Journal of Mathematics, 93, 4553; Mathematical Training, C. E. Stromeyer, 103; Simplified Definition of a Group, E. V. Huntingdon, 118 ; Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, 118, 165, 382, 455; a Cubic and Submerged Cubes, Prof. Thos. Alexander, 127; Algebra, H. G. Willis, 149; Trans- actions of the American Mathematical Society, 165 ; Formula for the Perimeter of an Ellipse, Thomas Muir, F.R.S., 1743 Histoire des Mathématiques dans 1’Antiquilé et le Moyen Age, H. G. Zeuthen, 199; Report on the Teaching of Geometry, 201 ; Huygens’ Principle in a Uniaxial Crystal, Prof. Conway, 215 ; Investigations on Repetition of the Sum- factor Operation, Lieut.-Colonel Cunningham, 215; Geo- metrical Proposition Connected with the Continuation of Power Series, Prof. M. J. M. Hill, 215; Opere Mate- matiche di Francesco Brioschi, 221; a Method of Treating Parallels, Dr. S. W. Richardson, 223 ; Use of Quaternions in the Theory of Screws, Dr. W. Peddie, 239; Mathematical Investigation of the Effect of an Infinite Plane-conducting Screen on the Magnetic Field Produced by an Electro-static Charge Moving Uniformly Parallel to the Plane, Prof. T. Levi Civita, 280; Slide Rule Notes, Lieut.-Colonel H. C. Dunlopand C. S. Jackson, 292; Death of Rev. Charles E. Searle, 327; Cases of Motion of a Point in a Plane, E. Daniele, 329; Annals of Mathematics, 382; Elementary Geometry, W. C. Fletcher, 438; a New Theory of the Tides of Terrestrial Oceans, Rollin Harris, Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.S., 444; a Series Related to Bernoulli’s Numbers, J. B. Sutton, 492; Decimal Coinage and Approximations, J. W. Butters, 513; the Abel Festival in Christiania, 552; a Method of Treating Parallels, W. R. Jamieson, 576; Vortex Spirals, Dr. J. Larmor, F.R.S., 630; Probabilités et Moyennes Géométriques, Emmanuel Czuber, 652 ; Philo- sophical Essay on Probabilities, Pierre Simon Marquis de Laplace, 652 Matignon (Camille), Preparation of the Anhydrous Chlorides of Samarium, Yttrium and Ytterbium, 168; Chlorinating Properties of a Mixture of Hydrochloric Acid and Oxygen, 240 Matriculation Examination, Irving, 320 Matriculation Requirements in Scottish Universities, John Perry, F.R.S., 654 Matter and Motion in Space, Sir Hiram S. Maxim, 223 Matthews (A.), the Term ‘‘ Indian Summer,” 205 Matthews (Charles G.), Manual of Alcoholic Fermentation and the Allied Industries, 1 Maxim (Sir Hiram S.), Matter and Motion in Space, 223 Maxwell-Lefroy (Mr.), Screw Worm in Cattle at St. Lucia, Science and the London, A. Prof. 400 May (Dr. Page), on the Movement and Innervation of the Stomach, 665 Maze (Abbé), Death of, 255 Mazé (M.), the Zymase from Zurotiopsis Gayont, 312 Mechanics: Thin Floating Cylinders, Prof. Thos, Alexander, 6; the Compound Pendulum, S. A. F. White, 22; Throw- | testing Machine for Reversals of Mean Stress, Osborne Reynolds, F.RS., and J. H. Smith, 45; (Quelques Reé- flexions sur la Mécanique suivies d’une Premiere Lecon de Dynamique, Emile Picard, tot; la Costruzione degli Ingra- naggi, Prof. D. Tessari, 218; French Service Regulation as to Heads and Worms of Screws Used in the French Navy, 229; Use of Quaternions in the Theory of Screws, Dr. W. Peddie, 239; on an Approximate Solution for the Bending of a Beam of Rectangular Cross-section under any System of Load, with Special Reference to Points of Concentrated or Discontinuous Loading, L. N. G. Filon, 262; Mechanics of Engineering, Prof. A. Jay DuBois, 265 ; Velocity Diagrams, their Construction and Uses, Prof. C. W. MacCond, 269 ; Elementary Principles in Statistical Mechanics, J. Willard Gibbs, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 291; the Roorkee Manual of Applied Mechanics, Stability of Structures, and the Graphic Determination of Lines of Resistance, Lieut.- Colonel J. H. C. Harrison, 340 Medicine: Treatment of Malarial Fevers by Latent Arsenic, Armand Gautier, 47 ; the Romance of Medicine, Sir Frederick Treves, 183; the Kelation of Biology to Medicine, Dr. Rose Bradford, 231% Chloroform, a Manual for Students and Practitioners, Edward Lawrie, 293; Trailé de Hactériologie Pure'et Appliquée 4 la Medicine et 4 l’Hygiéne, P. Mique) and R. Cambier, Dr. E. Klein, F.R.S., 316; Pharmacology at the British Medical Association, 353 ; Pathologie Génerale et Expérimentale, Les Processus Généraux, A. Chantemesse and W. W. Pcdwyssotsky, 363; Matiére Medicale Zoo- logique, Histoire des Drogues d’Origine Animale, H. I- Beauregard, 363; Chemische und Medicinische Unter- suchungen, Festschrift zur des Sechzigsten Geburtstages, Von Max Jaffé, 363; Das Wirbeltierblut in Mikrokristallo- graphischer Hinricht, Dr. H. U. Kobert, 363; a Text-book of Physics, with Sections on the Applications of Physics to Physiology and Medicine, k. A. Lehfeldt, 387 ; the Rontgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Francis H. Williams, 435; Religio Medici, &c., 457 ; Opening Addresses at the Medical Schools, 579; the Climates and Baths of Great Britain, 629 Meinardus (W.), Der grosse Staubfall von 9 bis 12 Marz, 1901, in Nordafrica, Sud- und Mitteleuropa, 41 Méland (M.), World’s Annual Excess of Imports over Exports of Timber, 283 Melbourne University, Report for 1g0t Meldola (Prof. R., F.R.S.), the Lesson of Evolution, Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.S., 219; Dinitro-f-anisidine, 238 ; Can Carbon Dioxide be ‘‘ Vitalised"’? 492 ; Roscoe-Schorlem- mer’s Lehrbuch der Organischen Chemie, Jul. Wilh. Brithl, 546 : Mellor (J. W.), Preparation of Pure Chlorine and its Behaviour towards Hydrogen, 238; Union of Hydrogen and Ghlorine v. and vi., 238 Melzi (Father), the Earthquake in Mid-Atlantic, 378 Mendel’s Principles of Heredity, a Defence, W. Bateson, BER.S.5 57 Mendeléeff's Periodical System of Elements, Position of the Kare Earths in, Prof. Bohuslav Brauner, 66 Mendelssohn (M.), Les Phénoménes Electriques cher les Etres Vivants, 575 Mennell (Frederick P.), the Great Granite Mass of the Matopos, 449 Mercier (Charles), a Tyext-book of Insanity, 5 Merigold (Mr.), Kedetermination of the Atomic Weight of Uranium, 208 Merrill (G. P.), Meteorite Ploughed up at Admire, Kansas, 422 Mesnil (F.), Multiplication of Trypanosomes in Fishes, 2163 on the Coccidia Found in the Kidney of Java esculenta, 312 Metallurgy: Constituents of Hardened Steel, Prof. J. O. Armold and Mr. McWilliam, 63; the Relations between Metallurgy and Engineering, ‘‘ James Forrest ” Lecture at the Institution of Civil Engineers, Sir W. C. Roberts-Austen, K.C.B., F.R.S., 18 ; Control of the Silicon in the Acid Open- hearth Bath, A. McWilliam and W. H. Hatfield, 63; Chemical and Physical, Properties of Carbon in the Hearth of the Blast Furnace, W. J. Foster, 63 ; Sulphur Contents of Slags, Baron Jiiptner, 63; Brinell’s Researches on the Influence of Chemical Composition on the Soundness of Steel Ingots, Axel Wahlberg, 63; Microscopic Effects of Stress on Platinum, Thomas Andrews, F.R.S., and Charles Reginald Andrews, 213 ; a Note on the Recrystallisation of Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 Index XXiX Platinum, Walter Rosenhain, 262; Metallography, an Intro- . duction to the Study of the Structure of Metals, chiefly by the Aid of the Microscope, Arthur H. Hiorns, 415 ; Recovery of Tin from Tin-scrap, 449; the Over-heating of Mild Steel, Prof. Heyn, 487 ; Compression of Steel during Solidification in the Ingot Mould, A. Harmet, 487; Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis for the Use of Students, Chemists and Assayers, E. L. Rhead and Prof. A. Humboldt Sexton, 628 ; Aluminium and its Alloys, Prof. E. Wilson, 655; W. Murray Morrison, 655 Metals, Film Structures in, George Beilby, $4 Metaphysics: Elements of, J. S. Mackenzie, 198 ; Zur Meta- physik des Tragischer, L. Ziegler, 342 Meteorology: Pilot Chart of the North Atlantic and Mediter- ranean for May, 15 ; for June, 114, 206 ; for August, 307 ; for November, 635; Caucasian Snow, A. Prun, 16: Tempera- ture Indicator for Use with Platinum Thermometers, R. S. Whipple, 22; Sun-Pillars and Parhelion, Prof. Grenville A. J. Cole, 32; the Sun-Pillar of March 6, 38 ; Sun-Pillar ? Sir W. J. Herschel, Bart., 77 ; a Solar Halo, R. T. Omond, 103 ; the Halos of May 1, 8 and 22, Rev. T. C. Porter, 223 ; Meteorological Observations at Stonyhurst College Observa- tory for 1901, 38; Der grosse Staubfall von 9 bis 12 Marz, 1901, in Nordafrica, Sud- und Mitteleuropa, G. Hellmann, W. Meinardus, 41; the Hurricanes of the Far East, Prof. Dr. Paul Bergholz, 51 ; Mont Pelée Eruption and Dust Falls, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 53; Volcanic Eruption in Java, Brilliant Sunset Glows in 1901, and Probable Glows from the Eruption in Martinique, Henry Helm Clayton, ror; the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in the West Indies, Prof. J. Milne, F.R.S., 67, 107, 151, 370; Observations of Volcanic Activity in the West Indies, 178; Possible Connection between Volcanic Eruption and Sunspot Phenomena, H. J. Jensen, 360 (see also Volcanoes); the Sunspot Curve and Epochs, 186; Mean Maximum Temperature and the Rainfall of Jamaica and Sunspot Frequency, Maxwell Hall, 206; Sun- spots and Wind, Alex. B. MacDowall, 320; Apparatus for Registering Thunderstorms, Father J. Fényi and Father Johann Schreiber, 65 ; Meteorological Results of the Balloon Ascents of February 6, Dr. Hergesell, 66; Briickner’s Cycle and the Variation of Temperature in Europe, Alex. B. MacDowall, 77; the Weather in May, 85; Connection between Thunderstorms and the Lunar Phases, V. Ventosa, 85; Tides in the Bay of Fundy, W. Bell Dawson, 85; the Daily Period of Rainfall, Dr. P. Polis, 86 ; the Prediction of the Minimum Yield of the Sources of the Vanne, Edmond Maillet, 95 ; Symons’s Meteorological Magazine, use of the Monthly Rainfall Tables, 114 ; Sandstorms, 114 ; Coast Fog Signals, E. Price Edwards, 115 ; Sea Temperature and Shore Climate, 116; Cornish Dust Fall of January, 1902, Dr. H. R. Mill, 119; Wind-Force Experiments on H.M.S. Worcester, 119; Royal Meteorological Society, 119, 215}; Rainfall of Saxony, Dr. G. Hellmann, 136; Increase in the Electrical Conductivity of Air Produced by its Passage through Water, Prof. J. J. Thomson, 143; Radio-active Rain, C. T. R. Wilson, 143; Fall of a Yellow Powder on June 1 and 2 during a Thunderstorm, C. Turner, 157; Curious Effect Produced by Lightning, Dr. Enfield, 158; Remarkable Shower of Hailstones. R. Swordy, 159; the Temperature of Kingston, Jamaica, Maxwell Hall, 159; Effects of Solar Eclipses on the Motion of Air-currents, Luigi de Marchi, 159; Meteorological Conditions Accompanying ‘‘ Fohn”’ and Up- Bank Thaws in Glen Nevis, R. C. Mossman, 167; Meteor- ological Items from Australia, India and South Africa, 183 ; Remarkable Sunsets at Madeira, F. W. T. Krohn, 199, 540; A. R. Tankard, 254 ; the Coloured Sunsets, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 222; J. Edmund Clark, 223 ; Peculiar Appearance at and after Sunset, Dr. C. B. Plowright, 230; A. R. Jenkin, 230; Recent Coloured Sunsets, 254 ; Brilliant Sky Effects at Morges directly after Sunset, F. A. Forel, 278; Height of Sunset Afterglows in June, 1902, Prof. A. S. Herschel, F.R.S., 294; Sunsets of West of Switzerland and Dust from Mont Pelée, 306; Colours between Clouds at Sunset, John Baddeley, 370; Sunset Effects, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 390; S. Pace, 390; Recent Sunset Effects and those which Followed the Eruption of Krakatoa, A. W. Clayden, 659 ; an Attempt to Keproduce an Aurora Borealis, Prof. W. Ramsay, F.R.S., 204; the Term ‘‘ Indian Summer,’ A. Matthews, 205 ; Surface Temperature of the Atlantic during April, 206 ; English Climatology 1891-1900, F. C. Bayard, 215; Rainfall in India, 230, 278; Cold Weather in South Africa, J. R. Sutton, 247; on Some Phenomena which Suggest a Short Period of Solar and Meteorological Changes, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., and William J. S. Lockyer, 248 ; Short Period Solar and Meteorological Varia- tions, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., and Dr. William Lockyer, 456; Death of Abbé Maze, 255; the Drought in Queensland and in New South Wales, 255; Wind Velocity and Fluctuations of Water-level on Lake Erie, Prof. Alfred J. Henry, 256; the Californian Climate, Note on a Statement in the Article on Francis Drake in the Dictionary of National Biography, 256; Death of M. Hervé Faye, 251; Obituary Notice of, 277 ; Storm at Kieff, 305 ; Cyclone at Chalon-sur- Saéne, 305; the Atlantic Ice Record, June and July, 307; on the Correlation between the Barometric Height at Stations on the Eastern Side of the Atlantic, Miss F. E. Cave-Brown-Cave, Karl Pearson, F.R.S., 311; Investigation into the Connection between the Magnetic Currents in the Earth and the Aurora Borealis, Prof. Kr. Birkeland, 328 ; Results of International Balloon Ascents of March 6, 329; Annales de Observatoire National d’Athenes, Démétrius Eginitis, 331 ; Lehrbuch der Meteorologie, Dr. Julius Hann, Dr. W. N. Shaw, F.R.S., 337; Ben Nevis Observatories, Sir Arthur Mitchell, 349; Rainfall of Sicily, 1880-1900, Filippo Eredia, 350; Rainfall in Dominica and St. Vincent, 1900-1, 378; Rainfall of Great Britain, 512; Earthquake of May 28 at the Cape, and Coincident Meteorological Effects, Charles Stewart, 369; Fog Bow at Oxford, J. Rose, 416; Storms in Majorca and Cape Colony, 446 ; Sea Temperature Variations on the British Coasts, 452 ; Snow Waves and Snow Drifts, Dr. Vaughan Cornish, 453; Death of Dr. H. von Wild, 511; Convention of Weather Bureau Officials at Milwaukee, 543; Cyclone on the Eastern Sicilian Coast on September 26, 553; Typhoon at Yokohama on September 29, 553; Cool Summer at Yokohama, Captain H. J. Shaw, 554; Studies in Atmospheric Electricity, Prof. Y. Homma, 555; Death of Dr. Julius Ziegler, 579; the International Meteorological Committee, 608; Series of Meteorological Tables at Truro, G. Penrose, 611 ; the Climates and Baths of Great Britain, 629; Map of Ireland showing Distribution of Rainfall, Dr. Mill, 644; Meteorology of the Equator, Dr. J. Hann, 660 Meteorites ; the Action of Copper Sulphate upon Iron Meteorites, O. C. Farrington, 311 ; Meteorites ploughed up at Admire, Kansas, G. P. Merrill, 422; the Casas Grandes Mass of Meteoric Iron, Mr. Fletcher, 556; Fall of a Meteoric Stone near Crumlin (Co. Antrim) September 13, W. H. Milligan, 577; Dr. L. Fletcher, 577 Meteors: a Remarkable Bolide observed at Lyons on March 19, 208 ; Bright Meteor on July 13, 281, 309; the August Meteoric Shower, W. F. Denning, 309 ; the Perseid Meteoric Shower of 1902, W. F. Denning, 406 ; Radiant Point of the Perseids, Prof. Alexander Graham Bell, 440; a Remarkable Meteor, Archibald MacDougall and W. E. Rolston, 557 ; Meteor Radiants, M. Eginitis, 557; a Possible Meteor Shower on October 4, G. Percy Bailey, 577 ; a Bright Meteor, W. Lascelles-Scott, 638 ; the Leonid Shower, Prof. Pickering, 662; R. B. Taber, 662 Metric System, Chart of the, Prof. C. Bopp, 630 Metric System, Report on a Bill for Adoption of the, in the United States, 158 Metz (G. de), Accidental Double Mechanically Deformed, 192 Meyer (G.), Erdmagnetische Untersuchungung im Kaiserstuhl, Refraction of Liquids 324 Meyer (Dr. M. W.), Der Untergang der Erde und die kosmischen Katastrophen, 601 Miall (L. C., F.R.S.), Injurious and Useful Insects, 293 Micrometer, Electric, Dr. P. E. Shaw, 70 Micrometer, Kew, Sir Joseph Hooker, 348 Microscopy: Distinguishing between Pleurosigma angulatum and P. balticum under Low Powers, G. Marpmann, 39 ; Royal Microscopical Society, 46, 166, 262; M. Pillischer’s Pocket Microscope, 46; ‘‘Soloid” Microscopic Stains, Burroughs, Wellcome, 87 ; Microscopic Effects of Stress on Platinum, Thomas Andrews, F.R.S., and Charles Reginald Andrews, 213; Structure of Acinetines, Prof. Marcus Hartog, 262; Metallography, an Introduction to the Study of the Structure of Metals chiefly by the Aid of the Microscope, Arthur H. Hiorns, 415 ; the Genus Syncheeta, C. F. Rousselet, XXX Index Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 448 ; Relations between the Mouth-organs of Diptera and Those of Other Insects, Walter Wesché, 512~ 13 Midi, les Fleurs du, P. Granger, 368 Miers (Prof. H. A. ¥: Yukon Gold-fields, 86 Miethe (Dr.), Uncomfortable Balloon Voyage, 254 Military Education, Science and, 175 Milk, Apparatus by which, can be Brought into the Form of Flour, 512 Milk Industry, Mechanical Treatment in the, M. F. Bordas and Sig. de Raczkowski, 456 Milk, Influence of Cream Separation on the Principal Con- stituents of, F. Bordas, Sig. de Raczkowski, 432 Mill (Dr. H. R.), Cornish Dust-fall of January, 1902, 1193 Map Showing the Distribution of Rainfall in Ireland, 644 Millais (J. G.), Natural History of the British Surface-feeding Ducks, 266 Miller (Hugh), the, Centenary, 156 Miller (Hugh), his Work and Influence, Sir Archibald Geikie, IDG) Ba WARIS Se eb} s) Miller (Dr.), Ammonia, Nitrates and Chlorine in Rothamsted Rain-water, 22; Nitrates and Chlorine in the Drainage through Uncropped and Unmanured Land, 22 Milligan (W. H.), Fall of a Meteoric Stone near Crumlin (Co. Antrim) September 13, 577 Mills (J. E.), Applications of the Kinetic Theory of Gases, 400 Milne (Prof. J., F.R.S.), the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in the West Indies, 56, 107,151, 370; Recent West Indian Erup- tions and Earthquake-recording Instruments, 619 ; Seismic Frequency in Japan, 202 ; World-shaking Earthquakes, 642 Milwaukee, Convention of Weather Bureau Officials at, 543 Minakata (Kumagusa), Distribution of Pithophora, 279 Mind, the Elements of, H. J. Brooks, 317 Mineral Waters, the Evolution of Artificial, William Kirkby, 602 Mineralogy; Yukon Gold-fields, Prof. H. A. Miers, 86; Mineralogical Constitution of the Finer Material of the Bunter Pebble-bed in the West of England, H. H. Thomas, 95; Catalogue of the Educational Collection of Minerals of West Ham, Dr. H. A. Auden, 137; Flames from Mud on a Sea-shore, Rev. II. T. Dixon, 151 ; Relation of the Plutonic and other Intrusive Rocks in West Cornwall to the Mineral Ores, J. B. Hill, 159 ; Composition of the Volcanic Dust of Barbadoes on May 7 and 8, 204 ; Mineralogical Society, 215 ; Discrepancy in the Results of Meigen’s Method of Dis- criminating Calcite and Aragonite, Dr. A. Hutchinson, 215 ; Reasons for the Non-existence of ‘‘ Kalgoorlite’”’ and ‘‘ Cool- gardite ” as Mineral Species, J. L. Spencer, 215; Crystal- lographic Characters of Liveingite, R. H. Solly, 215; Greenockite on Calcite from Joplin, Missouri, H. B. Corn- wall, 310; Meteorite Ploughed up at Admire, Kansas, G. P. Merrill, 422; Bauxite, Dr. H. Lienau, 539; on the Rocks Thrown Out by the Actual Eruption of Mont Pelée, A Lacroix, 544; Enclosures in the Andesites from Mont Pelée, A. Lacroix, 572; the Casas Grandes Mass of Meteoric Iron, Mr. Fletcher, 556; Fall of a Meteoric Stone near Crumlin (Co. Antrim); September 13, W. H. Milligan, 577; Dr. L. Fletcher, F.R.S., 577; Death of the Rev. Dr. Wiltshire, 658 Mining: the Misuse of Coal, Walter Rosenhain, 29; Prof. J. Perry, F.R.S., 30; W. Hibbert, 102 ; D. E. Hutchins, 246; the Anthracite Coal Industry, Peter Roberts, 50; the Mining Statistics of the World, Prof. C. Le Neve Foster, 163; Coal Cutting by Machinery in the United Kingdom, Sydney F Walker, 414; Persons Employed and Accidents at Mines and Quarries in the United Kingdom in rgor, Prof. C. Le Neve Foster, F.R.S., 449; Death of Prof. O. G. Norden- strom, 538; Gold Production and Life of the Main Reef Series, Witwatersrand, T. H. Leggett and F. H. Hatch, 659 Minot (Prof. C. S.), Address at the Pittsburg Meeting of the American Association, 300 Miquel (P.), Traité de "Bactériologie Pure et Appliquée a la Medicine et 4 Hygiene, 316 Misuse of Coal, the, Walter Rosenhain, 29; Prof. J. Perry, F.R.S., 30; W. Hibbert, 102; D. E. Hutchins, 246 Mitchell (Sir Arthur), Ben Nevis Observatories, 349 Mitchell (P. Chalmers), on the Intestinal Tract of Birds, 235 Modern Scientific Geography, 649 Moidrey (M. de), Phenomena Observed at Zi-Ka-Wei, China, during the Martinique Eruption, 408 Moissan (Henri), Lithium Silicide, 95 ; Liquid Hydride of Silicon, 263; New Properties of Amorphous Silicon, 263 ; Preparation and Properties of a Silicide of Vanadium, 312; Sur les Matiéres Colorantes des Figures de Ja Grotte de Font- de-Gaume, 452 ; a New Silicide of Vanadium, 624; Iodine Pentafluoride, 637 Molloy (Gerald), Stopping Down the Lens of the Human Eye, 6 5) Mollusca : the Structure of the Gills of the Lamellibranchia, Dr. W. G. Ridewood, 165 ; Death and Obituary Notice of Oliver Collett, 328 Mont Pelee, 53, 659 ; Mont Pelée Eruption and Dust Falls, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 53; Fresh Eruptions of, 278; Eruption of Mont Pelée heard at Maracaibo, Venezuela, E. H. Plumacher, 554; Notes on the Recent Eruptions of, Dr. H. A. Alford Nicholls, 638; Mont Pelee and After- glow, F. C. Constable, 79; Sunsets of West of Switzerland and Dust from Mont Pelée, 305; Rocks of Mont Pelée,” J. S. Diller, 372; on the Rocks Thrown Out by the Actual Eruption of Mont Pelée, A. Lacroix, 544 ; Enclosures in the Andesites from, A. Lacroix, 572 Moon: Changes on the Moon’s Surface. Prof. William H. Pickering, 40, 233; Theory of the Motion of the Moon, Ernest W. Brown, F.R.S., 356 Moor (E.), Curious Optical Effect, 127 Moore (Dr. B.), Physiology for HKeginners, Leonard Hill, F.R.S., 369; Health, Speech and Song, a Practical Guide to Voice Production, Jutta Bell-Ranske, 388 Morbology : New Febrile Blood Parasite in Man, J, Everett Dutton, 15; Acute Polymicrobial Osteomylitis, M. Ragalski, 48; Trypanosoma Thetleri, New Parasite in Blood of Cattle in South Africa, 15; Lieut.-Colonel Bruce, F.R.S., 84; Malarial Fever, its Cause, Prevention and Treatment, Ronald Ross, F.R.S., 269 ; Treatment of Malarial Fevers by Latent Arsenic, Armand Gautier, 47; Tuberculosis as a Disease of the Masses and How to Combat it, S. A. Knopf, 270; Death of Prof. Gerhardt, 305; Bats Capable of ‘Transmitting 3ubonic Plague, Dr. B. Gosio, 329; the Bacillus of Beri- beri, Major Rost, 378; the #d/e Played by Flies in the Propagation of Disease, Sir James Crichton Browne, 397 ; Prizes Awarded for Essays on Tropical Diseases, 397 ; the Thermal Death Point of the Tubercle Bacillus in Milk, Bovine Tuberculosis and Milk Supplies, H. L. Russell, 399 ; Screw-worm in Cattle at St. Lucia, Mr. Maxwell-Lefroy, 400; Horse Disease, 423; the Plague in the Punjaub, 484 ; the ‘Sleeping Sickness” of Uganda, 484; Recent Studies of Immunity with Special Reference to their Bearing on Pathology, Prof. Welch, 611 Mordey (W. M.), Electricity Meter, 84 Morel (M. A.), Does Lipase Exist in Normal Serum ? 48 Morgan (J. Livingston R.), the Elements of Physical Chem- istry, 100 Morgan (Prof. Lloyd), Nature-study in Elementary Education, 326 Wisin (M.), Fatal Accident to, 610 Morphology : Morphological Value of the Centrosome, Dr. Th. Boveri, 74 ; the Morphological Method and Progress, Opening «Address in Section D at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, Prof. G. B. Howes, F.R.S., 522; Human Embryology and Morphology, D. A. Keith, 603 Morrell (G. Herbert), Nature Study, Realistic Geography, Model Based on the 6-inch Ordnance Survey, 606 Morrison (W. Murray), Aluminium, Notes on its Production, Properties and Use, 655 Morse (G. H.), Rectifier for Alternating Currents, 328; the Preparation of Cells for the Measurement of High Osmotic Pressures, 401 Morton (Dr. Henry), Death of, 113 Morton (Prof.), Experiments on the Motion of a Detached Thread of Liquid in a Capillary Tube, 618 Mosquitoes: a Monograph of the Culicidee of the World, F. W. Theobald, 123; Paraffin Used to Mitigate the Plague of Mosquitoes in the City of Mexico, Seftor A. L. Herrera, 42 Mossman (R. C.), Meteorological Conditions Accompanying “*Fohn” and Up-bank Thaws in Glen Nevis, 167 Motion of the Pole, Dr. J. C. Chandler, 309 Mott (Dr), on the Regeneration of Nerves, 664 Mount Chullapata, Activity of, 553 | Mount Macedon, Geology of, Prof. J. W. Gregory, 207 Nature, | Dec. 18, 19¢2 Index XXX Mountain Masses and Latitude Determinations, Major S. J. Burrard, 80 Moureaux (Th.), Magnetic Perturbation on May 8, 96 Mud, Flames from, ona Sea-shore, Rev. H. T. Dixon, 151 Muir (Thomas, F.R.S.), Formula for the Perimeter of an Ellipse, 174 Muir (Dr. Thomas, F.R.S.), Symbol for Partial Differentiation, 271, 520 Municipal Engineering and Sanitation, M. M. Baker, 173 Munro (John), Time-signals by Wireless Telegraphy, 416; Murché (Vincent T.), the Teacher’s Manual of Object Lessons in Geography, 270 Murchison Falls, the, C. Steuart Betton, 188 Museums: Catalogue of the Collection of Birds Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322; Guide to the Galleries'‘of Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural History), 322; Guide to the Coral Gallery in the British Museum (Natural History), R. Kirkpatrick and F. J. Bell, 322; F. W. Rudler and the Museum of Practical Geology, 553; on the Classification and Arrangement of Anthropo- logical Museums, Dr. W. H. Holmes, 664 Mushrooms : the Most Effectual Plan for Starting the Germin- ation of Spores of Agaricus campestris, Dr. Margaret C. Ferguson, 612 Mycology: Mycoplasm, E. M. Freeman, 7 ; Fungal Diseases of the Tea-plant, J. B. Curruthers, 136; Rust-fungus, Prof. Marshall Ward, 210 Mycoplasm, E. M. Freeman, 7 Myers (Dr. C. S), Observations in the Smallest Perceptible Musical Tone-difference as Examined in the People of Scotland and of the Torres Straits, 666 Mythology: the Ruling Races of Prehistoric Times in India, South-western Asia and Southern Europe, J. F. Hewitt, 145 ; History and Chronology of the Myth-making Age, J. F. Hewitt, 145; Celtic Mythology, Lady Gregory, 489; Japan- ische Mythologie, Nihongi‘‘ Zeitalter der Gotter,” Dr. Karl Florenz, 546 Nascius (I. C. de), ajla Conquéte du Ciel, 199 Natural History: Linnean Society, 22, 47,94, 263 ; the Sweet Briar as a Goat Exterminator, Sir W. T. Thiselton-Dyer, F.R.S., 31; a Rare Wild Sheep, R. Lydekker, F.R.S., 32; Means ‘Taken by the Different County Councils for Training Teachers in the Best Methods of Imparting ‘‘ Nature-knowledge” to their Pupils, 39 ; Death and Obituary Notice of John Clavell Mansel-Pleydell, 65; Memoirs of the Kazan Society of Naturalists, 70; New South Wales Linnean Society, 96, 264, 312, 384, 516; Death of John Bellows, 113; Chickens Hatched in a Tree, W. I1. Hall, 127 ; Memoir of Dr. C. Berg, Senor A. Gallardo, 184; Nature Study and Life, C. F. Hodge, 245; the Nature Study Exhibition, Wilfred Mark Webb, 324; Nature Study in Elementary Education, Prof. Lloyd Morgan, 326; Nature Study, Lord Avebury, 326; How County Councils may Encourage Nature Siudy, Henry Hobhouse, 326; Realistic Geography Model Based on the 6-inch Ordnance Survey, G. Herbert Morrell, 606 ; Natural History of the British Surface-Feeding Ducks, J. G. Millais, T. Digby Pigott, C.B., 266 ; Spiderland, Rose Haig Thomas, 270; the Lake Counties, W. G. Collingwood, 271 ; Report on the Collections of Natural History Made in the Antarctic Regions during the Voyage of the Southern Cross, R. B. Sharpe and F. J. Bell, 322; Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322; Guide to the Galleries of Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural History), 322; Guide to the Coral Gallery in the British Museum (Natural History), R. Kirk- patrick and F. J. Bell, 322; the Seasonal Study of Natural History, Prof. J. Arthur Thomson, 326; Death and Obituary Notice of Oliver Collett, 228; the late Prof. A. Hyatt, 330; Ilow the Sabre-toothed Tigers Killed their Prey, 357; the Cambridge Natural History, Mammalia, F. E. Beddard, 373 ; the Face of Nature, Rev. C. T. Ovenden, 439; Animal Intelligence, L. C. Hurt, 459; Bipedal Loco- motion of a Ceylonese Lizard, E. Ernest Green, 492; Rose Haig Thomas, 551; Bipedal Locomotion in Lizards, N. An- nandale, 577; W. Saville Kent, 630; the Naturalist on the Thames, C. J. Cornish, 632 ; Upland Game-Birds, E. Sandys and T. S. Van Dyke, 652; Wild Fruits of the Country-side, F. Edward Hulme, F.S.A., 653 Natural Selection: Colour-Variation in the Guinea-Fowl, F. Finn, 126; Material for Natural Selection, Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, 607 Naval Architecture : the Proposed Experimental Tank for Test- ing Ship Models for Resistance. 128; Les Bateaux Sous- Marins et les Submersibles, R. D’Equevilley, 290; Death and Obituary Notice of Benjamin Martell, 305 Neve Balloon Accident, French, Lieutenant Baudic Drowned, 103 Navigation : Meteorological Pilot Chart for May, 15; for June, 114, 206; for August, 307 . for November, 635; the Malay Type of Sea-going Boat, 114 ; Coast Fog Signals, E. Price Edwards, 115 ; Single-handed Dividers, F. Howard Collins, 37 Naylor (W.), Trades’ Waste, its Treatment and Utilisation, 413 Nebula, the Orion, and Movement in the Line of Sight, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 18 Nebulosity, Remarkable Naked Eye, W. H. Robinson, 233 Neelect of Anthropology in British Universities, the, ‘‘ An- thropotamist,” 654 Neal (W. G.), the Ancient Ruins of Rhodesia, 34 Nearer East, the, D. G. Hogarth, 649 ? Negris (Ph.), Plissements et Dislocations de l’Ecorce ‘Terrestre en Grece, 28 Nep'une, the Discovery of, by the late Prof. J. Couch Adams, $4 Neptune, the Search fora Planet beyond, T. Grigull, 614 Nerve, Fatigue and, Prof. Gotch, 666 Nerves, on the Regeneration of, Prof. Halliburton, Dr. Mott, 664 Nevado de Chani, Archzeological Remains on the Summit of the, Dr. Erland Nordenskidld, F.R.S., 440 New South Wales Linnean Society, 96, 264, 312, 384, 516 New South Wales Royal Society, 360, 456, 572 New York Central Railway to be Worked Electrically, D. J. Arnold, 308 New York School Children, Ophthalmia among, 539 New York Zoological Park, 232 Newell (Lyman C.), Experimental Chemistry, 170 Neyroz (Dr. U.), Experimental Investigations on the Depth of Sleep, 137 Niagara Falls Power Plant as a Factor in Engineering Develop- ment, 232 Nicholls (Dr. II. A. Alford), Notes on the Recent Eruptions of Mont Pelée, 638 Niedenfuhr (Mr.), a Comparative Economic Study of the Manufacture of Sulphuric Acid by the Anhydride and the Modern Lead Chamber Processes, 330 Nile, the Black Coloration of the Rocks Forming the Cataracts of the, MM. Lortet and Hugounengq, 95 Nile, the ‘‘Sudd” of the White, 666 Nitrogen, Commercial Fixation of, 135 Noble (Wilson), Mechanical Break, 22 Nodon (M.), New Electric Valve, 159; Actino-electric Phe- nomena, 240 Norddeutschlands, die Heide, P. Graebner, 27 Nordenskiéld (Dr. Erland, F.R.S.), Archaslogical Remains on the Summit of the Nevado de Chani, 440 Nordenstrom (Prof. O. G.), Death of, 535 Nordmann (M.), Propagation of Electric Force from the Sun into Space, 136 North Atlantic Pilot Chart for May, 15; for June, 114, 206 ; for August, 307 ; for November, 635 North Queensland Ethnography, Walter E. Roth, 380 Notation of Variable Stars, 208 Nova Persei, 282 ; Observations of, 233; Discoverer of Nova Persei, 282 ; the Spectrum of Nova Persci. Prof. Campbell and Mr. Wright, 425; the Changes in the Nebula Surround- ing, Prof. Louis Bell, 426 Nugent (Paul C.), Plane Surveying, a Text an:l Reference Book for the Use of Students in Engineering and for Engineers Generally, 243 Nutting (P. G.), the Effect of Light on Cyanin, 416 Oates (E. W.), Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural Hi-tory), 322 Observatories : Meteorological Observations at Stonyhurst Col- Jege Observatory for 1901, 38; Colaba Observatory, 68; the Royal Observatory Visitation, 161 ; Mr. Tebbutt’s Observatory XXXI11 at Windsor, N.S.W., 258; Annales de _ l'Observatoire National d’Athénes, Deémétrius Eginitis, 331; Report of the Cape Observatory for 1901, Sir David Gill, 331; M. Faye and the Paris Observatory, Wilfred de Fonvielle, 343 ; Ben Nevis Observatories, Sir Arthur Mitchell, 349; Report on the Melbourne Observatory for 1901, 541 Oceanography: Cape of Good Hope Department of Agri- culture Marine Investigation in South Africa, Observations on the Temperature and Salinity of the Sea around the Cape Peninsula, J. D. F. Gilchrist, 260 Oceans, a New Theory of the Tides of Terrestrial, Rollin Harris, Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.S., 444 Occultation of W Leonis, 208 Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses, Francis Cranmer Penrose, 149 Oddone (Dr. Emilio), Seismology, Observations on Explosion of Ten Tons of Gunpowder in the Granite Quarries near Baveno, 350 Odone (Prof. E.), Proposed Non-pendulum Forms of Apparatus, 234 Ogawa (Mr.), Preparation of Sulphamide from Ammonium Amido-sulphite, 541 O’Gorman (Mervyn), Schule des Automobil Fahrers, Wolfgang Vogel, 313 Oil, the Use of, as Fuel for Engines, 207 Oil Chemist’s Handbook, the, Erastus Hopkins, 52 Okapi Specimens, the Brussels, Dr. Forsyth Major, 185 Oliver (Dr.), Dangerous Trades, the Historical, Social and Legal Aspects of Industrial Occupations as Affecting Health, 433 Olmsted (F, E.), Working Plans for Forests in Arkansas, 661 Omond (R. T.), a Solar Halo, 103 Omori (Dr. T.), on the Deflection and Vibration of Railway Bridges, 332 Ophir, Rhodesia and, R. N. Hall and W. G. Neal, Prof. A. H. Keane, 34 Ophthalmia among New York School Children, 539 Optics: Obituary Notice of Prof. Alfred Cornu, Prof. Silvanus P. Thompson, F.R.S., 12; Stopping down the Lens of the Human Eye, Wm. Andrews, 31, H. Bliss, 56, Gerald Molloy, 56; the Lens: a Practical Guide to the Choice, Use and Testing of Photographic Objectives, T. Bolas and George E. Brown, 75; a Method of Showing the Invisibility of Trans- parent Objects under Uniform Illumination, Prof. R. W. Wood, 102; Action of Light on Precious Stones, M. Chaumet, 119; Curious Optical Effect, E. Moor, 127; German Progress in Optical Work, Herbert F. Angus at the Optical Society, 138; Contribution to the Study of the Magnesium Light, Albert Londe, 168; Accidental Double Refraction of Liquids Mechanically Deformed, G. de Metz, 192; Einfiihrung in die Theorie der Doppelbrechung, Heinrich Greinacher, 653 ; de la Double Refraction Elliptique et de la Tétraréfringence du Quartz dans le Voisinage de YAxe, G. Quesneville, 386 ; Experiment Illustrating a Para- doxical Consequence of the Wave Theory of Light, Edwin Edser and Edgar Senior, 204; Study of Bright Points and Curves, 208; Contributions to the Study of Flicker, T. C. Porter, 213 ; Actino-electric Phenomena, Albert Nodon, 240; some New Forms of Geodetical Instruments, 276; the Re- fractive Indices of Fluorite, Quartz and Calcite, J. William Gifford, 287 ; Correction, 308; the Structure of the Retina of the Eye, H. M. Bernard, 308 ; Photography of Diffraction and Polarisation Effects, W. B. Crofts, 354; Simple Means of Producing Diffraction Effects, Wilfred Hall, 416 ; Reflec- tion of Light from an Iron Mirror Magnetised Perpen- dicularly to the Plane of Incidence, P. Camman, 384; Novel Magneto-optic Phenomena, Dr. Quirino Majorana, 398 ; Magneto-optical Rotation in the Interior of Absorption Bands, Prof. Zeeman, 622; Application of the Stereoscope to Lantern Projections, J. Macé de Lépinay, 581 Orchids, the Culture of Greenhouse, Frederick Boyle, 59 Ordnance Survey of England and Wales, 341 Organogeny, Avian, on the Intestinal Tract of Birds, P. Chalmers Mitchell, 235 Organography: Organographie der Pflanzen insbesondere der Archegoniaten und Samenpflanzen, Dr. K. Goebel, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 51 Orion Nebula and Movement in the Line of Sight, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 18 L[ndex Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Orion Nebula, Radial Velocity of the, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 309 Ornithology: More Tales of the Birds, W. W. Fowler, 4; Bird Hunting on the White Nile, H. F. Witherby, 52; the Birds of North and Middle America, the Fringillide, R. Ridgway, 75; Chickens Hatched in a Tree, W. H. Hall, 127 ; Cuckoo’s Egg thrown out of Bunting’s Nest, 151; Cuckoo heard on August 18, Mrs. R. W. Longfield, 421 ; the Early Life of the Young Cuckoo, W. P. Westell, 574; Colour Variation in Pigeons, F. Finn, 157; Recent Egg- sale prices, 160; Bird-Migration observed from the Eddy- stone, W. E. Clarke, 185; on the Intestinal Tract of Birds, P. Chalmers Mitchell, 235; Osteology of the Owls, W. P. Pycraft, 263 ; Natural History of the British Surface-feeding Ducks, J. G. Millais, T. Digby Pigott, C.B., 266; Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322; Notes on Young Gulls, Prof. R. vy. Lendenfeld, 415; Birds in the Garden, G. Sharp, 444; Effect of Wind on the Migration of Hawks, C. C. Trowbridge, 612 Orton (Dr.), Preparation of Highly Substituted Nitroamino Benzenes, 70 Osborn (Prof. H. F.), Law of Adaptive Radiation among Mammals, 184; the Eocene Primates and Rodents of North America, 379; the Titanotheres of the Oligocene, 399; the Morphological Importance of Length or Shortness in the Skulls of Mammals, 399 Osborne (Dr.), Researches on Glycogen, 666 Oscillographs, the Study of Resonance by Means of, M. Armagnat, 307 Ostenfeld (C. H.), Flora Arctica, 490 Osteology of the Owls, W. P. Pycraft, 263 Ostfriesischen Inseln, Flora der, Dr. Fr. Buchanau, 149 Outer Isles, A. Goodrich-Freer, 548 Ovenden (Rev. C. T.), the Face of Nature, 439 Owls, Osteology of the, W. P. Pycraft, 263 Oxford, the Rise of the Experimental Sciences at, Boyle Lecture at Oxford, Prof. T. Clifford Allbutt, F.R.S., 90; Fog Bow at Oxford, J. Rose, 416 Oxy-acetylene Blowpipe, M. Fouché, 159 Oysters from Syria, Remarkable Fossil, Alfred Ely Day, 606 ; B. Tf. N:, (607 : Pace (S.), Sunset Effects, 390 Pachundaki (D. E.), Geological Constitution of the Neighbour- hood of Alexandria, Egypt, 648 / Packard (Alpheus S.), Lamarck, the Founder of Evolution, his Life and Work, 169 Pailheret (F.), Action of Alcoholic Fermentation on the Bacillus typhosus and the Bactllus colt, 384 Palzobotany: on Fossil Pollens, &c., in the Coal-measures, B. Renault, 432; /atophyllum rotundifiorum, a Synonym of Neuropteris rarinervis, E. H. Sellards, 571, 572 Palzolithics : Paleolithic Implements in Ipswich, Nina Frances Layard, 77; Reproduction des Figures paléolithiques peintes sur les parois de la Grotte de Font-de-Gaume, Dordogne, Mm. Capitan and Breuil, 452; sur les Maticres colorantes des Figures de la Grotte de Font-de-Gaume, Henri Moissan, 452; les Figurations préhistoriques de la Grotte de la Mouthe, Dordogne, Emile Riviere, 452 , } Paleontology: Death of Henri Filhol, 14; Obituary Notice of, 133; a New Type of Human Fossil, R. Verneau, 24 ; New Fossil Mammals and Reptiles from Egypt, 83; Specimens Discovered in 1901 in Crete by Mr. Hogarth, 95 ; Palzontologie und Descendenzlehre, E. Koken, 126; Structure and Classification of the Tremataspide, Prof. William Patten, 184; the Iguanodons of Bernissart, L. F. de Pauw and Prof. van den Broeck, 231 ; History of Geology and Paleontology to the End of the Nineteenth Century, Karl Alfred von Zittel, 242; the Eocene Primates and Rodents of North America, Prof. H. F. Osborn, 379; the Titanotheres of the Oligocene, Prof. Osborn, 399; New Pleistocene Rhinoceros, Prof. F. Toula, 379; Corr., 399; Belly River Dinosaurs, Mr. Lambe, 400 Palestine: Legends of Palestine and Arabia, 517; on a Pre- historic Cemetery-cave in, R. A. S. Macalister, 663 Papuan Gulf, on the Religious Ideas of the Elema Tribe of the, Rev. J. H. Holmes, 664 ae eT ce Se: Nature, } Dec, 18, 1902 L[ndex XXXII Papuan Gulf, on the Sacred Initiation Ceremonies Undergone by the Lads of the, Rev. J. H. Holmes, 664 Parallels, a Method of Treating, Dr. S. W. Richardson, 223 ; W. R. Jamieson, 576 Parel (Very Rev. G.), Last Days of St. Pierre, 372 Parhelion, Sun-Pillar and, Prof. Grenville A. J. Cole, 32 Paris: Paris Academy of Sciences, 23, 47, 71, 95, 119, 143, 167, 192, 216, 240, 263, 288, 312, 335, 360, 383, 408, 432, 456, 488, 516, 544, 572, 623. 648, 671; Paris Geographical Society’s Prizes for this Year, 135; Forestry Exhibition in Paris in 1900, J. S. Gamble, F.R.S., 283 ; M. Faye and the Paris Observatory, Wilfred de Fonvielle, 343 Parks (G. J.), Heat Evolved or Absorbed when a Liquid is Brought in Contact with a Finely Divided Solid, 262 Parsons (Hon. C. A.), Steam Turbines, 643 Parsons (J.), Evidence of a ‘‘Seiche” ona Scottish Loch, 192 Partial Differentiation, Symbol for, Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., 53, 271, 520; Dr. Thomas Muir, 271, 520; A. B. Basset, F.R.S., 576 Pasteur, Statue to, at Déle, 377 Patagonia, the Larger Mammals of, Hesketh Prichard, 46 Pathology: Some Thoughts on the Principles of Local Treat- ment in Diseases of the Upper Air Passages, Sir Felix Semon, 149; Pathologie Générale et Expérimentale, Les Processus Généraux, A. Chantemesse and W. W. Podwyssotsky, 363 ; Death of Prof. Rudolph Ludwig Karl Virchow, 483 ; Obituary Notice of, 551; Recent Studies of Immunity with Special Reference to their Bearing on Pathology, Prof. Welch, 611 Paton (Lewis Bales), Syria and Palestine, 517 Patten (Prof. William), Structure and Classification of the Tremataspidz, 184 Patterson (Dr. J. Hume), on the Causes of Salmon Disease, 640 Patterson (Dr. T. S.), Influence of Solvents on the Rotation of Optically Active Compounds, 191 Pau, Earthquake at, 484 Pauw (L. F. de), the Iguanodons of Bernissart, 231 Pax (F.), Grundziige d. Pflanzenverbreit i. d. Karpathen, 27 Pearl Fisheries in the Gulf of Manaar, Prof. Herdman, 486 Pearson (Prof. Karl, F.R.S.), Astronomy in the University of London, 174; on the Correlation between the Barometric Height at Stations on the Eastern Side of the Atlantic, 311 ee (William Henry), the Hepaticz of the British Isles, 355 Peary Arctic Expedition, Return of the, 542 Peat, Use of, in Sweden as a Substitute for Coal for Steam Engines, 256 Pechmann (Prof. H. von), Death and Obituary Noticg of, 37 Pécoul (M.), Quantitative Examination of Atmospheric Air, 308 Peddie (Dr. W.), Use of Quaternions in the Theory of Screws, 239 Pendulum, the Compound, S. A. F. White, 22 Penning (William Henry), Death and Obituary Notice of, 15 Pennsylvania, Anthracite Mining in, Peter Roberts, 50 Penrose (Francis Cranmer), Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses, 149 Penrose (G.), Series of Meteorological Tables at Truro, 611 Perimeter of an Ellipse, Formula for the, Thomas Muir, F.R.S., 174 Perkin (A. G.), Constituents of Gambia and Acacia Catechus, 214 Perkin (Dr. F. Mollwo), Enzymes and their Applications, J. Effront, 197; the Influence of Education upon Trade and Industry, 442; Trade Statistics, 550 Perkin (W. H., jun.), an Introduction to Chemistry and Physics, 52 Perkins (H. F.), Degeneration-process in Larval Ccelenterates of the Genus Gonionema, 612 Perrine (Prof.), Search for an Intra-Mercurial Planet during the Total Solar Eclipse of 1901, 662 Perrine, Photograph of Comet 4 1902, 638 Perrine’s Comet 1902 4, Observations of, 558 Perrot (E.), Aznheliba, 120 Perrot (F. Louis), on the Formation of Liquid Drops and the Laws of Tate, 544, 672 Perry (Prof. J., F.R.S.), the Misuse of Coal, 30; Symbol for Partial Differentiation, 53, 271, 520; Opening Address in Section G at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 530; the Training of Engineers, 644; Science and Literature, 645 5 Matriculation Requirements in Scottish Universities, 54 Persei, Nova, 282 ; Observations of, 233; Discoverer of Nova Persei, 282 ; Spectrum of, Prof. Campbell and Mr. Wright, 425; the Changes in the Nebula Surrounding Nova Persei, Prof. Lewis Bell, 426 Perseids: Photographs of the, in 1901, 309; Perseid Meteoric Shower of 1902, the, W. F. Denning, 406 ; Radiant Point of the Perseids, Prof. Alexander Graham Bell, 440 Persia, Ten Thousand Miles in, or, Eight Years in Iran, Major Percy Molesworth Sykes, 418 Persulphuric Acids, Prof. Henry E. Armstrong, V.P.R.S., and J. Martin Lowry, 45 Petavel (Mr.), on the Production of a Standard Light, 618 Petch (T.), Rearrangement of Euclid i., 1-32, 7 Petroleum Districts, Spring Waters from, Contain no Sulphates, Prof. Hofer, 256 Petroleum Formation, Chemical Theory of, Paul Sabatier and J. B. Senderens, 138 Pharmacology: Pharmacology at the British Medical Associa- tion,353; Factors which Tend to Render Medicines Ineffective or Productive of Unusual Effects, Sir Lauder Brunton, 353 ; Therapeutic Value of Alkaline Waters of the Vichy Type, Prof. Liebreich, 353 ; Synthetic Purgatives, Prof. Tunnicliffe, 3533 Therapeutic Value of Arsenic, Dr. Ralph Stockman, 353 Philadelphia, Report of the Zoological Society of, 159 Phillips (Theodore), a Dark Spot on Jupiter, 4or Phillips (W. B ), the Coal, Lignite and Asphalt Rocks of Texas, 379 Philosophy : the Basis of Social Relations, D. G. Brinton, 221 ; the Criterion of Scientific Truth, G. Shann, 221; Die Philosophie August Comte’s, L. Levy Bruhl, 369 ; Philosophy of Conduct, G. T. Ladd, 389; Death of Prof. J. J. Hummel, 511; Helmholtz on the Value of the Study of Philosophy, B. Branford, 550 Phisalix (C.), Poison of the Toad, 288 Phosphorus versus Lime in Plant Ash, Dr. P. Q. Keegan, 655 Photography : Photographic Apparatus, Making and Repairing, F. W. Cooper and D. W. Gawn, 4; the Lens, a Practical Guide to the Choice, Use and Testing of Photographic Objectives, T. Bolas and George E. Brown, 75; New Fluid Lens, Dr. E. F. Griin, 135 ; Stereoscopic Method of Photo- graphic Surveying, H. G. Fourcade at the South African Philosophical Society, 139; Employment of Urine in the Development of the Photographic Plate, R. A, Reiss, 144; Photography as an Aid to the Surveyor, Arthur O, Wheeler, 206; Photography as Applied to Architectural Measurement and Surveying, J. Bridges Lee at Society of Arts, 235 ; Dis- tribution of the Stars in the Cape Photographic Durch- musterung, Dr. Downing, 238; Reduction of Measures of Swif’s Comet (a 1899) from Photographs taken with a Portrait Lens of 30-inch Focus and 5-inch Aperture, Mr. Filon, 238 ; Reductions of Photographs of Eros for the De- termination of Solar Parallax, Mr. Hinks, 238; Influence of the Photographic Magnitude of Stars upon the Scale of Re- duction of a: Negative, Prosper Henry, 240; Photographic Magnitude of Stars, Prosper Henry, 282; Photographs of the Perseids in 1901, 309; Photograph of Comet 4 1902 (Perrine), 638; the Watkins Manual of (Photographic) Ex- posure and Development, Alfred Watkins, 245; ‘‘Cooke”’ Photographic Lenses, Method by which the Focal Length may be Reduced, Messrs. Taylor and Co., 280; Photography of Diffraction and Polarisation Effects, W. B. Croft, 354; the Dictionary of Photography, E. J. Wall, 368; the Prin- ciples of Simple Photography, F. W. Sparrow, 389; Birds in the Garden, G. Sharp, 444; P.O.P. (the Use of Silver Printing-out Papers), A. Horsley Hinton, 519; the Scientific and Technical Exhibits at the Royal Photographic Society’s Exhibition, 582; Parallax Stereogram, F. E. Ives, 582; Photograph of the Spectrum of the Arc Light, Edgar Senior, 582 j Method of Copying Engravings by Superposition, Hot Player, 582 Photometric Tests of the Bremer Arc Lamp, M. Laporte and Prof. Wedding, 611 Physic Garden, the Chelsea, 321 Physical Geography, Margaret A. Reid, 653 Physics : a Laboratory Manual of Physics, H. Crew and R. R. Tatnall, 4; Physical Society, 21, 70, 118, 262; Prisms and Plates for Showing Dichromatism, Prof. R. W. Wood, 31 ; Interference of Sound, the Right Hon. Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S., at the Royal Institution, 42; the Indices of XXXIV L[ndex Refraction of Liquid Mixtures, Edm, van Aubel, 47 ; Mathe- matical and Physical Papers, Sir G. G. Stokes, Prof. Horace Lamb, F.R.S., 49; an Introduction to Chemistry and Physics, W. H. Perkin, jun., and Bevan Lean, 52; the Kinetic Theory of Planetary Atmospheres, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 54; Dr. E. Rogovsky, 222; Applications of the Kinetic Theory of Gases, J. E. Mills, 400; a Conse- quence of the Kinetic Theory of Diffusion, J. Thovert, 648 ; Electric Micrometer, Dr. P. E. Shaw, 70; Experiment Suggested by the late Prof. Fitzgerald for Testing the Relative Motion of the Earth and the Azther, Prof. F. T. Trouton, 66; Atoms and Valencies, J. Fraser, 68; Film Structures in Metals, George Beilby, 84; the Elements of Physical Chemistry, J. Livingston R. Morgan, 100; Harry C. Jones, 220; Ebullition of Rotatory Water, J. C. Porter, 118; Physical Properties of Hydrogen Telluride, MM. de Forcrand and Fonzes-Diacon, 144; on the Sensitiveness of the Coherer, E. R. Wolcott, 158; Accuracy of an Improved Form of Silver Voltameter, T. W. Richards and G. W. Heimrod, 158; Dispersive Power of Running Water on Skeletons, W. L. H. Duckworth, 166; Sedimentation Ex- periments and Theories, Prof. Joly, 207 ; Matter and Motion in Space, Sir Hiram S. Maxim, 223; Heat Evolved or Absorbed when a Liquid is brought in Contact with a Finely Divided Solid, G. J. Parks, 262; the Structure of the Retina -of the Eye, H. M. Bernard, 308 ; Scientific Memoirs, 315; Junior Chemistry and Physics, H. Jerome Harrison, 317; a Manual of Elementary Practical Physics, Julius Hortvet, 341 ; the Royal Prize of the Reale Accademia dei Lincei for Physics awarded to Prof. Cantone, 377; a Text-book of Physics, with Sections on the Applications of Physics to Physiology and Medicine, R. A. Lehfeldt, 387 ; Die Weltherrin und ihr Schatten, Ein Vortrag iiber Energie und Entropie, Dr. Felix Auerbach, 414 ; Elements of Physics, C. Henderson and John F. Woodhull, 458 ; Physical Experiments, John F. Woodhull and M. B. van Arsdale, 458 ; on the Use of Fourier’s Series in the Problem of the Transverse Vibrations of Stretched Strings, Dr. H. S. Carslaw, 485 ; Sichtbare und Unsichtbare Beweg- ungen, H. A. Lorentz, 489 ; the Formation of Liquid Drops and Tate’s Laws, Ph. A. Guye and F. Louis Perrot, 544, 672 ; a Text-book for Secondary Schools, Prof. Frederick Slate, 575; Refractivities of the Inert Gases, Clive Cuthbertson, 607 ; Redetermination of the Density and Coefficient of Cubical Expansion of Ice at o° C., J. H. Vincent, 611 ; Vortex Spirals, Dr. J. Larmor, F.R.S., 630; Elastic Parameters of Silk Fibres, F. Beaulard, 672 Physiology: Does Lipase Exist in Normal Serum ? MM. Doyon and A. Morel, 48; Zymogens and Enzymes of the Pancreas, Dr. H. M. Vernon, 87; Das Eisen als das thatige Prinzip der Enzyme und der lebendigen Substanz, N. Sacharoff, 651 ; the Electrical Resistance of the Blood, Dr. Dawson Turner, 127 ; Chemistry of Respiration in Bacteria, Dr. W. E. Adeney, 167 ; Directions for Class Work in Practical Physiology, E. A. Schafer, F.R.S., 100 ; Influence of Lecithin on the Develop- ment of the Skeleton and of Nervous Tissue, A. Desgrez and Aly Zaky, 120; Biochemical Action of Extract of Kidney on Certain Organic Compounds, E. Gérard, 144 ; Obituary Notice of Prof, Adolf Fick, Prof. Kunkel, 180; Arsenic as a Normal Constituent of Animals, Armand Gautier, 216; Arsenic in the Organism, Gabriel Bertrand, 216; Production of Glycose by the Muscles, MM. Cadéac and Maignon, 216; Spectrum of Hemoglobin, L. Bier and L. Marchlewski, 230 ; Comparative Study of the Permeability of Living and Dead Animal Mem- branes by Measurement of the Electrolytic Resistance, G. Galeotti, 256; Influence of Choline on the Glandular Secre- tions, A. Desgrez, 288; Coccidia found in the Kidney of Rana esculenta, A. Laveran and F. Mesnil, 312; Experi- mental Observations on Leucolysis, Drs. A. Goodal and E. Ewart, 335; on the Existence in the Albumin of Birds’ Eggs of a Fibrogen Substance Capable of being Transformed zz vitro into Pseudo-organised Membranes, Armand Gautier, 335; Anesthesia by Electric Currents, Stephane Leduc, 336; Mannite, the Nitrates and the Alkaloids of Normal Urine, S. Dombrowski, 360; Physiology for Beginners, Leonard Hill, F.R.S., Dr. B. Moore, 369; Antiparamcecious Serum, M. Ledoux-Lebard, 384; Variation of the Phosphoric Acid in Cow’s Milk with Time after Calving, H. Bordas and Sig. de Raczkowski, 384 ; a Text-book of Physics, with Sections on the Applications of Physics to Physiology and Medicine, R. A. Lehfeldt, 387; Health, Speech and Song, a Practical Guide Nature, Dec. 18, 1302 to Voice Production, Jutta Bell-Ranske, Dr. B. Moore, 388 ; the Conservation of Muscular Potential in an Atmosphere of Carbon Dioxide, Lhotak de Lhota, 432; on Skin Currents, Part iii., the Human Skin, Augustus D, Waller, F.R.S., 455; Religio Medici, &c., 457; Plant Physiology: Elementary Plant Physiolegy, D. ‘Il. Macdougal, 76; Ueber Aehnlich- keiten im Pflanzenreich, Prof. F. Hildebrand, 246; the In- fluence of Varying Amounts of Carbon Dioxide in the Air on the Photo-synthetic process of Leaves and on the Mode and Growth of Plants, Dr. Horace T. Brown, F.R.S., and F. Escombe, 620 Picard (Emile), Quelques Réflexions sur la Mécanique suivies d’une premiére Lecon de Dynamique, 101 Pickering (Prof. William H.), Changes on the Moon’s Surface, 40; Catalogue of North Polar Stars, 88; Changes on the Moon, 333; Observations of Variable Stars of Long Period, 486; the Lick Photographs, 487; the Leonid Shower, 662 Pierce (Arthur Henry), Studies in Auditory and Visual Space Perception, 73 Pigeons, Colour Variation in, F. Finn, 157 Pigott (T. Digby, C.B.), Natural History of the British Surface- feeding Ducks, J. G. Millais, 266 Pillischar’s (M.) Pocket Microscope, 46 Pilot Chart of the North Atlantic and Mediterranean for May, 15; for June, 114, 206; for August, 307; for November, 635 Pines of Western Asia, the, Sir J. D. Hooker, F.R.S., 53; the Writer of the Note, 53 Pisciculture : Pisciculture in the United States, America, Earl Gray, 65; Introduction into New South Wales of European Flat-fishes, 580 Pithophora, Distribution of, Kumagusu Minakata, 279; Prof. G. S. West, 296 Pittet (H.), Etude Pratique sur les Differents Systemes d’Eclairage, 172 Pittsburg Meeting of the American Association, 299; Address by Prof. C S. Minot, 300 Piutti (A.), Products of Catalpa Fruit, 87 Plague : the Plague in the Punjab, 484 Plane Surveying : a Text and Reference Book for the Use of Students in Engineering and for Engineers Generally, Paul C. Nugent, Major C. F. Close, 243 Planets: Discovery of Neptune by the late Prof. J. Couch Adams, F.R.S., 84 ; the Search for a Planet beyond Neptune, T. Grigull, 614; Saturn Visible through the Cassini Division, C. T. Whitmell, 87, 296; Minor Planets, 353; Satellites of Saturn and Uranus, Prof. J. J. See, 380 ; Spectral Researches on the Rotation of the Planet Uranus, H. Deslandres, 572 ; New Minor Planets, Prof. Max Wolf, 542; a New Minor Planet, 614; Rotation Period of the Superior Planets, M. Deslandres, 380; Equatorial Current on Jupiter, W. F. Denning, 138; a Dark Spot on Jupiter, Theodore Phillips, 401; Leo Brenner, 487; the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, Prof. Barnard, 662; the Kinetic Theory of Planetary Atmospheres, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 54; Dr. E. Rogovsky, 222; Search for an Intra-Mercurial Planet during the Total Solar Eclipse of 1901, Prof. Perrine, 662 Plant Ash, Phosphorus versus Lime in, Dr. P. Q. Keegan, 655 Plant Assimilation, Influence of Light upon, E. G. Hennesey, 103 Plant Physiology : Elementary Plant Physiology, D. T. Mac- dougal, 76; Ueber Aehnlichkeiten im Pflanzenreich, Prof. F. Hildebrand, 246; the Influence of Varying Amounts of Carbon Dioxide in the Air on the Photosynthetic Process of Leaves and on the Mode of Growth of Plants, Dr. Horace T. Brown, F.R.S., and F. Escombe at the Royal Society, 620 Plants: Studies in the Distribution of Plants, 27 ; Decorative Plants for Gardens, Dr. Nicola Terraciano, 36; a Tentative List of the Flowering Plants and Ferns for the County of Cornwall, including the Scilly Isles, F. H. Davey, 547 Platinum, Microscopic Effects of Stress on, Thomas Andrews, F.R.S., and Charles Reginald Andrews, 213 Platinum, a Note on the Recrystallisation of, Walter Rosenhain, 262 Player (Hort), Method of Copying Engravings by Superposition, 82 Pliocene Glacio-fluviatile Conglomerates in Subalpine France and Switzerland, Charles S. Du Riche Preller, 166 Nalure, } Dec. 18, 1902 Index XXXV Plissements et Dislocations de I’Ecorce Terrestre en Gréce, Ph. Negris, 28 Plowman (A. B.), Relations of Plant Growth to Ionisation of the Soil, 408 Plowright (Dr. C. B.), Peculiar Appearance at and after Sun- set, 230 Plumacher (E. H.), Eruption of Mont Pelée Heard at Mara- caibo, Venezuela, 554 Plumb-line, the Attractions of the Himalaya Mountains upon the, in India, Major S. G. Burrard, 80 Podwyssotsky (W. W.), Pathologie Générale et Expérimentale, les Processus Généraux, 363 Poisonous Fodder-plants and Oriental Drug Plants, Prof. Wyndham R. Dunstan, F.R.S., 83 Poisson (Jules), (zerminative Duration of Seeds, 408 Polis (Dr. P.), the Daily Period of Rainfall, 86 Pollution, River, Trades’ Waste and, W. Naylor, 413 Polynesian Politics and Anthropology, E. Sidney Hartland, 347 P. O. P. (the Use of Silver Printing-out Papers), A. Horsley Hinton, 519 Porter (Mr.), Origin of the Valleys of County Cork, 642 Porter (Rev. T. C.), a Remarkable Solar Halo, 76; Volcanic Dust from the West Indies, 131; the Halos of May 1, 8 and 22, 223 Porter (T. C.), Ebullition of Rotating Water, 118; Contribu- tions to the Study of Flicker, 213 Potato Beetle at Tilbury, Colorado, 134 Potter (M. C.), on the Parasitism of Pseudomonas destructans (Potter), 238 Powell (J. W.), Death of, 553 Praeger (R. Lloyd), Post-Glacial Deposits of the Belfast Dis- tricts, 619 ; on Geographical Plant Groups in the Irish Flora, 642 Prain (David), Notes on Indigofera, 21 Prasad (Dr. Ganish), Use of Fourier’s Series in Theory of Con- duction of Heat, 71 Pratt (Henry Sherring), a Course in Invertebrate Zoology, 292 Preece (Sir William), on the Future of the Telephone in the United Kingdom, 644; the Training of Engineers, 645 Prehistoric Flint Mine at High Wycombe, 610 Prehistoric Man in Burma, R. C. J. Swinhoe, 541 Prehistoric Pigmies in Silesia, David MacRitchie, 151 Prehistoric Times, the Ruling Races of, in India, South-western Asia and Southern Europe, J. F. Hewitt, 145 Preller (Charles S. Du Riche), Pliocene Glacio-fluviatile Con- glomerates in Subalpine France and Switzerland, 166 Prentice (Dr.), Influence of Acidic Oxides on Specific Rotations of Lactic Acid and Potassium Lactate, 22 Prichard (Hesketh), the Larger Mammals of Patagonia, 46 Primrose and Darwinism, the, 409, 575; the Writer of the Review, 575 Princesse Alice, Hydrographical Observations of the, J. Y. Buchanan, F.R.S., 376 Prisms and Plates for Showing Dichromatism. Prof. R. W. Wood, 31 Prize Awards of the Société d’Encouragement pour |’Industrie Nationale for Research Work bearing on Industry, 447 Prize Subjects, Belgian Royal Academy, 113 Probability: Probabilités et Moyennes Géometriques, Emmanuel Czuber, 652 ; Philosophical Essay on Probabilities, Pierre Simon Marquis de Laplace, 652 Propylene, Addition of Hypochlorous Acid to. Louis Henry, 72 Protista, the Study of the, 627 Protistenkunde, Archiv. fiir, 627 Protezione degli Animali, la, N. Lico, 414 Protozoa, the Foraminifera, an Introduction to the Study of the, Frederick Chapman, 196 Psychology: a Text-book of Insanity, Charles Mercier, 5; Experimental Investigations on the Depth of Sleep, Drs. Sante de Sanctis and W. Neyroz, 137; the Elements of Mind, H. J. Brooks, 317; Psychology of Primitive Man, Miss A. Amy Bulley, 664 Public Schools, Science in the, Rev. Dr. A. Irving, 459 Pugsley (Mr.), the British ‘‘ Capreolate”” Fumitories, 118 Punjab, the Plague in the, 484 Purdie (Prof. T., F.R.S.), on the Alkylation of Sugars, 662 Purser (Prof. John, M.A., LL.D., M.R.ILA.), Opening Address in Section A at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 478 Pycraft (W. P.), Osteology of the Owls, 263 Pygmies in Silesia, Prehistoric, David MacRitchie, 151 Quartz, Fusion of, in the Electric Furnace, R. S. Hutton, 66 Quartz, De la Double Refraction Elliptique et de la Tetra- réfringence du, dans le Voisinage de |’Axe, G. Quesneville, 386 Quaternion Integrals Depending on Variable, Prof. Chas. J. Joly, 47 Quesneville (G.), De la Double Refraction Elliptique et de la Tetraréfringence du Quartz dans le Voisinage de l’Axe, 386 a Single Quaternion Rabl (Carl), Die Entwicklung des Gesichtes, Tafeln zur Ent- wicklungsgeschichte der aeusseren Koerperform der Wiibel- thiere. Part i. Das Gesicht der Saeugethiere, 368 Raczkowski (Sig. de), Wariation of the Phosphoric Acid in Cow’s Milk with Time after Calving, 384; Influence of Cream Separation on the Principal Constituents of Milk, 432; Mechanical Treatment in the Milk Industry, 456 Radde (Dr. Gustave), Griindzuge d. Pflanzenverbreit i. d. Kaukasuslandern, von der unteren Wolga ueb, d. Manytsch- Schneider bis z. Scheitelflache Hocharmeniens, 27 Radial Velocity of the Orion Nebula, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 309 Radiography: Radio-activity, Dr. P. Vignon’s Researches and. the Holy Shroud, 13 ; Radio-activity of Uranium, Mr. Soddy, 119; Radio-activity of Thorium Compounds, Prof. Ruther- ford and Mr. Soddy, 119; Portable Rontgen-ray Outfit, Rosenberg and Co., 136; Action of X-rays on very Small Electric Sparks, R. Blondlot, 263 ; Precautions Necessary in the Use of Ruhmkorff Coils in Radiography, MM. Infroit and Gaiffe, 264 ; Method for Obtaining a Rontgen Photograph of an Internal Part of the Living Body During the Peiform- ance of a Definite Functional Movement, Dr. P. H. Eykman, 307; Penetrating Rays from Radio-active Substances, Prof E. Rutherford, 318; the Mode of Formation of Kathode and Rontgen Rays, Th. Tommasina, 408 ; the Réntgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Thera peutic Agent, Francis 11. Williams, 438; a Coin-controlled X-ray Machine for Public Use, 512 Ragalski (M.), Acute Polymicrobial Osteomylitis, 48 Railways: New High-speed Record on the Burlington and Missouri Railroad, 184; Liquid Fuel for Steam Purposes, J. S. S. Brame, 186; the Inspection of Railway Materials, G. R. Bodmer, 244; the Electrification of London, 296; on the Deflection and Vibration of Railway Bridges, Dr. F. Omori, 332; New York Central Railway to be worked Electrically, D. J. Amold, 398; Lake Como Electric Rail- way, 484; Aérial Luggage Transmitter at Woking Junction, 55) Rain, Radio-active, C. T. R. Wilson, 143 Rainfall, the Daily Period of, Dr. P. Polis, 86; Rainfall of Saxony, Dr. G. Hellman, 136 ; Rainfall in India, 230 ; Rain- fallin Dominica and St. Vincent, 1900-1, 378; the Rainfall of Great Britain, 512; Map of Ireland Showing Distribu- tion of Rainfall, Dr. Mill, 644 Ramage (Hugh), the Spectra of Potassium, Rubidium and Cesium and their Mutual Relations, 214 Ramsey (Prof. W., F.R.S.), an Attempt to Reproduce an Aurora Borealis, 204 Range-finder, a New, Experiences in South Africa with, Prof. G. Forbes, 645 Raworth (J. S.), the Smokeless Combustion of Bituminous Fuel, 64 Ray Dr. P. C.), Dimercurammonium Nitrate and its Haloid Derivatives, 22 Rayleigh (Right Hon. Lord, F.R.S.), Interference of Sound, Lecture at the Royal Institution, 42 ; Does Chemical Trans- formation Influence Weight ? 58; Accurate Conservation of Weight in Chemical Reactions, 618 ; Experiments to Deter- mine whether Double Refraction was Produced in Isotropic Transparent Bodies by their Motion through the Ether, 618 Reade (T. Mellard), Glacial and Post-Glacial Features of the River Lune and its Estuary, 540; a Recent Peat and Forest Bed at Westbury-on-Severn, 540 Rearrangement of Euclid i., 1-325 T. PRetch, 7; J. M. Child, - : Revoara (A.), Action of Hydrochloric Acid upon Sulphates of Aluminium, Chromium and Iron, 336 XXXVi Refraction of Liquid Mixtures, the Indices of, Edm. van Aubel, 47 Retractivities of the Inert Gases, Clive Cuthbertson, 607 Regeneration in Plants, 379; Prof. Goebel, 514 Reid (Clement), Geology of the Hampshire Basin, 486 Reid (Margery A.), Physical Geography, 653 Reiss (R. A.), Employment of Urine in the Development of the Photographic Plate, 144 Relations Between Metallurgy and Engineering, the, ‘‘ James Forrest ” Lecture at Institution of Civil Engineers, Sir. W. C. Roberts-Austen, K.C.B., F.R.S., 18 Religio Medici, &c., 457 Religion, the Keal Origin of, Jabelon, 491 Remarkable Sunsets at Madeira, F. W. T. Krohn, 199; A. R. Tankard, 254; see a/so Sunsets. ’ Renault (B.), on Fossil Pollens, &c. in the Coal-measures, 432 Resultant Tones and the Harmonic Series, Prof. Silvanus P. Thompson, F.R.S., 6; Margaret Dickens, 78 Retention of Leaves by Deciduous Trees, 56, 344; Jul. Wulff, 32; Wm. Gee, 32; G. W. Bulman, 56; P. T., 56; Prof. W. R. Fisher, 370; Dr. D. T. Smith, 631 Retina, on the Distribution in the, of the Photo-sensitive Pig- ment, the Visual Purple, Dr. Edridge Green, 666 Return of the Arctic Expeditions, 542 REVIEWS AND OuR BooKksHELY :— Manual of Alcoholic Fermentation and the Allied Industries, Charles G. Matthews, 1 Materialen zur Naturgeschichte der Insel Celebes Entwurf einer Geographisch-geologischen Beschreibung der Insel Celebes, Dr. Paul Sarasin and Dr. Fritz Sarasin, 3 More Tales of the Birds, W. W. Fowler, 4 College Algebra, L. E. Dickson, 4 A Laboratory Manual of Physics, H. Crewand R. R. Tatnall, 4 Photographic Apparatus, Making and Repairing, F. W. Cooper and D. W. Gawn, 4 Monographie der Gattung Alectorolophus, Dr. Jacob von Sterneck, 4 A Text-book of Insanity, Charles Mercier, 5 Lecons sur les Series a Terms Positifs, Emile Borel, 5 Practical Exercises in Magnetism and Electricity, H. E. Halley, 5 The Wiltshire Archeological and Natural History Magazine, Stonehenge and its Barrows, William Long, F.S.A., Stone- henge Bibliography Number, W. Jerome Harrison, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 2 Die Vegetation der Erde, Sammlung Pflanzengeographischer Monographien : (1) Grundziige der Pflanzenverbreitung auf d. Iberische Halbinsel, Moritz Willkomm, 27 ; (2) Grund- ziige d. Pflanzenverbreit. i. d. Karpathen, F. Pax, 27; (3) Grundziige d. Pflanzenverbreit i. d. Kaukasuslandern, von der Unteren Wolga ueb. der Manytsch-Schneider, bis z. Scheitelflache Hocharmeniens, Dr. Gustav Radde, 27 ; (4) Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse d. Illyrischen Lander, Dr. Giinther Ritter Beck v. Mannagetta, 27; (5) Die Heide Norddeutschlands, P. Graebner, 27 La Question de ?Eau Potable devant les Municipalités, P. Guichard, 28 Plissements et Dislocations de l’écorce Terrestre en Gréce, Ph. Negris, 28 Last Words on Materialism, L. Biichner, 29 The Ancient Ruins of Rhodesia, R. N. Hall and W. G. Neal, Prof. A. H. Keane, 34 Der Grosse Staubfall von 9 bis 12 Marz, 1901, in Nordafrica, Sud- und Mitteleuropa, G. Hellmann and W. Meinardus, 41 Mathematical and Physical Papers, Sir G. G. Stokes, Prof. Horace Lamb, F.R.S., 49 The Anthracite Coal Industry, Peter Roberts, 50 Organographie der PAlanzen insbesondere der Archegoniaten und Samenpflanzen, Dr. K. Goebel, Prof. J. B. Farmer, BORS., 51 The Hurricanes of the Far East, Prof. Dr. Paul Bergholz, 51 Bird Hunting on the White Nile, H. F. Witherby, 52 An Introduction to Chemistry and Physics, W. H. Perkin, jun., and Bevan Lean, 52 The Oil Chemist’s Handbook, Erastus Hopkins, 52 Elements of Botany, W. J. Browne, 52 The Culture of Greenhouse Orchids, Frederick Boyle, 59 Index Nature, Dec, 18. 1902 Studies in Auditory and Visual Space Perception, Arthur Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 73 Das Problem der Befruchtung, Dr. Th. Boveri, 74 The Book of the Rose, Kev. A. Foster-Melliar, 74 The Birds of North and Middle America, The Fringillide, R. Ridgway, 75 The Lens, a Practical Guide to the Choice, Use and Testing of Photographic Objectives, T. Bolas and George E. Brown, 7 A Asko of Geology, Albert Perry Brigham, 75 Elementary Plant Physiology, D. T, Macdougal, 76 Diagramme der Electrischen und Magnetischen Zustande und Bewegungen, IF. W. Wiillenweber, 76 The Attractions of the Himalaya Mountains upon the Plumb- line in India, Major S. G. Burrard, So The Tribes of the Brahmaputra Valley, a Contribution on their Physical Types and Affinities, L. A. Waddell, 91 The Coorgs and Yeruvas, an Ethnological Contrast, T. H. Holland, 91 Encyclopedia Britannica, 97 Directions for Class Work in Practical Physiology, Elementary Physiology of Muscle and Nerve, and of the Vascular and Nervous Systems, E. A. Schafer, F.R.S., 100 The Elements of Physical Chemistry, J. Livingston R. Morgan, 100 Practical Botany for Beginners, F. O. Bower, F.R.S., and Dr. T. Gwynne-Vaughan, 101 Quelques réflexions sur la Mecanique, suivies d’une Premiere Lecon de Dynamique, Emile Picard, ror Thomas Henry Huxley, Edward Clodd, Sir W. T. Thiselton- Dyer, F.R.S., 121 A Monograph of the Culicidee of the World, F. W. Theobald, 123 The Electric Arc, Heitha Ayrton, 124 Palzontologie und Descendenzlehre, E. Koken, 126 The Laboratory Companion to Fats and Oils Industries, Dr. J. Lewkowitsch, 126 The Ruling Races of Prehistoric Times in India, South- Western Asia and Southern Europe, J. F. Hewitt, 145 History and Chronology of the Myth-making Age, J. F. Hewitt, 145 Cyclopedia of American Horticulture, L. H. Bailey, 147 Les Cables Sous-Marins, Fabrication, Alfred Gay, 148 Some Thoughts on the Principles of Local Treatment in Diseases of the Upper Air Passages, Sir Felix Semon, 149 Flora der Ostfriesischen Inseln, Dr. Fr. Buchenau, 149 Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses, Francis Cranmer Penrose, 149 Algebra, H. G. Willis, 149 Lamarck, the Founder of Evolution, his Life and Work, Alpheus S. Packard, 169 Elementary Inorganic Chemistry, James Walker, F.R.S., 170 Experimental Chemistry, Lyman C. Newell, 170 Elementary Experimenjal Chemistry, W. F. Watson, 170 The Elements of Euclid, Book xi., R. Lachlan, 171 Recuéil de I’Institut Botanique (Université de Bruxelles), L. Errera, 171 Dynamos, Alternators and Transformers, Gisbert Kapp, 172 Etude Pratique sur les Différents Systems d'Eclairage, J. Defays and H. Pittet, 172 Sanitary Engineering, a Practical Manual of Town Drainage and Sewage and Refuse Disposal, Francis Wood, 173 The Story of Animal Life, B. Lindsay, 173 Municipal Engineering and Sanitation, M. M. Baker, 173 Alaska: Harriman Alaska Expedition 1899, 176 Encyclopedia Biblica, a Critical Dictionary of the Literary, Political and Religious History, the Archeology, Geography and Natural History of the Bible, Rev. T, K. Cheyne and J. Sutherland Black, 193 The Foraminifera, an Introduction to the Study of Protozoa, Frederick Chapman, 196 Enzymes and their Applications, J. Effront, Dr. F. Mollwo Perkin, 197 Astronomischer Jahresbericht, Walter F. Wislicenus, Dr. W. J. S. Lockyer, 198 Elements of Metaphysics, J. S. Mackenzie, 198 Histoire des Mathematiques dans l’Antiquité et le Moyen Age, , H. G. Zeuthen, 199 A la Conguete du Ciel, Contributions Astronomiques de F. C. de Nascius, en Quinze Livres, 199 Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 Index XXXVil Variation, Germinal and Environmental, J. C. Ewart, ¥.R.S., 209 The International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, Prof. J. B: Farmer, F.R.S., 217 La Costruzione degli Ingranaggi, Prof. D. Tessari, 218 The Lesson of Evolution, Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.S., Prof. R. Meldola, 219 The Elements of Physical Chemistry, Harry C. Jones, 220 Other Worlds, Garrett P. Serviss, 221 The Basis of Social Relations, D. G. Brinton, 221 The Criterion of Scientific Truth, G. Shann, 221 Opere Matematiche di Francesco Brioschi, 221 Webster’s International Dictionary of the English Language, 222 Education and Empire, Richard Burdon Haldane, 222 Special Reports on Educational Subjects, 22 , Expedition Norvégienne de 1899-1900 pour |’Etude des Aurores Boréales, Resultats des Recherches Magneétiques, Kr. Birkeland, Dr. C. Chree, F.R.S., 227 On the Intestinal Tract of Birds, with Remarks on the Valu- ation and Nomenclature of Zoological Characters, P. Chalmers Mitchell, 235 The Scientific Memoirs of Thomas Henry Huxley, 241 Ilistory of Geology and Palxontology to the End of the Nineteenth Century, Karl Alfred von Zittel, 242 Plane Surveying, a Text and Reference Book for the Use of Students in Engineering and for Engineers Generally, Paul C. Nugent, Major C. F. Close, 243 The Inspection of Railway Materials, G. R. Bodmer, 244 The Watkins Manual of (Photographic) Exposure and De- velopment, Alfred Watkins, 245 Nature Study and Life, C. F. Hodge, 245 Manual of Agricultural Chemistry, Herbert Ingle, 245 Ueber Aehnlichkeiten im Pflanzenreich, F. Hildebrand, 246 Index to the Literature of the Spectroscope (1887-1900, both Inclusive), Alfred Tuckermann, 246 William Gilbert, of Colchester, Physician of London, on the Magnet, Magnetic Bodies also, and on the Great Magnet the Earth, Prof. S. P.. Thompson, F.R.S., 249 The Record of the Royal Society of-London, 251 The Mechanics of Engineering, Prof. A. Jay DuBois, 265 The Natural History of the British Surface-feeding Ducks, J. G. Millais, T. Digby Pigott, C.B. 266 Traité de Zoologie Concréte, Yves Delage and Edgard Hérouard, Dr. G. C. Bourne, 267 Wellenlehre und Schall, W. C. L. van Schaik, 268 ' Malarial Fever, its Cause, Prevention and Treatment, Ronald Ross, F.R.S., 269 Velocity Diagrams, their Construction and Uses, Intended for all who are Interested in Mechanical Movements, Prof. C. W. MacCond, 269 Spiderland, Rose Haig Thomas, 270 Tuberculosis as a Disease of the Masses, and How to Combat it, S. A. Knopf, 270 The Teacher's Manual of Object Lessons in Geography, Vincent T. Murché, 270 William Gilbert of Colchester: a Sketch of his Magnetic Philosophy, Charles E, Benham, 270 The Vocal System based on the Fundamental Laws of Language, G. Lionel Wright, 271 The Lake Counties, W. G. Collingwood, 271 Preliminary Report on a Journey of Archzological and Topo- graphical Exploration in Chinese Turkestan, M. A. Stein, Prof. M. Winternitz, 284 The Encyclopedia Britannica, F.R.S., 289 , Les Bateaux Sous-Marins et les Submersibles, R. D’Eque- villey, 290 Elementary Principles in Statistical Mechanics, J. Willard Gibbs, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 291 A Course in Invertebrate Zoology, Henry Sherring Pratt, 292 Slide Rule Notes, Lieut.-Colonel H. C. Dunlop and C. S. Jackson, 292 Injurious and Useful Insects: an Introduction to the Study of Economic Entomology, L. C. Miall, F.R.S., 293 Chloroform: a Manual for Students and Practitioners, Edward Lawrie, 293 Les Limites de la Biologie, J. Grasset, 293 Schule des automobil Fahrers, Wolfgang Vogel, Mervyn O’Gorman, 313 Prof. Arthur Smithells, An Introduction to the Study of the Comparative Anatomy of Animals, G. C. Bourne, 314 Scientific Memoirs, 315 Traité de Bactériologie Pure et Appliquée 4 la Médicine et 2 PHygiéne, P. Miquel and R. Cambier, Dr. E. Klein, F.R.S., 316 General Investigations of Curved Surfaces of 1827 and 1825, Karl Friedrich Gauss, 316 The Elements of Mind, H. J. Brooks, 317 A Graduated Collection of Problems in Electricity, Prof. Robert Weber, 317 Junior Chemistry and Physics, W. Jerome Harrison, 317 Report on the Collections of Natural History made in the Antarctic Regions during the Voyage of the Sou¢heri Cross, R. B. Sharpe and F. J. Bell, 322 Catalogue of the Collection of Birds’ Eggs in the British Museum (Natural History), E. W. Oates, 322 Guide to the Galleries of Mammalia in the British Museum (Natural History), 322 Guide to the Coral Gallery in the British Museum (Natural History), R. Kirkpatrick and F. J. Bell, 322 Erdmagnetische Untersuchungung im Kaiserstuhl, G Meyer, 324 Chart of Lines of Equal Magnetic Declination and Annual Change for 1902, 324 Magnetical Dip and Declination in the Philippine Islands, Rev. John Doyle, 324 Annales de |’Observatoire National d’Athénes, D. Eginitis, 331 Lehrbuch der Meteorologie, Dr. Julius Hann, Dr. W. N. Shaw, F.R.S., 337 The Textile Fibres of Commerce, William S. Hannan, 338 Les Poissons du Bassin du Congo, G. A. Boulenger, 339 The Roorkee Manual of Applied Mechanics, Stability of Structures and the Graphic Determination of Lines of Resistance, Lieut.-Colonel J. H. C Harrison, 340 Ordnance Survey of England and Wales, 341 A Manual of Elementary Practical Physics, Julius Hortvet, 341 The Journal of the Iron and Steel Institute General Index, 342 Zur Metaphysik des Tragischer, L. Ziegler, 342 Hygiene for Students, Edward F. Willoughby, 342 Savage Island: an Account of a Sojourn in Niue and Tonga, Basil Thomson, E. Sidney Hartland, 347 Theory of the Motion of the Moon: Containing a New Calculation of the Expressions for the Coordinates of the Moon in Terms of Time, Ernest W. Brown, F.R.S., 356 . The Encyclopzdia Britannica, 361 Pathologie générale et expérimentale, les Processus géneraux, A. Chantemesse and W. W. Podwyssotsky, 363 Matiére médicale zoologique, Histoire des d’Origine Animale, H. Beauregard, 363 Chemische und medicinische Untersuchungen, Festschrift zur des sechzigsten Geburtstages von Max Jaflé, 363 Das Wirbeltierblut in mikrokristallographischer Hinricht, Dr. H. U. Kobert, 363 Essays in Historical Chemistry, T. E. Thorpe, C.B., F.R.S., 36 The sates torniay a Commentary upon the Aims and Methods of an Assistant Master in a Public School, Arthur Christopher Benson, 366 The Dictionary of Photography, E. J. Wall, 368 Die Entwicklung des Gesichtes: Tafeln zur Entwicklungs- geschichte der aeusseren Koerperform der Wirbelthiere, Carl Rabl, Part i., Das Gesicht der Saeugethiere, 368 Les Fleurs du Midi, P. Granger, 368 Physiology for Beginners, Leonard Hill, F.R.S., Dr. B. Moore, 369 Die Philosophie August Comte’s, L. Lévy-Briihl, 369 Elementary Coal Mining, George L. Kerr, 369 The Cambridge Natural History, Mammalia, F. E. Beddard, Drogues Noub Queensland Ethnography, Games, Sports and Amuse- ments, Walter E. Roth, 380 The Hepatice of the British Isles, being Figures and De- scriptions of all Known British Species, William Henry Pearson, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 385 De la Double Refraction Elliptique et de la Tétraréfringence du Quartz dans le Voisinage de l’Axe, G. Quesneville, 386 XXXVIiii A Text-Book of Physics, with Sections on the Applications of Physics to Physiology and Medicine, R. A. Lehfeldt, 387 Health, Speech and Song: a Practical Guide to Voice- Production, Jutta Bell-Ranske, Dr. B. Moore, 388 The Principles of Simple Photography, F. W. Sparrow, 389 Philosophy of Conduct, G. T. Ladd, 389 The Thompson Yates Laboratories Report, 390 The Annual of the British School at Athens, 390 The Primrose and Darwinism, 409 Exposition universelle de 1900, Congres International de Chronométrie, Comptes rendus des Travaux, Procés- verbaux, Rapports et Mémoires, 411 Trades’ Waste : its Treatment and Utilisation, W. Naylor, 413 Die Weltherrin und ihr Schatten, Ein Vortrag iiber Energie und Entropie, Dr. Felix Auerbach, 414 Chemisch-Analytisches Praktikum, Dr. Karl Anton Henniger, 414 La Protezione degli Animali, N. Lico, 414 Coal Cutting by Machinery in the United Kingdom, Sidney F. Walker, 414 Metallography : an Introduction to the Study of the Structure of Metals chiefly by the Aid of the Microscope, Arthur H. Hiorns, 415 Ten Thousand Miles in Persia, or Eight Years in Iran, Major Percy Molesworth Sykes, 418 Dangerous Trades: the Historical, Social and Legal Aspects of Industrial Occupations as Affecting Health, Dr. T. E. Thorpe, C.B., F.R.S., 433 International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, Prof. Herbert McLeod, F.R.S., 436 Qu’est-ce qui détermine le Sexe? Dr. A. Van Lint, 437 The Rontgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Francis H. Williams, 438 Elementary Geometry, W. C. Fletcher, 438 Diagrams of Mean Velocity of Uniform Motion of Water in Open Channels, Based on the Formula of Ganguillet and Kutter, Prof. Irving P. Church, 439 A First Course of Chemistry (Heuristic), J. H. Leonard, 439 An Elementary Book on Electricity and Magnetism and their Applications, Profs. D, C. Jackson and J. P. Jackson, 439 The Face of Nature, Rev. C. T. Ovenden, 439 Gold Seeking in South Africa: a Handbook of Hints for Intending Explorers, Prospectors and Settlers, with a Chapter on the Agricultural Prospects of South Africa, Theo. Kassner, 440 A Text-book of Inorganic Chemistry, Dr. A. F. Holleman, 440 The Bernese Oberland, G. Hasler, 440 Birds in the Garden, G. Sharp, 444 Reports of the U.S. Coast Survey, Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.S., 444 Reproduction des Figures Paleolithiques Peintes sur les Parois de la Grotte de Font-de-Gaume, MM. Capitan and Breuil, 452 Sur les Matieres Colorantes des Figures de la Grotte de Font- de-Gaume, Henri Moissan, 452 Les Figurations Préhistoriques de la Grotte de la Mouthe (Dordogne), Emile Riviére, 452 Special Reports on Educational Subjects. United States of America, 453 General Reports of H. M. Inspectors on Elementary Schools and Training Colleges for the Year 1901, 453 General Reports of H. M. Inspectors on Science and Art Schools and Classes and Evening Schools, 453 Geodetic Survey of South Africa, Report on a Rediscussion of Bailey’s and Fourcade’s Surveys and their Reduction to the System of the Geodetic Survey, Sir David Gill, K.C.B., F.R.S., Major C. F. Close, 457 Religio Medici, &c, 457 Elements of Physics, C. Henderson and John F. Woodhull, 458 Physical Experiments, John F. Woodhull and M. B. Van Arsdale, 458 Types of British Plants, C. S. Colman, 458 Water Supply, Prof. William P. Mason, 458 Sichtbare und Unsichtbare Bewegungen, H. A. Lorentz, 489 Cuchulain of Muirthemne, the Story of the Men of the Red Branch of Ulster, Lady Gregory, 489 Education in the Index - Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Flora Arctica, C. H. Ostenfeld, 490 An Arithmetic for Schools, J. P. Kirkman and FE, A. Field, 491 A first Step in Arithmetic, J. G. Bradshaw, 491 The Real Origin of Religion, Jabelon, 491 Theology and Ethics of the Hebrews, Archibald Duff, 517 Syria and Palestine, Lewis Bayles Paton, 517 The Elementary Principles of Chemistry, A. V. E. Young, 519 P.O.P. (The Use of Silver Printing out Papers), A. Horsley Hinton, 519 Tir des Fusils de Chasse, Journée, 545 Roscoe-Schorlemmer’s Lehrbuch der Organischen Chemie, Jul. Wilh. Brithl, Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S., 546 Japanische Mythologie, Nihongi ‘‘ Zeitalter der Gotter,” Karl Florenz, 546 An Introduction to Chemistry, D. S. Macnair, 547 A Tentative list of the Flowering Plants and Ferns for the County of Cornwall, including the Scilly Isles, F. H. Davey, 547 Outer Isles, A. Goodrich-Freer, 548 The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and Burma, Khynchota, W. L. Distant, 548 Mendel’s Principles of Heredity: a Defence, W. Bateson, RS Sy} Reports to the Evolution Committee of the Royal Society, W. Bateson and Miss E. R. Saunders, 573 Die Schutzvorrichtungen der Starkstromtechnik gegen Atmo- spharische Entladungen, Dr. Gustav Benischke, 573 Catalogue of Scientific Papers (1800-1883), Supplementary Volume, 574 The Early Life of the Young Cuckoo. W. P. Westell, 574 Physics : a Text-book for Secondary Schools, Prof. Frederick Slate, 575 L’Electricité (déduit de l’Experience et Ramenée au Principe des Travaux virtuels), E. Carvallo, 575 , Les Phénoménes électriques chez lez Etres vivants, M. Mendelssohn, 575 Eiementary Chemical Analysis, Distinguishing Tables and Tests, Prof. P. Carmody, 575 Der Untergang der Erde und die kosmischen Katastrophen, Dr. M. W. Meyer, 601 The Evolution of Artificial Mineral Waters, William Kirkby, 602 Human Embryology and Morphology, Dr. A. Keith, 603 The Making of Citizens : a Study of Comparative Education, R. E. Hughes, 604 Animal Forms: a Second Book of Zoology, David S. Jordan and Prof. Harold Heath, 605 Das botanische Practicum, Dr. Edward Strasburger, 605 Principles of Sanitary Science and the Public Health, Prof. William T. Sedgwick, 605 Nature Study: Realistic Geography, Model based on the 6 inch Ordnance Survey, G. Herbert Morrell, 606 A Junior Chemistry, E. A. Tyler, 606 The Encyclopzdia Britannica, vols. xxviii. and xxix., 625 Archiv fiir Protistenkunde, 627 Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis, E. L. Rhead and Prof. A. Humboldt Sexton, 628 The Climates and Baths of Great Britain, vol. ii., 629 Electric Wiring, W. C. Clinton, 629 The Common Spiders of the United States, James H. Emerton, 630 Trees in Prose and Poetry, Gertrude L. Stone and M. Grace Fickett, 630 Chart of the Metric System, Prof. C. Bopp, 630 The Naturalist on the Thames, C. J. Cornish, 632 The Nearer East, D. G. Hogarth, 649 Das Eisen als das thatige Prinzip der Enzyme und der lebendigen Substanz, N. Sacharoff, 651 Probabilités et Moyennes géométriques, Emmanuel Czuber, 652 Philosophical Essay on Probabilities, Pierre Simon Marquis de Laplace, 652 Upland Game-birds, E. Sandys and T. S. Van Dyke, 652 wild Fruits of the Country Side, F. Edward Hulme, 653 Einfiihrung in die Theorie der Doppelbrechung, Heinrich Greinacher, 653 Physical Geography, Margery A. Reid, 653 Dr. Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 Index XXXIX Reynolds (Osborne, F.R.S.), Throw-testing Machine for Re- versals of Mean Stress, 45 Reynolds (Prof. S. H.), the Jurassic Strata Cut Through by the South Wales Direct Line between Filton and Wootton Bassett, 263 Rhead (E. L.), Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis for the Use of Students, Chemists and Assayers, 628 Rheumatism, Local Treatment of, Ch. Bouchard, 288 Rhodesia and Ophir, R. N. Hall and W. G. Neal, Prof. A. 1. Keane, 34 Richards (Prof. T. W.), Accuracy of an Improved Form of Silver Voltameter, 158; Redetermination of the Atomic Weight of Uranium, 208 ; Decomposition of Mercurous Chloride by Dissolved Chlorides, 233 , Richards (Mr.), Electrochemical Equivalent of Silver, gor Richardson (Hugh), Theories of Heredity, 630 Richardson (O. W.), Decomposition of Oxalacetic Hydrazone in Aqueous and Acid Solutions and a New Method of Deter- mining the Concentration of Hydrogen Ions in Solution, 214 Richardson (Dr. S. W.}, a Method of Treating Parallels, 223 Richer (Pierre Paul), the Germination of Pollen Grains in the Presence of Stigmata, 672 Ridewood (Dr. W. G.), the Structure of the Gills of the Lamellibranchia, 165 Ridgway (R.), the Birds of North and Middle America, the Fringillide, 75 Righi (Prof. A.). on Mr. Marconi, 581 Riva (Carlo), Death and Obituary Notice of, 157 River Management : on Single Curved versus Double Straight Jetties, Lewis B. Haupt, 39 River Pollution, Trades’ Waste and, W. Naylor, 413 Riviere (Emile), les Figurations préhistoriques de la Grotte de La Mouthe Dordogne, 452 Road Vehicles, Resistance of, to Traction, Report of the British Association Committee, 643 Roberts (Peter), the Anthracite Coal Industry, 50 Roberts-Austen (Sir W. C., K.C.B., F.R.S.), the Relations between Metallurgy and Engineering, ‘‘James Forrest” Lecture at the Institution of Civil Engineers, 18 Robertson (P. W.), Atomic and Molecular Heats of Fusion, 19I Robinson (H. C.)}, the Wild and Civilised Tribes of the Malay Peninsula, 664 Robinson (W. H.), Remarkable Naked-eye Nebulosity, 233 Rocherolles (J.), Study of the Simultaneous Distillation of Two Non-miscible Substances, 336 Rock Metamorphism, Opening Address in Section C at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, Lieut.-General Charles Alexander McMahon, F.R.S., F.G.S., 504 Rockstroh (Edwin), Earthquake in Guatemala, 150 Rodrigues (Campos), Corrections to the Right Ascensions of the Principal Stars of the Berliner Jahrbuch, 557 Rogovsky (Dr. E.), Kinetic Theory of Planetary Atmospheres, 222 Rolston (W. E.), a Remarkable Meteor, 557 Rontgen Rays: Portable Rontgen Ray Outfit, Rosenberg and Co., 136; Method for Obtaining a Rontgen Photograph of an Internal Part of the Living Body during the Performance of a Definite Functional Movement, Dr. P. H. Eykman, 307 ; the Mode of Formation of Kathode and Rontgen Rays, Th. Tommasina, 408; R6ntgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Francis H. Williams, 438 ; a Coin-controlled X-ray Machine for Public Use, 512 Roscoe-Schorlemmer’s Lehrbuch der Organischen Chemie, Jul. Wilh. Briihl, Prof. R. Meldola, F.R.S., 546 Rose, the Book of the, Rev. A. Foster-Melliar, 74 Rose (J.), Fog Bow at Oxford, 416 Rosenberg and Co.’s Portable Rontgen Ray Outfit, 136 Rosenhain (Walter), the Misuse of Coal, 29 ; a Note on the Re- crystallisation of Platinum, 262 Rosenheim (Dr.), Decomposition of Compounds of Selenium and Tellurium by Moulds and its Influence on the Biological Test for Arsenic, 214 Rosenstiehl (A.), Quality of a Wine Depends upon the Yeast which Grows Spontaneously upon the Grape, 192 Ross (Ronald, F.R.S.), Malarial Fever, its Cause, Prevention and Treatment, 269 Rost (Major), the Bacillus of Beri-beri, 378 Rotation Period of the Superior Planets, M. Deslandres, 380 Roth (Walter E.) Australian Children’s Games, 380 Rousselet (C. F.), the Genus Synchzta, 448 Roux (E.), Action of Carbon Bisulphide on the Polyvalent Amino-alcohols, 264 Rowland (Prof. H. A.), New System of Octoplex Typographic Telegraphy, 134 Royal Astronomical Society, 94, 238 Royal College of Science, Science and Literature, Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., 645 Royal Dublin Society, 47, 167, 311 Royal Geographical Society, the President’s Opening Address, Current Arctic and Antarctic Expeditions, 113 Royal Institution, Lecture at, Interference of Sound, the Right Hon. Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S., 42; the Chemical Laboratory of the Royal Institution, 460 Royal Irish Academy, 47, 143 Royal Meteorological Society, 119, 215 Royal Microscopical Society, 46, 166, 262, 671 Royal Society: 45, 93, 165, 213, 238, 262, 287, 311, 334, 382, 455, 488; the Royal Society Conversazione, 83; the Royal Society Soirée, 204 ; Coefficients of the Cubical Ex- pansion of Ice, Hydrated Salts, Solid Carbonic Acid and other Substances at Low Temperatures, Prof. James Dewar, F.R.S., 88; on some Phenomena which Suggest a Short Period of Solar and Meteorological Changes, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F,R.S., and Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 248; Record of the Royal Society of London, Year-book of the Royal Society of London, 251 ; the Royal Society Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Dr. Tempest Anderson and Dr. J. S. Flett, 402; Reports to the Evolution Committee of the Royal Society, 573; Catalogue of Scientific Papers (1800- 1883), 574; Lecture at, the Influence of Varying Amounts of Carbon Dioxide in the Air on the Photosynthetic Process of Leaves and on the Mode of Growth of Plants, Dr. Horace T. Brown, F.R.S., and F. Escombe, 620 Royal Society, Edinburgh, 383 Royal Society, New South Wales, 456, 572 Royal Society of Sciences, Gottingen, 516 Royal Visit to the University of Wales, the, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 61 Rudler (F. W.), and the Museum of Practical Geology, 553 Rural Education in France, 225 Russell (E. J.), Preparation of Pure Chlorine and its Behaviour towards Hydrogen, 238 Russell (H. L.), Bovine Tuberculosis and Milk Supplies, 399 ; Thermal Death Point of a Micrococcus Isolated from Milk, 423 Russell (Prof. Israel C.), Report on the West Indian Volcanic Eruptions, 372, 485 Russell (James), Cross-magnetisation in Iron, 335; Magnetic Shielding in Hollow Iron Cylinders and Superposed Mag- netic Inductions in Iron, 383 Rust-fungus, Prof. Marshall Ward, 210 Rutherford (Prof. E.), Radio-activity of Thorium Compounds, 119; Penetrating Rays from Radio-active Substances, 318 Ryder (Capt.), Hilly Yiinnan, 642 Sabatier (Paul), the Addition of Hydrogen to Ethylenic Hydro- carbons by the Method of Contact, 119 ; ‘‘ Chemical”’ Theory of Petroleum Formation, 138; the Direct Hydrogenation of Acetylenic Hydrocarbons by the Method of Contact, 312 ; Reduction of Nitro-derivatives by the Method of Direct Hydrogenation in Contact with Finely Divided Metals, 360; Direct Reduction of Oxides of Nitrogen by the Contact Method, 384 Sabre-toothed Tigers, How the, Killed their Prey, 357 Sacharoff (N.), Das Eisen als das thatige Prinzip der Enzyme und der lebendigen Substanz, 651 Sackur (Dr.), Aqueous Solutions of Casein Sodium, 637 Safarik (Prof. V.), Death and Obituary Notice of, 305 St. Pierre, Last Days of, Very Rev. G. Parel, 372 St. Vincent, Effects of the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in, 306, 484; H. Hesketh Bell, 306; Captain Calder, 373; T. McGregor McDonald, 373; Eruptions of Volcano and Earthquake at St. Vincent, 327 : Salonica, Earthquake at, July 5, 254, 278; M. Christomanos, 624 Salt, the Use of, in the Dietary of Sheep, 556 4 Index Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Sanctis (Dr. Sante de), Experimental Investigations on the Depth of Sleep, 137 Sandstone Rocks of Peel, the Red, Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S., 191 Sandstorms, 114 Sandys (E.), Upland Game Birds, 652 ; Sanitation, Municipal Engineering and, M. M. Baker, 173; a Practical Manual of Town Drainage and Sewage and Refuse Disposal, Francis Wood, 173; Principles of Sanitary Science and the Public Health, Prof. William T. Sedgwick, 605 ; the Treatment of Smoke; a Sanitary Parallel, Dr. W. N. Shaw, F.R.S., at the Sanitary Congress, Manchester, 667 Sarasin (Drs. Paul and Fritz), Materialen zur Naturgeschichte der Insel Celebes, Entwurf einer geographisch-geologischen Beschreibung der Insel Celebes, 3 Saturn Visible Through the Cassini Division, C. T. Whitmell, 87, 206 Saturn and Uranus, the Satellites of, Dr. J. J. See, 380 Saunders (Miss E. R.), Reports to the Evolution Committee of the Royal Society, 573 Savage Island, an Account of a Sojourn in Niué and Tonga, | Basil Thomson, E. Sidney Hartland, 347 Saville-Kent (W.), Bipedal Locomotion in Lizards, 630 Saxelby (F. M.), Experimental Mathematics, 30 Saxony, Rainfall of, Dr. G. Hellmann, 136 Schafer (Prof. E. A., F.R.S.), Directions for Class Work in Practical Physiology, 100 ; on the Mechanism connecting the Muscular Apparatus with the Brain Centres for Willed Movement, 665; on some New Features in the Intimate Structure of the Human Cerebral Cortex, - Diuretic Action of Pituitary Extracts, 666 Schaik (W. C. L. van), Wellenlehre und Schall, 268 Scharff (Dr. R. F.), on the Atlantis Problem, 641 Schenk (Dr. Leopold), Death of, 397 Schlich (Dr.), World’s Timber Supply, 283 Schloesing (Th.), Studies on Earth, 671 Scholarships, Schools and, $2 School Gardens, Prof. Geddes, 326 Schools, an Arithmetic for, J. P. Kirkman and A. E. Field, 491 Schools and Scholarships, 82 Schreiber (Father Johann), Apparatus for Registering Thunder- storms, 65 Schribaux (M.), Method of Concentrating Wine, 360 Schuster (Prof. Arthur, F.R.S.), the Future of the Victoria | University, 252, 319; Opening Address in Section A (Sub- section of Astronomy and Cosmical Physics) at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association, 614 Schwappach’s (Prof.) Report on Prussian Experiments with Forest Trees, 283 Schweinitz (Mr. De), Chemical Composition of Tubercle Bacilli, 540 Science: the Duties of the State towards Science, Mr. Arnold- Forster, 62 ; Death and Obituary Notice of George Griffith, 64; the Rise of the Experimental Sciences at Oxford, Boyle | Lecture at Oxford, Prof. T. Clifford Allbutt, F.R.S., 90; Science and Military Education, 175; International Cata- logue of Scientific Literature, Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.R.S., 217; Prof. Herbert McLeod, F.R.S., 4363 Coronation Honours to Men of Science, 228; Scientific Memoirs of Thomas Henry |Huxley, Vol. iv., 241; Scientific Edu- cation in Germany, 255; Scientific Memoirs, 315; Science and the London Matriculation Examination, A. Irving, 320; 665; on the | Science in the Public Schools, Rev. Dr. A. Irving, 459; | Some Scientific Centres, v., the Chemical Laboratory of the Royal Institution, 460; the Carnegie Institution of Washing- ton, D.C., Dr. Daniel C. Gilman, 548 ; Forthcoming Books of Science, 558; American Journal of Science, 571 ; Cata- logue of Scientific Papers (1800-1883), Supplementary Volume, | Compiled by the Royal Society, 574 ; Science and Literature, | Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., at the Royal College of Science, | 645; Modern Scientific Geography, 649 Scotland: Evidence of a ‘*Seiche” on a Scottish Loch, Dr. T. N. Johnston and J. Parsons, 162; the Progress of Scot- tish Botany, J. C. Druce, 447; Scottish Antarctic Expedi- tion, W. S. Bruce, 631; Matriculation Requirements in | Scottish Universities, Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., 654; on the Pigmentation Survey of Scottish School Children, J. F. Tocher, 663 Scott (Dr., F.R.S.), Atomic Weight of Tellurium, 70 Screws: French Service Regulation as to Heads and Worms of Screws Used in the French Navy, 229 Sea, the first Meeting of the International Council for the Ex- ploration of the, 346 Sea Temperature and Shore Climate, 116 Sea Temperature Variations on the British Coasts, 452 Sea-shore, Flames from Mud ona, Rev. H. T, Dixon, 151 Searle (Rev. Charles E.), Death of, 327 Sedgwick (Prof. William T.), Principles of Sanitary Science and the Public Health, 605 See (Dr. J. J.), the Satellites of Saturn and Uranus, 380 Seeley (Prof. H. G.), on Cretaceous Strata Found by Mr. E. G. Fraser on the Shoulder of Sekasar, India, 620 **Seiche”’ on a Scottish Loch, Evidence of a, Dr. T. N. Johnston and J. Parsons, 162 Seismology ; Earthquake round Lake Baikal, 15 ; Mont Pelée Eruption and Dust Falls, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 53; the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in the West Indies, Prof. J. Milne, F.R.S., 56, 107, 1513; Observations of Volcanic Activity in the West Indies, 178, 203; Records and Results of Recent Eruptions,» 153; Eruptions of Volcano and Earthquake at St. Vincent, 327; Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Robert T. Hill, 370; see also Volcanoes ; Periodicity of Volcanic Eruptions and Earthquakes, Rev. T. E. Espin, 353 ; Earthquakes and Volcanic Eruptions, April 10 to September 23, 659; Periodicity of the Great Earthquakes of the Marches and Romagna, Dr. Cancani, 66; Record of Italian Earthquakes (1891-1900), Dr. A. Cancani, 66; Dis- tribution in Intensity of the After-shocks of Three Hun- dred Italian Earthquakes, Dr. Cancani, 513; the Carlisle Earthquakes of July 9 and 11, 1901, Dr. C. Davison, 71 ; . the Inverness Earthquake of September 18, 1901, Dr. C. Davison, 71 ; Earthquake of May 6, 1902, Michel Lévy, 95 ; Earthquake in Guatemala, Edwin Rockstroh, 150; Seismic Frequency in Japan, Prof. J. Milne, F.R.S., 202 ; Earthquakes in Greece during 1899, Dr. D. Eginitis, 230; Register of 208 Shocks Observed in Styria Between 1000 and 1870, Dr. R- Hoernes, 234; Historical Account of the Farthquakes of Poland, Prof. W. Laska, 234; Proposed Non-pendulum Forms of Apparatus, Prof. E. Odone, 234; a New Form of Seismograph, Dr. G. Agamennone, 260; Improved Seismo- graph, Dr. Cancani, 308; Earthquakes in Nebraska, Iowa, Dakota and California, 327 ; Observations on Explosion of Ten Tons of Gunpowder in the Granite Quarries near Baveno, Dr. Emilio Oddone, 350; Earthquake of May 28 at the Cape and Coincident Meteorological Effects, Charles Stewart, 369 ; the Earthquake in Mid-Atlantic, Father Melzi, 378 ; Earth Surface Vibrations, F. C. Constable, 440; J. M., 440; Earth- quakes in Guam, Tiflis and Ferghana, 579; Earthquake at Salonica, July 5, 254, 278; M. Christomanos, 624 Sellards (E. H.), Jdzophyllum rotundifiorum a Synonym of Neuropteris rarinervis, 571-2 Semenov (Jules), Electric Discharge in Flames, 143; the Mechanical Phenomena of the Electric Discharge, 336 Semon (Sir Felix), Some Thoughts on the Principles of Loca) Treatment in Diseases of the Upper Air Passages, 149 Senderens (J. B.), the Addition of Hydrogen to Ethylenic Hydro- carbons by the Method of Contact, 119; Chemical Theory of Petroleum Formation, 138; the Direct Hydrogenation of Acetylenic Hydrocarbons by the Method of Contact, 312; Reduction of Nitro-derivatives by the Method of Direct Ilydrogenation in Contact with Finely Divided Metals, 360 ; Direct Reduction of Oxides of Nitrogen by the Contact Method, 384 Senior (Edgar), Experiment Illustrating a Paradoxical Conse- quence of the Wave Theory of Light, 204; Photograph of the Spectrum of the Are Light, 582 Senter (George), on the Measurement of Temperature, 382 Serotherapy : Vaccination Against Pasteurelloses, MM. Joseph and Marcel Ligniéres, 120; the Plague in the Punjab, 484 ; the Rinderpest Serum, 659 Severo (M.), Death of, €5 Serviss (Garrett P.), Other Worlds, 221 Sexe? Qu’est ce qui Détermine le, Dr. A. Van Lint, 437 Sexton (Prof. A. Humboldt), Assaying and Metallurgical Analysis for the Use of Students, Chemists and Assayers, 628 Shann (G.), the Criterion of Scientific Truth, 221 Sharp (G.), Birds in the Garden, 444 Sharpe (R. B.), Report on the Collections of Natural History Nature, ] Dec. 18, 1902 [Index Made in the Antarctic Regions during the Voyage of the Southern Cross, 322 Shaw (Captain H. J.), Cool Summer at Yokohama, 554 Shaw (Dr. P. E.), Electric Micrometer, 70 Shaw (Dr. W. N., F.R.S.), Lehrbuch der Meteorologie, Dr. Julius Hann, 337; on Radiation in Meteorology, 619; the Treatment of Smoke, a Sanitary Parallel, 667 Shaw Prize for Industrial Hygiene Awarded by the Society of Arts to James Tonge, jun., 377 Sheep, the Use of Salt in the Dietary of, 556 Sheep, a Rare Wild, R. Lydekker, F.R.S., 32 Shelton (H.S.), Molecular Condition of Borax in Solution, 238 ‘Sherborn (C. Davies), Effect of a Lightning Flash, 492 Ship Models for Resistance, the Proposed Experimental Tank for Testing, 128 Shore Climate, Sea Temperature and, 116 Sichtbare und Unsichtbare Bewegungen, H. A. Lorentz, 489 ‘Sicily : Cyclone on the Eastern Sicilian Coast on September 26, 553 Signals, Coast Fog, E. Price Edwards, 115 Silesia, Prehistoric Pygmies in, David MacRitchie, 151 Silicon, Control of the, in the Acid Open-hearth Bath, A. MacWilliam and W. H. Hatfield, 63 Silicon not an Element, Th. Gross, 484 Simon (L. J.), Derivatives of Pyruvylpyruvic Ester, 72; a New Acidimetric Indicator, 516 ; the Derivatives of Ethyl Pyruvyl- pyruvate, 672 Sirex and Thalessa, the Habits of the Larve and Adults of, E. P. Stebbing, 407 Skagway, Earthquake at, 378 Skeletons, Dispersive Power of Running Water on, W. L. H. Duckworth, 116 . Skin Currents, on, Part iii., the Human Skin, Augustus D. Waller, F.R.S., 455 Slate (Prof. Frederick), Physics, a Text-book for Secondary Schools, 575 Sleep, Experimental Investigations on the Depth of, Drs. Sante de Sanctis and U. Neyroz, 137 ** Sleeping Sickness ” of Uganda, the, 484 Slide Rule Notes, Lieut.-Colonel H. C. Jackson, 292 Smedley (Miss Ida), Colour of Iodine-containing Compounds, Dunlop and C. S. 63 Smiles (S.), Liquid Hydride of Silicon, 263 ; New Properties of Amorphous Silicon, 263 Smith (Prof. Alexander), Amorphous Sulphur and its Relation to the Freezing Point of Liquid Sulphur, 239; Causes which Determine the Formation of Amorphous Sulphur, 383 sath (Dr. D. T), Retention of Leaves by Deciduous Trees, 31 Smith (Prof. G. Elliot), Abnormal Dentition in a Lemur, 71; Cerebellum of the Lemurs, 94 ; Brain of the Elephant Shrew, 94; a Peculiarity of the Cerebral Commissures in Certain Marsupialia, 165; Instances of Abnormality in Animals, 351 Smith (G. F. Herbert), Three-circle Goniometer, 83 Smith (Henry G.), two Chemical Constituents from the Eucalypts, 456 Smith (H. W. Croome), Remarkable Lunar Halo, 85 Smith (J. H.), Throw-testing Machine for Reversals of Mean Stress, 45 Smith (R. Greig), Gummosis of the Sugar Cane, 264. Smithells (Prof. Arthur, F.R.S.), the Encyclopedia Britannica, 289 ; the Future of the Victoria University, 319, 343 Smithsonian Institution, the, Its Documentary History, 226 Smoke, the Treatment of, a Sanitary Parallei, Dr. W. N. epee F.R.S., at the Sanitary Congress, Manchester, 7 Smyth (Prof. C. Piazzi), Does the Spectrum Place of the Sodium Lines Vary in Different Azimuths, 119 Snails, the Evolution of, in the Bahama Islands, Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, 56 Snake Poison, the Elaboration of Venogen and of Venom in the Parotoid Gland of Vipera Aspzs, L. Launoy, 624 Snake Poison, a Kinase in, C. Delezenne, 408 Snow, Caucasian, A. Brun, 16 Snow-waves and Snow-drifts, Dr. Vaughan Cornish at the Geographical Society, 453 xl Snyder (M. B.), a new Transiting Device, 613 Society of Arts: Photography as Applied to Architectural Measurement and Surveying, J. Bridges Lee, 235; Shaw Prize for Industrial Hygiene Awarded by the Society of Arts to James Tonge, jun , 377 Social Relations, the Basis of, D. G. Brinton, 221 Soddy (Mr.),; Radio-activity of Thorium Compounds, 119 Radio-activity of Uranium, 119 Sodeau (W. H.), Decomposition of Chlorates, 214 Sodium, the Manufacture and Uses of, James D. Darling, 189 Solar Corona, Connection between the Photographs of the, and of the Entire Solar Chromosphere obtained on the Same Day, H. Deslandres, 167 Solar Eclipses, Occultations of Stars and, Francis Cranmer Penrose, 149 Solar Eclipses, Effects of, on the Motion of Air-currents, Luigi de Marchi, 159 Solar Eclipse of May 18, 1901, Spectroscopy of the, J. W. Humphreys, 331 Solar Eclipse, Total, of, 1901, Search for an Intra-Mercurial Planet during the, Prof. Perrine, 662 Solar Halo, a Remarkable, Rev. T. C. Porter, 76 Solar Halo, a, R. T. Omond, 103 Solar Phenomena during 1901, 401 Solar Prominences, Hypothesis on the Nature of, Prof. W. H. Julius, 450 Solar Protuberances and Terrestrial Magnetism, the Relation between the, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 456 Solar and Meteorological Changes, on Some Phenomena which Suggest a Short Period of, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., and Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 248 Solar and Meteorological Variations, Short Period, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., and Dr. William Lockyer, 456 Solly (R. H.), Crystallographic Characters of Liveingite, 215 Sormani (Prof. Giuseppe), Changes in the Birth and Death Rates in Italy during the last Forty Years, 660 Sound : Interference of, the Right Hon. Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S., at the Royal Institution, 42 ; Studies in Auditory and Visual Space Perception, Arthur Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 73; Wellenlehre und Schall, W. C. L. van Schaik, 268 South African Philosophical Society, Paper Read at, Stereo- scopic Method of Photographic Surveying, H. G. Fourcade, 139 South Wales Electrical Power Distribution Company, the, 38 Space, Matter and Motion in, Sir Hiram S. Maxim, 223 Space Perception, Studies in Auditory and Visual, Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 73 Spark Discharge from Metallic Poles in Water, on the, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 93 Sparrow (F. W.), the Principles of Simple Photography, 389 Spectrum Analysis: Prisms and Plates for Showing Dichro- matism, Prof. R. W. Wood, 31; Action of Self-induction on the Spectrum of Dissociation of Compounds, A. de Gramont, 72; on the Spark Discharge from Metallic Poles in Water, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C B., F.R.S., 93; Visual and Spectroscopic Observations of the Sun-spot Group of May and June, 1901, Father Cortie. 94; Spectrum of Electric Sparks, B. Eginitis, 95 ; Does the Spectrum Place of the Sodium Lines Vary in Different Azimuths, Prof. C. Piazzi Smyth, 119; an Attempt to Reproduce an Aurora Borealis, Prof. W. Ramsay, F.R.S., 204; the Spectra of Potassium, Rubidium and Czsium, and their Mutual Relations, Hugh Ramage, 214; Spectrum of Hemoglobin, L. Bier and L. Marchlewski, 230; Index to the Literature of the Spectro- scope (1887-1900, both inclusive), Alfred Tuckermann, 246 ; Personal Equation in the Measurement of Spectroscopic Negatives, M. Hasselberg, 258; Uneven Distribution of Light in a Diffraction Grating Spectrum, Prof. R. W. Wood, 262; Radial Velocity of the Orion Nebula, Prof. H. C. Vogel and Dr. Eberhard, 309; Spectra Arising from the Dissociation of Water Vapour and the Presence of Dark Lines in these Spectra, John Trowbridge, 310 ; Spectroscopy of the Solar Eclipse of May 18, rgo1, J. W. Ilumphreys, 331; Spectroscopic Binary 8 Cephei, Prof. Frost and W. S. Adams, 352; Method of Spectrum: Analysis Furnishing the Arthur xlii Still Unknown Law of Rotation of Planets of Feeble Bright- ness, H. Deslandres, 360; Spectral Researches on the Rota- lion of the Planet Uranus, H. Deslandres, 572; Automatic Spectrographs Registering the Radial Movements and the Thickness of the Solar Chromosphere, H. Deslandres, 624 Spencer (L. J.), Reasons for the Non-existence of ‘* Kalgoor- lite” and *‘ Coolgardite”’ as Mineral Species, 215 Spencer’s (Stanley) Air Ship, 539 Spiderland, Rose Haig Thomas, 270 Spiders, the Common, of the United States, James H. Emerton, 630 Spirals, Vortex, Dr. J. Larmor, F.R S., 630 Spurge, Action of, on Salmonoid Fishes, H. M. Kyle, 45 Stafford (Mr.), Reactions between Acid and Basic Amides in Liquid Ammonia, 541 Stars: New Variable Stars, 68, 234; Naming of, 425 ; Variable Stars, 309; Notation of Variable Stars, 208 ; Observations of the Variable Star x* Cygni during 1899, 282; a New Algol Variable, 115; Mrs. Fleming, 331; A. Stanley Williams, 551, 638; Observations of Variable Stars of Long Period, 638 ; Prof. Vickering, 486; Catalogue of North Polar Stars, Prof. Pickering, 88 ; Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses, Francis Cranmer Penrose, 149; Observations of Nova Persei, 233, 252; Discoverer of Nova Persei, 282; Spectrum of Nova | Persei, Prof. Campbell and Mr. Wright, 425 ; the Changes in the Nebula surrounding Nova Persei, Prof. Louis Bell, 426 ; Distribution of the Stars in the Cape Photographic Durch- musterung, Dr. Downing, 238; Photographic Magnitude of Stars, Prosper Henry, 282; Rotation of the Brighter Fixed Stars, as a Whole, with Respect to the Fainter Stars, Sir David Gill, 282 ; Hong Kong Double Star Observations, W. Doberck, 282; Double Stars, Rev. T. E. Espin, 353; Cata- logue of New Double Stars, W. J. Hussey, 450 ; the Spectro- scopic Binary 8 Cephei, Prof. Frost and W. S. Adams, 352 ; Light of the Galaxy and Bright Stars, C. Easton, 3533 Sir David Gill’s New Theory of Stellar Movement, 515 ; Correc- lions to the Right Ascensions of the Principal Stars of the Berliner Jahrbuch, Senor Campos Rodrigues, 557 Statistics : the Mining Statistics of the World, Prof. C. Le Neve Foster, 163; Statistical Methods in Biology, Biometrika, 234; Trade Statistics, F. Evershed. 550, 607; Dr. F. Mollwo Perkin, 550; Changes in the Birth and Death Rates in Italy during the Last Forty Years, Prof. Giuseppe Sormani, 660 Steam: Liquid Fuel for Steam Purposes, J. S. S. Brame, 186; Use of Peat in Sweden as a Substitute for Coal for Steam Engines, 256; Steam Turbines, Hon. C. A. Parsons, 643 Steart 166 Stebbing (E. P.), the Habits of the Larvz and Adults of Sirex and Thalessa, 407 ; Steel: the Iron and Steel Institute, 62; Constituents of Hardened Steel, Prof. J. O. Arnold and Mr. McWilliam, 63 ; Brinell’s Researches on the Influence of Chemical Compo- sition on the Soundness of Steel Ingots, Axel Wahlburg, 63 ; Electrical Conductivity of Steel and Pure Iron, C. Benedicks, 160; the Compression of Steel during Solidification in the Ingot Mould, A. Harmet, 487; the Overheating of Mild Steel, Prof. Heyn, 487 Stein (M. A.), Preliminary Report on a Journey of Archzo- logical and Topographical Exploration in Chinese Turkestan, 284 Stellar Movement, Sir David Gill’s New Theory of, 515 Sterba (Jean), on an Oxycarbide of Cerium, 72; Cerium Sili- cide, 336 Stereoscope, Application of the, to Lantern Projections, J. Mace de Lépinay, 581 Stereoscopic Method of Photographic Surveying, H. G. Four- cadeat the South African Philosophical Society, 139 Sterneck (Dr. Jacob von), Monographie der Gattung Alectoro- lophus, 4 Stewart (Charles), Earthquake of May 28 at the Cape and | Coincident Meteorological Effects, 369 Stock (A.), Gaseous Antimony Hydride, 281 Stockem (L.), Apparatus for the Electrolytic Separation of Calcium from the Fused Chloride, 636 Stockman (Dr. Ralph), Therapeutic Value of Arsenic, 353 (F. A.), Overthrusts in the Braysdown Colliery, Index Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Stokes (Sir G. G.), Mathematical and Physical Papers, Prof. Horace Lamb, F.R.S., 49 Stomach, on the Movement and Innervation of the, Dr. Page May, 665 : Stonehenge and its Barrows, the Wiltshire Archzological and Natural History Magazine, William Long, F.S.A., Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 25 Stonehenge Bibliography Number, the Wiltshire Archeological and Natural History Magazine, W. Jerome Harrison, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 25 Stoney (Dr. Johnstone), on Substituting for Huyghen’s Wave Surface a Wave Film of Finite Thickness within which lee Phases of the Disturbance were Given Proper Values, 61 Stonyhurst College Observatory, Meteorological Observations. at, for 1901, 38 Storer (Prof. F. [1.), Mannan in Sugar-maple Trees, 541 Strasburger (Dr. Eduard), Das botanische Practicum, 605 Stress, Microscopic Effects of, on Platinum, Thomas Andrews, F.R.S., and Charles Reginald Andrews, 213 Stromeyer (C. E.), Mathematical Training, 103 peas (Mr.), Experiments with Wireless Telephony, 15 Submarine Cables : 148 Submarines, les Bateaux Sous-Marins K. D’Equevilley, 290 Sudd, the, of the White Nile, 666 Sulphur Contents of Slags, Baron Jiiptner, 63 Sun: Sun-pillar and Parhelion, Prof. Grenville A, J. Cole, 32; Sun-pillar of March 6, 38; Sun-pillar? Sir W. J. Herschel, Bart., 77 3 a Remarkable Solar Halo, Rev. T. C. Porter, 76 ; Voleanic Eruption in Java, Brilliant Sunset Glows in 1gor, and Probable Glows from the Eruption in Martinique, Henry Helm Clayton, 101; MKemarkable Sunsets at Madeira, F, W. T. Krohn, 199; A. R. Tankard, 254; Sunset Glows les Cables Sous-Marins, Alfred Gay, et les Submersibles, at Madeira, F. Krohn, 540; the Coloured Sunsets, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 222; J. Edmund Clark, 223 ; Peculiar Appearance at and after Sunset, Dr. C. B. Plow- right, 230; A. R. Jenkin, 230; Recent- Coloured Sunsets, 254; Sunset Effects, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 390; S. Pace, 390; Propagation of Electric Force from the Sun into Space, M. Nordmann, 136; Connection Between the Photographs of the Solar Corona and of the Entire Solar Chromosphere Obtained on the same Day, H. Deslandres, 167 ; the Sun- spot Curve and Epochs, 186; Mean Maximum Temperature and the Rainfall of Jamaica and Sunspot Frequency, Maxwell Hall, 206 ; Sunspots and Wind, Alex. B. MacDowall, 320: Apparent Deformations of the Sun’s Disc near the Horizon, 259; Height of Sunset Afterglows in June, 1902, Prof. A. S. Herschel, F.R.S., 294 ; Solar Phenomena during 1901, 401 ; Hypothesis on the Nature of Solar Prominences, Prof. W. H. Julius, 450; Instructions on the Observation of the Sun, 557 Sun-flower, Manufacture of Oil Cakes from the Seeds of the, 232 Surgery, the Rontgen Rays in Medicine and, as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Francis H. Williams, 438 Sanne (Dr.), the Use of Oxygen Inhalers in Connection with High Balloon Ascents, 306 Surveying : Stereoscopic Method of Photographic, H. G. Four- cade at the South African Philosophical Society, 139 ; Photo- graphy as an Aid to the Surveyor, Arthur O. Wheeler, 206 ; Photography as Applied to Architectural Measurement and Surveying, J. Bridges Lee at Society of Arts, 235 Sutton (J. R.), Cold Weather in South Africa, 247; a Series Related to Bernoulli's Numbers, 492 Sverdrup Arctic Expedition, Return of the, 542 Swedish Polar Expedition, Progress of, 421 Sweet Briar, the, asa Goat Exterminator, Sir W. T. Thiselton Dyer, F-R-S.; 31 Swift's Comet (a 1899), Reduction of Measures of, from Photo- graphs, with Portrait Lens of 30-inch Focus and 5-inch Aperture, Mr. Filon, 238 Swinhoe (R. C. J.), Prehistoric Man in Burma, 541 Swordy (R.), Remarkable Shower of Haiistones, 159 Sykes (Major Percy Molesworth), Ten Thousand Miles in Persia, or Eight Years in Iran, 418; the Geography of Southern Persia, 642 re Nature, | Dee. 18, 1902 Index xiii Symons’s Meteorological Magazine. Use of the Monthly Rainfall Tables, 114 Syria and Palestine, Lewis Bales Paton, 517 Syria, Remarkable Fossil Oysters from, Alfred Ely Day, 606 ; Bee Tit. 5.607 ; Taber (R. B.), the Leonid Shower, 662 Tank for Testing Ship Models for Resistance, the Proposed | Experimental, 128 Tankard (A. R.), Remarkable Sunsets at Madeira, 254 Taquin (A.), a Theory of Volcanoes, 233 Targioni-Tozzetti (Prof. Adolfo), Death of, 553 Tatnall (R. R.), a Laboratory Manual of Physics, 4 Taylor (Messrs. and Co.), Cooke Photographic Lenses, Method by which the Focal Length may be Reduced, 280 Taylor (R. L.), the Reaction of Iodine with Mercuric Oxide in Presence of Water, 648 Taylor (W.), the Science of the Workshop, 644 Teacher’s Manual of Object Lessons in Geography, Vincent T. | | Thiele (J.), the Solenogastree, 612 Murché, 270 Teaching of Geometry, Report on the, 201 Teaching of Zoology, an Attempt at Originality in the, Henry Sherring Pratt, 292 Teall (J. J. H., F.R.S.), Volcanic Dust from the West Indies, | | Thomas (Rev. C.), the ‘* Rotaplane,”’ 422 130 Teall (Mr.), on the Prolongation of the Ilighland Border Rocks into County Tyrone, 619 ; Proof Sheet of the ‘* Drift”” Edition of the Geolagical Map of Ireland, 619 Tebbuit’s (Mr.) Observatory at Windsor, N.S. W., 258 Technical Education at Manchester, Mr. Balfour, 633 Technology: Death of Dr. Henry Morton, 113; Death of * Frederick Augustus Abel, 483; Obituary Notice of, 492 Telegraphy : New System of Octoplex Typographic Telegraphy, Prof. H. A. Rowland, 134; Les Cables Sous-Marins, Alfred Gay, 148; the Receiver in Wireless Telegraphy, Edouard Branley, 143; New Form of Magnetic Detector, Recent | Transatlantic Signalling, G. Marconi, 182; Marconi’s Results in Day and Night Wireless Telegraphy, Prof. J. Joly, F.R.S., 199; Sir Oliver Lodge, F.R.S., 222; Note on a Magnetic Detector of Electric Waves which can be Employed as a Receiver for Space Telegraphy, G. Marconi, 334; a Note on the Effect of Daylight upon the Propagation ot Electromag- netic Impulses over Long Distances, G. Marconi, 335 ; New Marconi Signalling Station at Cape Breton, 485: Prof. A. Righi on Mr. Marconi, 581; Marconi Experiments on the Carlo Aiberio, 610; Wireless Telegraphy over 1600 English | Miles by*Land, 277; Armstrong-Orling System of Wireless Telegraphy,,327 ; a Simple Telephonic Receive? for Wireless Telegraphy, Dr. L. Bleekrode, 343 ; Time Signals by Wire- less Telegraphy, John Munro, 416; the De Forest System of Wireless Telegraphy, 446 Telephony : Experiments with Wireless, Mr. Stubblefield, 158 ; a Simple Telephonic Receiver for Wireless Telegraphy, Dr. L. Bleekrode, 343; on the Future of the Telephone in | the United Kingdom, J. E. Kingsbury, 644; Sir William | Preece. 644 Tempel-Swilt, Ephemeris for the Search of F. Bossert, 557 Tempel-Swift, the Periodical Comet of (1869-1880), 258 Temperature: the Measurement of High Temperatures and Stefan’s Law, M. Feéry, 47; Coefficients of the Cubical Expansion of Ice, Hydrated Salts, Solid Carbonic Acid and Other Substances at Low Temperatures, Prof. James Dewar, F.R.S., at Royal Society, 88 ; Electrical Resistance of Iron at Very Low Temperatures, E. Philip Harrison, 343 ; on the Measurement of Temperatures, Morris W. Travers, George Senter and Adrien Jaquerod, 382; Briickner’s Cycle and the Variation of Temperature in Europe, Alex. B. MacDowall, 77 ; Sea Temperature and Shore Climate, 116 ; Sea Temper- ature Variations on the British Coasts, 452; Temperatures of Kingston, Jamaica, Maxwell Hall, 159 , Termes Positifs, Lecons sur les Séries 4, Emile Borel, 5 Terraciano (Dr. Nicola), Decorative Plants for Gardens, 36 * Terrestrial Magnetism: Erdmagnetische Untersuchungung im Kaiserstuhl, G. Meyer, 324; the Relation Between the Solar Protuberances and Terrestrial Magnetism, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., 456 the ———— Comet, | Tessari (Prof. D.), la Costruzione degli Ingranaggi, 218 Texas, the Coal, Lignite and Asphalt Rocks of, W. B. Phillips, 379 Textile Fibres of Commerce, the, William S. Hannan, 338 Thames, the Naturalist on the, C. J. Cornish, 632 Theobald (F. W.), a Monograph of the Culicidze of the World, 123 Theology and Ethics of the Hebrews, Archibald Duff, 517 Therapeutics: Treatment of Malarial Fevers by Latent Arsenic, Armand Gautier, 47; Therapeutic Value of Arsenic, Dr Ralph Stockman, 353; Local Treatment of Kheumatism, Ch. Bouchard, 288 ; Therapeutic Value of Alkaline Waters of the Vichy Type, Prof. Liebreich, 353; the Rontgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Francis H. Williams, 438 Thermal Expansions at Low Temperatures, Prof. James Dewar, F.R.S., at Royal Society, 88 Thermodynamics, the Conservation of Weight and the Laws of, 102 Thermometers, Temperature Indicator for Use with Platinum, R. S. Whipple, 22 Thin Floating Cylinders, Prof. Thos. Alexander, 6 Thiselton-Dyer (Sir W. T., K.C.M.G., F.R.S.), the Sweet Briar as a Goat Exterminator, 31 ; the Life of Thomas Henry Huxley, Edward Clodd, 121 Thomas (Gordon C.), Novel Canal Lift, 350 Thomas (H. H.), Mineralogical Constitution of the Finer Material of the Bunter Pebble-bed in the West of England, 95 Thomas (Rose Haig), Spiderland, 270; Bipedal Locomotion of Lizards, 551 Thomas (V.), Volumetric Estimation of Iodides in the Presence of Chlorides and Bromides, 120; Utilisation of Mineral Substances by Grafted Plants, 624 Thompson (Prof. D’Arcy W.), the Hydrography of Faeroe- Shetland Channel, 654 Thompson (Prof. J. Arthur), the Seasonal Study of Natural History, 326 Thompson (J. Stuart), Scales of Fishes as an Index of Age, 4 Thompson (Prof. Silvanus P., F.R.S.), Resultant Tones and the Harmonic Series, 6; Obituary Notice of Prof. Alfred Cornu, 12; the First Magnetician, 249, 272 Thompson Yates Laboratories Report, the, 390 Thomson (Basil), Savage Island, an Account of a Sojourn in Niué and Tonga, 347 F Thomson (J. J.), Increase in the Electrical Conduotivity of Air Produced by its Passage Through Water, 143 Thorne (Dr.), Purification of Hydrochloric Acid from Arsenic, IG Thorpe (Prof. T. E., F.R.S.), Chemical Instruction and Chemical Industries in Germany, 32; Essays in Historical Chemistry, 365 ; Dangerous Trades, the Historical, Social and Legal Aspects of Industrial Occupations as Affecting Health, 433 dehy. Thovert (J.), a Consequence of the Kinetic Theory of Diffusion, 648 Throw-testing Machine for Reversals of Mean Stress, Osborne Reynolds, F.R.S., and J. H. Smith, 45 ay Thunderstorms, Apparatus for Registering, Father J. Fényi and Father Johann Schreiber, 65 | Thunderstorms and the Lunar Phases, Connection Between, V. Ventosa, 85 Tides in the Bay of Fundy, W. Bell Dawson, 85 ‘ Tides of Terrestrial Oceans, a New Theory of the, Rollin Harris, Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.S., 444 ; Tigers, How the Sabre-toothed, Killed their Prey, 357 Tilden (Prof.), Pinene Nitrosocyanide, 238 Time Signals by Wireless Telegraphy, John Munro, 416 Toads: Poison of the Toad, C. Phisalix and Gabriel Bertrand, 288; Bufonine, Gabriel Bertrand, 288 Tocher (J. F.), on the Pigmentation Survey of Scottish School Children, 663 Tommasina (Th.), the Mode of Formation of Kathode and Roéntgen Kays, 408 ; ‘ : Tonge (James, jun.), Shaw Prize for Industrial Hygiene: Awarded by the Society of Arts to, 377 xliv L[ndex Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 Topography ; Preliminary Report on a Journey of Archeo- logical and Topographical Exploration in Chinese Turkestan, M. A. Stein, 284 Toronto, Royal Society of Canada’s Meeting at, Universities in Relation to Research, 355 Torres (M.), Project for a Navigable Balloon with an Interior Keel, 422 Toula (Prof. F.), New Pleistocene Rhinoceros, 379 ; Corr., 399 Toxicology : Poison of the Toad, C. Phisalixand Gab, Bertrand, 288; Bufonine, Gabriel Bertrand, 288; a Kinase in Snake Poison, C. Delezenne, 408; the Elaboration of Venogen and of Venom in the Parotoid Gland of Vzfera Aspis, L. Launoy, 624 Traction, Electric, 513 Trade and Industry, the Influence of Education upon, Dr. F. Mollwo Perkin, 442 Trade Statistics, F. Evershed, 550, 607 ; Dr. F. Mollwo Perkin, 55° Trades, Dangerous, the Historical, Social and Legal Aspects of | Industrial Occupations as Affecting Health, Dr. T. E. Thorpe, F.R.S., 433 Trades’ Waste, its Treatment and Utilisation, W. Naylor, 41 Tere hays Exhibition at the Agricultural Hall, 272 Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, 165 Transiting Device, a New, M. B. Snyder, 613 Transparent Objects, a Method of Showing the Invisibility of, under Uniform Illumination, Prof. R. W. Wood, 102 Traquair (Dr. R. H.), on Fishes from the Lower Devonian Roofing Slate from Gemiinden, Germany, 620 Travers (Dr. Morris W.), Apparatus for Liquefying Hydrogen, 204 ; on the Measurement of Temperature, 382 Trees, Retention of Leaves by Deciduous, Jul. Wulff, 32; Wm. Gee, 32; G. W. Bulman, 56; P. T., 56; A. F. G., 344; Prof. W. R. Fisher, 370; Dr. D. T. Smith, 631 Trees in Prose and Poetry, 630 Tremataspide, Structure and Classification of William Patten, 184 Trephining in the South Seas, Rev. J. A. Crump, 136 Treves (Sir Frederick), the Romance of Medicine, 183 Tripartite Stroke of Lightning, a, W. H. Hall, 370 Trouton (F. T.), Experiment Suggested by the late Prof. Fitzgerald for Testing the Relative Motion of the Earth and the /Ether, 66 Trowbridge (C. C.), Effect of Wind on the Migration of Hawks, 612 Trowbridge (John), Spectra Arising from the Dissociation of Water Vapour and the Presence of Dark Lines in These Spectra, 310 Truth, the Criterion of Scientific, G. Shann, 221 Trypanosomes in Fishes, Multiplication of, A. Laveran and F. Mesnil, 216 Tuberculosis as a Disease of the Masses and How to Combat It, S. A. Knopf, 270 Tuckermann (Alfred), Index to the Literature of the Spectro- scope (1887-1900, both inclusive), 246 Tufts (F. L.), the Transmission of Sound through Solid Walls, 212 Tunnicliffe (Prof.), Synthetic Purgatives, 353 Turkestan, Recent Discoveries in Chinese, Prof. M. Winternitz, 284 Tum (C.), Fall of a Yellow Powder on June rand 2 during a Thunderstorm, 157 Turner (Dr. Dawson), Mechanical Break for Induction Coils, 21; the Electrical Resistance of the Blood, 127 Turner (Prof. H. H., F.R.S.), the Astrographic Chart, 273 Turner the; Prof Relatively to the Fainter Stars, 640 Turner (Dr. John), on some New Features in the Intimate Structure of the Human Cerebral Cortex, 665 Tyler (I. A.), a Junior Chemistry, 606 Types of British Plants, C. S. Colman, 458 Typhoon at Yokohama on September 29, 553 Uganda, the “‘ Sleeping Sickness ” United States, America: Report on a Bill for of, 484 Pisciculture in the, Earl Grey, 65; Adoption of the Metric System in the, 1 (Prof.), on an Attempt Made at Oxford to Verify the | Suggestion that the Bright Stars as a Whole are Rotating | the Insect-enemies of the Pine in the Black Hills Forest Reserve, A. D. Hopkins, 160; Reports of United States Coast Survey, Rollin Harris, Prof. G. H. Darwin, F.R.S., 444; the Common Spiders of the United States, James Hl. Emerton, 630; Working Plans for Forests in Arkansas, F. E. Olmsted, 661; Timber Resources of Nebraska, W. L. Hall, 661; ; Magnetic Work of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, Outlined for July 1, 1902-June 30, 1903, 666 Universities: the Colleges of the University of London, 10; University College and the University of London, 59; Astronomy in the University of London, Prof. Karl Pearson, F.R.S., 174; University Intelligence, 20, 44, 69, 92, 117, 141, 163, 190, 212, 236, 261, 287, 310, 333, 359, 381, 407, 431, 455, 488, 515, 543, 571, 600, 623, 647, 670; the Royal Visit to the University of Wales, Prof. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., 61; the Future of the Victoria University, Prof. Arthur Schuster, F.R.S., 252, 319 ; Prof. Arthur Smithells, F.R.S., 319, 343; Report on University Colleges, 332 ; Universities in Relation to Research, Prof. James Loudon at Royal Society of Canada’s Meeting at Toronto, 358; Matriculation Re- 158; quirements in Scottish Universities, Prof. John Perry, F.R.S., 654; the Neglect of Anthropology in British Universities, ‘‘ Anthropotamist,” 654 Upland Game-birds, E. Sandys and T. S. Van Dyke, 652 Uranium, Redetermination of the Atomic Weight of, Prof. T. W. Richards and Mr. Merigold, 208 Uranus, the Satellites of Saturn and, Dr. J. J. See, 380 Ussher (R. J.), on rhe Avifauna of Ireland as Affected by its Geography, 641 Vaccination League, Formation of an Imperial, 397 Valencies, Atoms and, J. Fraser, 68 Van Aubel (Edm..), the Indices of Refraction of Liquid Mixtures, 47 Van Dyke (T. S.), Upland Game-birds, 652 Van Lint (Dr. A.), Qu’est-ce qui Détermine le Sexe? 437 Vanne, the Prediction of the Minimum Yield of the Sources of the, Edmond Maillet, 95 Vapour Pressures and Boiling Points of Mixed Liquids, Dr. Young, F.R.S., 70 Variable Stars: New, 68, 234; the Naming of New Variable Stars, 425; New Algol Variable, 115; Mrs. Fleming, 331 ; A. Stanley Williams, 515, 638; Variable Stars, 309; Notation of Variable Stars, 208 ; Observations of the Variable Star x° Cygni during 1899, 282; Observations of Variable Stars of Long Period, Prot. Pickering, 486 ; Observations of Fifty-eight Long-period Variables, 638 Variable Velécities in Line of Sight, New Discoveries of, 425 Variation, Colour, in Pigeons, F. Finn, 157 Variation of Common Copper Butterfly, 459, 555 Variation, Germinal and Environmental, J. C. Ewart, F.R.S., 209 Vaughan (Arthur), the Jurassic Strata Cut Through by the South Wales Direct Line between Filton and Wootton Bassett, 263 Vaulx (Comte de la), Aéronautics, 447 Vegetable Electricity, Ae, Dr. Augustus D. Waller, 491, 549; Prof. Jagadis Chunder Bose, 549 Velocity Diagrams, their Construction and Uses, Prof. C. W. MacCond, 269 | Venezuela, Volcanic Eruption in, 484 | Ventosa (V.), Connection between Thunderstorms and the Lunar Phases, 85 Vermorel (M.), New Method for the Destruction of the Pyralis and other Noxious Insects, 288 Verneau (R.), a New Type of Human Fossil, 24 Vernon (Dr. H. M.), Zymogens and Enzymes of the Pancreas, 87 Vibration of the Violin, the, W. B. Coventry, 150 Vibration of Railway Bridges, on the Deflection and, Dr. F. Omori, 322 Vibrations, Earthquake-like, Caused by the Firing of Heavy Guns at the Mouth of the Medway, 230 | Victoria University, the Future of the, Prof. Arthur Schuster, PuRiSiy w252: Prof. 343 319; Arthur Smithells, F.R.S., 319, ——— Nature, | Dec. 18, 1902 Index xlv Vidal (E.), the Use of Hail Rockets, 312 Vignon (Leo), Saponification of Nitric Esters, 624 Vignon’s (Dr. P.) Researches and the “ Holy Shroud,” 13 Vincent (C. A.), on a General Numerical Connection between the Atomic Weights, 143 Vincent (J. H.), Redetermination of the Density and Coefficient of Cubical Expansion of Ice at 0° C., 611 Violin, the Vibration of the, W. B. Coventry, 150 Virchow (Rudolph Ludwig Karl), Death of, 483; Obituary Notice of, 551 Visual Space Perception, Studies in Auditory and, Arthur Henry Pierce, Prof. Alex. Crum Brown, F.R.S., 73 “*Vitalised” ? Can Carbon Dioxide be, Prof. R. F.R.S., 492 Vitality : Religio Medici, &c., 457 Viticulture: Quality of a Wine Depends upon the Yeast which Grows Spontaneously upon the Grape, A. Rosenstiehl, 192 ; Action of Sulphurous Acid upon Oxydase and on the Colour- ing Matter of Red Wine, A. Bouffard, 192 ; New Method for the Destruction of the Pyralis and other Noxious Insects, MM. Vermorel and Gastin, 288; Production of Sparkling Médoc, 329 ; Method of Concentrating Wine, MM. Baudoin and Schribaux, 360 Vocal System Based on the Furdamental Laws of Language, the, G. Lionel Wright, 271 Vogel (Prof. H. C.), the Orion Nebula and Movement in the Line of Sight, 18; Radial Velocity of the Orion Nebula, Meldola, 309 Vogel (Wolfgang), Schule des Automobil Fahrers, 313 Voice Production, Health, Speech and Song, a Practical Guide to, Jutta Bell-Ranske, Dr. B. Moore, 388 Volcanoes : the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in the West Indies, 53> 50, 79, 132, 153, 178, 203, 229, 635; Prof. J. Milne, 56, 107, 151, 370; R. T. Hill, 485; Prof. I. C. Russell, 485; Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Robert T. Hill, 370; Prof. I. C. Russell, 372 ; Royal Society’s Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Dr. Tempest Anderson, Dr. J. S. Flett, 402; Eruptions and Earthquakes during Week Ending Sep- tember 1 in the West Indies and Elsewhere, 446 ; Volcanic Dust from the West Indies, J. J. H. Teail, F.R.S., 130; Rev. T. C. Porter, 131; J. D. Falconer, 132; Mont Pelée Eruption and Dust Falls, Dr. William J. S. Lockyer, 53; Mont Pelée and After-glow, F. C. Constable, 79; Fresh Eruptions of Mont Pelée, 278, 580, 659 ; Eruption of Mont Pelée heard at Maracaibo, Venezuela, E. H. Plumacher, 554; Notes on the Recent Eruptions of Mont Pelee, Dr. H. A. Alford Nicholls, 638; Rocks of Mont Pelée, J. S. Diller, 372; on the Rocks Thrown Out by the Actual Eruption of Mont Pelée, A. Lacroix, 544; Enclosures in the Andesites from Mont Pelée, A. Lacroix, 572 ; Magnetic Disturbances during the Eruption of Mont Pelée on May 8, Dr. L. A. Bauer, 421; Last Days of St. Pierre, Very Rev. G. Parel, 372; Effects of the Recent Voitcanic Eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent, H. Hesketh Bell, 306; the Mission to Martinique, M. Lacroix, 336; the Eruption of Martinique, 538; A. Lacroix, M. Rollet de l’Isle and M. Giraud, 488, 516 ; Phenomena Observed at Zi-Ka-Wei, China, during the Mar- tinique Eruption, M. de Moidrey, 408 ; Effects Observed at St. Kitts during the Volcanic Eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent, Dr. W. Branch, 378 ; Composition of the Vol- canic Dust at Barbadoes on May 7 and 8, 204; Eruptions of St. Vincent Volcano and Earthquake, 327 ; Eruption in St. Vincent, Captain Calder, 373 ; T. McGregor McDonald, 373; Eruptions in Venezuela and St. Vincent, 484; Volcanic Eruption in Java, Brilliant Sunset Glows in Igo1, and Probable Glows from the Eruption in Martinique, Henry Helm Clayton, ror ; a Theory of Volcanoes, A. Taquin, 233 ; Volcanic Dust, Agricultural Use of, 306 ; Volcanic Disturb- ances in Spain, the Azores and Costa Rica, 327 ; Periodicity of Volcanic Eruptions and Earthquakes, Rev. T. E. Espin, 353; Possible Connection between Volcanic Eruption and Sun-spot Phenomena, H. I. Jensen, 360; Volcanic Eruption at Tori Shima, 396; Activity of the Rooang Volcano in Java, 396; Reports of Eruptions and Earth- quake Shocks, 421; the Lava-lake of Kilauea, S. E. Bishop, 441 ; Activity of Various Volcanoes, 511; Activity of Mount Chullapata, 553; Recent Sunset Effects and Those which Followed the Eruption of Krakatoa, A. W. Clayden, 659 Voltameter, Accuracy of an Improved Form of Silver, T. W. Richards and G. W. Heimrod, 158 Vortex Spirals, Dr. J. Larmor, F.R.S., 630 Waddell (IL. A.), the Tribes of the Brahmaputra Valley, 91 Wahl (A.), Condensation of Nitromethane with Aromatic Aldehydes, 288; Method of Gradual Synthesis of Aldehydes, 120; Synthesis of Fatty Aldehydes, 137 Wahlburg (Axel), Brinell’s Researches on the Influence of Chemical Composition on the Soundness of Steel Ingots, 63 Wales, Ordnance Survey of England and, 341 Wales, Marine Biology in, G. W. Duff Assheton-Smith, 282 Wales, the Royal Visit to the University of, Prof. G. H. Bryan, BARES: Ox Walker (James, F.R.S.), Elementary Inorganic Chemistry, 170 Walker (Sydney F.), Coal Cutting by Machinery in the United Kingdom, 414 Wall (E. J.), the Dictionary of Photography, 368 Waller (Augustus D., F.R.S.), on Skin Currents, Part iii., the Human Skin, 455; Ae Vegetable Electricity, 491, 549 “ Waltzing Mice” of Japan and China, Dr. K. Kishi, 114 Ward (Prof. Marshall), Rust-fungus, 210 Washington, D.C., the Carnegie Institution of, Dr, Daniel C. Gilman, 548 Water : la Question de |’Eau potable devant les Municipalités, P. Guichard, 28 Water, Diagrams of Mean Velocity of Uniform Motion of, in Open Channels based on the Formula of Ganguillet and Kutter, Prof. Irving P. Church, 439 Water, Ebullition of Rotating, T. C. Porter, 118 Water-power, the Utilisation in France of, for Industrial Purposes, Henri Desmarest, 485 Water-supply, Prof. William P. Mason, 458 Watkins (Alfred), the Watkins Manual of (Photographic) Exposure and Development, 245 Watson (A. T.), on the Errant Habits of the Onuphidze (Polychzeta), 641 Watson (W. F.), Elementary Experimental Chemistry, 170 Watts (Prof. W. W.), Charnwood Forest, 642 Waves and Sound, W. C. L. van Schaik, 268 Weather Bureau Officials, Convention of, at Milwaukee, Weber (Pro:. Robert), a Graduated Collection of Problems in Electricity, 317 eos Webb (Wilfred Mark), the ‘* Nature Study » Exhibition, 224 wetber (Dr. Herbert J.), Germination of the Pollen Grain and the Series of Events Leading to Fertilisation in Two Species of Zamia, 67 Webster’s International Dictionary of the English Language, 222 Wedding (Prof.), Photometric Tests of the Bremer Arc Lamp, 611 Wedekind (E.), a New Isomerism in Asymmetric Nitrogen, 192 Wecccheider (R.), the Rate of Hydrolysis of Sulphonic Acid Esters, 308 ; Weight, Conservation of, and the Laws of Thermodynamics, 102 Weight? Does Chemical Transformation Influence, Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S., 58 a Weiss (Prof. F. E.), Welwitschtia mirabilis, 23 f Welch (R.), New Path along the Goban’s Cliffs, 417 ; ‘‘ Sports of Helix nemoralis, 612 ‘ ‘ ‘ Welch (Prof.), Recent Studies of Immunity with Special Reference to their Bearing on Pathology, 611 Wellenlehre und Schall, W. C. L. van Schaik, 268 F Weltherrin und ihr Schatten, Die, Ein Vortrag ueber Energie und Entropie, Dr. Felix Auerbach, 414 Wesché (Walter , Relations between the Diptera and Those of Other Insects, 512 West (C. A.), Phosphorus Tetroxide, 214 West (Prof. G. S.), Distribution of Pithophora, 296 West Indies: the Recent Volcanic Eruptions in the, 56, 79, 178, 203, 204, 635; Prof. J. Milne, F.R.S., 56, 107, 151, - 370; Prof. Israel C. Russell, 372, 485; R. T. Hill, 485 ; Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Robert T. Hill, 370 ; Royal Society Report on the West Indian Eruptions, Dr. Tempest Anderson and Dr. J. S. Flett, 402 ; Volcanic Dust Mouth-organs of xlvi Index H. Teall, F.R.S., 130; Rev. 132; Agricultural from the West Indies, J. J. TC. Porters sine D. Falconer, Teaching in West Indian Isiands, 539 Westell (W. P.), the Early Life of the Young Cuckoo, 574 Wheeler (Arthur O.), Photography as an Aid to the Surveyor, 200 Whipple (R. S.), Temperature Platinum Thermometers, 22 White Nile, Bird Hunting on the, 11. F. Witherby, 52 White (S. A. F.), the Compound Pendulum, 22 Whitmell (C. T.), Saturn Visible through the Cassini Division, $7, 296 Whittaker (E. T.), Solutions of the Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical Physics, 618 Wigham (J. R.), a New Flashing Lighthouse Light, 644 Wild (Dr. H. von), Death of, 511 Wild Fruits of the Country Side, F. Edward Hulme, F.S.A., 653 wild Sheep, a Rare, R. Lydekker, F.R.S., 32 Williams (A. Stanley), a New Algol Variable, 515, 638 Williams (Dr. Francis H.), the Rontgen Rays in Medicine and Surgery as an Aid in Diagnosis and as a Therapeutic Agent, Indicator for Use with 438 Williams (Henry S.), Fossil Faunas and their Use in Correlating Geological Formations, 212 Willis (H. G.), Algebra, 149 Willis (J.), Magic Squares, 78 Willis (J. C.), Report of Royal Botanic Gardens, Ceylon, 155 Willkomm (Moritz), Grundziige d. Pflanzenverbreitung auf d. iberische Halbinsel, 27 Willmore (Charles), Death of, 183 Willoughby (Edward F.), Hygiene for Students, 342 Wilson (C. T, R.), Radio-active Rain, 143 Wilson (Prof. Ernest), the Dissipation of Energy by Electric Currents Induced in an Iron Cylinder when Rotated in a Magnetic Field, 334 ; Experiments on the Use of a Magnetic Detector in Space Telegraphy, 618 ; Electrical Conductivity of Certain Aluminium Alloys Exposed to the London Atmosphere, 644; the Physical Properties of Certain Aluminium Alloys, and Notes on Aluminium Conductors, 655 : Wilson (Dr. W. E.), on a Bolometer Arranged to Record Solar Radiation, 619 Wiltshire (Rev. Dr.), Death of, 658 Wiltshire Archeological and Natural History Magazine, the, Stonehenge and its Barrows, William Long, F.S.A., Stone- henge Bibliography Number, W. Jerome Harrison, Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C B., F.R'S., 25 Wind, Sunspots and, Alex. B. MacDowall, 320 Wind Velocity and Fluctuations of Water Level on Lake Erie, Prof. Alfred J. Henry, 256 Wine, Methods of Concentrating, M. F. Garrigou, 456 Winternitz (Prof. M.), Recent Discoveries in Chinese Turkestan, 284 Wireless Telegraphy : the Receiver in, Edouard Branley, 143 ; New Form of Magnetic Detector, Recent Transatlantic Signalling, Mr. Marconi, 182 ; Marconi’s Results in Day and Night, Prof. J. Joly, F.R.S., 199 ; Sir Oliver Lodge, F.R.S., 222; a Note on the Effect of Daylight upon the Propagation of Electromagnetic Impulses over Long Distances, G. Marconi, 335 ; New Marconi Signalling Station at Cape Breton, 485 ; Marconi Experiments on the Car/o Alberto, 610 ; Prof. A. Righi on Mr. Marconi, 581 ; Note on a Magnetic Detector of Electric Waves which can be Employed as a Receiver for Space Telegraphy, G. Marconi, 334; Wireless Telegraphy over 1600 English Miles by Land, 277; Armstrong-Orling System of Wireless Telegraphy, 327; a Simple Telephonic Receiver for Wireless Telegraphy, Dr. L. Bleekrode, 343 ; Time Signals by Wireless Telegraphy. John Munro, 416; the De Forest System of Wireless Telegraphy, 446 Wireless Telephony, Experiments with, Mr. 158 Wislicenus (Walter F.), Astronomischer Jahresbericht, 198 Witherby (I. F.), Bird Hunting on the White Nile, 52 Woking Junction, Aérial Luggage Transmitter at, 554 Wolcott (E. R.), on the Sensitiveness of the Coherer, 158 Wolf (Prof. Max), New Minor Planets, 542 Wood (Francis), Sanitary Engineering, a Practical Manual Stubblefield, Nature, Dec. 18, 1902 of Town Drainage and Sewage and Refuse Disposal, 173 Wood (Prof. R. W.), Solid Carbon Dioxide Obtained from Sparklets, 15; Prisms and Plates for Showing Dichromatism, 31; a Method of Showing the Invisibility of Transparent Objects under Uniform Illumination, 102; Uneven Distribu- tion of Light in a Diffraction Grating Spectrum, 262 Woodhull (John F.), Elements of Physics, 458 ; Physical Ex- periments, 455 Woodward (Horace B.), on Bagshot Strata at Combe Pyne Hill, Dorset, 620 ' Woodward (Dr. Smith), on Lower Carboniferous Fish Fauna from Broken River, Victoria, 620 Worcester, Wind-force Experiments on H.M.S., 119 Worlds, Other, Garrett P. Serviss, 221 Wright (G. Lionel), the Vocal System Based on the Funda- mental Laws of Language, 271 Wright (Joseph), on the Discovery of Marine Foraminifera in Boulder-clay from various Districts in Ireland and Else- where, 619 Wright (W. B.), Results of Glacial Drainage round Montpelier Hill, Co. Dublin, 311 Wright (Mr.), the Spectrum of Nova Persei, 425 Wulff (Jul.), Beechen Hedges on Elevated Ground, 32 Wiillenweber (F. W.), Diagram der electrischen und magnet- ischen Zustande und Bewegungen, 76 Yeruvas, the Coorgs and, an Ethnological Contrast, T. H. Holland, 91 Yokohama, Cool Summer at, Capt. H. J. Shaw, 554 Yokohama, Typhoon at, on September 29, 553 Yoshitake (I5.), Constituents of Gambia and Acacia Catechus, 214 Young (A. V. E.), the Elementary Principles of Chemistry, 519 Young (Dr., F.R.S.), Preparation of Absolute Alcohol from Strong Spirit, 70; Properties of Mixtures of Lower Alcohols with Water, 70; Properties of Mixtures of the Lower Alco- hols with Benzene and with Renzene and Water, 70; Frac- tional Distillation as a Method of Quantitative Analysis, 70; Vapour Pressures and Boiling Points of Mixed Liquids, 7oO Yukon Gold-fields, Prof. H. A. Miers, 86 Zaky (Aly), Influence of Lecithin on the Development of the Skeleton and of Nervous Tissue, 120 Zamia, Germination of the Pollen Grain and the Series of Events Leading to Fertilisation in Two Species of, Dr. Herbert J. Webber, 67 Zanzibar, Coral Reefs of, C. Crossland, 166 Zebras, Grevy’s, in the Regent’s Park Gardens, 512 Zeeman (Prof.), Magneto-optical Rotation in the Interior of Absorption Bands, 622 Zeuthen (H. .G.), Histoire des Mathématiques dans l]’Antiquité et le Moyen Age, 199 Ziegler (Dr. Julius), Death of, 579 Ziegler (L.), Zur Metapbysik des Tragischer, 342 Zinno (Prof.), Synthesis of Tartaric Acid for Production on Large Scale, 330 Zittel (Karl Alfred von), History of Geology and Palzeontology to the End of the Nineteenth Century, 242 Zobel (Dr.), Researches on Glycogen, 666 Zoology: Additions to the Zoological Gardens, 17, 40, 68, 87, 115, 138, 161, 186, 208, 233, 258, 281, 309, 331, 352, 380, 401, 425: 450, 486, 514, 541, 557, 552, 613, 638, 661 ; An- niversary Meeting of the Zoological Society, 37 ; Zoological Society, 46, 71, 239, 263 ; the Zoological Society’s New Ape- house, 406; Grevy’s Zebra in the Regent's Park Gardens, 512; the Larger Mammals of Patagonia, [lesketh Prichard, 46; Abnormal Dentition in a Lemur, Prof. G. Elliot Smith, 71; Cerebellum of the Lemurs, Dr. Elliot Smith, 94; the Flying Lemur, Dr. H. C. Chapman, 351; Collateral Budding in Two Annelids, Dr. H. P. Johnson, 86; Brain of the Elephant Shrew, Dr. Elliot Smith, 94; Shoulder-girdle of Dasyurus and Perameles, Dr. R. Broom, 94 ; Two Species of Astralium from Port Jackson, H. Leighton Kesteven, 96; ee ee Se TN Nature, | Dec. 18, 1902 Index xl vii the ‘* Waltzing Mice” of Japan and China, Dr. K. Kishi, 114; Report of the Zoological Society of Philadelphia, 159 ; a Peculiarity of the Cerebral Commissures in Certain Marsu- pialia, Prof. G. Elliot Smith, 165 ; Law of Adaptive Radia- tion among Mammals, Prof. H. F. Osborn, 184; Brussels Okapi Specimens, Dr. Forsyth Major, 185; New York Zoological Park, 232; Traité de Zoologie Concrete, Yves Delage and Edgard Hérouard, Dr. G. C. Bourne, 267 ; the Zoological Gardens at Ghizeh, Egypt, Captain Stanley S. Flower, 280 ; Additions to the Zoological Gardens at Ghizeh, 330; a Course in Invertebrate Zoology, Henry Sherring Pratt, 292 ; the Cocoanut-crab, Dr. R. Horst, 308 ; Instances of Ab- normality in Mammals, F. Howe, 351; Prof. O. C. Bradley, 351; Elliot Smith, 351 ; Matiére Médicale Zoologique, Histoire des Drogues d’Origine Animale, H. Beauregard, 363; the Cambridge Natural History, Mammalia, F. E. Beddard, 373; Death of Prof. Adolfo Targioni-Tozzetti, 553; Animal Forms, a Second Book of Zoology, Dr. David S. Jordan and Prof, Harold Heath, 605 ; the Solenogastre, J. Thiele, 612; the Degenerate Eyes of Lizard Rhineura floridina, Prof. C. H. Eigenmann, 636; the Larger Apes, Orthograde, Dr. A. Keith, 661 RICHARD CLAY AND SONS, LTD., LONDON AND BUNGAY. A WEEKLY ILLUSTRATED JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. “© To the solid ground Of Nature trusts the mind which builds tor aye.” —W ORDSWORTH. THURSDAY, MAY 1, 1902. ALCOHOLIC FERMENTATION. Manual of Alcoholic Fermentation and the Allied In- dustries. By Charles G. Matthews, F.I.C., F.C.S., of cells, and is in any case due to an enzyme. “ Con- tact” reactions undoubtedly take place amongst organic as well as inorganic compounds, and really the term “catalytic” is very useful. It would, however, be unfair not to acknowledge that such discrepancies have been | observed between the courses followed, on the one hand, &c. Pp. xv + 295. (London: Edward Arnold, 1902.) | Price 7s. 6d. net. M®* MATTHEWS has written an eminently read- able book, containing a large amount of useful information. The work is divided into twelve chapters, to which eight appendices are added ; it is prefixed by a good and thorough table of contents and finishes with a capital index. The first chapter deals with ‘‘ Alcoholic Fermentation. General Considerations leading to Special Ones.” In this chapter we have an account of the earlier work of Leuwenhoek, Fabroni, Gay-Lussac, Cagniard de Latour, Schwan, Turpin, &c., and the theories held by Liebig, Fremy and Traube. The work of Reess and of Pasteur receives due acknowledgment, and towards the end of the chapter we find a summary of the various views which have been held with regard to fermentation. “(1) Fermentation as an effect resulting from the | growth or vegetation of an organism. (The accepted theory as established by scientific knowledge.) **(2) A mechanical theory or theory of chemical de- composition. (Liebig’s theory, and that of the Liebig school.) ““(3) A theory of so-called catalytic action or decom- position by contact—presumably of the ferment and fermentable substance. ignorance of the true action.)” The last remark in brackets appears somewhat hard on | members of the catalytic school, and the following | statement, “that apart from the results of the vital processes of the yeast organism or other living cells, the production of alcohol from a saccharine liquid is unknown ” (p. 8), during the hydrolysis of esters by mineral acids and, on the other, fermentation by yeast as to lead to the idea that the two processes are fundamentally different. The recent work of Adrian Brown on “enzyme action” (Chem. Soc. Trans., \xxxi. 373), and of Horace Brown and Glen- dinning on the “hydrolysis of starch by diastase” (cbid., p. 388) prove clearly, however, that enzymes working in dilute solutions (2. when not overloaded) follow the law of mass action, so that one must conclude that processes of this nature are fundamentally as mechanical as the inversion of cane sugar by a mineral acid. Chapter ii. deals chiefly with the morphology of yeast, whilst chapter iii., on the “‘Saccharomycetes and other Organisms acting as Alcoholic Ferments,” gives a clear and full account of the various species of yeast which have been identified, the chapter ending with an account of mycoderma vini, mucor racemosus, &c., and the con- ditions under which they can behave as alcoholic ferments. Chapter iv., on “The Effect of Physical and - Chemical Influences on the Yeast Organism,” deals with (An elegant mode of expressing | seems scarcely justifiable in the light of Buchner’ re- | searches. In fact, the references to Buchner’s work on pp. 47 and 121-122 show that the author quite accepts the fact that fermentation may take place in the absence | NO. 1696, VOL. 66] the food material of yeast, the heat developed during fermentation, and the oféz7um temperature, and naturally leads to a further consideration of theories which have been put forward as to the fermentative action of yeast and to mention of Buchner’s zymase. Referring to this, the author justly remarks “ that though it pushes the cause of alcoholic fermentation a little further back, there is no reason to believe that Buchner’s zymase could be produced by other than vital agencies or in association with living matter.” This does not, however, preclude zymase from acting in a mechanical manner, neither is it Jroved that some inorganic ferment might not have somewhat the same effect, however improbable this appears in the light of present knowledge. Chapter v., entitled “ Chemical Science,” one cannot B to help thinking would have been better left out. To attempt to cover the range of chemical science from atoms and molecules to the elements of organic chemistry in so short a space is practically impossible, nor should it be necessary in a technical work. Moreover, if such matter appears to the author de- sirable, he should take especial pains to be accurate. Chemists will take exception to N,O, as the formula of | nitric oxide, also to the triad radical (CH)” being called Sormyl. The footnote to p. 75 is not quite clear, whilst p. 76 contains the following :— gt) H © and “ee H H—C_N=C, H belonging to the class called cyanoparaffins.” On p. 78 we are informed that “ethers are a class of compounds bearing the same relation to the alcohols that the metallic oxides do to their hydrates.” “The Carbohydrates” are described in chapter vi., and the author deals in succession with the pentoses and hexoses, passing on to the di-, tri- and poly-saccharides. The subject of the starches occupies several pages and is illustrated by well-executed plates. In considering the question of yeasts, no one can fail to be struck with the influence the scientific work of Pasteur, Hansen and others has had on the fermentation industries, and chapter vi. perhaps brings home to the reader even more forcibly the powerful effect the brewing industry has had in promoting the scientific examination of the carbo- hydrates. “ Nitrogenous Substances and the Nutrition of Yeast” | form the subject-matter of the next chapter, and albu- menoids, amido-substances and enzymes are described in | succession. A few misprints have occurred amongst the formulz of the amido-acids, e.g. amido-acetic acid, glutamine and tyrosine. Generally the chapter is clear and interesting ; the author has no need to apologise for the space devoted to the topic. With chapter viii. we come to the first practical applica- tion of fermentation, and in eighteen pages we are made | acquainted with the chief features in the manufacture of wine, including cider and perry. But it is in the suc- ceeding two chapters (ix. and x.) that the author is really in his element, and devotes upwards of fifty pages to the science and practice of brewing. Chapter ix. is occupied with malting and the physiological and chemical changes involved ; the next chapter leads us by all the inter- mediate stages from the mash-tun to the barrel, and gives much information on the influence of the composition of brewery waters and the courses of different fer- mentations. NO. 1696, VOL. 66] NATURE [May 1, 1902 Chapter xi. deals with “ Fermentation from the Dis- tiller’s Point of View,” and is all too short (twenty-seven pages) to give anything like a complete account of this extensive and important industry. The author confines himself to the manufacture of pot-still whisky and “patent-still spirit.” With regard to the former, practice varies so largely that the description given must not be taken as typical of the working of a// malt distilleries. One may note the temperature at which the “sparge” is applied ; 170° is frequently exceeded, and the use of stirrers in wash stills by no means universal, especially where small stills are employed. ‘“ Maturation,” accord- ing to the author, takes place “chiefly by a selective absorption which the wood of the cask exercises, and also by some little oxidation and | etherification of the higher alcohols” ; certainly a more definite and rational view than that which supposes new whisky to contain objectionable substances which, as the reviewer has sometimes been assured, break up into substances communicating a fine flavour to old spirit. The manufacture of patent still spirit as carried out in this country is next described, and we then pass on to continental processes. German methods deservedly re- ceive a large amount of attention, and the author draws particular attention to the preparation of the “ Vor- maisch” by sowing vigorous yeast in a strong wort, slightly acidified by a small lactic fermentation and sub- sequently sterilised. The ripe “ Hefegut” so obtained is used for pitching the chief mash; the effect of the small quantity of lactic acid is not only favourable to the yeast, but restricts the growth of bacteria. Mr. Matthews mentions the fact that artificial acidification has been frequently resorted to; the subject has been recently ventilated by Dr. Lange before the Verein der Spiritus- Fabrikanten. Dr. Lange states that hydrochloric acid at first gives excellent results ; unfortunately, the bacteria soon become accustomed to it, as they also probably would to sulphuric acid. Butyric acid appears to be efficient if properly handled, the yeast remaining cleaner. The course of fermentation is illustrated by diagrams taken from Marcker’s “ Spiritusfabrikation.” One wishes that this work had also been drawn upon for diagrams of recent German distillery plant, Ilge’s automaton, for example. The last chapter (xii.) deals with the cultivation of pure yeast and the brewing of “lager-beer,’ the com- parative uselessness, and perhaps harmfulness, of en- deavouring to brew English beers with pure cultivations being well brought out in the last few pages. The eight appendices are chiefly concerned with laboratory instructions; D, E and F are, however, of more general interest, since they deal respectively with conjugating yeast, the nutrition of yeast, and the com- bined action of diastase and yeast on starch granules. Mr. Matthews is to be congratulated on the way in which he has treated his subject, but the reviewer cannot help thinking that if he gave the space devoted to matters of general chemical knowledge to the subjects of wine and the preparation of the purer forms of alcohol, the book would gain in usefulness. Nsths Jats May 1, 1902 ] NATURE 3 THE GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY OF CELEBES. Materialen zur Naturgeschichte der Insel Celebes, Band iv.—Entwurf einer geographisch-geologischen Be- schreibung der Insel Celebes. By Dr. Paul Sarasin and Dr. Fritz Sarasin. Pp. xi + 344 + 28; 13 plates. (Wiesbaden : Kreidel, r901.) Price Mk. 50. HIS, the fourth volume of the series which the authors have devoted to the natural history of Celebes, is a welcome addition to our knowledge of the East Indian Archipelago. The recent geological history of the island, and the light thrown upon it by the distri- bution of the animals and plants of the region, has already formed the subject of a special memoir. Here we have a description of the surface features and configuration of Celebes so far as that has been explored, a record of many interesting observations, geographical and geological, made during several years spent in travel in nearly every quarter of the island, with petrographical notes on the rock specimens collected (including a special chapter by Prof. C. Schmidt), a sketch map on the scale of I in 2,000,000 and tables of the observed altitudes of many important stations. The outline of the island, sinuous and branching, is the external expression of its geological structure. A folded mountain chain, of which some peaks rise to 5000 or 6000 feet above the sea, forms the axis or backbone of Celebes. It is not simple, but consists of several parallel ranges, more or less intermittent, with longitudinal valleys between them. These valleys appear to be synclinal or to be due in some cases to depression between parallel lines of fault which trend with the folds. Not much is known about the mountainous interior of the island, but from the specimens of rocks collected, which include granite, gneiss, mica schist, chlorite schist, epidote glaucophane schist, quartzite and crystalline limestones, it is certain that there is a large development of metamorphic rocks. No fossils have been obtained from this series, but the authors believe that some of the crystalline limestones may be of Jurassic age. This axis of metamorphic rocks is bent almost at a right- angle where it crosses the equator, and in the interior of the bend another less important series of folds runs roughly parallel to the main external ridge which forms the dominant structural feature of the island. A striking peculiarity of the surface configuration is the presence in each system of folds of a longitudinal depression flanked on each side by ridge-like elevations. This cen- tral valley runs from end to end of Celebes. It largely determines the direction of the drainage, as the principal interior streams run in it for long distances, parallel to the shores, till they take advantage sooner or later of one of the breaks in thé continuity of the hill ranges to pass outwards to the sea. The narrow and not very well defined coastal plain consists, for the most part, of Tertiary and later deposits very frequently intercalated with volcanic rocks. The Eocene is well represented by massive nummulitic and orbitoidal limestones, often coralline. Beneath these there are sometimes exposures of sandstone, and not un- commonly radiolarian clays and cherty beds which may be lower Eocene or possibly Cretaceous. Overlying the . NO. 1696, VOL. 66] Eocene are sandstones and conglomerates known as the “Celebes Taveyannaz beds” (from their similarity to the Taveyannaz group in the Alps) and an extensive “Celebes Molasse,” with fresh water, brackish water, marine and land fossils. Pliocene shell beds and Pleisto- cene strata are well developed in the lower grounds and along the shores. The Tertiary geological history of Celebes is outlined as follows :—The Eocene began with deep-water conditions (radiolarian clays) followed by shallow coral seas. In the Miocene the great upheaval took place and the mountain axis attained its complete development. This was an epoch of land conditions, and was accompanied by the deposit of the “‘ Celebes Molasse.” During the Pliocene the land area was much greater than at present, but in the Pleistocene depression ensued, and is regarded as having been at least 300 feet. Thereafter minor oscillations have taken place; a well- marked raised beach can be traced at heights of go feet above the sea-level indicating recent elevation, while in other places submerged forests point to slight and local depression. Over most of the island signs of volcanic activity abound. One crater named Una Una was in eruption in 1898, but there are few historic records of volcanic out- bursts, though many may be traced in the traditions of the natives. In the extreme south the great peak of Bantaeng (2970 m.), an Etna covered with parasitic cones, is a well-known object and has already been described by several travellers. The authors ascended it, and give a map of the higher parts of the mountain. This map shows a very large breached crater occupying the summit and accompanied by two enormous depressions (pre- sumably also craters) to the south of the principal one. Beds of ash and lava flows are very frequently inter- bedded with the Tertiary strata, and in the Minahassa region at the north-east termination of the island there is a cluster of volcanic mountains, some of which must have been very recently in eruption, while others are in various stages of denudation and decay. This is one of the most interesting parts of Celebes, and some of the best chapters of the book are those devoted to the de- scription of these volcanic cones and craters. For the excellent photographic illustrations which accompany them there can be nothing but praise. The volcanic activity appears to have first manifested itself in the Miocene, and to have followed the era of folding and upheaval. Many types of effusive rocks are found. The commonest are apparently andesites (propylites) and basalts. But leucite-tephrites, trachytes and phonolites were also emitted, and Prof. Schmidt has furnished descriptions of some very fine nepheline-bearing shonkinites which appear to be the plutonic representa- tives of this group. They are accompanied by bostonites and gauteites as dyke rocks. In the volcanic areas hot springs are numerous, and some of the quartz veins are auriferous. Some interesting notes are also given on the configuration of volcanic bombs. A special feature of the geography of Celebes which has attracted a good deal of attention is the existence of inland lakes of considerable size. These are found in the central valley depressions between the hill ranges, and they occur in well-defined chains in these valleys. The largest is the Towuti Lake, but Lake Posso and "A NATURE Lake Tempe are also considerable sheets of water. Their great depth is notable ; Lake Posso is 160 fathoms deep, Lake Motana 260 fathoms. The authors believe that they are of tectonic origin and are due to depression in the synclines between the mountain uplifts. They may be flanked by lines of fault, and the very steep slopes of their shores, as shown by the soundings, is easily ex- plained on this hypothesis. Their resemblance to the Central African lakes is close and is heightened by the presence in them of a molluscan fauna the affinities of which are said to be Miocene. Their great depth would appear to be against their Miocene origin, but as the areas that drain into them are small, it may well be that the deposition of sediment is too slow to have produced any very great effects. It is suggested that depression has also taken place and has counterbalanced the accumulation of alluvial material brought down by the streams. In conclusion, it may be noted that the work contains a full bibliography of the geology and geography of Celebes, and the description of each district is accom- panied by a synopsis of the observations of previous travellers. OUR BOOK SHELF. By W. W. Fowler. 222: Pp. More Tales of the Birds. 232. illustrated. (London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd.) Price 3s. 6d. THIS is a delightful little book of stories, admirably written and beautifully illustrated, in which birds play a more or less important part. It is in no way one of the numerous works on the popular natural history of birds with which the market is nowadays flooded, but strikes a line peculiarly its own. In the first chapter we have a pathetic story of a young soldier whose thoughts were turned to home and its associations during the Waterloo campaign by a lark’s nest which escaped destruction although situated in the midst of the great battle-field. The second deals with the toils and troubles of a house- martin, as supposed to be narrated by the bird itself. In regard to the reason for the annual migration, the bird is made to say: ‘‘We always do come here, and our ancestors always came, so I suppose we shall go on doing it. Besides, this is reallyour home. We were born here, you see ; and when the heat begins in South Africa there comes a terrible feeling in our hearts, a terrible home- sickness, and we mus¢ go.” Evidently, so far as birds are concerned, the author does not believe in the theory that Africa was a great centre of animal evolution. Jackdaws, magpies and starlings severally form the texts for other chapters. To ornithologists, perhaps, the interest of the book will centre on the exquisite illus- trations, by the accomplished pencil of Miss F. L. Fuller, which are alone worth the price charged. Although there are some to whom this class of writing does not appeal, many readersfof all ages and both sexes will doubtless find pleasant occupation for a spare hour or two in this bright and entertaining little volume. R College Algebra. By L. E. Dickson, Ph.D. Pp. viii + 214. (New York: Wiley and Sons. London : Chapman and Hall, Ltd., 1902.) THE usual profession of “rigour” is followed here by the usual i inaccuracies. On page vii.we are told that = means “equal” ; on p. 69 it is stated without proof that if 7 is a proper fraction the limit of 7" is zero when 7 increases indefinitely ; the discussion of the exponential theorem in art. 129 is thoroughly unsound, and the proof that every equation has a root (pp. 211-12) is marred by serious NO. 1696, VOL. 66] [May 1, 1902 defects. On the other hand, the chapters on logarithms, mathematical induction and theory of equations are good. Probably this book has been written rather hastily ; otherwise it is difficult to understand how such a competent mathematician as the author is known to be should have overlooked so many deficiencies. Even in the chapter on the binomial theorem for any index, he calmly applies the rule for multiplying two power-series without discussing its validity either there or in any other passage of the book! Finally, Mr. Charles Smith is made responsible for the assertion that the binomial expansion of (1 +x)" converges for x=1 if ~ <~—1. Very likely this is an uncorrected misprint for z >—1; but why refer to Mr. Smith instead of to Abel’s classical memoir ? M. A Laboratory Manual of Physics. By H. Crew, Ph.D. and R. R. Tatnall, Ph.D. Pp. xii + 230. (New York: The Macmillan Company ; London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 5s. EACH exercise commences with references to certain school text-books, but, unfortunately for the British reader, these are all American works, and, so far as the reviewer knows, they are not used in any schools here. We are amused to find that metre scales are called metre “sticks” in the States. There is a good simple chapter on inertia, and a form of inertia balance is described. It seems tous a mistake to omit all experiments on velocity and acceleration because of their difficulty. Friction occurs in all real machines, and it ought to be studied in elementary works. The apparatus is generally of quite a simple character and very suitable for school use. Ap- pendix A contains an extract from one of Boyle’s papers in which he describes an instrument virtually the same as Nicholson’s hydrometer, and the authors call attention to this in their description of that instrument. The book will prove very useful in conjunction with the text-books to which references are made. Photographic Apparatus. Making and Repairing. By F. W. Cooper, D. W. Gawn and others. Edited by E. Brown. Pp. xvi+ 128. (London: Dawbarn and Ward, Ltd., 1902.) Price Is. IT is not every photographer who wishes to make or repair his own apparatus, but those who are acquainted with the use of tools will find this small book a useful help if they require it in aiding them to fit up all kinds of convenient accessories to the photographic camera and dark room. The information given is concise and the instructions are clear ; and numerous illustrations, 180 in number, are included which materially aid the text from a beginner’s point of view. The ground covered is by no means meagre, for the worker is made acquainted with such subjects as the studio and studio fitments, the dark room and its fixtures, cameras and accessories, printing and enlarging apparatus, concluding with numerous and useful miscellaneous attachments. That the instructions are the result of practice is shown by the numerous writers on the varied subjects, most of the information being reprinted with additions from articles in The Photogram. Monographie der Gattung Ree hus. Von Dr. Jakob von Sterneck (Trautenau). bhandlungen der k.k. zool.-botan. Gesellschaft in Wiee, Band i., Heft 2, October 31, 1901.) Pp. 150. (Wien: Holder.) AN exhaustive monograph of a genus of plants, poy known under the names of Fistularia, L., Rhinanthus, L., Alectorolophus (Haller), Allioni, and Mimulus, Scopoli- Fifty-one species and two hybrids are described by the author. The genus is most numerous in Europe (a familiar British representative being a common meadow-plant, known as the Yellow Rattle) ; but it also extends through- out a considerable portion of temperate Asia and North — May 1, 1902] NATURE America. The species are divided into six sections, and the synonymy, variation, distribution, &c., of each species are given in great detail, at least in the case.of well-known species. The probable evolution and phylogeny of the genus are also discussed, and to the latter subject the elaborate “Stammbaum” is devoted. The three maps show the distribution of various species of the genus. Scientific botanists should find much to interest them in Dr. Sterneck’s work. A Text-book of Insanity. By Charles Mercier. Pp. xiv + 222. (London: Swan Sonnenschein and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 6s. net. Mr. MERCIER addresses his little work directly to the ordinary medical student, for whom, it appears from the preface, there has hitherto been no text-book of insanity of moderate compass. For the practical student so clear and brief a description of the leading types of mental disorder from the pen of a recognised authority will be of high value. The work hasalso its merits from the stand- point of the theoretical psychologist, though he will probably prefer to study the author’s views in his larger work, “ Psychology Normal and Morbid.” The account of normal mental activities by which the description of insane deviations from the normal is preceded is eminently clear and judicious. The psychologist should also be thankful to the author for discarding the bewildering nomenclature of #zanias and phobias, and | offering a simple and intelligible classification of mental diseases, based on insanity (z.e. the aggregate symptoms presented simul- _ taneously at any stage by a patient) and varieties of insanity (ze. specific types of the course run bya case from first to last). Besides purely medical and psycho- logical information, the book contains some useful re- marks on the legal responsibilities of the practitioner in connection with insane patients. Noe Ee ls Lecons sur les Séstes & termes positifs. Par Emile Borel. Recueillies et rédigées par Robert d’Adhémar. Pp. vili+94. (Paris: Gauthier-Villars, 1902.) Price fr. 3°50. THIS appears as the third instalment of Prof. Borel’s lectures on the theory of functions. It is somewhat more fragmentary than its predecessors, and has, in fact, the typical qualities and defects of a set of lecture-notes. As an introduction to the memoirs of Hadamard, Mittag- Leffler and Poincaré, as well as to those of Prof. Borel himself, these chapters will be very serviceable. Perhaps the most noteworthy articles are those which deal with the theory of increment (cvozssance) ; it is there shown that there is no natural scale of orders of magnitude. In fact, an aggregate of orders of increasing functions can be constructed which is not numerable. Moreover, functions have been invented which have no regular order of increase ; thus an example is given of a function which is comparable with exf x for an infinite number of values of the variable, and with exp (exp x) for another infinite number of values. This will cause searchings of heart in certain quarters, no doubt; even Prof. Borel remarks that “fort heureusement, les fonctions qui se présentent aturellement aux géométres sont, en général, de nature plus simple.” 222. H. E. Hadley, B.Sc. Pp. xii + 232 millan and Co., Ltd., rgor.) Price 2s. 6d. THIs is an excellent collection of laboratory experiments, suitable for the higher classes in secondary and public schools. Magnetism is taken first, then electrostatics and current electricity. An appendix gives some in- struction for making the necessary apparatus. The author wisely confines the experiments to those which can be performed with quite simple apparatus. NO. 1696, voL. 66] the distinction between forms of | LETTERS TC THE EDITOR. The Editor does not hold himself responsible for opinions ex- pressed by his correspondents. Neither can he undertake fo return, or to correspond with the writers of, rejected manuscripts intended for this or any other part of NATURE. No notice 2s taken of anonymous communications.| A Remarkable Lunar Halo, On the night of January 19 of this year a singular lunar phenomenon was visible here. The sky had clouded over and was covered with a nearly uniform whitish sheeting of cloud, through which the brighter stars could be seen. There was no wind. The barometer stood at 29°20 inches and the tempera- ture was 28° F. The moon, which was near the meridian, was ten and a quarter days old and had a north declination of 19°. Surrounding the moon was the ordinary lunar halo of 45° or 50° in diameter, which is so often seen at the approach of bad weather. This ring was clearly defined on its inner edge, which was of a reddish or brownish colour; it rapidly diffused on its outer edge and was perhaps a couple of degrees in thick- ness. The whole interior of the ring was darker than the sky outside of it anywhere, which is its customary appearance. Cutting exactly through the moon, with its centre near the Capelly ° e Caster Peliux SASSI a] Fic. r.—Lunar Phenomenon 1902, January 19, 9 p.m. zenith—in the region of Capella—was another ring of apparently the same dimension and brightness, and similar to the other in every respect. It too was sharply defined on its inner edge, where it was fringed with a reddish or brownish colour, The general colour of the two rings was whitish, with a suggestion of yellow. The interior of this ring was also darker than the sky outside. There was no noticeable increase of light where : ‘ 4 | the two rings intersected. They seemed to merge into one Practical Exercises in Magnetism and Electricity. By (London: Mac- | another without any evidence of the crossing. This phenomenon was first seen at 8h. 50m. (6h. om. slow of Greenwich Mean Time). It was perhaps visible for some time before this. I had been observing with the large telescope when the increasing cloudiness had stopped work. It was noticed (a few minutes before seeing the phenomenon) that the seeing had suddenly got excessively bad. The extra ring remained visible until 9h, 20m., at which time it disappeared—not all at once, but gradually and unequally. During the time it was under observation, from 8h. 50m. to gh. 20m., this ring revolved eastward in position angle, about 6 NATURE | May 1, 1902 17°.. The moon remained bisected by it throughout the entire visibility. Only the brighter stars were visible, on account of the thick- ness of the sky, and hence its exact dimensions could not be accurately determined from the want of comparison stars. An endeavour was made to secure pointings on different portions of the ring with the 12-inch equatorial by sighting along the tube, but this was found to be impossible because of the narrow- ness of the slit in the dome, which prevented its being seen with sufficient distinctness. At oh. 17m. Algol was on the inner edge of the extra ring near its junction with the ring surrounding the moon. At gh. 20m. Castor was central on the ring, and at gh. 24m. this star was on the inside edge. By this time the ring had almost entirely disappeared, only a fragment of it being visible at Castor. After this it was not seen again, though the ordinary ring remained visible for several hours. When the extra ring was disappearing, the ordinary ring became brighter, and at Ioh. 30m. a bright spot (a moon dog?) became visible on its north edge. At 8h. 50m. a Orionis was bisected by the ordinary ring, from which the diameter was found to be 48°*9. Following are some estimations of the position of the extra ring. At 8h. 50m. a line prolonged through Pollux and Castor would touch the extra ring 84° from Castor. At this time Capella was by estimation (a difficult and rather uncertain determination) about one-fifth of the radius of the ring north- east of its centre. At gh. om. the ring passed 7° from Castor in the line to 8 Aurigz, at which time Capella was by estima- tion 4}° north of the edge of the regular Ifinar ring. The phenomenon was witnessed by Mr. Frank Sullivan, assistant in the large dome, and myself. I do not know that anyone else saw it. I have never seen a similar phenomenon to this, and as it must be a rare one with reference to the moon I have thought it worth while to record the observationsin NATURE. I under- stand that something of the kind has been seen previously with reference to the sun. A careful drawing was made of the phenomenon, a copy of which is reproduced in Fig. 1. The exact time of the drawing is 8h. 50m. (6h. om. slow of Greenwich). This will explain itself. In making the drawing the two rings have been assumed to be of the same size. E. E. BARNARD. Yerkes Observatory, Williams Bay, Wis., U.S.A., April 8. Longitude 5h. 54m. 13s.°2 W., Latitude + 42° 34’ 13”. The Education Bill. THE Education Bill now before Parliament is of so compre- hensive and important a character that it deserves to be con- sidered from various points of view. That which is most germane to the readers of NATURE is perhaps the influence it may have upon advancing or retarding the progress of natural knowledge. It is generally now admitted that the old notions of educa- tion, both as to subject and method, require to be improved, and that the recent advance of science, and of the applications of science to industry, claim a much larger share of attention than in days of yore. The best schools are opening their doors to this knowledge, if not welcoming it, and any change in the management of schools ought to be in this direction. How far will the present Bill fulfil this requirement? It says nothing about the curriculum of the schools, and concerns. itself solely with the constitution of the local education authority, and the machinery for raising and distributing the necessary funds and for appointing representatives on the management of the schools. The personnel of the managers in the first instance may not be much changed, but their powers may be seriously limited by their superior authorities, who have the revision of the expen- diture and the settlement of the rate to be levied. The influ- ence of the electors in School Board districts will be lost ; an influence which at the present time is generally directed towards rendering the schools of as much practical value as possible. The Act of 1870 secured the coming forward of men or women sufficiently interested in the subject to stand the ordeal of a popular election, and who, when elected, worked under the stimulus of public responsibility ; whereas under the present Bill the managers of transferred schools will apparently retain their office indefinitely, and the nominees of the new local educational authority will always be ina minority and there- NO. 1696, VOL. 66] fore unlikely to be able to develop the newer ideas of edu- cation. Our methods are undergoing a slow but very real change >. good object-lessons from the infant classes upward, involving the proper use of eyes and hands, are coming to the fore ; with a training afterwards in such branches of natural history and physical science as may bear on the probable occupations of after life—agriculture, mining, manufactures, trade, &c.—or on domestic pursuits. Much of England’s prosperity in the future will, in fact, depend upon the proper adaptation of this funda- mental training to the wants of the various sections of the: community. Hence the paramount importance of selecting such persons as shall not only be acquainted with the wants of the neighbourhood, but shall also be imbued with the impor- tance of this kind of teaching. It is interesting in this connection to observe that the statis- tical returns of the Board of Education show that in the schools. under the management of popularly elected bodies the attention given to the scientific subjects of instruction is more than twice as great proportionally as that in the ‘‘ voluntary”’ schools. These returns have shown a gradual advance in this respect since 1890, except that in 1899-1900 there is a small retro- gression perceptible in most of the subjects, including mechanics, animal physiology, chemistry and general physics. (See British Association report on ‘‘ Teaching of Science in Elemen- tary Schools,” 1901.) The cause of this is not obvious, and it is impossible to say whether it continues, as the figures for the year 1900-1 are not yet issued. Small schools are always worked at a great disadvantage, as the children attending them cannot be properly divided into classes and have almost necessarily to be taught by one teacher. This cannot be avoided in districts of very sparse population ;. but the Government Bill gives direct encouragement to the multiplication of small schools, each of which will be recog- nised as necessary provided it can draw thirty children from some neighbouring school. The Bill is defective in not providing that the education com- menced under the code in the elementary schools should be continued in the department of higher education, whether in evening, ‘technical or secondary schools. The only correlation attempted consists in the putting all schools within a given area. under one local authority ; but it does not ensure that there should be any organic connection or unity of aim between the lower and the higher schools. I cannot help thinking that men and women elected for the express purpose, and subject to periodical re-election, are the- most likely to support the more modern and practical views of education and so to enable the children under their charge to become more intelligent and valuable members of the com- munity. J. H. GLADSTONE, 17 Pembridge Square, April 26. Resultant Tones and the Harmonic Series. Miss DicKiNns’s method of determining from the harmonic series the resultant tone would be of more worth than it is if it did not yield results which are untrue to the facts. is, or ought to be, well known from the observations of the late Dr. Koenig, in some cases differ from those assumed. For example, the combination of two pure tones of the ratio 9:4 does vot yield as the resultant tone 5. And in the case of the ratio 8:5 the resultant tone actually heard is just as likely to be 2 as 3, or both may be heard. The remark that the method is evidently as applicable to summational as to differential resultant tones is evidently made in ignorance of the circumstance that the ‘*summational” tones are not, in fact, ever heard if the: They are one of the myths of Si.vanus P. THOMPSON. two fundamental tones are pure. science, April 19. Thin Floating Cylinders. IN a letter to NATURE of February 18, 1897, I pointed out that a thin cylindrical floating shell was in equilibrium under the actions of its own weight and the external fluid load, the: shell having its axis horizontal and just touching the surface or else completely submerged. The method was that of Rankine’s conjugate load-areas, and building on this Dr. Thomson and myself made practical graphical ; masonry arch ; these were privately printed and circulated, and These, as. solutions of the circular Pip May 1, 1902] NATURE 7 met with the approval, among others, of Prof. Perry, London, and Prof. Malverd Howe, America. In revising this matter for the new edition of our ‘* Applied Mechanics,” I find that polygonal cylinders of uniform plates freely hinged at their edges and displacing their own weight of fluid and lying horizontally are also in equilibrium, provided the polygon be regular. In the diagram the square shell is shown just reaching the surface and rolled into three positions. The proof is the same as for the ordinary statical problems on festoons of rods hinged at the ends, only now there is the external fluid pressure in addition to the weights. The fluid is kept out by face plates at the ends, the face plates having the same density as the fluidand being quite smooth, so as to allow the shell freely to change its shape. If the shell be slightly compressed it will collapse, but the friction of the face plates and the confined air afford a slight degree of stability. The diagram shows the regular hexagonal shell, and by increasing the number of sides we arrive, as before, at the circular cylinder. In the polygonal shells there are bending moments on the sides as well as the thrust, but on the circular there is only hoop thrust, as it may be a plenum of joints. Submerging only adds a symmetrical load all round, and the shells are still balanced. As they are also balanced with the axis vertical it follows that they are in equilibrium in any position whatever. My first letter led to some correspondence, and I hope this may be of interest to your readers. TuHos, ALEXANDER. Trinity College, Dublin, April 19. Mycoplasm, Since 1889 a fungus hyphal layer has been known to exist in the nucellar remnants of the grains of the Darnel grass, Lolium temulentun:, and to these hyphze have been attributed the poisonous properties of the Darnel. Later investigations have shown that the fungus could be found in the growing point of developing plants, in the inflorescence, and finally in the ovular rudiments. The manner of entrance of the fungus had, however, escaped detection. Nestler (Ber. d. deutsch. Sot. Gesellsch., B. xvi., 1898, p. 210) and others failed to observe the fungus in the embryo in the mature grain. The hyphz in the growing point could not be observed before the eighth day of germination. Eriksson has recently! quoted the work of Nestler and others on the fungus of Lolewm temudentum in support of his theory on mycoplasma. According to Nestler, the embryo does not contain the hyphee, which appear in the seedling on the eighth day. In only one case was he able to see hyphz in the embryo. In view of the support which this work appears to give to Eriksson’s mycoplasma theory, an advance note on some of my results in the investigation of the fungus of Lolium zemulentum, which has been carried on in the laboratory of Prof. Marshall Ward at Cambridge University, may be of interest. In appropriately stained sections of the embryo taken from the mature seed of Loléwm temulentum, hyphe in great abundance may be seen in the growing point, sometimes but two cells from the tip; these hyphe may be traced to their point of entrance at the juncture of the coleorhiza and scutellum on the outer surface of the latter in the region of the median longitudinal plane of the scutellum. Previous investi- gators had entirely overlooked the presence of a considerable 1 Eriksson, Aun. des Sc. Nat., T. xv., 1902, p. 73, says :—‘‘ Les tentatives infructeuses d’A. Nestler d’apprendre 4 connaitre de quelle maniére le champignon qu'on trouve presque toujours dans les fruits du Lodium temulentum est entré dans le cone végétatif de l'embryon du fruit amenent aussi la supposition d’un état mycoplasmatique latent.” NO. 1696, VOL. 66] amount of mycelium in that part of the grain which lies directly against the scutellum in the median basal region, where it has grown around the end of the aleurone layer. The infection takes place apparently before the grain has reached complete maturity, as the fungus is well established in the ripe grain. There can, therefore, be no question here of mycoplasm, since direct hyphal infection can very easily be demonstrated. There is no evidence to prove that the fungus is a Uredine. The detailed results, with other particulars of the nature and development of the fungus, will be published soon. April 20. E. M. FREEMAN. Rearrangement of Euclid I. 1-32. THE rearrangement outlined in my previous letter was devised to meet the difficulty which, as Prof. Bryan states, is the chief objection to Euclid’s Elements as an elementary course. Beginners cannot solve riders because (1) They do not grasp the reasons for Euclid’s limited postu- lates and axioms, and never fairly understand the ‘‘ rules of the game ” ; consequently their early attempts violate his conditions, and their rejection discourages. (2) Too much time is occupied by the propositions, with the result that they regard them, not as tools, but as models, and imitate Euclid’s methods of proof. There is nothing in 1-8 worthy of imitation. (3) They do not distinguish between data and queesita unless they have drawn accurate figures. It is impossible to draw accurate figures by proved methods in Euclid’s scheme (e.g. I. 4), and we therefore have recourse to figures drawn on the prin- ciple of Artemus Ward’s horses. This is the great difficulty in working riders. Allow a boy to assume the mid-point of a line and he will assume the most impossible constructions. He should never be allowed to quote a construction which he cannot perform, and no construction should be shown him with- out proof. Freehand copies of blackboard figures are useless ; if he has drawn a dictated figure, there is no confusion between hypothesis and conclusion. There is also the additional advan- tage that the less intelligent feel that in drawing the figure they have accomplished something, and this frequently stimulates to further effort. To remove these difficulties we must extend the axioms and postulates, reduce the number of standard propositions, and introduce problems as early as possible. The advocates of a purely theoretical scheme have two courses open to them—either they must teach constructions first without proof (which is extremely illogical), or they must postpone them until the com- pletion of the theory, and therefore postpone riders indefinitely. Geometry without riders resembles arithmetic without examples. In the scheme which we have found most successful, riders commence with the definitions. Every standard proposition is treated as a rider and evolved by the class ; one proposition a fortnight is considered sufficiently rapid progress, the intervening lessons being devoted to riders. The circle gives a method of drawing equal lines, and, with the idea of angular measurement, a method of constructing equal angles. Of course we assume the shape of the circle. I. 15 and 32 give the fundamental fact of rotation and introduce easy theorems and numerical examples. I. 8 with its riders elicits I. 9, and I. 4 is followed by I. 10, locus of points equidistant from two given points, I. 11, 12, 5. Having reached this point, possible riders are endless, and the only difficulty lies in their selection ; many propositions of III. and IV. may be included in the riders. Every pupil can now draw an accurate figure from dictation, and knows exactly what data he has to work upon. The rate of progress may appear slow, but we are teaching Book VI. in the second year. It should be noted that I. 1 is a rider, 20 an axiom, and that 2, 3, 7, 18, 19, 21, 24, 25 are not read. In teaching riders, theorems should, as a rule, be grouped on methods of proof; the required figure should be dictated and the class asked to prove any fact they can concerning it. A general enunciation should then be invented; in this way standard propositions for future proof are frequently suggested. It is a mistake to hurl a general enunciation at a class of beginners. Problems usually give more trouble, but if grouped on loci their difficulties vanish. There would be no examination difficulty if papers were set on riders only. Euclid’s Elements might then be reserved for university examinations—a geometrical ‘‘ Paley.” Leyton Technical Institute, April 25. T. Petcn. 8 NATURE [May 1, 1902 THE FORTHCOMING BELFAST MEETING OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION. PREPARA for the forthcoming meeting at Belfast are already well advanced, and careful attention is being paid by the various committees to those details which make so much towards a satisfying and successful issue. The last meeting in Belfast was under the presidency of Prof. John Tyndall, whose famous address on that occasion will be remembered. It is interesting to note that at this year’s meeting the president-elect, Prof. Dewar, F.R.S., who has so widely extended the bounds of our knowledge of the properties of liquefied gases, comes to preside over this meeting of the Association in the place where the late Dr. Andrews made his classical researches on the same subject, and where a collection of his apparatus is preserved in the laboratory where he worked. The meeting will have ample accommodation in Queen’s College and neighbouring buildings, all within a radius of three minutes’ walk from the reception-room, which, as on the last occasion, will be the large examina- tion hall of the College. Most of the sections will, as before, find place in the lecture-rooms close at hand, those sections dealing with allied subjects being close to each other, an arrangement made more easy by the recent additions to the College buildings. These include chemical laboratories, physiological and _ pathological departments and a students’ union. The first general meeting will be held on Wednesday evening, September 10, in the Grosvenor Hall, which seats about 2500 persons, when the president-elect will deliver his inaugural address. The Friday evening discourse will be given by Prof. J. J. Thomson, F.R.S., on “ Becquerel Rays and Radio- activity,’ one of the most fascinating fields of advance in modern physics and a subject which affords scope fora wide range of experimental illustration. On Monday evening a discourse will be given by Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, F.R.S., on “Inheritance.” The Saturday evening lecture will be delivered by Prof. Louis C. Miall, F.R.S., and the subject will be “ Gnats and Mosquitoes,” about which so much interest has recently centred in connec- tion with the propagation of malarial fever. Conversa- ziones will be given on the Thursday and Tuesday evenings. It is intended to organise a loan collection illustrative of Irish antiquities and archeology and also of the progress of Belfast and its industries since remote times, and supplementing the interesting collections of a similar kind already existing in the local museums. It has been thought best to arrange for excursions on Saturday, September 13, to the most important and interesting localities only, and to provide for large numbers in each party rather than to have many excur- sions, the want of interest in the less important of which might cause disappointment. Efforts will be made to facilitate the attendance of the more distinguished members on these occasions. The chief excursions will be to: (1) Portrush and Giant’s Causeway. (2) Glenariff, Garron Head and Coast Road. (3) Newcastle, Tollymore Park and Mourne Mountains. (4) Warrenpoint and Carlingford. (5) Drogheda and the Valley of the Boyne. Specially prepared pamphlets will be issued as guides to the ex- cursions. A number of minor excursions will be so arranged as to suit the spare time that may be at the disposal of members. In connection with the meeting and the excursions, the following notes upon Belfast and the neighbourhood are of interest. For the paragraphs dealing with geology and botany I am indebted to Mr. S. A. Stewart, for that on zoology to Mr. Robert Patterson, and for that on archeology to NO. 1696, VOL. 66] Mr. F. J. Bigger. Further information on these or other allied subjects will be most willingly given to members by the hon. secretaries of either the Belfast Natural History and Philosophical Society, Belfast Museum, College Square, or the Belfast Naturalists’ Field Club at the same address. Geology.—The geological characters of the counties of Antrim and Down differ very widely. The river Lagan, which separates them, is also the dividing line between the Palzozoic rocks of the south-east and the interesting secondary series to the north. The city of Belfast is built mainly on drift deposits which overlie Triassic marls and sandstones. The hills which almost encircle the city are made up of eruptive masses of dolerite covering sedimentary deposits, which consist of hard Chalk, Upper Greensand, Lias Clays, Keuper Marls and Bunter Sandstones, the interior of the county being a more or less elevated plateau. These great masses of Trap, more than 1000 feet thick, have been erupted in succes- sive sheets, and contain beds of iron ore at certain levels. At Ballypallidy many fossil plant remains are found which determine the age of these erupted rocks as Eocene. The beautiful prismatic rocks of the Giant’s Causeway are well known, and this columnar Trap is seen in several places on the coast, though in minor masses and less developed form. Good sections of the sedi- mentary rocks may be seen in the Belfast hills, the Antrim coast road, Portrush, and elsewhere. A much indurated but fossiliferous bed of Lias clay, so hard as to appear flinty, occurs at Portrush. In the Cushendall district some older rocks are interpolated. At Cushendun, between Cushendall and Ballycastle, 1s a massive con- glomerate which has been supposed to be of the age of the Old Red Sandstone ; where it crops out on the shore some fine caverns have been excavated by the action of the sea. Carboniferous shales and sandstones occur near Ballycastle, and coal mining in these beds is of very ancient date. To the south and east of Belfast lies the county of Down, with its range of mountains stretching from New- castle to near Warrenpoint. There is little variety in the rocks of the county. The higher mountain peaks are of granite, while the stratified rocks of less elevation are very much hardened Lower Silurian grits and shales. The granite masses of the Mourne Mountains are valu- able building material, and they yield beryl, topaz and other much-prized minerals. Save the Silurian, there are scarcely any stratified rocks in the county. A very small patch of Permian occurs below high-water mark at Cultra, Belfast Bay,and with it a strip of Carboniferous Shale. At Newtownards is Scrabo Hill, which is an outlier of the New Red Sandstone ; and at Castle Espie, on Strangford Lough, is a very smallexposure of Carbon- iferous Limestone. Carlingford isin the county of Louth ; it is a Carboniferous Limestone country, as indeed is the greater part of that county. At Coalpit Bay, near Donaghadee, are Silurian shales with graptolites. Zoology.—The zoology of the district is exceedingly interesting, and specialists in any branch might well devote additional time to it beyond the official week. To the conchologist the district is a happy hunting- ground, fully two-thirds of the species of British land and freshwater mollusca being found here, some of extreme rarity, while several species that are very rare in England are found here in some numbers. The marine mollusca will also repay investigation, this being the only British locality for several species, while the richness of this fauna is shown by the fact that recently a single day’s dredging produced one species new to science and two more new to Britain. The coleopterist will also find an interesting fauna awaiting him, several species being found here which are unknown elsewhere in Britain. September is rather late for the lepidopterist, otherwise some good things might be found. But, May 1, 1902] indeed. remarks such as the above might be made of almost all the various branches of zoology ; the district is well worth thorough searching ; the Mourne Moun- tains have been scarcely touched by the collector, and important finds might be made at anytime. The field naturalist could easily spend a profitable week on or around Lough Neagh—by far the largest lake in the British Islands—which is comparatively close to Belfast and easy of access. Here the pollan is found in great numbers, and those interested in fish can investigate this species, which is not found in either England or Scotland. The Toome Eel Fishery is also worth a visit, ten thousand pounds’ worth of eels being caught annually. Botany.—Though the peculiar group of plants, styled in the Cybele Hibernica‘ Cantabrian,” which enrich the flora of south-west Ireland are absent in the north-east, yet the floras of Antrim and Down are both extensive and varied. The recent “Irish Topographical Botany,” by Praeger, gives the plants of co. Antrim as 777, in an area of 1191 square miles ; co. Down, 742 species, area 957 square miles. The coast-line of these two counties, more than 200 miles, with its sand dunes, mud flats and maritime rocks, affords suitable sites for very diverse groups of plants. The visitor to Newcastle in co. Down will find on its sandy warrens quite a number of uncom- mon species, while the muddy shores at Dundrum yield such plants as Atriplex portulacoides and Juncus obtust- florus. This sea-coast is girt in almost its entire extent with hills and mountains of considerable elevation and varied mineral composition. The visitor to the Mourne Mountains will meet with siliceous rocks, granites and indurated Silurian grits and shales, yielding at Tollymore and elsewhere hawkweeds, some of much rarity. The Trappean hills which characterise almost exclusively the greater part of co. Antrim give a flora differing con- siderably from that of its neighbouring county. Glenariff is typical of the rugged and picturesque ravines cut deep, by the waters flowing from the moors above, into the basalt and secondary rocks of Antrim. The yew tree, formerly plentiful, still lingers on the wild cliffs of Glenariff, but apparently is near extinction. The rare umbellifer Cavum verticillatum is plentiful on the Giant’s Causeway headlands, and Scottish lovage is found on rocks washed by the sea near Portrush. The bryologist will find in “the glens of Antrim” capital hunting grounds, as their moss flora includes many species of considerable rarity. The south of the county has during last year yielded to the researches of Mr. J. H. Davies Ditrichum vaginans, a moss new to the British Isles. The valley of the Boyne in co. Louth, to the south, is in a limestone district, and has an extensive flora consisting of species that usually frequent calcareous tracts, but has no special features to note. Archaeology.—The antiquities around Belfast are numerous and representative, more especially the pre- historic remains. Forts and souterrains are abundant and cromleacs numerous, the finest being the Giant’s Ring quite close to the city. Here a fine cromleac is surrounded by a great earthen ring, a wonderful evidence of man’s power and labour in the earliest ages. Several fine souterrains, chambered and complicated, are to be found near Antrim town. Standing stones, some holed, are also numerous, whilst Ogam monoliths occur at Connor. Celtic pre-Norman churches can be seen in several parishes with holy wells adjoining, whilst later churches with distinctive features, several round towers, such as those at Antrim, Armoy and Drumbo, can easily be visited. Of the abbeys, the most attractive are Grey Abbey, a Cistercian house, Inch Abbey, and Bun-na- Margie, a Franciscan foundation. Some ancient crosses and cross slabs, such as those at Downpatrick, Donagh- more, Dromore, Movilla and Bangor, are well worth inspection, whilst armorial stones abound in every churchyard. NO. 1696, VOL. 66] NATURE 5 The great Norman castle of Carrickfergus, with its bold central tower and surrounding ramparts, is still occupied, whilst Dunluce, the chief residence of the MacDonnells, overhangs the stupendous cliffs of the north coast, one of the finest sights in the three king- doms. The Knights Templars had a stronghold at Dundrum, where a great circular keep and encircling battlements still defy the hand of Time. Smaller castles abound on every hand both in Antrim and Down, showing how the Normans and subsequent settlers obtained a firm foothold, for the Irish were not given to castle-building. In many districts primitive manners, utensils and customs are still common. Wooden vessels and quaint candlesticks, wheel cars and slipe carts, donkey creels and straw ropes, the scythe and the hand-reaper are the peasant’s usual means of living and carrying on his ordinary husbandry. Nowhere can all the phases of archeology be better studied than in the north of Ireland. Belfast—the population of which has increased from 185,000 to 350,000 since the last meeting—is well known as the industrial capital of Ireland. Its linen manufac- ture was in a flourishing condition in the thirteenth century, was still farther improved by the Huguenot refugees who settled in the neighbourhood in the seven- teenth, and has now attained to the vastly greater scale made possible by modern machinery. Members of the Association will be given ample opportunities of visiting the most important works. Inspection of the newer and no less important ship- building industry will also no doubt prove of the greatest interest, not only to engineers, but also to the travelling public who may care to see the birthplace of the White Star steamers, the first vessels in the design of which the true characteristics proper to steam-propelled vessels were fully grasped, though their great length at first evoked prophecies of disaster. Permission to inspect these yards has in recent years been only very sparingly granted, partly because of the time lost by the workmen from the distraction of their attention by visitors. Ad- mission to these yards and engine shops will be accorded to members of the Association. The handbook or guide to the district, a copy of which will be presented to each member, will contain specially prepared maps illustrating the topography, geology and antiquities of the district. The editors in charge of the work are Mr. F. J. Bigger, Mr. R. LI. Praeger and Mr. J. Vinycomb. The following subjects will be dealt with :—‘ History of Belfast and the District,” by Mr. F.J..Bigger and Mr. J. Vinycomb; “ Antiquities,” by Mr. F. J. Bigger and Mr. W. J. Fennell ; “Geology and Physical Geology,” by Mr. J. St. J. Phillips ; “ Botany,” by Mr. R. LI. Praeger, Mr. S. A. Stewart and the Rev. C. H. Waddell ; “Zoology,” by Mr. R. Patterson, Mr. R. Welch, the Rev. W. F. Johnson and Mr. H. Lamont Orr; ‘“ Trade and Commerce,” by Mr. A. G. Wilson. Although the journey to Ireland includes the crossing of St. George’s Channel, any discomfort that this may have entailed in the past has been reduced to a minimum in recent years by the excellent steamers now available. The shorter sea passages are v/d Holyhead and Kings- town or Greenore and vz@ Stranraer and Larne. Mem- bers from England who prefer a night passage have a choice of three direct routes—v/? Fleetwood, Barrow or Liverpool. The first mentioned has the largest and best steamers ; the others have one or two very good boats. Passengers from Glasgow wié Ardrossan or Greenock will find the direct boats fairly good, though comparatively small, old-fashioned and often over- crowded ; but the open sea passage is not long, and day- light passages are available. The railway and steamboat companies will issue return tickets to Belfast from the principal stations in the United 10 NATURE Kingdom at a fare and a quarter on surrender of the usual voucher issued to members. From stations in England and Scotland such tickets will be available from September 8 to 22, in Ireland from September 8 to 28. The local railway companies will issue return tickets at single fares to members during the meeting for short journeys, and the Belfast Street Tramways Company has kindly offered to issue passes to members for its cars free of charge. These cars pass the College gates. [he accommodation for visitors has increased con- siderably since the last meeting in Belfast, two large and several smaller hotels having been established since then, and it is expected that a large amount of private hospi- tality will be offered by the citizens. J. BROWN. THE COLLEGES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON. ee considering the educational needs of London it is important to remember that its extended area, its large population, and its exceptional municipal govern- ment all conspire to place the metropolis in a category by itself. Local authorities and other organisations which may serve to meet the requirements of the rest of England are not suitable for the unique wants of the greatest city in the world. When framing the Education Bill now before Parliament, the Government recognised this exceptional character, and very wisely postponed for a future occasion the consideration of the coordination of existing institutions of different educational grades in London, and of the addition of necessary schools and colleges. Similarly, the University of London, as re- constituted by the Commissioners appointed under the Act of 1898, is an institution of a unique character. No other university has a similar constitution, because nowhere, at home or abroad, are the conditions of the metropolitan area duplicated. As was pointed out in an article in NATURE in 1899 (No. 1548, vol. Ix.), if, as is done in the University of London Act, 1898, the area to be served by the London University is that included within a radius of thirty miles from the University buildings, it will be found that the University has, on a very moderate estimate, to meet the higher educational needs of about seven million in- habitants. It was shown in the article referred to that to accomplish this huge undertaking with any hope of success it would be necessary to make the fullest possible use of every existing institution which could be regarded as of university standing. It is instructive in this connection to compare the provision of university education in some other districts with that to be found in the capital. The population of Scotland is under four millions and a half, yet there are, north of the Tweed, four largely endowed and well- equipped universities, and in addition a university college. The total population of the eight large towns in England provided with university colleges is under three millions and a half ; while Wales, with a population of under two millions, has three university colleges. So that, even on the grounds that London should be made as well off as the other parts of Great Britain, it may be urged, fairly and temperately, that there is need for a great and im- mediate advance. For these reasons amongst others we are glad to find that University College is making an earnest appeal for largely increased funds in aid of higher education and the facilities for research in London. If the teaching University of London is to be built up on existing institutions, it is of the highest importance that Uni- versity College should be incorporated with it. A short time ago a joint committee of the council of the College and the senate of the University considered the subject of incorporation, and though they have not finished their deliberations, they have agreed on certain points, viz. :— NO. 1696, VOL. 66] [May 1, 1902 (1) For:incorporation to take place the College must be: free from debt. (2) The University will not take over University College School. Accommodation must therefore be provided on a new site. (3) The University will require extensive rearrange- ments of the Medical School. All outstanding debts are already provided for by the Drapers’ Company, which has generously become responsible for them to the extent of 30,0007. In addi- tion, about 60,000/. have been contributed, a large part of which has been given on condition that the incorporation of the College in the University is really effected. But a much larger sum is needed. To provide a site and new buildifigs for University College School, to refit the present school buildings and to carry out other indispensable alterations, not less than 110,000/. will be required. For the completion of the College buildings, thus providing adequate accommodation for both teaching and research in the many different branches of knowledge, 250,000/. arenecessary. For departmental expenses, including the maintenance of laboratories, libraries, &c., an annual income of 6000/., or a capital sum of 200,000/., must be provided. For the endowment of existing unendowed chairs and for the foundation of additional professorships a yearly sum of 20,000/. must be forthcoming, and this represents a capital sum of 700,000/. In short, to perfect and complete the College and to render fruitful its incorporation in the University a sum of at least one million pounds must be found. If our merchants and manufacturers appreciated the importance, as a factor in our national commercial suc- cess, of the higher education of the people of London, there would be no difficulty in obtaining the sum required by the council of University College. As we have chronicled from time to time, the merchant princes of America have supplied for similar institutions in the States very many times the amount asked for by University College. The Leland-Stanford University of California has received nine millions sterling from private munificence ; Chicago University has been given over two and a half millions, and many other universities have similarly been provided with their necessary millions. University College is fully justified in its appeal to the public by a splendid record of activity during the seventy- five years of its existence. The standard of the studies carried on throughout this period has been that of a university, and the yearly output of original work has not been exceeded by that of any constituent college of a British university. We cordially recommend its claims to all those who are able to be munificent, and would suggest that no more suitable way of celebrating the Coronation in London could be found than the provision of this million pounds to begin the work of establishing in the capital of the Empire a teaching university worthy of our imperial aspirations. But, as has often been pointed out in these columns, the responsibility for the provision of educational facilities which will bring us in line with other progressive nations rests, not upon individuals, but with the State. Private benevolence is never better employed than when it is used to assist higher education and research, but it ought not to be regarded as an excuse for the neglect of a national duty ; yet over and over again this is done by statesmen of both parties. Mr. Balfour occupied this position on Wednesday of last week, when speaking at the Mansion House in connection with the distribution of prizes awarded under the commercial education scheme of the London Chamber of Commerce. He acknowledged that our nation “has lagged behind all the great nations of the world, not merely in commercial education, which is a portion of technical education, but also in many of the wider and more important aspects of national educa- tion.” His remarks upon the importance of studying a May 1, 1902] NATURE Mai commerce in the spirit of impartial scientific investigation and wide knowledge were also to the point. Mr, Balfour said, in effect, that there could be no doubt about our leeway, or upon the value of broad and scientific educa- tion as the chief factor of progress, but he looked to the general community to “set itself to work to bear the great responsibilities which the needs of our country have thrown upon our shoulders.” It is only when educational provision is under consider- ation that our statesmen are content to leave obvious national defects to be remedied by chance munificence in the way suggested. In military and naval matters the Government is held responsible for efficiency, whatever assistance may be obtained from voluntary effort. The same principle must be applied to higher and technical education before we can hope to make our educational f ia BRIXTON Fic. 1.—Distribution of Colleges and Polytechnics in London. 1. Royal College of Science, 6. Finsbury Technical College. 11. East London Technical College (People’s Palace). 14. Northampton Institute. 15. Northern Polytechnic. 2. King’s College. 7- Battersea Polytechnic. 18. South-Western Polytechnic. forces equal to those we have against us. The States which are making headway, and equipping themselves for industrial war, are those which give the greatest en- couragement to the advancement of knowledge. Until our statesmen recognise this fact and act upon it, there can be no assurance against the loss of national position which must come sooner or later. drift can only be compared with that of the man who is improvident enough to neglect to provide for old age because he hopes that some generous friend will present him with an endowment assurance. _The Government should lead the way to improving higher education, not by words, but by deeds. Practical sympathy is what is needed at present more than anything else, and the University of London offers a good oppor- NO. 1696, VOL. 66] The present policy of | HA CK NEY 3. University College. 8. Birkbeck Institution. 12. Goldsmiths’ Institute. 16. Regent Street Polytechnic. tunity for the State to show it. Leta liberal grant be made from the national exchequer, and private donors would understand that the statesmen who express fine sentiments upon the value of higher education to national welfare are actually convinced of the urgent necessities of the case. It is because this example has not been set that the various colleges of the University have to carry on their work with very inadequate resources. We commend these considerations to the Duke of Devonshire, who is to speak at the Mansion House on May 9 at a meeting to be held in support of the appeal for funds for advanced secondary education and research at University College. It must be remembered that, when looked at broadly, this question of the provision of an adequately endowed and fully equipped University of London is a much n The order is that given in the Report of the London Technical Education Board. 4. Bedford College. 5. Central Technical College. g. Borough Polytechnic. ro. City of London College. 13- London School of Economics and Political Science. 17 Sir John Cass’s Aldgate Institute. 19. Woolwich Polytechnic. larger one than that of securing sufficient funds to make possible the incorporation of University College in the University. Even when its incorporation has been effected, University College will be but a constituent college of what we hope is destined to be a powerful and comprehensive University, binding together all those institutions located within the metropolitan area which, by a little adaptation and some necessary expansion, can legitimately claim university rank. The consummation for which every earnest educationist in London should work is the incorporation in the University of London, in the same large way that University College desires, of all suitable colleges and polytechnics. There is King’s College, which in one important respect, since it has already moved its secondary school to Wimbledon, has 12 NATURE [May 1, 1902 advanced a step further on the road to incorporation than University College. The Royal College of Science, with its intimate connection with the Board of Education and its exceptional facilities for training teachers of science, would worthily fill an important part in the work of the University. The Central Technical College of the City Guilds, subsidised by the wealthy City companies, pro- vides higher education, and could immediately take its place in the University to teach advanced technology. Bedford College, too, which has specialised in the direction of the higher education of women, must be included. Finally, there are the polytechnics. On more than one occasion it has been pointed out in NATURE that the amount of research work accomplished in the poly- technics of greater London rivals successfully that done in many university colleges. It must, it is true, be admitted that to be worthy of the great University which it is hoped the current decade will see thoroughly established, the polytechnics will have to curtail their work. At present they attempt the education of all comers from twelve years of age and upwards. But just as it has been made a condition of the incorporation of University College that the school in connection with it shall be moved elsewhere, so in the case of the poly- technics, the existing day schools for boys and girls, where an education on the lines of the ‘School of Science ” curriculum of the Board of Education is given, will have to be transplanted, in order that the buildings and the equipment of the polytechnics may be entirely at the disposal of the senate of the University. Similarly, the recreative side of the general training offered by many of the polytechnics will have to be provided else- where, for it will scarcely be compatible with the dignity of a great university to perpetuate the present arrange- ments for providing students with social enjoyments. With these modifications, and perhaps some others, the polytechnics, situated as they are in all parts of the metropolitan area, as will be seen from the accompany- ing outline map (Fig. 1), based upon the Report of the London Technical Education Board for 1900-1901, are peculiarly well adapted to become constituent colleges. There are immediate advantages accruing from an arrangement such as that outlined of a comprehensive university, consisting of the three university colleges, the Royal College of Science, the City Guilds Institute, the thirteen or so polytechnics, and perhaps a few other more specialised institutions, all bound together as necessary parts of one university, possessing the same aspirations, and all engaged in the same work of higher education. Such an organised whole will effect far more for London than the present individual and sporadic efforts of separate uncoordinated institutions competing the one against the other. And such an university could still preserve its former character as an imperial examining board for granting degrees. A development of this kind and on this scale will doubtless necessitate the expenditure of many times the million pounds asked for by University College. But when the inhabitants of the wealthiest city in the world are educated to understand that no spending is so profit- able as that on higher education and on the endowment of research, there will be little difficulty in obtaining the necessary funds. The immediate necessity is the pro- vision of the amount required to ensure the incorporation of University College in the University of London ; but this must be followed by a strenuous endeavour on the part of all men of science and influential men in every other department of mental activity to instruct Londoners in their duty towards their city and country of providing a permanently endowed University of London, consisting of constituent colleges situated in every part of the enormous area for the higher education of which the University is responsible. NO. 1696. VOL. 66] PROF. ALFRED CORNU. (CoG was born in 1841 at Chateauneuf, and en- tered the great military school of Paris, the Ecole Polytechnique, at the age of nineteen. After four years of study there he entered the Ecole des Mines, which he quitted in 1866, thus completing a brilliant career as a student. One year later, at the age of twenty-six, he was chosen as professor of physics at the Ecole Poly- technique, a post which he filled to the end of his life and adorned with the many results of his scientific researches. It would be impossible in a brief review of Cornu’s life to give more than the barest outline of his contributions to original knowledge. His position as a teacher gave him, amidst the material surroundings of his laboratory, the leisure to work. The beauty, the dignified ease and perfection of his investigations, the keen perspicacity of his observations, the masterly re- straint, so to speak, of the scientific memoirs which from time to time he contributed to the scientific world, all bespeak a man of no ordinary capabilities, a master of his profession. Clear in his exposition of scientific matters, exquisitely clear alike in his experimental demonstrations and in the language in which he ex- pounded their theory, he was as great in teaching as in research. Optics was his first love, and though he laboured successfully in other branches of experimental physics, it was to optics that he returned, and in the field of optics were achieved his greatest successes in physical investigation. The pages of the Comptes rendus and of the Journal de Physique bear eloquent testimony to the activity and penetration of his mind. Already, from 1863 to 1865, he had begun to cor tribute to the Académie des Sciences notes, the earliest of which relate to the refraction and reflection of light and to the problems of crystalline reflection. Following on the work of Jamin, he later pursued the subjects of vitreous and metallic re- flection, and studied the connection between them. He showed that they were but parts of one and the same phenomenon, though affecting different regions of the spectrum, there being, as he showed, a true continuity between them. Soon after entering upon the duties of his chair Cornu began with laborious and patient preparation those experiments upon the velocity of propagation of light which have become classical. Fizeau on the one hand, Foucault on the other, had already made deter- minations, each on his own lines. Foucault’s value, then supposed to be the best, was 2°98 x 1o! in C.G,S. units. Cornu’s results, of which an account will be found in some detail in NATURE of February 4, ale raised this figure to 3004 x 10!®, in vacuo, or 3°0033, in air. His method, which was fundamentally the same as that of Fizeau, was applied to the transit of light over a distance of 46 kilometres (or between two stations 23 kilometres apart, the one at the Observatoire, the other at Monthéry) ; and the instrumental perfection of his rotatory apparatus enabled him to observe up to the twenty-first extinction of the beam, thus securing a precision far in advance of that attained by Fizeau. For his determina- tion of the velocity of light he was awarded the frzx Lacaze in 1878, the same year in which his merits were recognised by his admission to the Académie des Sciences. In 1872 he wrote papers on the theory of electrostatics, in which he expounded the potential theories of Gauss © and Green, then little known in France. They are to be found in vol. i. of the Journal de Physique, then recently founded by his friend d’Alméida. For several subsequent years Cornu was occupied with researches on the spectrum. He measured the wave-lengths of the hydrogen rays with a_ pre- cision previously unknown, enabling a comparison to be made between the values so obtained by ex- periment and the theoretical formule which had been POD PO el ~ May I, 1902] proposed by Balmer and others to express them. The suggestions of Dr. Johnstone Stoney and the later developments of Kayser and Runge will not be forgotten in this relation. He also made observations on at- mospheric absorption in the spectrum, using photo- graphic methods, at his country house at Courtenay, where he used to spend most of his vacations. He thus was able to fix the inferior limit to the ultra-violet end of the spectrum, so far as it is visible at low elevations, and found that in the laboratory air is opaque to ultra-violet waves of a lesser wave-length than 07185 p. His work on meteorological optics has thus been summarised by M. Guillaume :—“Such researches, in the course of which he was often led to a scrutiny of the sky, could not fail to draw his attention to the optical phenomena of the atmosphere, the study of which, though energetically pur- sued by the French physicists of last century, is to-day somewhat neglected. The splendid glows which were observed in the sky toward the end of 1883 furnished to Cornu an occasion to utilise the profound knowledge which he possessed of the phenomena of optics. He showed that the twilight glow, which at that time gave such marvellous charm to the sunsets, was due to a diffrac- tion caused by fine powders, and it became evident that the formidable volcanic explosion of Krakatoa was the prime cause of it.” Cornu published an elegant method for the investi- gation of the optical constants of lens systems. He devised the optical lever for the measurement of the curvatures of lenses, and he perfected the Jellett prism for polarimetric work. To him is due the elegant geometrical construction in which spirals are applied to express | graphically the relative intensities of the light in diffrac- tion images. His preference for geometrical demon- strations of theorems which might otherwise be hidden under a burden of analytical symbols was _ well known. He worked at acoustics in conjunction with M. Mercadier, and at elasticity, and in conjunction with M. Baille redetermined the constant of gravitation. He was occupied, too, with the. problems of the syn- chronisation of two resonant systems capable of vibration under elastic forces, these memoirs being published in 1888 and 1889, the second of them including the applica- tion of his ideas to the synchronisation of clocks for the distribution of time. His plan was closely akin to that of Wheatstone, depending on the sending, at every second, of feeble induction currents generated by the movement of a magnet attached to the pendulum of a master clock. In 1884 he reported on the electric transmission of power by M. Marcel Deprez on the Chemin de Fer du Nord. He took part in the first electrical congress at Paris in 1881. In 1886 he became a member of the Bureau des Longitudes, and in 1900 of the International Commission on Weights and Measures. He was president of the Académie des Sciences; twice, at different periods, president of the Société de Physique ; and by general consent was elected to preside also over the International Congress of Physics in 1900. _ He was elected a foreign member of the Royal Society in 1884, and was also an honorary member of the Physical Society of London. In 1878 he received for his work on the velocity of light the Rumford Medal of the Royal Society. At least twice he gave Friday evening discourses at the Royal Institution ; the last of these in 1895 on the physical phenomena of the high regions of the atmosphere. In 1899 he delivered, with delightful eloquence and learned ease, the Rede lecture at Cambridge, on the wave-theory of light and its influence on modern physics. On this occasion, which was at the time of the jubilee celebration of Sir George Stokes, he received the honorary degree of Doctor of Science. In Cornu, France has lost one of her most distinguished men of science, and one who, not only as investigator, NO. 1696, VOL. 66] NATURE 13 but as teacher and wise counsellor, had won universal, esteem and respect. A true follower of the great tradi- tions of France inthe pursuit of science, and a passionate follower of Arago, Biot, Fresnel and Fizeau, he was in his own person much more than this. He was the ideal of a well-equipped, well-balanced, intellectual leader in scientific thought. SILVANUS P. THOMPSON. M. VIGNON’S RESEARCHES AND THE “HOLY SHROUD.” et the meeting of the Paris Academy of Sciences on April 21, some remarkable photographs of brownish stains found on the “ Holy Shroud” keptin the Treasure Chamber of Turin Cathedral, and traditionally said to be the winding-sheet of Christ, were exhibited in connec- tion with a paper by Dr. P. Vignon, of which a translation from the current number of the Comptes rendus of the Academy is given below. Upon reproducing these stains by photography, Dr. Vignon found that he obtained a realistic picture of a human figure, and the suggestion is that the picture is actually a representation of the body of Christ, produced by radiographic action from the body, which, according to ancient texts, was wrapped in a shroud impregnated with a mixture of oil and aloes. We give Dr. Vignon’s paper, which it. will be noticed is confined to an account of principles relating to radio- activity. ON THE FORMATION OF NEGATIVE IMAGES BY THE ACTION OF CERTAIN VAPOURS. Ir is known, from the work of M. Colson, published in the Comptes rendus of the Academy of Sciences in 1896, that freshly cleaned zinc emits vapours at the ordinary temperature which are capable of affecting photographic plates in the dark. The researches of Russell have also shown that the striations of a plate of zinc reproduce themselves on a photographic plate. But it is a long step from this to the realisation of an object in relief. I have succeeded in obtaining images either with medals powdered with zinc, or with bas-reliefs or objects fully embossed, in plaster, and rubbed with zinc powder. These images are negatives, not by the inversion of light and shade, since they are formed in the dark, but by the fact that the reliefs give more energetic impressions than the cavities. To interpret these it is necessary then to invert photographically ; | positive images are then obtained in which the scale of relief is scrupulously respected, which is far from being the case in normal photographs of the same objects illuminated from the front. Naturally, upon images made at a distance, the repro- duction of the most minute details could not be expected, the precision of the detail obtained being less as the distance increased. The clearness of the image depends upon the rapidity with which the action diminishes when the space in- creases between the emissive surface and the receiving screen. From a point of the active surface let a perpendicular be lowered on to the receiving plate ; the foot of this perpendicular constitutes the centre of a circle which makes a more energetic impression in its central region than on its edges; the clearness of the image will thus be greater the smaller the surface of the circle acted upon, and this surface varies inversely as the rapidity with which the actions decrease when the distance increases. It is on this account that the images correspond very nearly to those which would be realised if the actions were pro- duced only according to the orthogonal projections of the dif- ferent points of the active surface. It is a curious point that the images converted into positives frequently give rise to the impression of having been lit from above. This will be the case when a plane, such as the forehead, is seen from the front and forms at the same time a strong relief, whilst a plane near it is rapidly shifting, such as, for example, the region which connects the superciliary arch to the eyeball. When this plane shifts it appears to sink into a deep shadow. The truly specific character of these negative images which arise from action at a distance lies in the softness of the contours. The limit of the visible portion is the result for the eye of the receding of the surface. If this falling back takes place at a small distance {rom the receiving plane, the contour is still marked, though vaguely ; but if this falling away is produced 14 NATURE [May 1, 1902 only at a distance greater than that at which the vapours can act, no corresponding effect is produced in the image, which gradually weakens up to its borders by insensible gradations until it disappears altogether. Practically in spite of the softness of the details and the out- lines, the impressions produced by vapour are far from consisting of simple shadows ; if the object is in strong relief, the image is energetic and well marked ; it appears simply as if the object were seen through transparent gauze, or as if it had half emerged from a fog. Negative images have also been obtained by acting with ammoniacal vapours upon cloths impregnated with a mixture of powdered aloes and olive oil ; it is known that aloes contains a principle which turns brown and is oxidised under the in- fluence of alkalies in moist air. A plaster hand covered with a suede glove which has been moistened with a solution of ammonium carbonate acts similarly. There is obtained in this way a sort of print of the hand, a negative softened at the edges and wanting in proportion in so far that the points where the hand is too far from the cloth are too faint, the points of contact of the hand and cloth, on the other hand, being too strongly marked. The fermenta- tion of urea, easily brought about by the addition of a little urine, leads to the formation of ammonium carbonate and thus causes the browning of the aloes. The fermentation of a febrile sweat, rich in urea, leads to the same result, as is already well known. The extension of Dr. Russell’s researches on the photographic activity of certain bodies in the dark, con- tained in the above paper communicated to the Paris Academy by M. Vignon, has given rise to a most curious discussion. There is a so-called “Holy Shroud” at Turin in which tradition states the body of Christ was wrapped after the Crucifixion. An article in the Z7zmes thus refers to it and its connection with M. Vignon’s work :— “Tt is said to have been brought from the East in the four- teenth century, and in the following century it passed into the hands of the House of Savoy, and was deposited at Chambéry. Finally, it was transferred in 1578 to its present resting-place by Duke Emmanuel Philibert, who wished to spare Carlo Borromeo, the sainted Archbishop of Milan, the fatigue of a pilgrimage to its distant Savoyard shrine. The Shroud bears upon it, traced in hues of brown, what is alleged to be a double impression of the figure of Our Lord, the outlines both of the face and back of which have reproduced themselves with wonderfully distinct exactness. So seldom, however, is it exposed to view that this remarkable characteristic had almost been forgotten when, in May, 1898, some photographs specially taken of it by Signor Secondo Pia, of Turin, with the consent of its possessor, the King of Italy, once more drew attention to this strangely living likeness. Eighteen months ago these photographs came under the notice of M. Vignon, who, recognising their exceptional importance, at once began that inquiry of which the results were made public in a paper communicated to the Académie des Sciences.” In Paris, therefore, it has been generally accepted that a demonstration has been given by science of the authenticity, not only of the so-called shroud, but of all the historical events connected with it, and a much closer rapprochement between science and theology is predicted for the future. Here, however, difficulties have been raised. Father Thurston, a learned Jesuit, writes to the TZzmes as follows :— ‘* Before we can profitably discuss the value of Dr. Vignon’s scientific explanation of the marks on the ‘Holy Shroud’ a serious difficulty of quite another order has to be cleared up. The Abbé Ulysse Chevalier claims to have proved to demon- stration that the linen winding-sheet exhibited at Turin is a spurious relic manufactured in the fourteenth century, and, as the writer believes, with fraudulent intent. M. ?PAbbé Chevalier is a scholar of distinction, and of his perfect loyalty to the Catholic Church there can be no possible question. Moreover, his essay (‘* Itude Critique sur Origine du S, Suaire,” Paris, Picard, 1900) has been warmly welcomed by the more critical journals devoted to hagiography. In the Bollandist periodical, NO. 1696, VOL. 66] the Analecta Bollandiana, for instance, its Jesuit editors state (vol. xix., 1900, p. 350) that the Abbé Chevalier’s discussion of the subject is final, and that ‘il ne reste plus qu’a proclamer ‘«4 haute et intelligible voix,’ comme le voulait le Pape Clément VII. : ‘‘ Hac figura... non est verum sudarium Domini Nostri Jesu Christi.”’ “‘They go on to state that the story of the ‘image of the shroud’ given by Geoffroy de Lirey to the college founded by him in 1353 is not lost in the mist of ages, and does not happen to present any of those obscurities by which the historian who wishes to impart his own laboriously-acquired conviction to others must at times find himself baffled. We have, for in- stance, the document addressed to the Pope by Bishop Peter d’Arcis, in which he denounces the fraudulent dealing of the Chapter of Lirey, who for motives of avarice pretended that miracles were worked by this shroud, whereas his predecessor in the see of Troyes had officially investigated the matter and proved it to be a forgery. ‘Et probatum fuit eciam per artificem qui illum (pannum) depinxerat, ipsum humano opere factum, non miraculose confectum vel concessum.’”’ There is also another difficulty. It is stated that there is at least one other Holy Shroud in another holy place. NOTES. THE governing body of the Jenner Institute of Preventive Medicine has appointed Major Ronald Ross, F.R.S., whose name is well known in connection with his researches on malaria, to be head of a new department in the Institute at Chelsea, WE learn from the British Medical Journal that the Legisla- ture of New Jersey has passed a Bill which sets aside 10,000 dollars for the support of an experiment station where scientific investigations are to be made into the habits and breeding-places of mosquitoes and their relations to public health. WE regret to see the announcement of the death, at the age of sixty, of M. Henri Filhol, professor of paleontology at the Jardin des Plantes, Paris; and also of Prof. I. L. Fuchs, pro- fessor of mathematics in the University of Berlin. THE council of the Royal Institute of Public Health has con- ferred the Harben Gold Medal for the year 1902 upon Prof. W. R. Smith, late medical. officer of the School Board for London, in recognition of his eminent services to the public health, THE Washington correspondent of the Zzmes reports that Lord Kelvin and Mr. Westinghouse both gave evidence on April 24 before a committee of the House of Representatives appointed to consider the present system of coinage and weights and measures. Lord Kelvin advocated the passing of a Bill to substitute the metric system for the standard now employed in the United States. Mr. Long, Secretary of the Navy, expressed the hope that England would take the lead in this change, but said that if England did not the United States should, and England would then follow. Mr. Westinghouse supported the Bill; but declared that it would take ten years for the people to learn to use the metric system. IN connection with the second International Congress of Medical Electricity and Radiography, to be held at Bern on September 1-6, there will be an exhibition of apparatus re- lating to electro-physiology, electro-therapy and radiography. The physiological apparatus will be exhibited in the Physio- logical Institute, and will be in charge of Prof. Kronecker, director of the Institute, to whom communications relating to it should be addressed. The induction coils, contact-breakers, vacuum tubes and other apparatus connected with the produc- tion and uses of Rontgen rays in medicine will be in charge of Herr O, Pasche, chief of the Rontgen Institute of the Bern ee et ee aa May 1, 1902] NATURE 15 Hospital. The exhibition will be opened on August 29, and intending exhibitors should communicate as soon as possible with Herr Pasche, Réntgen Institute am Inselspital, Bern. Ar the present time, when much attention is being given to the reform of mathematical teaching associated with the name of Prof. Perry, the pamphlet entitled ‘‘The Cultivation of the Mathematical Imagination,’ by Miss Mary Everest Boole (Colchester: Benham and Co., price 6¢.), appears very oppor- tunely. The methods advocated by the authoress belong chiefly to the kindergarten stage of education, but there are many suggestions that are appropriate to a slightly more advanced stage ; the central idea is always that of leading up to general truths by means of concrete processes. The pamphlet should be very helpful to teachers who wish to find out how to prepare the minds of young children to receive formal mathematical instruction. Pror. R. W. Woop writes :—‘‘It may perhaps be a matter of some interest to teachers whose laboratory facilities are limited to know that solid carbon dioxide can be obtained from the sparklets now sold everywhere for a penny or two for the aération of beverages. The larger of the two sizes gives the best yield, of course. It is best to cool the sparklet in ice and salt for a few minutes before the experiment, and doubtless the amount of solid obtained would be still further increased by chilling the metal reservoir with which the bottles are fitted. A small square of black velvet should be held, or tied with a turn or two of string, over the end of the tube which delivers the :gas into the fluid. The nap of the cloth should be on the inside, and the part over the tube should form a little bag about the size of a marble. On discharging the sparklet and quickly removing the bag, the interior will be found to be lined with the snow-white solid, with which a small drop of mercury can be easily frozen. The substance shows off most beautifully on the jet black surface of the velvet.” THE death is announced of Mr. William Henry Penning. After pursuing a course of engineering under Mr. C. H. Gregory, he joined the staff of the Geological Survey in 1867 and was engaged in mapping portions of Essex, Suffolk, Cam- bridgshire and Lincolnshire. He was joint author of memoirs on the geology of the neighbourhood of Cambridge, Lincoln, and parts of Essex. He was author also of ‘* A Text-Book of Field Geology,” 1876 (edit. 2, 1879), and of ‘‘ Engineering Geology,” 1880. In 1882, through ill-health, he resigned his post on the Geological Survey and spent some time in South Africa. He died on April 20. We have also to regret the death of Mr. Joseph Nolan, who joined the Geological Survey in Ireland under Jukes in 1867, and after many years of active service in the field became in 1890 resident geologist in the Dublin office. He was author or part author of several memoirs in explanation of the Geological Survey maps. He retired from the public service in 1901 and died on April 19. A STRONG earthquake was felt round Lake Baikal on April 12. {t began at Irkutsk bya severe shock at 6h. 40m, a.m., the pen- dulum of the observatory being deflected by 22 mm. About twenty fairly severe shocks followed during the first minute. Groups of shocks next occurred, the strongest of them being at 7h. 13m., 7h. 31m., 7h. 36m. and 8h. t4m. All these shocks could be felt even without instruments, their force attaining the value of 5 in the seismic scale. The earthquake was widely felt round Lake Baikal. At Selenghinsk the chief disturbance travelled in a direction from S.W. to N.E. and the following shocks were noticed :—at 7h. om., 7h. 50m., 7h. 54m. and 8h. 35m. At the village Snyezhnaya, on the eastern coast of the lake, several chimneys were destroyed and crockery was thrown down. Further east, at Verkhneudinsk, and on the western coast, NO. 1696, VoL. 66] the shock was much feebler. During the night of April ro-11 a very strong earthquake was felt in the north of Finland. At Uleaborg window panes rattled and crockery fell from its place. Shocks of earthquake continue also to be felt at Shemakha. Two severe shocks were noticed on April 17 at 1oh. om. and Ioh. 30m. p.m. Ir seems at first sight to be a bold statement to put forward that the study of the distribution of plants may be dated back to the time of Alexander the Great. But no more weighty opinion could be obtained than that of a scholar who has com- bined the study of classics and botany. Herr Hugo Bretzl, asa thesis for his doctorate in Strassburg, has made a careful study of Theophrast’s ‘‘ Plant-geography,” and comes to the conclusion that from the description there given of the air-roots of A%czs bengalensts the writer must have been able to refer to the original accounts of Alexander’s expedition. The brochure received gives two chapters from the whole work, which is to be pub- lished in book form and promises to be exceedingly interesting. Not only does the author show that the Greeks realised such facts as the absence of the pine in all the countries which inter- vene between Macedonia and India, but incidentally his refer- ences suggest that the Aristotelan writers have not received due justice at the hands of other writers of historical botany. Ir will be remembered that in a recent issue notes of the discovery of a blood parasite occurring in man and belonging to the genus Trypanosoma were recorded. The case was one of a European, whose chief symptoms were irregular rises of temper- ture with afebrile intervals, the attack being accompanied by increased frequency of respiration and pulse. The parasite was present only during the febrile attacks, and whilst it closely resembled Z. Avucez in form and staining reactions, it was, however, considerably smaller and in fixed specimens assumed a characteristic ‘‘set.” Another striking feature, which reminds one of the diseases known as Nagana and Surra in horses and cattle, is the occurrence of cedema of the eyelids and feet. Nepveu claims to have discovered this parasite in man in Algiers, but his description is very imperfect and raises considerable doubts as to whether what he saw were really trypanosomes. Mr. J. Everett Dutton, who described the parasite occurring in the blood of a European at Bathurst, West Africa, has within the last few days added the most interesting obser- vation that the parasite occurs also in native children. Whilst examining for malaria parasites a large number of microscopical blood preparations of the native children of a small village, a few miles nearer the mouth of the River Gambia than Bathurst, he found in one preparation a number of trypanosomes resem- bling in every way those found in the case of the European before recorded. This second observation opens up a_ large field for further investigation and points to the extreme im- portance of the study of the diseases of natives, especially from a parasitological point of view, in West Africa and other parts of the world. THE Meteorological Office Pilot Chart for May gives a short account of submarine earthquakes and the curious sensations they produce on board ship. Within the basin of the North Atlantic the fairly well-defined seismic regions are near the equator, between 19° and 33° W. ; about the West Indies ; from the Cape Verde Islands north-westward to about 33° N., 41° W. ; and from 34° to 45° N., 13° to 30° W. The ice season this spring is very late, no bergs having been reported down to April 16. The St. Lawrence River was open for navigation at Quebec on April 3, an unusually early date. Numerous obser- vations show that during the month of February last the temperature of the surface water of the Atlantic was below the average over a space extending south-westward from the British 16 NATURE Isles as far as 30° W. longitude. On shore the month was the coldest we had experienced for seven years, the air temperature being from 3° to 5° under the normal for various localities. TuE Meteorological Council has issued a valuable paper entitled ‘‘ Temperature Tables of the British Islands.” The work is divided into two parts: (1) The results derived from thirty years’ hourly observations (1871-1900) for the four observatories Valencia, Aberdeen, Falmouth and Kew, showing the means and extremes of temperature for each day of the year and for the month; (2) the means and extremes for each month and for the year for 117 stations, with records of not less than fifteen years. In order to give an adequate representation of monthly temperatures of the London area, a table for Greenwich is included, with the consent of the Astronomer Royal, which gives data for sixty years. In the diagrams representing the seasonal variations at the observatories, the curves for maximum and minimum readings are printed on tracing paper, so that they can be superposed one upon the other, or upon the curve showing the mean values. A special feature, it is stated, in the treatment of the seasonal curves is an attempt to define a normal seasonal variation of temperature by the harmonic analysis of five-day means, to which daily averages and individual observations can be referred. THE first number of the third volume of the West Indian Bulletin is devoted to a summary of the business transacted during the Agricultural Conference at Barbados in January last ; to full reports of a number of papers on various phases of the sugar industry, with short accounts of the discussions on them ; and to two communications of a general character—‘‘ The Organisation and Functions of Boards of Agriculture’ and a ““Report of the Chemical Section at the Conference.” With the approval of the Secretary of State it is proposed by the Commissioner shortly to commence the publication of a new fortnightly review, to be called the Agrzculturval News, in- tended to contain in popular form agricultural information suited to the circumstances of the West Indies. A PAPER by Mr Horace C. Richards, on the harmonic curves known as Lissajou’s figures, is not the least interesting feature of the Journal of the Franklin Institute for April. The diagrams traced by the aid of a harmonograph are remarkably perfect and beautiful. AN illustrated account of M. Santos Dumont’s Parisian experiments is now given in Prometheus, No. 642. It includes reproductions of photographs showing the results of the acci- dents on August 8 and September 6, 1901; the successful ascents of October last are illustrated by views of the balloon when starting and when rounding the Eiffel Tower and a chart of the course. THE Rendiconti of the Lombardy Academy notes that the Bologna Medical and Surgical Society offers a prize of 500 lire for an essay on sero-diagnosis in tuberculosis. Further, the “‘Olympic Academy” of Vicenza offers a prize of 3160 lire for a study of the Italians living on the South American continent, including more particularly the question of emigration and the relation between the colonists and their mother country. TuHeE Deutsche Mathematiker-Vereinigung has decided on a new departure in regard to the publication of its /akres- bericht. Under the editorship of Prof. A. Gutzmer, of Jena, this publication will in future appear monthly instead of an- nually, and among other features it is proposed to include academic dissertations, inaugural addresses, obituary notices both of members and of non-members, discussions on ques- tions of teaching, notices of such undertakings as catalogues of current literature or the publication of Gauss’s works, accounts of the meetings of societies, and notes and queries. NO. 1696, vou. 66] [May 1, 1902 WE have received the April number of Ze mozs scientifique, which is devoted to a summary of recent books and publications on horticulture and botany. Among these we notice two new books on the cultivated plants of the south of France, one by M. Sauvaigo dealing with the Mediterranean coast, the other on southern flowers generally by M. Granger, and a new flora of France by M. A. Acloque. UNDER the title of Z/éorte nouvelle de la Loupe, M. G. Quesneville has published, in Paris, a small érochuve dealing with the optical properties of lenses, considered with especial reference to vision. The principal difference between the present and the conventional treatment is that here account is taken of what happens to the rays of light, not only during their passage through the system of lenses considered, but also after they enter the eye. THE manufacture of butter with sterilised cream with the view of preventing the spread of tuberculosis is dis- cussed by Drs. Serafino Belfanti and Costantino Coggi in the Lombardy Rendéconti?, xxxv. 7. In Sweden and Denmark pasteurisation is already adopted on a large scale, but in Ger- many and Italy a prejudice still exists against butter made with cream that has been subjected to this precautionary measure. The paper shows that the process, so far from being detrimental to the quality of butter, may actually prove of commercial value, and that the problem of preventing the diffusion of tuber- culosis by means of milk does not involve such great pecuniary sacrifices as have been sometimes anticipated. Tue Geneva Society of Physics and Natural History has just issued the first part of volume xxxiv. of its AZémozres, con- taining reports of the work done during 1900 both in physica} and biological science. Among the most interesting results we notice M. A. Brun’s observation during the summer of 1900 of a peculiar kind of snow on Mont Malet, called ‘‘neige de Caucase,” or Caucasian snow. It is a porous snow the grains of which attain a size of as much as three millimetres, and their want of adherence may readily give rise to avalanches. A new station at the Hospice of the Great St. Bernard is another feature noted in the AZémotves. The observations are made at the usual hours of the: Swiss. meteorological service, and the building is situated to the north-east of the old hospice. This departure is largely due to the energy of Prof. R. Gautier, who has equipped the station with thermometers and hygrometers specially adapted to high mountain work, and whose efforts have been ably supported by the monks. WE have received a copy of an address on the teaching of biology delivered by Prof. Haberlandt on the occasion of the opening of the new scientific and medical institute at the University of Gratz on December 9, 1899. From the Report of the Director for the year 1899-1900, it appears that so long ago as 1857 a Museum was established in the town of Trivandrum, Travancore, but that for many years its condition was far from flourishing. By the addition of a public garden and menagerie, affairs have been placed on a better footing ; and it is satisfactory to learn that the museum is now devoted to the illustration of local zoology. The following sentence from the director’s Report is somewhat remarkable :— *©In 1890 I succeeded Colonel Ketchen as Honorary Secretary and received the honorarium usually given to the Honorary Secretaries.” In vol. xxiv. (pp. 499-566) of the Proceedings of the U.S. Museum, Mr. W. H. Dall describes and figures a number of new or hitherto imperfectly known shells, mainly American, in the collection of which he has charge. A large number of these, belonging to Buccinum, Trophon and allied forms, are a as — May 1, 1902] from Alaska and other parts of the Pacific coast of north- western America. Conspicuous among them is the handsome shell from Unalaska Island on which the genus and species Beringius crebricostatus were established by the author. (CME oir oo olidha wm iceo u,b) 5 Hats" Buchenau : ‘‘ Flora der ostfriesischen Inseln” . . . 149 Penrose: Occultations of Stars and Solar Eclipses’”’ . 149 Willis: Algebra ®*.. <7; veymaiecencsiicu noah ciate = Matt am EL SD Letters to the Editor :— Earthquake in Guatemala. (With Map).—Edwin Rockstroh . . ora U8) The Vibration of the Violin.—W. B. Coventry AP pe Gf) The ‘‘ Armorl”’ Electro-Capillary Relay.—J.-S. . . 151 Prehistoric Pygmies in Silesia. —David MacRitchie 151 Flames from Mud on Sea-Shore.—Rev. H. T. Dion! |< 151 Cuckoo’s Egg Threwn out of Bunting’ s Nest. aan G. 151 Volcanic Eruptions in the West Indies. By Prof. Te vigine sk Ros... Gato 151 Records and Results of Recent Eruptions Sued 153 The New Botanical Laboratories at Liverpool. (Lilustiated) . . SCHORR MAR Oe HSE The Hugh Miller Centenary. Raphael Ao SK8 Ieazarnisiiuchs. we By G. By Mice relocate SO GanlogRivan By A. G. 0 cfc lr coms ch eee nee Notes. (/élustrated). .. of se) Vee, O57, The Royal Observatory Visitation $e 161 Evidence of a ‘‘ Seiche”’ on a Scottish Loch. (With Diagram). . The Mining Statistics of the World. ‘By B. H. B. 163 University and Educational Intelligence . . . . 163 Scientific Serials . . . PTS ois! ecm m a 2155 Societies and Academies . Ae.oy Oh th SoC us) Dianyrote societies . }) Assasins «ce oct eee Sore NATURE THURSDAY, JUNE 19, 1902. THE PLACE OF LAMARCK IN THE HISTORY ‘OF EVOLUTION. Lamarck, thé Founder of Evolution; his Life and Work. With Translations of his Writings on Organic Evolution. By Alpheus S. Packard, M.D., LL.D., Professor of Zoology and Geology in Brown University, &e. Pp. xiv + 451. (London and New York : Long- mans, Green and Co., rgor.) Price gs. net. HE name of Lamarck has of late been much in people’s mouths. Now that the doctrine of organic evolution has secured acceptance from all those who are qualified to form an opinion on the subject, an attempt is being made in some quarters to deprive Darwin, the real hero of the campaign, of at least a portion of his laurels, and to bestow them on a leader of inferior rank and far lower achievement. It cannot be doubted that this attempt is, in the long run, doomed to failure; but in the meantime there is considerable danger of an unwholesome reaction among those who have not perfectly comprehended the points at issue. It is often forgotten that the idea of “ special creation,” or, as we should rather say, of the “immutability of species,” is one of comparatively recent growth. Before the seventeenth century the current notions on this sub- ject were by no means rigid, while the terms “genus” and “species,” in their technical use, were the exclusive property of logicians. It is not until the time of Ray that we find the latter term borrowed by a naturalist in order to give precision to a conception which was then a novelty to the scientific mind. The definition of natural species in the Linnzean sense would have sounded as strange in the ears of Francis Bacon as would the denial of spontaneous generation. The work of Ray, Linnzus and Cuvier, greatly as it assisted the cause of science, carried with it a fatal defect. It left order where it had found confusion, but in substituting exactness of definition for the vague conceptions of a former age, it did much to obscure the rudimentary notions of organic evolution which had influenced naturalists and philosophers from Aristotle downwards. Nevertheless, the old transformist beliefs, though no longer popular, were not left quite without a witness. Buffon, being possibly influenced by considerations other than scientific, vacillated, as is well known, between the theories of mutability and fixity of species. Erasmus Darwin, on the other hand, was a vigorous and outspoken upholder of the transformist opinion, shorn of some, but not all, of its former crudities. Geoffroy St. Hilaire de- clared in favour of the derivation of different species from the same type; and six years later Lamarck, who had previously taught the fixity of species, announced his adherence to the evolutionary view. The author of the “ Vestiges of Creation” and Herbert Spencer may be said in some sort to have carried on the transformist succession, but it was reserved for Charles Darwin and Alfred Russel Wallace to import into the problem an entirely fresh set of considerations, and by means of a new and illuminating theory, supported ona secure basis of fact, to win universal acceptance fora doctrine which all NO. 1703, VOL, 66] 169 the skill and eloquence of its former advocates had failed to commend to the scientific world. Prof. Packard, on the title-page of the present work, calls Lamarck “the founder of evolution.” If the fore- going may be taken as a not unfair presentment of the course of opinion on the subject of transformism, it is difficult to see how such a claim can be justified. It is idle to discuss whether or not Lamarck was acquainted with the works of Erasmus Darwin. Transformism was in the air, and it is impossible to credit Lamarck with the origination of a view which had been present to the minds of Geoffroy St. Hilaire and of Buffon. Neither can it be said that Lamarck’s advocacy won general approval for a doctrine that was previously discredited. The strength of his own convictions and the persistence with which he urged them are not in question ; but the fact that he failed to convert either his contemporaries or his successors is equally indisputable. The only ground on which, if on any, the claim advanced on behalf of Lamarck can be sustained is the allegation that he was the first to render the doctrine of transmutation credible by pointing out the methods on which organic evolution has proceeded. Much, no doubt, depends on the acceptance or rejection of the so-called “ Lamarckian factors.” Inthe earlier stages of the present phase of the evolutionary controversy, these factors were somewhat uncritically accepted as adjuvants to the theory of natural selection propounded by Darwin and Wallace. But when the belief in the inheritance of acquired characters had once been seriously called in question, it was speedily perceived that no logical necessity existed for evolutionists to accept these factors at all. The question became clearly one of evidence; and in the opinion of many, if not most, of the leaders of scientific thought, the upholders of the Lamarckian view have so far failed to deal successfully with the burden of proof that undoubtedly rests upon them. The hereditary trans- mission of individually acquired characters is a necessary part of the Lamarckian system, and until this point is established to the satisfaction of scientific opinion, it is at least premature to hail Lamarck as in any sense the founder of organic evolution. And even should the proof be forthcoming, the facts would still remain that many of Lamarck’s views had been already foreshadowed, that his system contains much speculation unsupported by adequate evidence, and much that is demonstrably erroneous ; moreover, that it failed in any appreciable degree to influence his contemporaries. It is hardly necessary to point out how complete a con- trast to this is afforded by the history of Darwinism. Founded on a basis of observation and experiment to which the Lamarckian speculations can lay no claim, and calling in the aid of a principle—that of natural selection —which, given the observed facts of variation, actually showed how the adaptation everywhere manifest in nature might have been brought about, the Darwinian system supplied an element of rationality which had hitherto been absent, and compelled the attention of those to whom the unsupported hypotheses of previous trans- formists had failed to appeal. The importance ot Darwin’s work is seen in its results. Under the influence of the “ Origin of Species,” Huxley, Lyell, Hooker and Asa Gray ranged themselves on the side of evolution ; I 170 the whole of the scientific world, with few exceptions, followed their example, and before his death Darwin had the satisfaction of knowing that the doctrine of evolution had become almost a commonplace in the minds of the reflecting and cultivated portion of the community. Lamarck was unquestionably a capable, industrious and enthusiastic naturalist. He possesses the merit of having grasped the truth of organic evolution, though his views as to its methods were crude and his arguments in its favour unsubstantial. He also carried out the principle on a far larger scale and with greater amplifi- cation of detail than did any of his transformist prede- cessors, and to him we owe the first attempt at the construction of a scheme of phylogeny. But while we readily allow all this, it seems to us, for the reasons above given, that in. the present work the importance of Lamarck and of his contribution to the progress of evolutionary theory is greatly over-estimated. Never- theless, in putting before us within reasonable compass a careful and critical account of the little that is known of the life and circumstances of Lamarck, and of his relations with the leaders of scientific thought in France during a period which is full of interest, Dr. Packard has done real service. He seems inclined to complain that writers on evolution “do not know their Lamarck.” Whether this be true or not, the extracts from Lamarck’s writings here given are so representative and so copious that there will in future be no excuse for ignorance as to what Lamarck’s tenets really were. It may be doubted whether the well-known chapters in Lyell’s “ Principles ” do not really contain all that is requisite for forming a working estimate of the Lamarckian doctrine. But there are some to whom, for various reasons, a more extended acquaintance with this doctrine will be necessary, and who yet possess neither the time nor the opportunity for attacking the works of Lamarck in their original form. To such readers, if they are willing to show indulgence towards a certain amount of needless repetition and some occasional inaccuracy in translation and other matters, Dr. Packard’s interesting and thorough-going volume may be recommended with confidence. BE: ALD: ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. By James Walker, (London: George Elementary Inorganic Chemistry. DSc, \PheD:; H.R-S., .Pp:.265. Bell and Sons, 1901.) Price 35. 6d. Experimental Chemistry. By Lyman C. Newell, Ph.D., State Normal School, Lowell, Mass. Pp. xv + 410. (London: D. C. Heath and Co., 1902.) Price 5s. Elementary Experimental Chemistry. By W. ¥. Watson, A.M., Furman University, South Carolina. Pp. 320. (New York: A. S. Barnes and Co., 1901.) Price 7s. net. HE first of these books may be said to meet a dis- tinct want, felt in this case by others than the author, and to meet it extremely well. It is an ele- mentary treatise on chemistry imbued with the spirit of the times, but written with restraint and marked by the lucid and philosophic style characteristic of the best class of scientific writing. It is not an ancient garment em- broidered with new ions, nor is it an aggravated bouleversement of the chemistry that was presented to NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 us twenty years ago. It would probably do most chemists good to read it, and it is admirably adapted as a first college book for students. It contains the essentials of chemical theory and a really judicious selection of chemical facts, and it is to be commended, perhaps, most of all to examiners, whose sins in asking for unimportant facts abate but slowly. It is no book for those who have to charge their memories with Dutch liquid, puce- coloured oxide of lead and powder of Algaroth ; yet it does not relegate the conception of mass action and reversible changes to a period of grave and senior study. It is, in fact, a book which can be unreservedly recommended, and Prof. Walker deserves our thanks for having written it. Dr. Newell’s book is a thoughtful and _ interesting attempt to improve upon the older kind of text-book, and the author endeavours to interweave a laboratory course with adequate descriptive matter. It is difficult to judge such a book fairly without putting it to practical use, but there seems every prospect that by using it as the author intends it to be used the student would be brought to the right view of chemical science and to a sound know- ledge of the leading principles and facts. The book abounds in practical and theoretical problems, and encouragement is given to the discussion of laboratory results in class—a most valuable form of teaching. There is a tendency in books of this kind for some of the statements, questions and injunctions to become a little puerile, and to conjure up a picture of ingenuousness which, in the present writers experience, is not often found in real life, at least among male students. How- ever, there is not very much to complain of in this way. The book has obvious merits, and the author may fairly claim that it deserves a trial. The third work under review is intended especially for students who only take one short course of chemistry. A reviewer will, according to his disposition, be either intimidated or exasperated by the author’s statement that he is “ profoundly grateful to ten different educators for reading the proof sheets and making valuable sugges- tions.” To make any objections after this announcement seems perhaps rash ; but at whatever cost, the author and the ten educators must be faced with the statement that to an eleventh educator the book has proved disappoint- ing. The introduction to the work comprises ten pages, and it consists of a series of statements defining matter, chemical compounds and mechanical mixtures, atoms, molecules, indestructibility of matter and conservation of energy. It is difficult to know what purpose is served by confronting the student at the very outset of chemical study with a series of dogmas such as are found here. The idea of the atom, for instance, is introduced by the statement that ‘“‘a single symbol as C and Cl indicates one atom of the element.” Immediately upon this comes “An atom is the smallest portion of matter that can take part in a chemical change. It is indivisible.” The atom being thus disposed of, the molecule is dealt with in like fashion. It is really astonishing to find this kind of thing in a book with such pretensions as are set forth in the preface. The rest of the book is of the sane mould ; there is nothing to distinguish it from dozens of other elementary chemical books of the kind that in this country have had their day and are happily JUNE 19, 1902 ] ceasing to be. A careful perusal has disclosed nothing that can give a well-intentioned critic occasion to say “*this is a happy idea—that is capitally put—this is some- thing to help us.” On the contrary, if this book were to be reviewed in detail, it would be necessary to write columns of complaint. One feature of novelty appears in the book in the form of full-page illustrations of apparatus and materials used in all the experiments. These pictures are reproduced from photographs, and show three tiers of apparatus arranged as if for sale. In many cases it is not easy for an experienced chemist to recognise the individual pieces, and in plate xx. we reach a climax. It represents on the top shelf two tin canisters, a stoppered bottle, a Bunsen burner, a beaker, a tin dish, a blowpipe and another stoppered bottle. On the next shelf are three stoppered bottles, a hammer, four tin canisters, a small structure like a dog kennel, and a rack of twelve test-tubes. On the bottom shelf are two developing trays, a beaker, a stoppered bottle, a sugar basin, a stone gingerbeer bottle, a pocket handkerchief and apparently a bank-note ora shirt cuff. The plate bears the legend “The Metals.” By the use of a lens one word of two of the labels can be deciphered. SOLID GEOMETRY. The Elements of Euclid, Book XT. By R. Lachlan, Sc.D. Pp. 51. (London: Edward Arnold, n.d.) Price ts. T is to be hoped that some of the scientific committees which are now dealing with the improvement of mathematical teaching, and more especially with that of the teaching of elementary geometry, will, in the process of pruning Euclid, direct attention to this little-read Book xi. As in other books of the Elements, many of the propositions are of the trivial, or even ludicrous, character, while some of the definitions lack precision. For example, can prop. I—‘‘one part of a straight line cannot lie in a plane and another part without the plane ”—be seriously cegarded as necessary? Indeed, the proof assumes the thing which it seeks to prove; let A B C be the given straight line ; let a part of it, A B, lie in the plane, and a part, B C (if possible), out of the plane ; produce A B in the plane to any point, D, &c. To this several other instances might be added. Then as regards definition, the descriptions of di- hedral, trihedral and (generally) polyhedral angles leave something to be desired. Possibly some better term than angle can be found in such cases. We are told that “when two planes meet and are terminated at their line of intersection, they are said to form a dihedral angle” ; “ when several planes meet in a point, they are said to form a polyhedral angle.” All that such planes visibly “form” is a certain figure ; the “angle” which they form (as it is employed in subsequent mathematics) is, in reality, an avea on a sphere of unit radius. It is true that Book xi. is not concerned with this precise quantitative definition of (so-called) sold angles—better called conical angles—but merely with certain plane, or face, angles connected with them ; nevertheless, it may be desirable to give the student, who when he reaches Book xi. can scarcely be called a degénner, this quanti- tative notion. NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NAAT ORE 171 In the small compass of this book there is little oppor- tunity for anything strikingly original or novel. Dr. Lachlan finishes it with an appendix which contains a large number of propositions, examples, &c., and this appendix will be found much more valuable than Book xi. itself. A few criticisms of a minor character may not be out of place. We notice that in the enunciation of each proposition, Dr. Lachlan always uses the simple word “is” or “are” when the proposition states a fact which can be proved ; thus, “if two planes intersect, their line of intersection is a straight line.” The typical editor of a modern Euclid would say “their line of intersection shall be a straight line,” employing a ridiculous com- pulsory form of expression. There is now the beginning of a revulsion against this style, which has been con- sidered for some curious reason to be appropriate and essential to Euclid, but to no other subject of study or conversation. So far, Dr. Lachlan is in agreement with common sense ; but why does he, when setting out on the proof of the proposition, re-state the fact with a “shall be”? Twice he forgot his rule—in prop. 1, where “must be” is employed, and _ prop. 14, where the simple and sensible ‘“‘are” of the formal enunciation remains “are” in the re-statement. The proof of prop. 20 would avoid a tendency to mislead the student if it stated that the point C is first taken (arbitrarily), then E, and finally B and D by draw- ing avy line, E B D, through E. In the third line of the proof of prop. 21, the proof is rendered very much more clear by the insertion of the word “all” before the words “the ds,” the statement then being the very obvious one that if there are two sets of fifty plane triangles, the sum of all the angles in the first set is equal to the sum of all those in the second set. Finally, the employment of the word “ power” in the definition (p. 536) “the square on the distance between a point and the centre of a sphere less the square on the radius of the sphere is called the power of the point with respect to the sphere” does not seem justifiable or neces- sary, although it has been employed by a geometer of high repute. The word ower is already employed in science for something quite different from the square of a tangent. Indeed, a student of electricity might be tempted to think that this geometrical “‘ power of points ” is a mere pun on the well-known term used in connec- tion with frictional machines. Everything must not be sacrificed to brevity ; if new terms are wanted in science, they should be appropriate and expressive. BELGIAN BOTANICAL INVESTIGATIONS. Recueil de Institut Botanique (Université de Bruxelles), Par L. Errera. Tomev. Pp. xii + 357. (Bruxelles: Henri Lamertin, 1902.) N this book there are brought together recent papers by botanists of the Royal Academy of Belgium, which have already been published in different journals during the last two years. Although this is the first volume to be published, it appears as vol. v., since the first four volumes will be given up to earlier papers. Thus the five volumes will provide a systematic record of various lines of research, mainly physiological, which have been the subjects of investigation in the Botanical Institute of Brussels. The nature of the alkaloids found in plants and the methods of localising them is one of these subjects, and in the present volume there are two papers dealing with those bodies, the one by the late M. George Clautriau, on “The Nature and Significance of Alkaloids in Plants,” the other by E. Vanderlinden, treating of alkaloids in the Ranunculacez. A considerable part of Clautriau’s paper is historical, the present research being confined to caffeine obtained from coffee and tea plants. Having previously studied the alkaloids in various other plants, he is well qualified to summarise our present knowledge of them. Although alkaloids have only been located in a limited number of plants, Clautriau considers that they are probably formed in all plants, but not always in suf- ficient quantity to be stored up. Alkaloids derived from purine bases are found throughout the whole range of plants, while those derived from a pyridine base are con- fined almost exclusively to Angiosperms. Definite micro- chemical tests for alkaloids are wanting ; thus Clautriau was unable to obtain any which would enable him to detect caffeine zz s¢¢u. He concludes that alkaloids are decomposition products formed in the breaking down of proteids ; that they can be worked up again, but this requires a considerable expenditure of energy, and that generally their function is to protect the plant. Vander- linden’s results are quite in harmony with Clautriau’s views. He finds that the amount of alkaloid present in a plant is liable to fluctuations, these depending upon the phase of vegetation and the nature of the soil. Curiously, Ranunculus and Clematis, two genera weli known to possess toxic properties, yield no alkaloid. In a second paper, Clautriau describes his experiments on pitcher-plants, some of which were performed on plants in their natural habitat in Java, others after his return to Brussels. Vines, who has reinvestigated the subject on the strength of Clautriau’s results, does not confirm them, but decides that the ferment is tryptic, not peptic. In the course of his experiments on the permeability of protoplasm to liquids at different temperatures, van Rysselburgh disproves the view held by Schwendener and others that protoplasm is not permeable to water at o° C. ; in fact, he finds that it is permeable to potassium nitrate, urea, methylene-blue, &c., at the same tempera- ture. Another important observation was made that the sap in a cell if isotonic with a certain solution at any temperature will be isotonic with it for all temperatures. M. Jean Massart advances some decidedly unconven- tional ideas on the phylogeny of the lower organisms, which presumably have originated during his investigation of the protoplasm of the Schizophyta. His deductions as to the nature of the central body in the Schizophyceze and the stainable bodies in Bacteria are somewhat con- vincing, but at present many problems of the nucleus seem to be beyond our powers of solution. The last few pages of the publication are devoted to the description of a gigantic Bacterium, Spiril/um colossus, obtained by Prof. Errera from an ancient moat. NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 OUR BOOK SHELF. Dynamos, Alternators and Transformers. By Gisbert Kapp. Translated from the third German edition by H. H. Simmons, A.M.I.E.E. Pp. v + 503. (London: Biggs and Co.) Price tos. 6d. e Etude Pratique sur les Différents Syst’mes d’Eclairage. By J. Defays and H. Pittet. Pp. 168. (Paris: Gauthier- Villars, n.d.) Price fr. 3. Mr. Kapp’s book has passed through a somewhat curious development. Originally written in English, it first appeared in German as a translation; subsequently Mr. Kapp revised, and to a large extent re-wrote, the German translation, the revised book appearing as the third German edition in 1899. It is this work which has now been translated by Mr. Simmons. The general merits of the book are probably known to most electrical engineers ; those who are only familiar with the earlier English edition will find much that is new and valuable in the one now before us. After some opening chapters on the electric and magnetic theory underlying the design of dynamos, the winding of armatures is con- sidered in detail in a couple of chapters well illustrated by diagrams. The next chapter deals with field magnets, after which armature reaction, commutation and sparkless collection are considered at some length. Some typical examples of direct-current machines are described, but at no great length, as this ground has already been covered by Mr. Kapp in his “Dynamo Construction : Electrical and Mechanical.” The remainder of the book deals in a similar manner with alternators, synchronous and asynchronous motors, and rotary converters. Graphical methods are employed in this part to a con- siderable extent ; the mathematical treatment throughout the book is clear and concise, a certain familiarity with the differential and integral calculus being assumed in the reader: Asa whole the work forms a most valuable text-book for the student of this branch of electrical engineering. It will be noticed that the book does not deal at all with transformers ; this is because a separate work on this subject has been published by the author, a fact which is stated in the preface. Yet in spite of this, the title as it appears on the cover and page headings is “Dynamos, Alternators and Transformers,” which is, to say the least, misleading. On the title-page a different, and more accurate, name is given to the book. This defect is to be regretted, as it mars an otherwise excellent work. MM. Defays and Pittet’s volume cannot fail to prove attractive to those who are interested in the problems of artificial lighting. The authors have aimed at providing a practical guide to those who are called upon to select, as, for example, for lighting a factory, a suitable system of illumination. Naturally, in such a case, the question of relative cost is of prime importance ; the authors have, however, rightly abstained from dwelling too strongly on this point, as not only is the price so largely a question of locality, but it is often very difficult, if not impossible, to decide what is the monetary equivalent of the advantages which one illuminant possesses over another. The whole subject of artificial illumination is first dealt with in a general manner, the considerations of importance in relation to different conditions of use being pointed out. After this, separate chapters are devoted to a detailed examination of lighting by gas, acetylene, oil, alcohol and electricity. The principles underlying each system are expounded clearly and not too technically, and its security, healthiness and efficiency are discussed. From the hygienic point of view there can be no question as to the superiority of electric light; it is also more con- venient, and probably safer, than any other method ; but unfortunately it is considerably dearer, unless regarded from the enlightened standpoint which takes into account JUNE 19, 1902 | NATURE 173 the value of health and convenience. Second in healthi- ness, probably, comes incandescent gas lighting, and this is also the cheapest. For comparative figures we must refer readers to the book itself, in which many useful and interesting tables are given. The book would be improved by the addition of illustrations, which are more especially needed to accompany the descriptions of different forms of gas burners and lamps. We also think that it would be advantageous if the very short chapter on the distribution of light, and the use of shades, &c., were expanded, as this is a subject on which the public more especially needs instruction, since it 1s that which, more than any other, they have under their own control. M.S Sanitary Engineering. A Practical Manual of Town Drainage and Sewage and Refuse Disposal. By Francis Wood, A.M. Inst. C.E., F.G.S. With numerous illustrations. Pp. xi + 304. (London: Charles Griffin and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 85. 6d. net. SANITARY engineering is a comprehensive and difficult science, yet the author states in his preface that he him- self “felt the want of a work which would in one small volume deal with the science in a comprehensive, concise and easily intelligible form.” It is fair to infer from this statement that he considers the want has been met by the compilation of the present work. Yet in his introductory remarks (chapter i.) he adds that the student “ will know only a small part of this vast subject when he has read and learned the contents of the present volume.” We concur with the writer in the latter statement. The work contains a great deal of information upon sanitary engineering which will be useful to municipal engineers and students, medical officers of health, sanitary in- spectors and members of local authorities ; but the sub- ject is of course not dealt with comprehensively. The general correctness of the statements and views expressed leave little to be desired, but while in a scientific text-book there is no occasion to be hypercritical on the subject of literary style, there are so many instances in this work where the meaning is obscured or the sense is lost by the slovenly construction of sentences that the pleasure and satisfaction of perusing it are somewhat marred. To give one or two instances :— “ The student must therefore take and make the most of the opportunities which he now has—and never will have again” (p. 5). “The engineer is a born geologist ; his work is con- nected with the earth and its composition” (p. 5). “Since the system of bacteriology has been brought forward ” (p. 227). “The formation of Urban, Rural District, and Parish Councils are doing a great work in abolishing these abominations ; and it is pleasing to note that in almost every district and village sanitary inspectors are being appointed, who with the powers they possess are rapidly converting these anomalies, which soon must become things of the past” (p. 49). The author is inclined to conclude that the explanation why sewer air may at times be quite sweet is “that micro-organisms also act on the foul atmosphere and consume each other, together with the foul matter in the gases which must prevade it” (p. 124). We read with some curiosity and misgivings the statement that a chapter had been allotted to bacteriolysis -—but, as we suspected, the chapter deals with the bacteriological purification of sewage. On pp. 170- 180, an article which appeared in Zhe Engineer about four years ago is inserted, and the writer advises that “the paragraphs under their different headings should be read in conjunction with the same subjects, which are to be found elsewhere” in the book. One need hardly point out that this is not the most convenient way in which the subject-matter can be presented to the NO. 1703, VOL. 66] student. The author would have done well if he had himself selected the different paragraphs contained in the article and put them under their proper headings. The work, however, in addition to containing much valuable information, is very well illustrated, and the subject- matter dealt with comprises a fairly wide survey of the more important matters of practical sanitary engineering. The Story of Animal Life. By B. Lindsay. The Library of Useful Stories. Pp. vill + 208. (London : George Newnes, Ltd., Igol.) Price rs. To try to tell the story of animal life within the compass of one of Messrs. Newnes’ well-known shilling series of “Useful Stories” seems almost irreverent. Even Prof. Macalister required two primers, and the result was somewhat indigestible pemmican. Perhaps Huxley’s educational genius might have achieved what must seem to most naturalists impossible. We therefore admire Miss Lindsay’s courage, and while we think that she has attempted too much, we willingly recognise that her little book is good value for a shillng—a multum in éarvo, packed with interesting information and illumined with big ideas. It is perhaps unduly handicapped with technicalities and zoological subtleties, for when we read of “diploblastic,” “apopyles,” “ metamerism,” “ Archi- annelida,” “ Euthyneura,” ‘“Adelochorda,” and so on, we wonder what these abstruse terms are doing in this shilling gallery. On the other hand, the booklet is interesting, and it has the two-fold merit of refusing to give a false simplicity to the subject, and of clearly indicating that zoology is not remote from human life. We regret to notice some inaccuracies of spelling and grammar which might have been readily avoided in so small a book. We regret still more to have to point out that many of the figures are so roughly reproduced that they recall the earliest stages of book illustration. Some of them, eg. the tadpoles, are worse than medizeval, and if they were not so dull might be referred to as beacons warning us of the dangers of cheapness. Municipal Engineering and Sanitation. By M. M. Baker, Ph.D., C.E. Pp. viii + 317. (New York: The Macmillan Company ; London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 5s. net. THE author intends this small volume for that large and rapidly growing class of persons who, either as officials or citizens, are striving to improve municipal conditions. It is a short review of the whole field of engineering and municipal sanitation, and no claim is made that it is an exhaustive study of any one of the branches with which it deals. Although engineers and sanitarians will not find in the book much that is new to them, yet it contains matter of a trustworthy and up-to-date nature which will make the book interesting and helpful even to professional men. In addition to the treatment of the subjects of water-supply, sewage and sewerage, general scavenging and the making and keeping of streets, and pavements, the following matters are also dealt with :—subways for pipes and wires; urban and inter-urban_transporta- tion ; bridges, ferries and ice boats ; docks and harbour facilities ; telegraph, telephone and messenger service ; ice ; milk ; markets ; slaughter-houses ; lighting ; ceme- teries ; crematoria; fire ; smoke ; noises; disinfection ; parks ; playgrounds ; baths and Javatories ; public offices ; and the administration, finance and public policy of municipal authorities. Having regard to the extensive range of subjects dealt with, it follows that in such a small volume the treatment of each subject must be, generally speaking, sketchy. For instance, the chapter upon disinfecting metheds and apparatus consists of three small pages containing scme 750 werds only. The hook is of a handy size, well printed and bound, but withcut illustrations. 174 LETTERS: TC PHE “EDITOR. (Zhe Editor does not hold himself responsible for opinions ex- pressed by his correspondents. Neither can he undertake to return, or lo correspond with the writers of, rejected manuscripts intended for this or any other part of NATURE, No notice ts taken of anonvmous communications. Astronomy in the University of London. Ir seems desirable to call special attention to the change which has recently been made in the conditions with regard to astronomy for the B.Sc. Pass and Honours degrees of the University of London. This is the more important as, owing to an unfortunate slip of the much-overworked academic Registrar, the point was omitted from the published examination schedules, and has only been corrected by an attached slip in recent issues. The point is this, that in future astronomy is to be counted as an independent subject for the B.Sc. degree. It will rank equally with geology, botany or zoology. It is true that the Faculty of Arts has retained a certain amount of astronomy in its mathematical syllabus—in my opinion a very poor syllabus— which represents, not modern astronomy, but the condition of affairs in ‘‘ three day papers ” at Cambridge fifty years ago, when the University of London was founded. Why the Faculty of Arts does not insist also on a little antiquated geology and a little pre- Darwinian biology is cause for wonder. At any rate, the Faculty of Science has recognised that astronomy is a suitable subject for graduation, and we may hope that students of astronomical physics and theoretical and observational astronomy will realise that they can now specialise in London before graduating. A Pass student will be able to graduate by studying mathematics, physics and astronomy, and an Honours student by taking astronomy and ez/kex mathematics ov physics. We may hope that a school of astronomy will form itself in London free from the traditions of the Cambridge Mathematical Tripos, and recognising mathematics for the astronomer as ancillary only to observational and physical work. Kar PEARSON. University College, London, June 15. De Vriesian Species. THE recent work of Prof. H. de Vries on the origin of species by mutation has attracted a great deal of attention, although it cannot be said that the facts he presents are of a new kind, or that, taken by themselves, they prove anything about the origin of species. The great merit of the work is to be found in its clear presentation of the subject, with carefully worked out examples, at an opportune time. In former years botanists were not so ready as they are to-day to recognise apparently minor characters as specific, and the great variety of slightly modified plant forms passed almost unnoticed. It was not considered worth while to investigate the polymorphism of the old specific aggregates, and men like Jordan, who didso, were not regarded altogether favourably. The old conception of species seemed to give us a superabundance of plant types, taking the world over ; and many botanists thought, as one recently said to me, that it was impossible to catalogue and name the minor forms, decause they were infinitely numerous. However, there has arisen a new school, especially dominant in America, which recognises the fact that many of the old specific names cover a number of types which are readily distinguishable from one another. These may intergrade. but in many cases they do not seem to do so, and though the distinctions may seem small, they are perfectly constant. The result of the new investigations is in many cases to increase the number of recognised species four-fold, ten-fold, or more. Now when one comes to study these numerous species, it is evident that much of the difference is not absolute, but consists in different combinations of the same or similar characters, like the patterns of a kaleidoscope. With a little ingenuity, one could almost predict the characters of undiscovered forms. Heredity seems every now and then to take a new throw of the dice, with results exactly such as de Vries has described. The successful throws are those which give results adapted to the environment, and these, under the laws governing the survival of the fittest, give us what we proceed to describe as new species, The proof that species do thus originate is not to be found in garden experiments alone, but must be confirmed by field obser- vations. Unfortunately, the average systematic botanist seems to be much more interested in defending his ‘‘ new species ” than in asking whether they may not be ‘‘new” in a more literal sense than he imagines. Nevertheless, search will be made for NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 “de Vriesian species,” and thereby the true status of many described plants may be revealed. Two instances of such which have lately come to my notice may be worth recording. (1) Aelianthus petiolaris phenax (new variety). Rays 13, mustard yellow, 11 mm. diameter ; corollas and stigmas yellow, giving the flower a yellow disc, Found at Boulder, Colorado, August, 1901, growing in a field full of normal A. /efiolaris, with deep saffron-yellow rays about 8 mm. diameter, and corolla and stigmas a very dark wine red. I took both plants to the meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science at Denver, and showed them to an eminent botanist who knows the flora of Colorado well, and is not regarded as a “splitter.” I said, ‘‘these appear to be forms of one species.” ‘*Oh, no,” he replied, ‘‘one is a Helianthus, the other a Rudbeckia!” However, the flowers were carefully examined in company with Prof, Pammel, and were also shown to Miss Eastwood, and no doubt remained that the new variety was really an offshoot from /#. fetiolaris, which had probably originated where it was found. The variation is the more interesting because in the sunflowers (Helianthus) the colour of the disc is used as a character to separate groups of species. (2) Ribes cereum viridior (new variety). Plant perhaps more resinous ; tube of calyx shorter, pale greenish, stigma exserted beyond petals. Fruit deep red, small, perfectly spherical. Found (first by my wife) between San Ignacio and Las Vegas, New Mexico. A clump of bushes presenting these characters (observed in two seasons) grows only a few yards away from plenty of what Mr. Coville considers genuine 2. cereum, witha longer calyx-tube, streaked with purplish pink, and fruit a little larger and more inclined to be oblong. I was at first quite sure I had a valid species in this zzr¢dzor variety, and Mr. Coville, before we got the fruit, thought the specimens might be his R. mescalerium, which has black fruit. Now, however, it appears reasonably certain that the plant represents a de Vriesian “* species” or mutation. Miss Eastwood has lately described a somewhat similar mutation of a Californian species, under the name (2bes sertceum viridescens. T. D. A. COCKERELL. East Las Vegas, New Mexico, U.S.A., May 22. Formula for the Perimeter of an Ellipse. THE formula given by your Queensland correspondent (Nature of April 10, p. 536) for the perimeter of an ellipse is not at all objectionable on the score of degree of approximation, It leads, however, to another, which for practical purposes is much preferable. If for shortness’ sake A be written for log 2/ log 47, he says in effect that the perimeter of an ellipse with semi-axes @ and 4 is approximately equal to the circum- ference of a circle of radius (22s 2 Now A= 3010300/*1961199, two convergents to which are 3/2 and 20/13. Taking the former of these—a course which entails the extraction of no roots other than the square and the cube— we obtain the following result:—The perimeter of an ellipse is approximately equal to the circumference of acircle the radius of which is the semi-cubic mean of the semi-axes of the ellipse (see Messenger of Math., xii. pp. 149-151 ; Proc. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc., February 1, 1go0r), But by far the best result of this kind known to me may be put in the shape of a rule as follows :—To obtain the radius of a circle the circumference of which will be a close approximation to the perimeter of a given ellipse, diminish twenty-one times the arithmetic mean of the semi-axes of the ellipse by twice the geometric mean and thrice the harmonic mean and divide the remainder by 16. As an illustration of the value of this, we may take the classical example where z=1 and 6="8. The three means A, G, H, referred to in the rule are then “o) NS; 8/9 and _ 18°9 —(1°7888544 — 2°6666666) 16 4 = 18:9 ~ 474555210 16 = 144444790 TOM ee = °90277993. - - JUNE 19, 1902] Now, according to Legendre, the perimeter in this case is 2m(-90277992), so that the rule gives the desired result correct to within one hundred-millionth of 27. THOMAS MulIR. Cape Town, South Africa, May 19. The ‘‘Armorl” Electro-Capillary Relay. IN reply to your correspondent ‘‘J.-S. ” (p. 151), I may say that the model which I saw did actually work ; it illustrated the flow of mercury from a fine jet when subjected to the influence of a small electromotive force, in the same way as described with reference to Fig. 1 of my article. I think your correspondent slightly misunderstands the principle of the instrument; it is not the small movement of the mercury, such as is used in the ordinary capillary electrometer, which works the relay lever ; this movement merely serves to force some of the mercury out of the jet, and the fading mercury then moves the lever. — The inventors claimed that they had succeeded in effecting so nice a balance of forces that the mercury flowed from the jet under a very small influence. I join with your correspondent in the desire (which I expressed also in my article) that some trustworthy data concerning the instrument should be published. June 13. THe WRITER OF THE ARTICLE. SCIENCE AND MILITARY EDUCATION. Gree report of the Military Education Committee was issued to the public on Saturday, June 7, and has been the subject of much comment in the Press. The conclusions and recommendations of the Committee have been well. received on the whole, though there are some exceptions, as in the case of the Sfectator, which would wish to see Sandhurst done away with, or rather used in an entirely different manner and at a later stage in the officer’s career, and in that of the military corre- spondent of the Z7es, who, in the course of a long article, falls foul of an important passage relating to science, and in effect advises the War Office not to accept or act upon the recommendations of the Com- mittee on this subject. The writer of the article goes so far, indeed, as to suggest that the Committee has not sufficiently considered the evidence, quoting Sir George Clarke in support of the merits of Latin in such a way that we were not a little surprised on turning to Sir George’s evidence to find that, when questioned as to the proper preliminary training of cadets (Question 839), he expressed the opinion that they should have a “ broad, liberal education,” adding that “the broader it is and the wider its scope, and the sounder generally, the better it will fit them for the special training they receive after- wards.” The passage objected to by the 7zes correspondent (20) will be found on p. 5, and, appearing as it does over the signatures of two such eminent representatives of classical training as the head masters of Eton and St. Paul’s, is so important that we print it in full. It is as follows :— “The fifth subject which may be considered as an essential part of a sound general education is experi- mental science, that is to say, the science of physics and chemistry treated experimentally. As a means of mental training, and also viewed as useful knowledge, this may be considered a necessary part of the intellectual equip- ment of every educated man, and especially so of the officer, whose profession in all its branches is daily be- coming more and more dependent on science.” Considering the uncompromising terms of this state- ment, it is disappointing to find that a committee holding such clear and strong views should have found itself, in the event, unable to agree upon a scheme which would ensure that this “‘necessary part of the intellectual equipment of every educated man” should be provided for each and all our future officers. For it cannot be denied that the actual position proposed for science in the scheme recommended, viz. that it should be alternative NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE 175 in Class I. with Latin, will put it in the power of opponents of science to prevent candidates who may come under their influence from having the opportunity of securing this ‘essential part of a sound general education.” In saying this we do not overlook the fact, as some are disposed to do, that the proposed arrangements will allow those who select Latin as their subject in Class I. to offer science as a Class II. subject, and that, conse- quently, neither of these two necessary subjects need be neglected. But after making all allowance for the manner in which the scheme as a whole will qualify the effect of the relations of Latin and science in Class I., we think the Committee has not sufficiently regarded the fact that as Latin is begun at a very early age, but chemistry and physics much later, candidates choosing their subjects at about fifteen, as many, and perhaps most, of them must do, will-be much more likely to select the former than the latter from Class I. (see Ques- tions 8630, 8631, 8632), leaving science for Group II., where, however, it becomes an alternative with several other subjects, and so is very likely to be squeezed out. It is a striking illustration of the effects of the neglect of science in our educational system, which even now is being remedied but slowly in some of our schools, that so many soldiers and others still make the mistake of supposing that as regards science the Army only needs ‘‘a proportion of scientific experts among military officers for suggesting and following up improvements in madériel,’? and that “the majority of such experts can be better obtained from civilian sources outside the Army than from within its ranks.” The last part of this statement is, indeed, in spite of all the fine qualities of our officers, only too sadly true. But it is just because the basis of military educa- tion (and indeed of nearly all English education in the case of the abler members of the higher classes) has been too narrow in the past that the Army has failed to throw up a sufficient supply, we will not say of trained scientific specialists, but of officers capable of understanding the specialists, of absorbing their ideas, mastering their methods and applying these in the operations of war. How can we expect average men whose training has been mainly in language and mathematics to be resourceful and confident when brought face to face with the problems created for their profession by the revolutions of the last half century ? Every question, said Liebig, one of the creators of much that is strongest in modern Germany, put to science clearly and definitely has been satis- factorily answered before long. Only when the inquirer has no precise idea of the problem to be solved does he remain unsatisfied for long. It is just because the majority of our officers have not had the broadest training possible, that so many are unable to make use of the new powers that science holds out to them, and are still under the mistaken impression that the main use of science in education lies in the facts which it provides. It is clear that even now many educators and soldiers have not grasped the real elements of this great problem, and that they still fail to see that the object with which science is now taught is, not to convey a few more facts or a few facts of a new kind, but to preserve those habits of mind and that fertility of resource which daily become more important in face of the problems of modern life, and which are not to be gained by a purely literary and mathematical training. All will agree that faculties which must especially be cultivated in our officers “are power of command, habits of leadership, and the ability to act decisively and correctly at the right time and place.” But when it is contended, as it oftenis, that “study in a chemical laboratory does not make for this kind of fitness,” it is forgotten that laboratory work properly done will certainly develop these qualities at least as well, and probably better, than any study in 176 NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 which books only are concerned, and that we do not teach either science or Latin, mathematics or modern languages primarily to produce the habit of command, but because the habit of command and the ability to act with decision have a tenfold value in the man who is many- sided in his knowledge and experience and who, in the language of the street, ‘knows where he is” in many departments of human activity. The object of a training in experimental science is not to stuff the mind with knowledge, as so many still seem to think, but to open and prepare it to receive and rightly apply knowledge in the after working years of life. Those persons are indeed ignorant who suppose that in a modern course of work, let us say, in physics, a boy’s mind is “stuffed with knowledge ” or that a course of work in electricity gives less play to the imagination than getting up vocabularies or irregular verbs. But we must not follow a bad example ; these things also make for goodness in their degree. As we have said above, the report of the Committee has, as regards its main features, been received with a chorus of approval, and little remains to be said about it. We think the proposal of an expert educational committee with advisory powers excellent. We are giad that whilst science and Latin are alternative subjects in Class I.,the subject not taken as a Class I. subject can be taken as a Class II. subject. Atthe same time, we regret that Sir Michael Foster did not succeed in pre- vailing on his colleagues to embody in their final recom- mendations the admirable opinion which we quote at the beginning of this article. If we may judge from the tenor of the discussion at the Conference of Science Masters last Christmas, we think the proposed changes in regard to practical work in chemistry will be widely welcomed. Butif this reform is to work well, no attempt must be made to add the new scheme of practical work to the old requirements in qualitative analysis. The time which did not suffice for the latter alone cannot be sufficient for both together. We believe, too, that many teachers both of chemistry and physics would be most willing to see the scope of the syllabus in their special subject reduced a little, in order to secure that all candidates taking science should include in their work the “pass part” portions of both the chemical and physical divisions of science. A HOLIDAY CRUISE TO ALASKA} {pee two handsome and magnificently illustrated volumes should be brought to the notice of every man of wealth as a lesson in the art of spending a holi- day. He will learn therefrom how this may be done with permanent satisfaction to himself and permanent advantage to science. In a pointedly brief and unassuming preface the patron of the expedition explains that, having planned a summer cruise through Alaskan waters for himself and his family, he found that the steamer which he had chartered would accommodate a larger party, and therefore resolved to seek “some guests who, while adding to the interest and pleasure of the expedition, would gather useful in- formation and distribute it for the benefit of others.” By the advice of his physician he obtained the aid of Dr. C. Hart Merriam, chief of the Biological Survey of ane U.S. Department of Agriculture, in carrying out this plan. The outcome is succinctly stated in the introduction (pp. xxv-xxxi) by Dr. Merriam, who has most capably 1 “Alaska. Harriman Alaska Expedition, 1899.” 2 vols. Royal 8vo. Pp. xxxvii + 383, with 39 coloured plates, 85 photogravure plates, 240 text figures and 5 maps. Vol. i. Narrative, Glaciers, Natives. Vol. ii. History, Geography, Resources. By many authors. (New York: Double- day, Page and Co., 1gor.) NO. 1703, VOL. 66] fulfilled his duties as general editor to the records of the cruise :— “In the early spring of 1899 Mr. Edward H. Harriman of New York, in cooperation with the Washington Academy of Sciences but entirely at his own expense, organised an expedi- tion to Alaska. He invited as his guests three artists and twenty-five men of science, representing various branches of research and including well known professors in universities on both sides of the continent, and leaders in several branches of Government scientific work. . The expedition sailed from Seattle May 30 . . . and was gone just two months.” The ship threaded the ‘“‘inside passages” from Puget Sound to Juneau, Skagway and Sitka ; thence along the open coast to Cook Inlet and the Alaska Peninsula, and past the Aleutian Islands into Bering Sea, up to the entrance to Bering Strait, touching at Eskimo settle- ments on both the Asiatic and American coasts, and then turning homeward. The voyage was not in itself in any way remarkable ; the interest centres in the per- sonnel and methods of the expedition. As for the personnel—the following list will show that the selected scientific party was qualified to take advantage of every opportunity. Botany was represented by F. V. Coville and T. H. Kearney, jun., of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, and by Prof. B. E. Fernow, of Cornell, Dr. A. Saunders and Dr. W. Trelease ; zoology in its various branches by Dr. W. R. Coe, of Yale, D. G. Elliot, of the Field Columbian Museum, Dr. A. K. Fisher and Dr. C. H. Merriam, of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, R. Ridgway, of the Wash- ington National Museum, C. A. Keeler, of the San Francisco Museum, Prof. W. E. Ritter, of the Uni- versity of California, Prof. T. Kincaid, of the Uni- versity of Washington State, and Dr. G. B. Grinnell ; geology and geography by Dr. W. H. Dall, G. K. Gilbert and H. Gannett, of the U.S. Geological Survey, and Prof. B. K. Emerson, of Amherst ; mineralogy by Dr. C. Palache, of Harvard, and W. B. Devereux ; meteor- ology by Prof. W. H. Brewer, of Yale ; and nature-lore in its literary aspect by John Burroughs and John Muir. Of the three artists on the ship Mr. L. A. Fuertes was a specialist in bird-portraiture—sixteen of the many beautiful coloured plates which adorn these volumes attesting his skill. We learn, moreover, that a fourth artist was sent to Alaska in the following year for the special purpose of securing drawings and paintings of Alaskan plants ! The expedition also included two photo- graphers, two taxidermists, two stenographers; with a chaplain, two physicians and a trained nurse. The Harriman family party numbered eleven. As for the methods—these seem to have been in every wayadmirable. Under unskilful management the scheme would probably have come to nought through the stress of divergent interests. But the patron of the expedition met the occasion like a whole-hearted democrat. His procedure is thus described by Dr. Merriam :— ‘The day after leaving New York Mr. Harriman called to- gether the members of the Expedition and announced that it was not his desire to dictate the route to be followed, or to control the details of the work. In accordance with his wishes a business organization was effected, comprising an executive committee, a committee on route and plans, and special com- mittees on the various scientific activities. These committees, throughout the voyage, held frequent meetings and determined from day to day the operations of the expedition. . . . ‘*Among the unusual features which contributed to the success of the Expedition, three are worthy of special mention : — “¢(1) Theship had no business other than to convey the party whithersoever it desired to go. Her route was entrusted to a committee comprising the heads of the various departments of research ; so that from day to day and hour to hour her move- ments were made to subserve the interests of the scientific work, ‘*(2) The scientific staff represented varied interests and was made up of men trained in special lines of research. JUNE 19, 1902] ‘€(3) The equipment was comprehensive, including naphtha launches, small boats and canoes, camping outfits, stenographers, photographers, and extra men for oarsmen and helpers, thereby reducing toa minimum the time necessary to accomplish material results. . . .” To indicate what was accomplished let us again quote Dr. Merriam :— ‘* During the two months’ cruise a distance of nine thousand miles was traversed. Frequent landings were made, and, no matter how brief, were utilised by the artists, photographers, geologists, botanists, zoologists, and students of glaciers. From time to time longer stops were made and camping parties were put ashore that more thorough work might be done. Thus one or more camping parties operated at Glacier Bay, Yakutat Bay, Prince William Sound, Kadiak Island, the Alaska Peninsula and the Shumagin Islands. Large and important collections were made, including series of the small mammals and birds of the coast-region,”— and here we may break off to note that Burroughs, in a later part of the volume (p. 62), mentions that one day the ship “ made a voyage of sixty miles to enable our collectors to take up some traps, the total catch of which proved to be nine mice,”’— ‘enormous numbers of marine animals and seaweeds, and by far the largest collections of insects and land-plants ever brought from Alaska. There were also small collections of fossil shells and fossil plants. In working up this material the services of more than fifty specialists have been secured, and although the task is by no means finished, thirteen genera and nearly six hundred species new to science have already been discovered and described. The natural history specimens have not merely enriched our museums, they have increased many fold our know- ledge of the fauna and flora of Alaska... . «* A number of glaciers not previously known, as well as many others which had been vaguely or imperfectly known, were mapped, photographed and described, and much evidence was gathered of changes that have occurred in their length and size. . .. In Prince William Sound a new fiord fifteen miles in length and abounding in glaciers was discovered, photographed, and mapped. . . . The large number of photographs taken by the professional photographers on board was materially increased by cameras belonging to various members of the Expedition, and in all not less than five thousand photographs were secured. These cover many parts of the coast region from British Columbia to Bering Strait, and constitute incomparably the best series of pictures of the region thus far obtained,” The publication of the results has been undertaken in the same well-ordered and liberal spirit. The two volumes before us ‘contain the narrative of the expedition and a few papers on subjects believed to be of general interest. The technical matter, in the fields of geology, paleontology, zoology and botany, will follow in a series of illustrated volumes. Twenty- two special papers, based on collections made by the Expedition, have been already published in the Proceedings of the Washington Academy of Sciences, and others will follow. All this material will be brought together in the volumes of the technical series.” Having dealt somewhat fully with the organisation and methods of this truly exemplary expedition, let us now glance briefly over the principal contents of the book, which constitute the best general description of Alaska hitherto published. The narrative of the cruise by John Burroughs (pp. 1-118) is a piece of literary workmanship such as only an able and well-practised writer with a keen eye for nature and under the stimulus of scenes new to him could have penned. This part will appeal more strongly to the general reader than to the man of science, for to the latter the blending of emotional sentiment with technical description, however skilfully done, can rarely fail to give a sense of incompatibility and distortion. As literature, however, these word-pictures are excellent; we will quote, as an example, Mr. Burroughs’ impression of a distant view of Mount St. Elias (p. 55) :— ““The base and lower ranges had been visible for some time, bathed in clear sunshine, but a heavy canopy of dun. NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE 177 coloured clouds hung above us and stretched away toward the mountain, dropping down there in many curtain-like folds, hiding the peak. But the scene-shifters were at work ; slowly the heavy mass of clouds that limited our view yielded and was spun off by the air-currents till at last the veil was completely rent, and there, in the depths of clear air and sunshme, the vast mass soared to heaven. ‘© There is sublimity in the sight of a summer thunder-head with its great white and dun convolutions rising up for miles against the sky, but there is more in the vision of a jagged mountain crest piercing the blue at even a lesser height. This is partly because it is a much rarer spectacle, but mainly because it is a display of power that takes greater hold of the imagination. That lift heavenward of the solid crust of the earth, that aspira- tion of the insensate rocks, that effort of the whole range, as it were, to carry one peak into heights where all may not go— eyery lower summit seeming to second it and shoulder it forward till it stands there in a kind of serene astronomic solitude and remoteness—is a vision that always shakes the heart of the beholder.” The general narrative is succeeded by a series of pro- fusely illustrated articles on special subjects. First we have “Notes on the Pacific Coast Glaciers,’ by John Muir (pp. 119-135), who was one of the earliest explorers of the Alaskan ice-fields and is able to compare the present limits ofsome of the glaciers with their extent in 1879, when he first visited them. He states that in Glacier Bay, “the Hugh Miller and Muir have receded about two miles in the last twenty years, the Grand Pacific about four, and the Geikie, Rendu and Carrol perhaps from seven to ten miles.” The remaining portion of the first volume (pp. 137-. 183) is occupied by a concise account of the Indians and Eskimo of the Alaska coast region, by Dr. G. B. Grinnell, closing with the usual lament over the destruction of the weaker race by the influx of the horde of gold-seeking white men, “uncontrolled and uncontrollable.” The second volume opens witha history of the dis- covery and exploration of Alaska by the veteran Dr. W. H. Dall, whose thirteen previous visits to the territory render him thoroughly qualified to deal with the subject. He treats fully of the early period up to the trans- ference of the country by Russia to the United States in 1867, but sums up the subsequent events in a few sentences, remarking (p. 203) that ‘“a history of conditions in Alaska from 1867 to 1897 is yet to be written, and when written few Americans will be able to read it without indignation. A country of which it could be said with little exaggeration that * Never a law of God or man Runs north of fifty-five’ : a country where no man could make a legal will, own a home- stead or transfer it, or so much as cut wood for his fire without defying a Congressional prohibition: where polygamy and slavery and the lynching of witches prevailed, with no legah authority to stay or punish criminals; such in great part has Alaska been for thirty years.” He notes also :— “¢To one conversant with the facts, one of the most amusing things in current literature is the placid innocence of many a casual traveler or gold hunter, who pours out his tale of ex- periences in the confident belief that nothing of the kind is on record. A bibliography, far from complete, yet with fully 4000 titles, does not cover the publications in books and serials upon the Territory and its adjacent regions.” The next article is on “ Days among Alaska Birds,” by Mr. Charles Keeler (pp. 205-234), richly illustrated with coloured plates. Many readers will be somewhat astonished to learn that one of the humming-birds is found abundantly as far north as Juneau and Sitka, and will feel with Mr. Keeler that the bird “seemed singularly out of place.” ““ Indeed, even after reading that the tiny rufous humming- bird journeyed so far into the northern wilds, it was with almost a shock of surprise that we saw the dainty creature, which we 178 NATURE instinctively associate with the tropics, contentedly buzzing about the salmon berries and appearing as unconcerned and happy as if his fine wings had not carried him some thousands of miles from his winter quarters in southern California or Mexico, I cannot imagine a more wonderful instance of bird migration than this—one of the smallest known birds, no larger than a fair-sized moth, yet with strength, endurance, and intelligence to travel up and down the greater part of the North American coast line, pressing close upon the train of early spring, awaiting only the blooming of the wild currant in California and the salmon berry farther north, to venture upon his perilous way !” What erroneous deductions as to the climate of an “inter-glacial period” would probably be drawn if the remains of a humming-bird were found in a peat bed between deposits derived from glaciers ! The “ Forests of Alaska” are described by Prof. B. E. Fernow (pp. 235-256), who points out that their economic value has been much over-estimated. He notes “the astonishing indifference to the influence of the near-by ice-masses ” shown by the trees growing in close proximity to some of the great glaciers and even upon their surfaces where covered by moraine material. This article con- tains some interesting observations on the propagation and spread of forest growth. The general geography and physiography of the territory are the subject of a lucid article by Mr. H. Gannett (pp. 257-277). In mentioning that the present glaciers are “ only trifling fragments ” of the great glaciers which occupied this region a short time ago, it is remarked that, nevertheless, ““all the glaciers of Switzerland together would form but a few rivulets ot ice on the surface of the Muir Glacier, and the Muir is but one of many glaciers of equal magnitude.” All observers of the glacial phenomena of the region will probably agree with Mr. Gannett that the period since the retreat of the ice from the present water-channels of the coast cannot have been long. It is evident that in Alaska, as in several other glacier-fields of the globe, if the existing ice were entirely removed, few of the glaciers could ever regain their present dimensions under the climatal conditions which now prevail. And it seems probable that in some degree the present glaciers represent the lingering remnants of the great ice-fields of the Glacial period. “The Alaska Atmosphere” is dealt with by Prof. W. H. Brewer (pp. 279-289), who lays especial stress upon the effects produced by the relatively dustless con- -dition of the air. An article on “ Bogoslof, our Newest Volcano,” by Dr. C. H. Merriam (pp. 291-336), copiously illustrated with views of the two new volcanic islands at various periods in their history, and provided with a bibliographical appendix, will appeal to every volcanist. In describing “The Salmon Industry” (pp. 337-355), which has attained such gigantic proportions in Alaska, Dr. G. B. Grinnell once more calls attention to the wretchedly wasteful methods adopted by the salmon canners in defiance of Congressional laws which there is scarcely a pretence of enforcing, and to the consequent extraordinarily rapid depletion of supplies supposed at first to be inexhaustible. It is the common story of the white pioneer in every part of the globe :— _ ‘*All these people recognise very well that they are destroy- ing the fishing ; and that before very long a time must come when there will be no more salmon to be canned at a profit. But this very knowledge makes them more and more eager to capture the fish and to capture all the fish. This bitter compe- tition sometimes leads to actual fighting—on the water as well as in the courts. A year or two since, one company which was trying to stop another from fishing on ground which it claimed as its Own, sent out its boats with immense seines, and dropping them about the steam launches of its rival tried to haul them to the shore. . Thus the canners work in a most wasteful and thoughtlessly selfish way, grasping for everything that is within NO. 1703, VOL. 66] : [JUNE 19, 1902 their reach and thinking nothing of the future. Their motto seems to be, ‘If I do not take all I can get somebody else will get something.’ ” The final article of the book, however, reveals the pioneer in the unaccustomed vé/e of conservator. It consists of a highly interesting account, by Mr. M. L. Washburn, of “ Fox Farming in Alaska” (pp. 357-365), a new industry which in itself is a striking illustration of western resourcefulness and may lead to important future developments. “Something like fifteen years ago a few men in western Alaska, realizing that fur-bearing animals were doomed, decided to try the experiment of propagating some of the more valuable kinds, Having resided on the Seal or Pribilof Islands and observed that the blue fox became somewhat tame, they resolved to try its domestication by placing a small number on protected islands and caring for them as the stockman cares for his herd of cattle or sheep. About twenty foxes were taken from St. Paul Island of the Pribilof group, and placed on North Semidi, one of the hundreds of unoccupied islands of Alaska, and thus the experiment began. . From North Semidi, the original ‘ fox-ranch,’ if one may employ such a term, foxes were taken to other islands along the Alaska coast:and the experiments continued. The results though sometimes dis- couraging and not always financially successful, have shown on the whole that the animal could be raised and its valuable pelt obtained with as much regularity as in the case of the humbler domestic animals. About thirty islands are now stocked with blue foxes—all the outgrowth of the small stock of twenty foxes taken from St. Paul Island fifteen years ago.” A description is given of one of these ranches where there are now 800 to 1000 foxes. The animals soon learn to recognise their keepers and come to know the feeding time, gathering round for their daily allowance, and after- wards scattering about the island until the time for the next day’s dinner. In short, the blue fox has been added to the list of domesticated animals. The probable out- come is thus stated :— “It is believed that the time is not far distant when hundreds * of the now useless islands of Alaska will be utilised in the propagation of fur-bearing animals, and that many of the farmers of the Northern States [/et Canadians take note !| will have wire-fenced enclosures of an acre or two devoted to this industry, from which they will reap a far greater return than from all the rest of their live stock.” For the excellency of the paper, printing, illustrations and binding, as well as for their contents, these volumes are indeed highly to be commended. As an instance of rare unobtrusiveness and good taste we may mention that in spite of its almost immoderate wealth of illustra- tion not a single portrait of Mr. Harriman or of any member of his family party is to be found in the work. That the literary and scientific members of this summer cruise should have occasionally burst into song causes us no surprise ; and the sprinkling of verse in the volumes is distinctly pardonable in the circumstances. G..W., L. OBSERVATIONS OF VOLGANIC ACTIVITY IN THE WEST INDIES. URTHER details of the recent volcanic eruptions at Martinique and St. Vincent continue to reach us through West Indian and other papers. Though the great eruptions of Mont Pelée and the Soufritre occurred on May 7-8, the Dominica Guardian states that shocks of earthquake were felt so far backas February of last year. These disturbances were noticed several times during the year, and were regarded as serious in February of this year. From April 20 also until the eruption, rumbling sounds were frequently heard, especially at Fancy and at Frasers. Nineteen shocks were ex- perienced within half an hour on May 3 at Wallibou, od JUNE 19, 1902] NATURE : 179 and the disturbances became more noticeable as the days went on, until, on May 5, the Soufritre gave definite warnings of its renewed activity. The Rev. J. H. Darrell, writing from Kingstown, St. Vincent, on May 9, gives, in the Dominica Guardian, the following account of the subsequent eruptious of this volcano ':— It was on Tuesday, May 6, at 3 p.m., that the mountain commenced its series of volcanic efforts. A strong shock of earthquake, accompanied by a terrible noise, occurred, and the voleano began to emit steam. At 5 p.m. louder and more frequent explosions were heard, the detonations succeeding each other at rapidly diminishing intervals. At 7.30 p.m. columns of steam issued from the old crater with terrific noise. These lasted until midnight, when another heavy explosion occurred, At 7 a.m. on Wednesday, May 7, there was another sudden and violent escape of pent-up steam, which continued ascend- ing until 10 a.m., when other material began to be ejected. It would seem that this was the time when the enormous mass of water in the lake of the old crater was emitted in a gaseous condition. By 12 o’clock noon it appeared that there were three craters vomiting lava—the old crater that had contained the lake, the second crater that opened in 1812, and a third crater that had burst open in the present eruption. Six dis- tinct streams of lava were visible, running down the sides of the mountain. The mountain heaved and laboured to rid itself of the burning mass of lava heaving and tossing below. By 12.30 p.m. it was evident that it had begun to disengage itself of its burden by the appearances as of fire flashing now and then around the edge of the crater. There was, however, no visible ascension of flame. These flame-like appearances were, I think, occasioned by the molten lava rising to the neck of the volcano. ‘Being quite luminous, the light emitted was reflected fom the banks of steam above, giving them the appearance of ame. From the time the volcano became fully active, tremendous detonations followed one another so rapidly that they seemed to merge into a continuous roar which lasted all through the night of May 7 and up to 6.30a.m. on Mayg. These detonations and thunderings were heard as far as Barbados, 100 miles distant, as well as in Grenada, Trinidad and the south end of St. Lucia. At 12.10 p.m. I left in company with several gentlemen in a small row boat to go to Chateaubelair, where we hoped to get a better view of the eruption. As we passed Layou, the first town on the leeward coast, the odour of sul- phuretted hydrogen was very perceptible. Before we got half way on our journey a vast column of steam, smoke and ashes ascended to a prodigious elevation. The majestic body of curling vapour was sublime beyond imagination. We were about eight miles from the crater, as the crow flies, and the top of the enormous column, eight miles off, reached higher than one-fourth of the segment of the circle. I judge that the awful pillar was fully eight miles in height. We were rapidly pro- ceeding to our point of observation, when an immense cloud, dark, dense, and apparently thick with volcanic material, descended over our pathway, impeding our progress and warning us to proceed no further. This mighty bank of sulphurous vapour and smoke assumed at one time the shape of a gigantic promontory, then appeared as a collection of twirling, revolving cloud-whirls, turning with rapid velocity, now assuming the shape of gigantic cauliflowers, then efflorescing into beautiful flower- shapes, some dark, some effulgent, others pearly white, and all brilliantly illuminated by electric flashes. Darkness, however, soon fell upon us. The sulphurous air was laden with fine dust that fell thickly upon and around us discolouring the sea; a black rain began to fall, followed by another rain of favilla, lapilli and scoriz. The electric flashes were marvellously rapid in their motions and numerous beyond all computation. These with the thundering noise of the mountain mingled with the dismal roar of the lava, the shocks of earthquake, the falling of stones, the enormous quantity of material ejected from the belching craters, produc- ing a darkness as dense as a starless midnight, the plutonic energy of the mountain growing greater every moment combined to make up a scene of horrors. It was after five o’clock when we returned to Kingstown, cowed and impressed by the weird- ness of the scene we had witnessed, and covered with the still thickly falling grey dust. Of what this material is composed I am unable to give a certain opinion ; but it appears to consist of NO. 1703, VOL. 66} comminuted rock, produced by attrition of the material as in- successive outbursts it is hurled aloft and then tumbles back again to the burning crater to be ejected finally as impalpable- dust. So minute are the particles that they find their way through the finest chinks of a closed room. Large areas of cultivation have been buried under the fall of the dust. Its effects upon vegetation will probably be beneficial ultimately, but inthe meantime great suffering as well as inconvenience is occasioned thereby. The awful scene was renewed yesterday (May 8) and again to-day. At about 8 a.m. the volcano shot out an immense volume of material which was carried in a cloud over Georgetown and its neighbourhood, causing, not only great alarm, but compelling the people by families to seek shelter in other districts. More than 400 lives have been lost on the windward side of the island, chiefly from lightning, and we have not yet heard from other parts of the island in that neighbourhood. The flowing. lava on the leeward side of the mountain has buried up the Wallibou and Richmond villages and estates, while on the windward side of the mountain the estates of Lot Fourteen, Rabacca, Overland, Tourama, Orange Hill, Mount Bentinck, Langely Park and portions of others have been obliterated. It is now 2 p.m. (May 9). A dense gloom still envelops the mountain, but there has been no further eruption since 8 a.m. Several streams and rivers have dried up in various parts of the island, and we are threatened with a water as well asa food famine. As already announced, the National Geographic Society of Washington has sent a special expedition to Martinique and St. Vincent to investigate the volcanic conditions of the West Indian regions. Thé members consist of Mr. Robert T. Hill, of the U.S. Geological Survey ; Prof. Israel C. Russell, professor of geology in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor ; Commander C. E. Borchgrevink, the Antarctic explorer ; Dr. T. A. Jaggar, of Harvard Univefsity ; Mr. G. C. Curtis, of Cambridge, U.S.A., and Dr. Angelo Heilprin, president of the Philadelphia Geographical Society. The expedition is one of the most important and best equipped commissions ever sent out to study actual volcanic action. Results of scientific and practical con- sequence may therefore be expected from the work of the members of the party. On their return to the United States they will report the results of their observations to the National Geographic Society. ‘ This report, form- ing a series, will be published in full in the journal of the Society, the Wational Geographic Magazine, the June number of which contains a preliminary account of the observations already made. Upon arriving at Martinique, Dr. Hill embarked on a steamer and examined the coast as far north as Macouba Point, the north end of the island, making frequent land- ings. After landing at Le Précheur, a little village five miles north of St. Pierre, he walked through an area of active volcanism to the destroyed city. Dr. Hill, accord- ing to the Associated Press despatches from Fort de France, was the first man to set foot in the active area of craters, fissures and fumaroles. On hisreturn to Fort de France he issued a brief statement as to his observations to the National Geographic Society, and it is here abriged from the Society’s magazine. The zone of the catastrophe in Martinique forms an elongated oval, containing on land about eight square miles of destruction. This oval is partly over the sea. The land part is bounded by lines running from Le Précheur to the peak of Mont Pelée, thence curving around to Carbet. There were three well- marked zones :— (1) A centre of annihilation, in which all life, vegetable and animal, was utterly destroyed. The greater northern part of St. Pierre was in this zone. (2) A zone of singeing, blistering flame, which also was fatal to all life, killing all men and animals, burning the leaves on the trees, and scorching, but not utterly destroying, the trees themselves. ‘ (3) A large outer, non-destructive zone of ashes, wherein some vegetation was injured. 180 ; The focus of annihilation was the new crater, midway between the sea and the peak of Mont Pelée, where now exists a new area of active volcanism, with hundreds of fumaroles, or miniature volcanoes. The new crater is now vomiting black, hot mud, which is falling into the sea. Both craters, the old and new, are active. Mushroom-shaped steam explosions constantly ascend from the old crater, while heavy ash-laden clouds float horizontally from the new crater. The old one ejects steam, smoke, mud, pumice and lapilli, but no molten lava. The salient topography of the region is unaltered. The destruction of St. Pierre was due to the new crater. The explosion had great superficial force, acting in radial directions, as is evidenced by the dismounting and carrying for yards the guns in the battery on the hill south of St. Pierre and the statue of the Virgin in the same locality, and also by the condition of the ruined houses in St. Pierre. According to the testimony of some persons, there was an accompanying flame. Others think the incandescent cinders and the force of their ejection were sufficient to cause the destruction, This must be investigated. On Monday, May 26, Dr. Hill started on horseback from Fort de France for Morne Rouge and Mont Pelée. He reached Morne Rouge safely on May 27, where he succeeded in getting a number of photographs. A close approach to Mont Pelée was impossible, so he started back in a southerly direction. During the two nights he was Camping out he made some important observations of volcanic action, and on his return issued the following statement :— My attempt to examine the crater of Mont Pelée has been futile. I succeeded, however, in getting very close to Morne Rouge. At 7 o’clock on Monday evening I witnessed from a point near the ruins of St. Pierre a frightful explosion from Mont Pelée, and noted the accompanying phenomena. While these eruptions continue no sane man should attempt an ascent to the crater of the volcano. Following the salvos of detona- tions from the mountain, gigantic mushroom-shaped columns of smoke and cinders ascended into the clear, starlit sky, and then spread in a vast black sheet to the south and directly over my head. Through this sheet, which extended a distance of ten miles from the crater, vivid and awful lightning-like bolts flashed with alarming frequency. They followed distinct paths of igni- NATURE tion, but were different from lightning, in that the bolts were | horizontal and not perpendicular. This is indisputable evidence of the explosive oxidation of the gases after they left the crater. This is a most important observation, and it explains in part the awful catastrophe. This phenomenon is entirely new in volcanic history. I took many photographs, but do not hesitate to acknowledge that I was terrified. Nearly all the phenomena of these volcanic outbreaks are new to science, and many of them have not yet been explained. The volcano is still intensely active, and I cannot make any predictions as to what it will do. Associated Press messages from Martinique, dated May 31, announced that Prof. Heilprin had succeeded in climbing to the top of the crater of Mont Pelée. The despatch is as follows :— Prof. Angelo Heilprin this morning ascended to the top of the crater on the summit of Mont Pelée. The expedition left Fort de France last Thursday, May 29, at noon. Friday was spent in studying the newly formed craters on the north flank of the mountain. Saturday morning Prof. Heilprin determined to attempt the ascent to the top of the crater, and with this purpose in view he set out at five o’clock. The volcano was very active, but Prof. Heilprin reached the summit and looked down into the huge crater. Jere he spent some time in taking careful observations. He saw a huge cinder cone in the centre of the crater. The opening of the crater itself is a vast crevice 500 feet long and 150 feet wide. While Prof. Heilprin was on the summit of the volcano, several violent explosions of steam and cinder-laden vapour took place, and again and again his life was in danger. Ashes fell about him in such quantities at times as to obscure his vision | completely. NO. 1703, VOL. 66] [JUNE 19, 1902 Prof. Heilprin found that the crater at the head of the River Fallaise has synchronous eruptions with the crater at the summit of the volcano, and that it ejects precisely the same matter at such times. On May 31 a party consisting of Prof. Jaggar, of Harvard University, Dr. Hovey, of the American Museum of Natural History of New York, and Mr. George C. Curtis, ascended to the summit of the Soufriére of St. Vincent from the western side. The ascent was exceedingly difficult, owing to the mud that covered the mountain side, but the ground was cold. After a tiresome scramble up the slippery hill, the rim of the old crater was reached about midday. There was no trace whatever of vegetation, but there had been no change in the topographical outlines of the mountain on that side, and the old crater re- tained its tragic beauty. The great mass of water that formerly lay serenely about 500 feet below therim of the crater had dis- appeared, and the crater appeared to be a dreadful chasm more than 2000 feet deep. With the aid of a glass, water was made out at the bottom of this abyss. The party did not venture across the summit of the Soufriére to inspect the new crater, which was then emitting a little vapour, for the ground in that direction looked to be dangerous. Apparently the ridge of the mountain, called ‘‘The Saddle,” was intact, although the old crater seemed of larger circum- ference than before the recent eruption. At the western base of the Soufriére a subsidence of a depth of 100 feet occurred for an area of a square mile. The bank of volcanic dust that pre- vents the sea encroaching farther inland at Wallibou is being gradually washed away. The lava beds on the eastern side of the Soufriére continue to emit steam, despite the protracted and heavy rainfall that has occurred. Mr. Knight, Senator for Martinique, has arrived in Paris, and a few of his observations of the condition of men and things in that island are given in yesterday’s Times. He says that the streams of mud which are still flowing do not emerge from the flanks of the volcano, but from the constantly convulsed ground, now opening in large abysses and then closing. Evidence that the death of the victims of the Mont Pelée eruption must have been instantaneous was obtained from the appearance of the bodies discovered. Thus, persons have been found on the thresholds of their nearly demolished houses in the attitude of gazing at Mont Pelée. Others were found seated at a table. One man, dis- covered in the middle of the street, had the muscles of his legs and arms fixed in the attitude of a runner. Others were | shaking hands. PROF. ADOLF FICK} ITH Adolf Fick, the physiologist of Wurzburg, whose death took place in the autumn .of last year at Blankenberg, there passed away one of the last representatives of the brilliant physiological school by | the combined labours and critical acumen of which, | during the latter half of the past century, the foundations of modern physiology were established. For the com- plete appreciation of the man’s whole character, however, regard should be had as well to Adolf Fick’s energetic and practical support of public, and, in particular, edu- cational questions, as to his distinction as investigator, man of science and teacher. In all matters that he took in hand he made a striking and original appearance, and he merits a special place in the honour roll of history. Fick, in whom as a youth conspicuous mathematical talent had already displayed itself, sought the university with the intention of studying mathematics. His elder brother, Heinrich, who died a few years ago while pro- fessor of Roman law at Ziirich, urged him to the study of medicine, and this he pursued at Marburg and Berlin. 1 Abridged from an obituary notice by Prof. Kunkel. : : JUNE 19, 1902] NAT ORE 181 At the former university he graduated in September 1851. As early as the year 1852 he worked as prosector under C. Ludwig, whose close friendship he retained throughout life. In 1856 he went into residence at Ziirich, and, in suc- cession to Ludwig and Moleschott, obtained in 1862 the full professorship of physiology there, which he retained for six years. Inthe year 1868, upon Von Bezold’s early death, Fick was called to Wiirzburg, where he filled the chair of physiology for thirty-one years. He resigned his post at the end of the summer term of 1899, not from distaste for work or through the burden of years, but while in full vigour of mind and body, in the strict fulfil- ment of a long-expressed intention of making way, on the completion of his seventieth year of life, for the energies of a younger man. At the time when Fick entered upon the study of physiology, modern medicine, as it is now understood and taught in the schools, was still in its infancy. The great strides made by chemistry at the beginning of last century had rendered possible the introduction of exact methods in the investigation of the problems of biology. The first positions securely gained by physical science had been at once utilised to set aside the doctrine of “vital power,” and to establish the important principle that we must endeavour to explain the specific phenomena of life as being determined by preceding chemical and physical conditions. Just as the chemists Lavoisier, Liebig and others, with the knowledge that they had won by their special training, addressed themselves at once to the solution of biological questions, so a school of physicists, starting from the basis of its own discoveries, proceeded to the investigation of the physiological problems which appertained to it. The brothers Ernst, Heinrich and Eduard Weber, Helmholtz, Du Bois-Rey- mond, Ludwig, Briicke, are the most prominent names of this school and already belong to history, and amongst these earlier adaptors of the methods of physical research to the study of biology, Fick must be accorded a place on account both of his conspicuous bent and training as a physicist and of the work accomplished by him. So early asthe year 1849, when a nineteen-year-old student, Fick published his first scientific treatise—that on the muscular system of the thigh—an essay which even at the present day forms a. very instructive analysis of the mechanical relations of the muscles of the hip joint. For these researches into the mechanism of the human body Fick always retained a liking. He wrote a mono- graph on the saddle-shaped articulations, gave in his “Medical Physics,” the first edition of which appeared in the year 1856, an admirable exposition of the mechanism of the joints generally, and contributed an article on the subject. to L. Hermann’s great ‘‘ Hand- buch,” besides encouraging several of his own pupils to undertake similar investigations. His scientific work upon the mechanics of the body led Fick to a special line of inquiry—one to which he devoted the working time and energy of his mature years—that respecting the changes of muscle during its contraction. There are about thirty essays by Fick-himself, as well as a number of writings by his students, which deal with particular points in the physiology of muscle. Of these one of the most important was the development of heat which attends contraction. With the aid of thermo- electrical apparatus devised by himself, he was enabled to determine approximately the absolute amount of heat that was developed during continuous contraction. He subsequently introduced and defined the important con- ceptions which are expressed by the terms “ isotonic” and “isometric” as applied to contraction, and investi- gated the nature of the conditions so designated. . For the measurement of work, he constructed his “ Arbeits- sammler.” As the final result of all his muscular studies, he stated NO. 1703, VOL. 66] his views as to the nature of the process of muscular con- traction. These have not escaped criticism. One of his conclusions, however, which in a manner he reached by a process of exclusion in so faras he rendered untenable other possible ways of explaining the contraction of muscle by reference to the second of the laws of the mechanical theory of heat, is, indeed, of quite prime importance. According to Fick, the kinetic energy generated by chemical reactions in the muscle cannot be accounted for by the hypothesis that the chemical energy consumed is first developed in the form of heat, and this transformed into the coordinated kinetic energy of the contraction. It must rather be supposed that the chemical forces stored up in the muscle are so coordinated that in their transformation into kinetic energy they directly cause the change of form ofthe muscle ; so that we have not to do with a thermodynamic process as in the case of the steam engine, but the chemical energy is converted directly into the coordinated kinetic energy of the con- traction. With this notable definition respecting the changes which precede muscular contraction, an im- portant stage is reached in the explanation of the phenomena of contractile substances, and every future discussion of these questions must be referred back to this as a starting point. Another subject of Fick’s repeated investigations was that of the dynamics of the circulation. His first efforts were directed towards improving the methods of obtain- ing graphic records of the blood-pressure curve, with the result that the manometer and the spring kymograph bearing his name have been adopted into general use. He was the first to analyse by means of an apparatus constructed by him—now called the plethysmograph— and with the greatest clearness and precision, the varia- tions in speed of the flow of blood in artery and vein (Ztirich Laboratory Reports, 1868). By means of new methods of investigation and observation he threw valuable light upon the phenomenon of dicrotism and upon the pressure of the blood in the ventricles of the heart and in the great vessels. Under the head of the physiology of the organs of sense, he paid special attention to the subject of vision. His dissertation “Tractatus de errore optico,” &c., Marburg, 1851, deals principally with the phenomena of astigmatism (Helmholtz, ‘“ Physiolog. Optik,” p. 147). Fick occupied himself repeatedly with speculations as to the explanation of the colour sense. He published a number of critical and experimental studies upon the subject. His last communication to the Society of Medical Physics of Wiirzburg dealt with Hering’s theory of the colour sense. His contributions to the study of the subject of hearing consisted in an experimental investigation upon the mechanism of the tympanum. A paper by Fick, on the sense of touch, is comprised in the volume for 1860 of Moleschott’s Uztersuchungen. , Upon the physiology of the nerve substance Fick published only a few essays. To the issues for the year 1862 and 1864 of the reports of the Vienna Academy and to the E. H. Weber “ Festschrift” in the year 1871 he contributed studies upon the sensibility of the spinal chord. The essay upon the different degrees of excita- bility observable in functionally different parts of the chord deserves special mention. Of Fick’s work on metabolism, and the physiology of the digestive glands, may be mentioned, as particularly well known, the experiment* that he made with the 1 Vide the Philosophical Magazine for June 1866. The late Sir Edward Frankland regarded this as “‘one of the most important chemico-physio- logical experiments ever made” (Frankland’s ‘t Experimental Researches,” p. 918). Although prevented from accompanying his brother-in-law, Fick, on the expedition, Frankland undertook the experimental determination of certain calorimetrical equivalents required as a basis for the conclusions drawn from the Faulhorn experiment. These, it may be added, had a much wider application, and until replaced by more exact determinations they served for years as the only data on which calculations could be founded. 182 cooperation of J. Wislicenus for estimating the amount of albumin expended in physical work such as mountain climbing. The result, that the material used in muscular work must be free from nitrogen, was at once generally accepted. The results of investigations on the peptones, upon what becomes of them in the circulation of the blood, on the action of pepsin, and on the value of various nutritive substances, were made public from time to time in lectures for which Fick prepared and demon- strated very numerous and laborious experiments. The students’ manuals which Fick wrote are distin- guished by their lucid exposition, clear style and critical discussion. His first book, entitled ‘‘ Die medicinische Physik,” was written when he was in his twenty-seventh year, and passed through three editions. This book at once secured for the young author a place in the front rank of the physiologists of the day. Of the ‘‘ Kom- pendium der Physiologie” four editions appeared, the last in the year 1892. As early as 1862 he published a “Lehrbuch der Anatomie und Physiologie der Sinnesorgane” as part of a larger compilation. To Hermann’s “ Handbuch,” already mentioned, he furnished two elaborate articles on physiological optics. From the physiological laboratory at Ziirich in the year 1869, and from the Wiirzburg Institute in the years 1873 to 1878, there appeared the “ Physiologische Unter- suchungen” (four issues). From 1852 and onwards for fourteen years he was one of the contributors to Canstatt’s “ Jahres bericht” on the literature of physiology. Of the remarkable talents and training that enabled him, for instance, to deliver experimental lectures on physics during the vacancy of the chair of physics, he also gave evidence by his own productions as investigator | and writer in this branch of science. Best known is his work on hydro-diffusion in Poggendorff's Anma/s. The fundamental conceptions of mechanics, and the insight gained into these by means of the mechanical theory of heat, were favourite subjects of his speculation. A_ brief enumeration must suffice here of the titles of the most characteristic of the treatises that fall under this head, and many of which lie in the borderland between physics and pure philosophy :— “Ueber die der Mechanik zu Grunde liegenden Anschauungen,” “ Ueber die Zerstreuung der Energie,” “Versuch einer physischen Deutung der kritischen Geschwindigkeit in Weber’s Gesetz,” “‘Ueber Druck im innern von Flissigkeiten.” The following treatises belong more to the philosophical side :—“ Die Naturkrafte in ihrer Wechselwirkung,” “Die Welt als Vorstellung,” “ Philosophischer Versuch ueber die Wahrscheinlichkeit,” “Die stetige Raumerfiilling durch Masse,” &c. Even this slight sketch of Fick’s literary activity will show how comprehensively he mapped out for himself the sphere of his work and how exhaustively he laboured in it. But he was also unusually well equipped in all other departments of human knowledge. He was extra- ordinarily learned and well read. In accordance with his own definition of an educated man as one who 1s capable of taking a comprehensive view of the most characteristic results furnished by the intellectual work of the whole of mankind, Fick studied and mastered a very widely embracing province of knowledge. He was assisted in his efforts by a particularly accurate memory, which he retained unimpaired to the last. Conspicuous among Fick’s talents was his critical faculty. He dealt with the first principles of the science of mechanics in an unusually clear and distinct way, and when a series of novel conceptions was put before him he was able to correctly analyse and estimate them. He was recognised by those who knew him as a scientific critic by vocation. He was aided in his experimental work by great manual dexterity. He prided himself upon belonging to the school of Bunsen, and in the construction NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 of the various instruments which he introduced followed Bunsen’s method by himself putting together out of simple materials the first models of new scientific ap- paratus. It is an interesting fact that Fick warmly espoused the cause of total abstinence, and was himself for the last decade of his life a total abstainer. NOTES. M. AMaGar has been elected a member of the section of physics of the Paris Academy of Sciences, in succession to the late Prof. Cornu. Mr. Marconi brought forward two interesting pieces of information in his lecture at the Royal Institution last Friday. The first relates to the new form of magnetic detector which he has been employing in place of the coherer. The instrument is found to be more sensitive and trustworthy than the coherer, and gives promise of a great increase in the speed of working. Already a speed of thirty words a minute has been attained, and this may possibly be increased to several hundred. The second point relates to the recent Transatlantic signalling. It seems that on the occasion of Mr. Marconi’s journey across the Atlantic in the Phzlade/phia, the signals transmitted during the day failed entirely at a distance of 700 miles, although a message was successfully sent at night more than 1550 miles, and a signal more than 2000 miles. This effect Mr. Marconi suggests may be due to the diselectrification of the aérial wires by the daylight. The difficulty can, however, be got over by the use of greater trans- mitting power—as is evidenced partly by the fact that the signal received at Newfoundland was transmitted during the daytime. The Canadian station, for the erection of which Mr. Marconi was liberally subsidised by the Canadian Government, will be open shortly for experiments. The rest of the lecture gave an interesting 7észmé of the work already accomplished, but con- tained nothing which will be new to those who have followed its progress. THE eighty-third meeting of the Société Helvétique des Sciences Naturelles will be held at Geneva on September 7-10. M. E. Sarasin is the president of the society, M. Mare Micheli and Prof. R. Chodat vice-presidents, M. Maurice Gauthier and M. A. de Candolle secretaries, and M. A. Pictet treasurer. Correspondence referring to the forthcoming meeting should be addressed to M. de Candolle, Cour de St. Pierre, 3, Geneva. In accordance with previous announcements, the autumn meeting of the Iron and Steel Institute will be held at Diisseldorf on September 3-4. The directors of the Nord- deutscher Lloyd have generously offered to the members attending the meeting complimentary first-class passages, including table, to the number of 250, by the s.s. Avon- prinz Wilhelm, upon that ship’s homeward voyage (from New York) to Bremen, on September 1, from Plymouth. The provisional programme of the meeting is as follows :—On Tuesday, September 2, the members will arrive at Diisseldorf, On September 3 the president, coungil and members will be received by the civic authorities and by the reception com- mittee in the Municipal Concert Hall (Stadtische Tonhalle). A selection of papers will subsequently be read and discussed. In the afternoon a visit will be paid to the Diisseldorf Exhibition, for the purpose of examining the various sections of mining, metallurgy and machinery. In the evening the members and ladies accompanying them will be invited by the Mayor and Corporation of Diisseldorf to a conyersazione and concert. On September 4 the morning will be devoted to the reading and discussion of papers, and the afternoon to visits to the exhibi- tion and to works in the immediate vicinity. In the evening the reception committee will entertain the visitors at a banquet. JUNE 19, 1902] On September § the whole day will be devoted to visits to works. In the evening the exhibition grounds will be specially illumin- ated in honour of the Institute. On September 6 there will be an excursion to the picturesque district of Vohwinkel, to the Elberfeld suspended railway and to the Kaiserbridge, near Miingsten. A detailed programme will be issued when the arrangements are further advanced, ON June 14 the Essex Field Club visited those portions of the old Lambourne and Hainhault Forests which, according to the scheme proposed by Mr. E. N. Buxton, are to be re-afforested and to become an open space for London second only in im- portance to Epping Forest. It is proposed to make free some 859 acres, of which seventy are detached from the main portion. These form Grange Hill Forest, and the purchase of them for 7000/, is now assured. For the rest, 20,000/. is asked. It is hardly necessary to point out the importance from a natural history point of view which the grounds will possess if they become public property. Not only will the naturalist find happy} grounds for study, but others who feel the necessary primness of London parks will be able to enjoy nature less adorned. ° QUEENWOOD COLLEGE, near Stockbridge, Hants, was de- stroyed by fire on June 10, Mr. Charles Willmore, the principal, meeting his death in the disaster. Several distinguished men, both in Mr, Willmore’s time and in that of his predecessor, Mr. George Edmondson, made their temporary home at Queenwood. Prof. Fawcett, Postmaster-General and political economist, was a scholar there ; and in the roll of its science masters we find the names of Tyndall, Frankland, Debus, Field and Hake. There have been few schools in this country in which the pursuit of science was more earnestly and heartily encouraged. It is now about seven years since the college, as such, ceased to exist. DuRING atrial witha French naval balloon off Toulon on June 9, Lieut. Baudic, who was alone in the car, was thrown into the sea and drowned. The object of the ascent was to ascertain whether it is possible, from the car of a balloon, to perceive submarine boats at a distance of a mile orso. The balloon started from the Maritime Aéronautical Works estab- lished in 1890 at Garrouban. The Garrouban Aéronautical Station is provided with two balloons, the Awxz/are, and a larger one measuring 500 c.m. capable of carrying three persons, called the Normal. These marine balloons are intended to be sent up captive from a large warsteamer for inspecting the surrounding sea and sending up signals at a distance. WE learn from Sczence that at the recent annual meeting of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences it was decided to award the ‘‘ Rumford premium ” to Prof. George E. Hale, of the Yerkes Observatory, ‘‘ for his investigations in solar and stellar physics, and in particular for the invention and perfection of the spectro-heliograph.” It was also resolved to grant the sum of 750 dollars from the income of the Rumford fund to be expended for the construction of a mercurial compression pump designed by Prof. Theodore W. Richards and to be used in his research on the Thomson-Joule effect. A grant from the Rumford fund was also made to Prof. Arthur A. Noyes in aid of his research as to the effect of high temperatures upon the electrical conductivity of aqueous solutions, THE 7Zimes reports that the jubilee festival of the Germanic Museum at Nuremberg was celebrated on Monday in the presence of the German Emperor and Empress and members of the Royal Houses of Bavaria, Baden and Wiirtemberg. The collections in the museum illustrate every aspect of the growth of the Germanic peoples ; special collections, for example, have been formed to illustrate the development of the trade guilds and of characteristic German industries, such as the Bavarian NO. 1703, VOL. 66] NATURE 183 breweries. From a collection of antiquities in the narrow sense of weapons, heraldic devices and the like, the museum has _grown into a complete historical exhibition. DuRING the researches of the seventh expedition of the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, which visited the Gambia in the summer and autumn of last year, a new parasite associated with symptoms resembling those occurring in animals suffering from the tse-tse fly disease was found in the blood of a native child. The committee of the school has now resolved to despatch a new expedition to the Gambia and to Senegambia to study the disease further. The expedition, which will start ina few weeks, will, as at present organised, consist of Dr. J. Everett Dutton and Dr. J. L. Todd, of McGill University, Montreal. Its principal object will be to investigate the conditions under which the disease occurs in both Europeans and natives and its distribution, and also to ascertain how it is conveyed from man to man. AMoNG the subjects discussed at the annual meeting of the Sea Fisheries Committees of England held in London on June 10 and presided over by Mr. Gerald Balfour were the establishment and maintenance by the Government of one or more laboratories for carrying on the work of fishery research, or, failing that, the provision from Imperial resources of the funds necessary to render more efficient and useful the labora- tories which at present exist. Mr. Gerald Balfour, in welcom- ing the delegates, said some of the subjects discussed last year, such as the registry, lettering and numbering of fishing boats, had been carried out ; and the artificial fertilisation of ova had been referred to the Committee on Ichthyological Research now sitting, as was also the establishment and maintenance of laboratories and hatcheries. In the popular mind, the medical and other sciences are regarded as too severely precise to have romantic aspects, yet in the history of scientific discovery records can be found of many noble deeds and sacrifices for the sake of others. Sir Frederick Treves referred to the romance of medicine in an address at the Charing Cross Hospital Medical School on June 11. He remarked that the exploits of discoverers of new countries had always been surrounded with a halo of romance, but the discoveries in medicine had not been less romantic. No story of the past could exceed the romance of the history of the work of Pasteur, Lister and Koch. They had not discovered any new garden of the Hesperides, but they had travelled far into the valley of the shadow of death. He did not think there was anything in the history more tragic than the account of Laénnec holding on the point of a needle a minute scrap of tissue and saying ‘‘ I have found the seed of tuberculosis.” When Koch demonstrated the bacillus of tuberculosis he was practically reaching one of the limits of philosophic inquiry. Could there be anything more profoundly interesting than the way in which malaria was studied and finally explained ? SEVERAL matters of meteorological interest have been recorded during the past few days. The drought in Australia came to an end at the beginning of last week, when good rains occurred in portions of South Australia, New South Wales and Victoria. Less hopeful news comes, however, from India, for an Exchange telegram from Simla states that the official monsoon forecast, which this year for the first time is withheld from the public, foreshadows a deficient rainfall all over India and drought in Gujerat and Western Punjab. At Karachi, however, a terrific storm occurred on Monday. The Dazly Maz/ states that the city is halfsubmerged by extraordinarily high tides. Telegraphs and telephones have all been destroyed, and there has been serious loss of life and property. Exceptionally stormy weather is also being experienced in South Africa. At Middleburg, 184 Cape Colony, for the first time for sixteen years, the town was covered with deep snow on June 11. Storm and cold are general throughout the Colony. The cold is unprecedented, and thousands of cattle and sheep have perished. In many places the telegraph poles are buried beneath snowdrifts. A very severe snowstorm swept ever the midland districts of Cape Colony on June 14. Trains were blocked at Naauwpoort by a snowdrift 6 feet in depth, and much difficulty was experienced in clearing the lines. Heavy falls of snow also occurred in other parts of the country. THE annual report of the Decimal Association records that ately there has been a very decided growth of public opinion in favour of the compulsory adoption of the metric weights and measures throughout the British Empire. There are warm sup- porters of the reform in Canada, Australia, Cape Colony and India, and efforts will be made to bring the question before the Conference of Colonial Premiers to be held at the time of the Coronation. British consuls abroad, residing in countries where the metric system is in use, continue to dwell upon the im- portance of the change being made from our present confused and complicated weights and measures to those of the metric system. The Committee on Decimal Coinage appointed by the Federal House of Representatives for Australia issued its report in April recommending the adoption of decimal coinage. The report of this committee concluded with a recommendation that the Commonwealth should cooperate in any movement for the decimalisation of the weights and measures of the Empire. Quite recently the Association of Trade Protection Societies of the United Kingdom passed the following resolution at its annual meeting :—‘‘ That this meeting is of opinion that the time has now arrived when the decimal system of coinage and the metric system of weights and measures should be com- pulsorily adopted throughout the British Empire.” AMERICA has just furnished a new high-speed record, which has been attained on the Burlington and Missouri Railroad. The train (says Hez/den’s Magazine for June) consisted of nine cars, namely, a mail car, a luggage car, two reclining chair cars, three sleeping cars, dining car and a private car, and the engine (B. and M. R. No. 41) was of the ten-wheeled type with 6-feet driving wheels. The section over which the record was taken was between Eckley and Wray, Colorado, separated by a distance of 14°8 miles, which was ‘‘ covered in exactly nine minutes, that is, the train was travelling at the rate of 98°66 miles per hour for the whole section.”’ It is stated that the time was correctly tallied by five separate chronographs, and may therefore be considered trustworthy. In the Jahrbuch der k.-k. geol. Retchsanstalt (Band li. Heft 1), Herr Lukas Waagen contributes a detailed account of the Jurassic Avecula (Oxytoma) inaeguivalvis and its allies. This paper will be welcomed by all who may have occasion to study this very variable and difficult group of shells. The author supplies a comprehensive synonymic list, and concludes that the numerous specific separations in this group, proposed by various authors, are in reality unwarranted. A score of new forms of fossil ear-bones of fishes, from the Tertiary strata of Austro-Hungary, have been described by R. J. Schubert (Jahrbuch der k.-k. geol. Reichsanstalt, Band li. Heft 2). These otoliths are for the most part referred to Um- brina, Corvina, Scizenidarum and Scizna, and were obtained in Pliocene deposits at Brunn am Gebirge and in Miocene beds at several other localities. Some appear to indicate relationship with recent Mediterranean forms, while others have their nearest allies in the Oligocene and Miocene of Germany and in the older Tertiaries of North America. The paper is well, illustrated. NO. 1703, VOL, 66] NATURE [JUNE 19, 1902 In a memoir on the flora of Thibet or high Asia Mr. Botting Hemsley, F.R.S., has compiled an account which brings out vividly the unique conditions of altitude and climate. The data for the subject-matter are obtained from collections deposited in the herbarium at Kew. Amongst the peculiarities of the vegetation may be noted the scarcity of certain types of plants, é.g. annuals, succulents and bulbous plants (except oleae ots ws Dre@eAdolf Fick . ...1; 41s geet sc Rene INotes 7... - PR cOMENCNDYO egos > se Our Astronomical Column : — The Sunspot Curve and Epochs . . 186 Method of Observing Altitudes at Sea “during Night- hee Ale 186 Liquid Fuel for Steam Purposes, Byils S. s. Brame 186 The Murchison Falls. By C, Steuart Betton ... 188 The Manufacture and Usesof Sodium, (///ustrated) 189 University and Educational Intelligence ..... 190 Socretiesjand/Academiesi) saa meneencl- 1 eil-a aaeLOL Diarylorsocieties . i.) hansen: << smn meloe a NATORE 193 THURSDAY, JUNE 26, 1902. BIBLICAL CRITICISM AT ITS BEST AND WORST. Encyclopaedia Biblica; a Critical Dictionary of the Literary, Political and Religious History, the Archae- ology, Geography and Natural History of the Bible. Edited by the Rev. T. K. Cheyne, D.Litt., D.D., and J. Sutherland Black, M.A. LL.D. Vol. iii. (L to P). (London : Adam and Charles Black, 1902.) HEN the plan of the “ Encyclopzedia Biblica” was first announced several years ago, the most favourable anticipations were formed with regard to the new project by all advocates of a moderate and scientific criticism of the Biblical writings. This dictionary was to embody the ideal of the late Prof. Robertson Smith, an encyclopzedia which should include within its purview the results of the latest criticism, provided only that this criticism was conceived in common sense, developed with moderation and expressed with that consideration for the holders of traditional views which in this case is absolutely required. The first volume of the ‘“ Ency- clopzedia” seemed entirely to fulfil these anticipations, and its appearance was welcome to all students of Biblical history and archzeology; but in the second, various disquieting symptoms were noticeable, especially | ‘in Prof. Cheyne’s article “Jerahme’el”; the third can only be frankly described as disappointing these initial hopes and as being, in fact, most damaging to the cause of the “higher criticism.” Those who have a working knowledge of Biblical criticism will, of course, be able to discriminate between those parts of the “ Encyclopzedia” which are really useful and suggestive and those which are the reverse ; but what of the vast majority of readers who do not know? ' It is probable that very many of these, wearied by Prof. Cheyne’s incessant discussion of his “Jerahmeelites” and “Musrites,” irritated by Prof. van Manen’s calm abolition of St. Paul and revolting against the inconsiderate tactlessness of Prof. Schmiedel’s article “Mary,” will, ignoring the vast overplus of sound and _ sterling critical learning which is to be found in the book, be driven into the Opposing camp of anticritical obscurantism and refuse to hear anything further of Biblical criticism. will the splendid work of critics of the type of the late Profs. Robertson Smith, Tiele and Socin, many of whose articles appear in this volume, of Profs. Driver, Néldeke and Wellhausen, of President Moore and many others, be discredited by the insistent advocacy of a single over- mastering theory for which no convincing proof has yet been furnished by its author, and by the continual display by several of the continental contributors of their ignorance of the fact that in approaching British and American readers on such a subject as the Nativity of Christ or the life of the Virgin Mary the utmost tact is necessary. We have spoken of Prof. Cheyne’s insistent advocacy throughout this volume of the “Encyclopedia” of his Jerahmeel-cu7-Musri theory, and have described this theory as one for which no convincing proof has yet been NO. 1704, VOL. 66] furnished by its author. Certainly in the “ Encyclopedia Biblica” he has furnished none, either in the article “Jerahme’el” in vol. ii. or in the present volume. For a convenient summary of all that is apparently known about the name “Jerahmeel” and the tribe of the Jerah- meelites we may refer the reader to Mr. J. F. Stenning’s paragraph on the subject in Hastings’ “ Dictionary of the Bible,” vol. 11. p. 568. The Jerahmeelites were a clan of southern Judzea, mentioned three or four times in the Old Testament; the name Jerahmeel occurs four times (1 Chr. ii. 9, 33; xxiv. 29; Jer. xxxvi. 26). Prof. Cheyne, however, has built up for himself a vast edifice of pure theory all about the Jerahmeelites, in whom he sees a powerful tribe of Arabian origin equal in im- portance to, and rivalling, the Israelites. This theory ts connected by him with Winckler’s unproved theory of the existence of a North Arabian country bearing the same name in the Assyrian records as did Egypt and a land of Northern Syria, z.e. “‘ Musri,” which itself again largely rests upon the unproved theories of Glaser with regard to the age of the “ Minzean” inscriptions of Yaman. So Prof. Cheyne pictures to himself hosts of ‘“ Jerah- meelites” and “ Musrites” constantly warring against Israel, finding them even serving in the armies of Nebuchadnezzar ; they were, according to him, con- stantly the objects of prophetic denunciation for the evil which they had done unto Israel, although at the same time a disproportionate number of the Jewish proper names known to us from the Old Testament are pronounced by him to be of Jerahmeelite origin. But if the Jerahmeelites are only mentioned half-a-dozen times in the traditional text of the Old Testament and the “Musrites” may quite possibly never have existed, how does Prof. Cheyne arrive at these somewhat revolutionary conclusions? By a simple process very characteristic of the extreme “higher critic,” he merely supposes that the name “ Jerahmeel” originally occurred far more in the Old Testament than it does at present, and that it has been constantly substituted and corrupted ; he then proceeds to replace the words “ Jerahmeel” or “ Missur” (Musri) wherever he thinks they ought to stand, and in this way “restores” the text of the Bible in accordance with his theory. Many of his re-substitutions and cor- rections are founded on more or less ingenious emenda- tions of the text; for others no justification is given ; | they rest merely on the zfse dixit of Prof. Cheyne. Thus | This procedure might be excused in a critic of such preeminent standing as Prof. Cheyne, and we would be ready to accept from the mine of his great learning many conclusions the reasons for which were not fully ap- parent were it evident to us that the steps of his reason- ing were tending in the direction of what was both pro- bable and possible ; but in the case of “* Jerahmeel” we confess that we have very little faith in his reasoning, and in the connected case of the supposed North Arabian Musri we believe that he has been misled by a hasty adoption of a theory which is in no way accepted by the majority of Assyriologists. However this may be, it is in any case on the face of it evident that the professor has in the third volume of the “ Encyclopaedia” allowed himself to be absolutely over- mastered by his theory ; he sees Jerahmeel everywhere ; everything is a corruption or a disguise or a distortion K 194 of “Jerahmeel” ; Amramis a“ development ” of ‘ Jerah- meel” ; Aérvam is a corruption of “ Jerahmeel” ; Zev7 is a Jerahmeelite name, for it corresponds to Leah, which is ‘‘a fragment of a feminine form of Jerahmeel” ; Maacah is “a popular corruption of Jerahme’el or Jerahme’elith (a Jerahmeelitess),” AZeholah is the same, Mephibosheth (col. 3023), Michael, Abihail (col. 3198), Jerubbaal, Ephrath (3516), Rimmon (3379), Ramah (3264), Jericho (3258), Hiddekel, Leummim all apparently occur as corruptions of, or substitutions for, “ Jerahmeel.” In the majority of cases it is impossible to discover how or why. “ Both Micha and Chimham [the italics are ours] (2 S. 19, 37 #) may quite naturally,” says Prof. Cheyne (co/. 3025), “‘ be traced to Jerahme’el” ; Hded-melech ought to be “ Arab-jerahmeel” (3340); the MWepAz/im were really Jerahmeelites, for MePhilim =“ Rephilim” = “ Jerah- meelim”; and after this the transition Memmzel— “ Jemuel”—“ Jerahmeel ” is comparatively easy ! Further, Amalek is “an early popular distortion ” (2935) of, and “ultimately the same name” (3258) as, “ Jerahmeel.” The inevitable Jerahmeel pursues us even into the Garden of Eden. In Gem. ii. 8 “we cannot hesitate to read ‘Yahwé [Elohim] planted a garden in Eden of Jerahmeel’”; the traditional text reads, “And Yahwé [Elohim] planted a garden eastward in Eden.” According to Prof. Cheyne there is a “Jerahmeelite form of the story” of Paradise (3574), and the pas- sage Gen. iii. 20 probably ran _ originally, “And Jerahmeel called the name of his wife Horith, that is, a Jerahmeelitess.” The original names of Adam and Eve were, therefore, not Adam and Eve, but “ Jerahmeel” and “ Horith.” We cannot find that any real reasons are given for all these assumptions. Dr. Winckler’s hypothetical North-Arabian “ Musri” is pressed into service in much the same way. Here is the traditional text of Dew?. xxxiy. 1 side by side with Prof. Cheyne’s version of it ;— Traditional Text. (R. V.) “* And Moses went up from the plains of Moab unto mount Nebo, to the top of Pisgah, that is over against Jericho. And the Lord shewed him all the Jand of Gilead, unto Dan, and all Naphtali, and the land of Ephraim, and Manasseh, and all the land of Judah, unto the hinder sea: and the South, and the Plain of the valley of Jericho the city of palm trees, unto Zoar.” Prof. Cheyne’s Version. “And Moses went up from Arabia of Musri to the top of the mountain of the Negeb of Jerahmeel [fronting Jerah- meel].2, And Yahwe shewed him Jerahmeel as far as Dan, and all Tappthim [the land of Jerahmeel and Musri], all the land of Judah as far as the Jerahmeelite sea,? and _ the Negeb of Jerahmeel [the land of Jerahmeel, the land of Musri].” Prof. Cheyne’s note is to the effect that the words in square brackets are to be regarded as glosses; note 3 states that this is the true original name of the Dead Sea. Because, relying on his own arbitrary interpretation of ii. Chron. xxi. 16, Dr. Winckler boldly supposes a North- Arabian Kush as well as a North-Arabian Musri, Prof. Cheyne naturally follows, and so: we ;find that the name of Nehushta, the mother of Jehoiachin, is corrupt ; it ought to be “ Cushith,” a NortheArabian: her father was ‘“‘Elnathan of Jerusalem” ; this is very unlikely ; ““Elnathan” is of course wrong, and “ Jerusalem ” is in this passage a corruption of Jerahmeel! Of course Prof. Cheyne does not mean a corruption in the sense in NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE [June 26, 1902 which the word “lord ” is a corruption of “hlaford” ; he means that the text has been more or less wilfully altered! from the supposed original “ Jerahmeel” to the existing “Jerusalem.” But he gives no real proof of any such corruption or of the validity of his supposition that the original text read “ Jerahmeel.” Mordecai follows the rest ; Paddan-aram ought to read “Haran (Hauran?) of Jerahmeel” (3523); Daniel ‘‘is most easily explained as a corruption of Jerahmeel,” and with Daniel go Badel, Nebuchadnezzar and Bel- Shazzar, the real original of the latter having been a hypothetical ‘‘ Baal, prince of Missur” (3983). For Prof. Cheyne’s apparent belief that the names of Nebu- chadnezzar and Belshazzar have, in the Book of Daniel, been substituted for those of his hypothetical North Arabian heroes, and that the w2zse-en-scéne of the story of Daniel is to be bodily transferred from Babylonia to: the Negeb of Jerahmeel, no proof whatever is given. The reader is invited to compare the accepted text of Jer. xxxix. 1 with Prof. Cheyne’s version of it ; Mergal- Sharezer is, according to him, a corruption of ‘ Mergal- sharezer” (!) which “ proceeded from” ‘ shar Yerahme'el shar Missur, “the king of Jerahmeel and the king of Missur.” He turns the Babylonian Nergal-shar-utsur, the Rab-mag, and other Babylonian officials into princes of Jerahmeel, Missur, Nodab, Cushim and the Arabians For these extraordinary proposals not the slightest justification is given. For Prof. Cheyne the Book of Obadiah seems to con- tain a kind of Bacon-Shakespeare eryptogram all about Jerahmeel, and this is how he, with apologies for doing so, it is true, recasts the well-known sentence from Psalm cxxxvii. : “On the heritage of Jerahmeel we wept, remembering Zion.” In Psalm cx., Prof. Cheyne restores an original text for verses 5-6(R. V.), “The Lord at thy right hand shall strike through kings in the day of His wrath ; He shall judge among the nations, He shall fill the places with dead bodies, He shall strike through the head in many countries,” as follows :— “The Lord will shatter Jerahmeel in the day of His wrath, He will judge mighty kings for the treason of their pride. The Lord will smite Geshur on the land of the Arabians ; the kings of Rehoboth He will destroy, the princes of Jerahmeel.” It may be admitted that the received text is here cor- rupt, but we cannot see that the corruption goes very far. or think it probable that the original sense of the passage quoted was very different from its present tenour ; even as it stands, it is not nonsense, any more than is the Pisgah passage quoted above. Finally, we may compare the received text of Gez. x. 10 #7, describing the kingdom of Nimrod, with Prof. Cheyne’s version of it :— Traditional Text. (R. V.) “« And the beginning of his kingdom was Babel, and Erech, and Accad, and Calneh, in the land of Shinar. Out of that land he went forth into Assyria, and builded Nineveh, and Rehoboth-Ir, and Calah, and Resen between Nineveh and Calah. .. .” Prof. Cheyne’s Version. ‘© And the beginning of his kingdom was Jerahmeel in the land of Seir. From that land he went forth into Geshur, and smote Hebron, Rehoboth, Jerahmeel, and Beersheba, which is between Hebron and Jerahmeel.” In this passage we have a plain statement of a legen- dary account of the origin of the kingdoms and cities of NL ————— ~ane JUNE 26, 1902} ‘Mesopotamia, the foundation of which is in the legend ascribed to a half-mythical hero called Nimrod. It is impossible to see what grounds there are for any radical alteration of the text, yet Prof. Cheyne arbitrarily assumes that all the Mesopotamian names in the passage quoted are substitutions for names of obscure places to the south of Juda, and he apparently does so merely because Nimrod is called ason of Cush, and Dr. Winckler thinks there was a country called Cush in northern Arabia. In this case we cannot but reject Prof. Cheyne’s alterations, which seem to us entirely arbitrary, unnecessary and im- probable. We have by no means given a full list of the passages in the “Encyclopedia” which Prof. Cheyne devotes to “‘ Jerahmeel ” and the names which he would iden- tify with it, but further enumeration would be weari- some. Space, too, fails us wherein to recapitulate the obvious arguments against the wildest of all Prof. Cheyne’s proposals, 7z.e. to explain Goshen, Pithom and Raamses as names, not of Egyptian places, but of “the Negeb of S. Palestine or N. Arabia” (co/. 3211), and so to deny, in effect, that there ever was any Israelitish sojourn in, or exodus from, Egypt at all, the exodus having been, according to him, an exodus, not from Egypt, but, of course, from the other country of the same name in northern Arabia ! (see the article “ Moses ”). But here again Prof. Cheyne is merely following Winckler, whose theory on the subject he regards as “‘at any rate very plausible” (a7¢. “ Mizraim,” col. 3163). Now Prof. Cheyne is, of course, at liberty to hold this theory if he pleases, and to connect it with the equally vague and unestablished theory of Dr. Winckler about the “North-Arabian Musri” or with any other theory he pleases, but it is doubtful whether he ought to state it with such assurance of its validity in a work of this kind, which was intended to give its readers the matured results of a reasonable criticism, not necessarily the latest theories all hot. Prof. Cheyne has, however, in the majority of cases chosen to give his readers mere neoteristic theories instead of solid and certazz additions to knowledge. We cannot find that any of his colleagues have adopted Prof. Cheyne’s views on the Jerahmeel question, with a single exception, and that a most unexpected one. It was rather startling to find the name of Mr. T. G. Pinches set down as that of one of the contributors to a dictionary which was designed to set forth the views of the higher critics and is partly edited by the most extreme critic of them all, for Mr. Pinches has hitherto been conspicuous for his resolute adherence to the opposing school of sentiment on these matters, and has, indeed, always been looked upon as a pillar of evan- gelical orthodoxy ; but now, not only do we find Mr. Pinches writing an article in a heterodox encyclopzdia, we even find him apparently accepting Prof. Cheyne’s most heterodox theory, and admitting into his article the statement that “‘Pul’ or ‘Phaloch’ may be a corruption of Jerahmeel.” The remark about a “ southern Asshur”’ in northern Arabia, which occurs just above this, must be due to Prof. Cheyne, but Mr. Pinches ought not to have allowed it to appear in his article without comment. Apparently the land 457 mentioned in the Minzan inscriptions G/. 1083, 1155 (6th century NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE 195 B.C.) is meant; this may be Assyria itself, if it is not the land of Asir in western Arabia, between al-Hegaz and Yaman. Mr. Pinches’s alternative suggestion that Tiglath-Pileser III. may have received the name “ Pul’? “on account of the Babylonian opinion of his character (cp. Ass. d/u, ‘wild animal’)” cannot be accepted, be- cause 6#/u is a generic term for “cattle,” and we do not suppose that any sensible Babylonian would have called a king or anybody else “a cattle.” However, although we may regret that this volume of the “Encyclopzdia Biblica” has been made the vehicle of a wild and unproven theory, or rather group of theories, we ought not to allow this regrettable fact to prejudice us against the volume as a whole. When Prof. Cheyne can free himself from the baneful influence of “Jerahmeel” his work cannot be bettered ; witness his article ‘ Ophir,” which finally disposes of the idea, started and still maintained by persons with but little archeological knowledge, that Mashonaland is Ophir. The article of Profs. Néldeke, Buchanan Gray and Kautzsch on “ Names” should be carefully read ; it is of great interest and value. Prof. Driver’s article, ““Mesha,” is thoroughly exhaustive and extremely inter- esting ; we cannot but regret that only a single contribu- tion from his pen is to be found in this volume. The articles ‘‘ Persia” and “ Philistines,” by the late Prof. Tiele and Prof. F. Brown, and by President G. F. Moore respectively, are of the first order, especially the latter, which is thoroughly up to date, the author agreeing with all those writers who have recently treated of the subject in believing the Philistines to have been certainly of European, and probably of specifically “ A°gean,” origin. The traditional view that they came from Crete is borne out on the one hand by the Egyptian records of the wars and alliances of the Purvuwsatz and on the other by the lately ascertained fact that the “ Mycenzan” culture had obtained a foothold in Philistia at some time between the fifteenth and twelfth centuries B.C. In this connection, Mr. J. L. Myres’s remarks on Mycenzan finds in Philistia and on the influence of A:gean pottery- types on the native styles should be noted (art. “ Pottery ”). Prof. Eduard Meyer’s “ Phoenicia” is worthy of so distinguished a historian; Mr. W. M. Miiller’s articles on subjects connected with Egypt are, while critical, at the same time moderate, careful and informing. Evi- dently he will not have anything to do with the Jerah- meelite theory ; he still believes Pithom to be Pithom in the Wady Tiimilat, and holds with the rest of the world that the Israelites once lived in the land of Goshen, which was in Egypt. The Rev. C. H. W. Johns must also be congratulated on his non-adherence to the Jerahmeelite theory ; at any rate, he treats Gev. x. 8 #7 as referring to Mesopotamia, not to Jerahmeel, and evidently continues to think that “ Nineveh ” means Nineveh and not Hebron (see above). His article ‘“‘ Nineveh” is good ; we find nothing to object to init except the statement that “Sir H. Layard by his explorations definitely fixed” the city “at Kuyunjik (1845-47 and 1849-51).” Asa matter of fact, he claimed by his excavations to have proved that Ca/a/ was the site of Nineveh, and it was only after Hincks, Rawlinson and others had deciphered the inscriptions that the-earlier 196 NATURE [JUNE 26, 1902 = = ve view of Rich, duly mentioned in its place by Mr. Johns, was shown to be correct. Other articles which may be highly commended are those of Prof. Deissmann on “ Papyri,” which contains a most valuable discussion of the character of New Testament Greek, of Dr. Benzinger on “Law” and ‘© Passover,” of Prof. Prince on “ Music,” besides various contributions by younger English Semitic scholars, e.g. Mr. S. A. Cook and Mr. Maurice Canney. We also welcome several short contributions by Sir W. T. Thiselton-Dyer on botanical subjects and a paragraph on the flora of Palestine by Mr. H. H. W. Pearson. We have touched but superficially upon the many articles in this volume which deal with New: Testament criticism. It is a highly controversial subject, and if things have to be said which are likely to shock the feelings of the average Christian, they should at least be said as tactfully as possible. But it cannot be said that we find much tact in the contributions, already referred to, of Profs. van Manen, Usener and Schmiedel, for example. This is a pity, for it prejudices readers in this country against this kind of critical work, which, though often exaggerated in its methods and not seldom self- contradictory in its conclusions, is still deserving of careful attention and study. The general editing of the ‘‘ Encyclopedia” could be improved with advantage. The highly laudable aim of employing only specialists in certain branches of biblical knowledge to deal with questions connected with their own special studies has resulted in a certain irri- tating choppiness of treatment. Thus we get an article, “Purim,” of which five paragraphs are written by Mr. Johns, one by Mr. Frazer and one by Prof. Cheyne. Mr. Johns tells us all he knows about the possibility of a Babylonian origin for the feast; Mr. Frazer discusses Mordecai and Marduk, Vashti and Esther and Ishtar, the mock-king of the Sacaea and the king and queen of the May; and Prof. Cheyne implies that Mr. Frazer is all wrong, because there never were any such names as Mordecai and Esther, which are simply corruptions of Jerahmeel and “Israelith,’? and the book of Esther originally referred, not to Babylonia or Persia, but “to a captivity of the Jews in Edom” (italics in original). At least, we understand that Mr. Frazer wrote § 6 of this article ; it is signed with his initials. But a fact which militates against this theory-is that in the paragraph in question “J. G. F.” refers to himself always in the third person—J. G. Frazer thinks this or J. G. Frazer thinks that—and an editorial note at the bottom of co/. 3980 says that the editors ‘‘have no hesitation in appending a sketch of J. G. Frazer’s view... .” Is it their sketch or is it Mr. Frazer’s? If it is theirs, why is it signed “J. G. F.”? Prof. Cheyne often adds paragraphs with remarks of his own, chiefly about Jerahmeel, to the work of other contributors ; one conspicuous instance is in the article “‘ Moab,” by Profs. G. A. Smith and Wellhausen, which is followed by Prof. Cheyne for two columns with an addendum correcting Wellhausen’s work in accordance with the supposed results of the latest criticism, 7.e. Musri and Jerahmeel. The faults of this volume are, then, many and great, but, we repeat, this fact ought in no way to detract from the inestimable value of the immense overplus of sound NO. 1704. VOL. 66] learning which is to be found in it. Prof. Cheyne’s own articles do not all stray into the paths of Jerahmeel by any means, and the large majority of the other con- tributors, who show no trace of Jerahmeelite influence, are experts in their own particular branches, and their splendid work must be regarded as redeeming the “Encyclopedia” from many of its faults. The publishers have done their utmost ; the typography and general get-up of the book are first-rate : it is a pity that their efforts should be so severely handicapped by the wild theorising of one of their editors and by the tactlessness of some of their less notable foreign con- tributors. In conclusion, a word of commendation must be given to the excellence of the proof-correcting ; we have hardly discovered any errors in this regard. A slip of the pen left uncorrected is, however, noticeable in co/. 3165, Z. 2 from the top, where “al-Misr” should read simply “Misr.” The phrase “al-Misr” does not, apparently, occur in the Himyaritic (Minzean) inscription G/. 1155 , (= Hal. 535) which is here mentioned ; only “ Misr” or “Misran ” is spoken of, the latter expression = al-Misr.! THE FORAMINIFERA. The Foraminifera, an Introduction to the Study of the Protozoa. By Frederick Chapman, A.L.S., F.R.M.S. Pp. xv + 354. (London: Longmans, Green and Co., 1902.) Price 9s. net. HE contents of this book may be divided into two parts, general and special. Beginning with the latter, we find presented in a convenient form (chapters vii.-xvi.) an account of the families and genera of the Foraminifera. One species of each genus is described and figured, the conditions of its occurrence and its paleontological history being also given. The figures are reproductions of pen and ink sketches, and in most cases will no doubt enable the student to refer his speci- mens to their proper genera. Some are, however, too indefinite to serve even this purpose, and the attractive- ness of the book would have been increased if more care had been taken to give something of the elegance and finish of the natural objects. ; In dealing with the phenomenon of the occurrence of two or three plans of arrangement of the chambers which is presented by many forms in the growth of the individual test, the use of the words dzmorphous and trimorphous is advocated. The terms dimorphic and trimorphic were originally applied to such tests, but now that it is re- cognised that the species of the Foraminifera present themselves under two forms, arising by different modes of reproduction, the words dimorphic and dimorphism have been, in accordance with customary biological usage, employed in the latter sense. Fresh words are therefore needed, as the author points out, for the use to which 1 That Egypt, by the way, is here meant, and not any place in North Arabia, is evident from the inscription itself, which obviously contains a reference to the conquest of Egypt by Cambyses. We are strongly of opinion that M. Hz artme ann’s dating of this inscription in Zeftschr. fiir Assyriologie, x. (1 . 32, 1S absolutely correct. A asd defence (Mitteilungen der vasiatischen Geselischaft, 1901, 1, TD) of Glaser’s later view, as altered and amplified by W sates and Hommel, is weak. Weber also, like Prof. Cheyne, takes the existence of a North-Arabian Musri for gospel ; we prefer to wait till Dr. Winckler has proved its existence, which he has not yet succeeded in doing, before we accept it. JuNE 26, 1902] these terms were originally applied. But ézmorphous and ¢rimorphous are objectionable, not only on account of the clumsy and hybrid character of the former, but because they may be taken to imply, by analogy with the use of the terminations ows and zc in chemistry, some relation with the phenomenon of dimorphism. The Latin equivalents é/formed and triformed proposed by Rhumbler ! are far preferable. The most valuable part of the book as a contribution to the literature of the Foraminifera is the chapter on their geological range. Twenty years ago, Schwager summarised the information which had been accumu- lated on this head in the article appended to Biitschli’s account of the Sarcodina in Bronn’s Thier-reich. Since that date our knowledge has greatly extended, and to no inconsiderable extent as the result of Mr. Chapman’s own investigations. The chapter ends with a tabular view of the range of the several families, in which it appears that all the main ones were represented in the Primary rocks, and that four of them (Textularide, Lagenide, Globigerinidze and Rotalide) have been found in Cam- brian strata. ; The descriptive part of the book ends with useful practical directions, but no mention is made of the microaquarium, which has yielded such excellent results in the hands of Schaudinn, who invented it.” The earlier chapters purport to give, as implied in the title, an introduction to the study of the Protozoa in general and of the Foraminifera in particular ; and it is undoubtedly most desirable that workers in this group should have their eyes open to the general biological bearing of the phenomena which lie before them. To attain this end they must, however, go elsewhere. In these chapters there is no grasp of the problems presented, or of the conclusions which have been arrived at. On p. 11 we are told that the division of the nucleus “takes place either by the simple process of binary division or by the more complex and beautiful process of karyokinesis.” The author thus ignores the process which has been observed in several of the higher forms (though it is, indeed, alluded to and figured further on), namely, the simultaneous breaking up of the nucleus or nuclei into fragments. Continuing the same sentence, the karyokinetic division of the nucleus is described as a process ‘‘in which the nuclear body is invested with strands of chromatin threads,” —whatever that may mean ; but on turning to Fig. 10, which is given in illustration, we find two figures from Schaudinn’s paper on the “Central-Korn” of the Heliozoa (Verh. deutsch. zool. Gesellschaft, Bonn, 1896), which represent stages, not of the karyokinetic division of the nucleus at all, but of the division of the central granule, a process preliminary to karyokinesis. In chapter iv., on the shell structure of the Foraminifera, the author is more at home, but it opens with the state- ment that the arrangement of the segments of the shell is partially determined by the form of the initial or 1“ Entwurf eines naturlichen Systems der Thalamophoren.” (Wachrichten der K. Geselisch. d. Wissenschaften 2u Gottingen. Math.-phys. Klasse, 1895, Heft 1, p. 63.) The reader 1s leftin doubt as to the precise term advocated by the author, for on p. 48 ‘‘dimorphous” is used, but on p. 164 the word has become ““bimorphous.” ean Mikroaquarium." (Zects. f. wiss. Mikroskopie. NO. 1704, VOL. 66] Bd. xi., 1894, NATURE 197 primordial chambers. The primordial chambers, whether they be microspheric or megalospheric, are nearly always globular or ovoid, whatever the arrangement of the suc- ceeding chambers may be. How then can the arrange- ment be in any degree determined by their form ? We cannot pass over the omission (p. 53) of the name of Max Schultze, the author of the classical work “Ueber den Organismus der Polythalamien,” from the list of those who since Dujardin have been pioneer workers on the group. On the whole it must be confessed that the book is written in a slip-shod style, which in these earlier chapters is very marked ; and in closing it one cannot but feel that the author would have been better advised if he had confined himself to the special treatment of the subject, for which he is well qualified, leaving the larger biological problems to other hands. Vo Mo Jee UNORGANISED FERMENTS. Enzymes and their Applications. By J. Effront. Trans- lated by S. €. Prescott, S.B. Vol. i. Pp. xt -- 322: (New York: John Wiley and Sons ; London: Chapman and Hall, Ltd.) Price 12s. 6d. N_ his work on “Enzymes and their Applications,” Dr. Effront has presented us with book of great interest and value. The book, as he explains in his preface, is “a summary of the course at the Institute of Fermentation of the New University of Brussels.” If the lectures are delivered in the style in which the book is written, we should very much like to be among his students. Judging from his definition of an enzyme, Dr. Effront is in practical agreement, although he does not say so, with those who class the enzymes among catalytic agents. His definition is as follows :— ‘ “The enzymes, soluble ferments, zymases or diastases are active organic substances secreted by cells, and have the property, under certain conditions, of facilitating chemical reactions between certain bodies without enter- ing into the composition of the definite products which result.” But although it seems appropriate to class the enzymes with catalytic agents, yet there are certain substances which appear to have a catalytic action upon the enzymes. For example, on p. 118 it is stated that the addition of 50 milligrams of asparagin to starch which has been treated with amylase increases the saccharification, in a given time, nearly seven-fold. In chapter iii., which treats of the “ Manner of Action of Diastases,” the different theories advanced to explain diastatic action are carefully reviewed. As an example we may cite the theory of Arthus, who, relying upon the discrepancies which exist between the accounts of many authors as to the properties of the various diastases, takes up the position that enzymes are not substances, but are properties of substances. Enzymes, indeed, bring about chemical changes, but so also do light, heat and electricity. Magnetism is a property of magnetised sub- stances such as steel, but it cannot be obtained apart from the substance. The same reasoning applies to enzymes, which are only the properties of the substances obtained by precipitation or other means, and therefore a pure enzyme is impossible. On p. 66 Dr. Effront shows 198 how extremely sensitive the enzymes are to antiseptic and toxic substances ; we have not heard of magnetism or electricity being affected in a like manner. But whatever the truth may be, it cannot but be admitted that our present knowledge as to what diastatic action really may be is incomplete and vague in the extreme. Possibly the elucidation of many of the difficulties will follow the preparation of a pure enzyme. One difficulty encountered in studying the enzymes is the multitude of names which a single enzyme may possess, ¢.g. on p. 51 we are told that sucrase is variously called “glucose ferment, cytozymase, zymase and in- vertin.” The chief reason for this diversity of names is that different investigators, having obtained from different sources a diastase capable of transforming cane sugar into invert sugar, have often been under the impression that they have come across a new diastase and have there- fore invented a name for it. Chapters v. and vi. deal with sucrase from a theoretical aspect, and chapter vii., on the fermentation of molasses, introduces us to the technical portion of the work. Al- though sucrase is not prepared commercially, it plays a very important part in fermentation, especially in the manufacture of alcohol from molasses. Dr. Effront has evidently studied the technical part of the question with the same care which he has devoted to the scientific side. As a consequence the chapters on the technology of the enzymes should be very valuable to those interested in this branch of the subject. The space at our disposal forbids us to more than _ briefly notice some of the important applications of enzymic fermentation. There is an interesting chapter on “Panary Fermentation,” and here one cannot but be struck by the fact that although the art of bread-making is one of great antiquity, yet we know very little as to what really does take place in the process of bread- making. Chapter xviii. deals with the industrial application of “maltase” (the ferment of maize, which also occurs in small quantities in yeast) and the manufacture of glucose. Chapter xxi. should be of great interest to chemists, as it treats of the ‘“‘ Ferments of Glycerides and Glucosides.” Among the various enzymes here discussed, we notice “Jipase,” the active principle of the pancreatic juice, “emulsin,” which occurs in almonds, and “erythrozyme,” the ferment contained in the madder root. This chapter might with advantage have been extended, but, unfortu- nately, our knowledge of these very interesting substances is not yet very far advanced. In conclusion, we must not forget the translator, Mr. Samuel C. Prescott, who has carried out his labours in a most satisfactory manner. F. MOLLWO PERKIN. OUR BOOK SHELF. Astronomischer Jahresbericht. By Walter F. Wisli- cenus. Band iii. Pp. xxxi + 671. (Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1902.) THE value of this work to astronomers and others inter- ested in astronomical matters is now so well known, in spite of this being only its third appearance, that the present issue will be warmly welcomed. In the compila- tion of such an undertaking as this, Dr. Wislicenus and his co-workers are to be heartily congratulated, for they NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE ' [JuNE 26, 1902 have brought together a very great number of most. useful references and excellent brief extracts of all the more important publications of the past year. The volume now contains 671 pages, and the compiler informs us that this will probably be about its normal size. The second volume contained 552 references more than the first one, and the one before us shows an excess over the second by 193 references. This latter excess was chiefly due to the great number of papers on Nova Persei, which required 228 references alone. In future, to keep down the number of such references, the com- piler proposes to include under one reference all those publications which appear during a year under the same heading and by the same author. This seems a very rational suggestion. It may be mentioned that references are not only given to all the original publications, but also to all transla- tions of such publications and astronomical articles which have appeared in various quarters. Thus, to take a case in point, we find that the communication by Dr. J. Hartmann to the Sz¢z. der Kgl. preuss. Akademie der Wiss. zu Berlin on “ The movement of the Pole Star in the line of sight” was translated into English in the Astrophysical Journal, and was noticed in Sirius, Die Natur, Astronomische Rundschau, Das Weltall and the Revue Scientifique, their respective references being added in each case. The book concludes with a capital index of names and brief tables of errata to the second and present volume. In addition to those mentioned in the present volume, which, by the way, are remarkably few in number con- sidering the work involved, may be added “ Norman ” instead of “ Normann” in references Nos. 1454 and 2131, and ‘‘nachste Maximum” instead of ‘“‘jetzige Minimum” in reference number 1510. In conclusion, it is hardly necessary to point out that no astronomical observatory or similar institution should be without this volume, which embodies in it all that relates to the recent progress of astronomical science, not only in this country, but over the whole world. That the work has in its third year become so complete is due to the untiring labours of Dr. Wislicenus and his co-compilers, and it is hoped that such may in the future be lightened by the endeavour of all interested in such a useful undertaking to remember to send them separate copies, reprints, &c., of published papers. W. J. S. LOCKYER. Elements of Metaphysics. By J. S. Mackenzie. Pp. xv + 172. (London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 4s. 6d. PROF. MACKENZIE is to be congratulated on having produced an exceedingly useful little book of a kind which has no precise counterpart in our current philosophical literature. Within the compass of less than two hundred small pages he deals very suggestively with the nature of the metaphysical problems, the methods of meta- physical science and its relation to the rest of our theoretical and practical interests, science in general, art, ethics, and religion. The aim of his discussion is not so much’ to indicate conclusions as to lead his reader to: comprehend the nature of the problems to be solved and the methods of solution which are at our command. Hence the beginner in philosophy could hardly have a better introduction to what is, after all, the main business of philosophy, the practice of thinking intelligently for himself on the ultimate problems of knowledge. So far as the author’s own conclusions in philosophy are put forward, they indicate a rare catholicity of view with a certain bias in favour of the line of thought, represented by Aristotle and Hegel among the great names of meta- physics, which insists upon development as the key to the understanding of the forms of existence. As might be expected’ from his choice of philosophical masters, JUNE 26, 1902] Prof. Mackenzie is an idealist in his general position, though he evidently realises the difficulties which beset an over-hasty idealism, and states his result in an avowedly tentative form. Histoire des Mathématiques dans Antiquité et le Moyen Age. Par H.G. Zeuthen. Traduite par J. Mascart. Pp. xvi + 296. (Paris: Gauthier-Villars, 1902). Price fr. 7. THIS translation of Prof. Zeuthen’s well-known and deservedly popular work has been revised by the author, and several interesting notes have been added by M. Paul Tannery. The greater part of the volume deals with the mathematics of the Greeks, especially their geometry ; the Elements of Euclid, in particular, are analysed in considerable detail, and discussed with intelligence and sympathy. Conservatives who still rally to the cry of “Euclid, and nothing but Euclid,” may be respectfully invited to study, with the help of such comments as Prof. Zeuthen’s, the actual text of the Elements, which is now easily procurable in Heiberg’s excellent edition. It ought, on the one hand, to increase their admiration of the Greek geometer, and, on the other, to convince them of the absurdity of supposing that a garbled travesty of a portion of his work is the best introduction to geometry to put into the hands of the English schoolboy. Another interesting section is that which deals with the mathe- matics of the Arabs. It is difficult to claim for them any very substantial contributions to the science; but they showed themselves apt pupils both of the Greeks and of the Indians, they kept the study of mathematics alive when Christian Europe was passing through its darkest age of ignorance and superstition, and they powerfully helped on the subsequent revival. Yo Moslem scholars, and their enlightened rulers, modern Europe owes a debt which is not always sufficiently realised. M. A la Conguéte du Ciel! Contributions Astronomiques de F.C. de Nascius, en Quinze Livres, Livre Deuxiéme (fascicule 6 et dernier.) Pp.84. (Nantes : Imprimerie- Libraire, Guisthau, 1902.) M. F. C. pe Nascius has favoured us from time to time with copies of his astronomical contribu- tions, which are to extend when complete to fifteen volumes. Since each volume consists of numerous parts, it will be easily understood that no inconsiderable task awaits the reader who aspires to a complete mastery of the author’s methods and teaching. Only one small part of the second volume lies before us, but we confess that we are utterly unable to comprehend its purpose or to do justice to the ingenuity that apparently underlies its construction. The general conception seems to be remotely connected with Bode’s law, but is far more difficult of apprehension, for with this is connected a discussion of the ‘‘triangle of divine harmony,” while over the whole hovers a bewildering but awe-inspiring theme which is expressed as algorithmic. It will, perhaps, be sufficient to say that the object of the author, if object he has, is by some simple manipulation of figures to produce quantities that shall approximate to various astronomical constants, such as the periods and distances of the planets. For example, he sets out to establish or reproduce the period of sunspots, which he gives at I1ll years. The triangle of divine harmony is, we are assured, admirably adapted for this species of discussion. This triangle happens, fortunately, to be right-angled, and two sides have the values 69 and 17°89. There is a good deal about the number 69, which we are very solemnly assured is equal to 64 + 5, and it is no doubt entirely one’s own fault if he fails to correctly apprehend its true significance, but 17°89 seems to be introduced here for the first time, at least in this volume, and one may be excused if he fails to perceive its actual bearing. Our author handles these NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE 199 quantities in the following way. The area of the divine triangle is first found, this is then doubled to get a paral- lelogram, and the side of a square found the area of which is equal to the tenth part of that parallelogram. This side has for its numerical value 117110! and the author congratulates himself on his success. For many years, we are afraid, M. de Nascius has laboured on similar lines, which are destined to bring him or his readers little profit, but which he will no doubt pursue so long-as he can trace his figures. It is nearly thirty years, he tells us, since he first placed a hesitating foot on the path which was destined to lead him to such brilliant discoveries. Let us hope that he has been frequently cheered by finding some close co- incidence between his calculations and observed facts, and that his delight has been as keen as that experienced by other physicists who have trod a more legitimate road and been led to more valuable results. EETTERS TO THE EDIMOR: The Editor does not hold himself responsible for opinions ex- pressed by his correspondents. Neither can he undertake to return, or to correspond with the writers of, rejected manuscripts intended for this or any other part of NATURE, No notzce 2s taken of anonvitous communications. | Mr. Marconi’s Results in Day and Night Wireless Telegraphy. 4 READING a brief account of these results in the Zvmes of June 14, I perceive that Signor Marconi advances in explana- tion of the greater distance at which night signals were received, that the day signalling is affected by diselectrification of the transmitting elevated conductor. If—as I gather—Signor Marconi is referring to his observa- tions made at positions in the Atlantic, west of England, the waves lravelling westward, may not ether drift in the earth’s orbital path be concerned in producing the effects observed ? The waves advancing against the orbital zther stream in the day time, with it at night, might be supposed to give rise to conditions analogous to those which affect the transmissibility of sound against or with a high wind. It will assist if we assume a retarded cether drift near the earth’s surface and free motion above. But still, the difficulty in this explanation resides in the very great magnitude of the effects observed. I write merely by way of suggestion, and in very considerable ignorance of almost every particular involved in this explanation. JEeLN: Geological Laboratory, Trinity College, Dublin, June 17. Remarkable Sunsets at Madeira. THE last few evenings we have witnessed here some beautiful sunsets, closely resembling the sunsets observed after the Krakatoa eruption, which I remember well, ze. there is the same large area of beautiful pink haze in the west and high up in the sky at and immediately after sunset. The first sunset which I felt certain was of the above character I noticed on Friday, June 6. On June ro and yesterday the display was particularly striking. There were indications, I believe, of the pink glow on one or two evenings before June 6, but as there were a good many clouds about it was difficult to feel certain of the special character of the sunsets. F. W. T. KRown. Funchal, Madeira, June 12. THE INSTITUTION OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS’ DEPUTATION ON ELECTRICAL LEGISLATION. WE published an article a short time ago (NATURE, vol. Ixvi. p. 35) on the report of the committee appointed by the Institution of Electrical Engineers to inquire into the cause of this country’s backwardness in electrical industries, and stated that it had been decided to ask the Prime Minister to receive a deputation on the subject. This deputation, after being once or twice postponed, waited upon the President of the Board of Trade, the Right Hon. Gerald W. Balfour, M.P., on 200 NATURE [JUNE 26, 1902 Tuesday, June 17. A number of influential members of the Institution were present, including Mr. J. Swinburne (president), Lord Kelvin, Prof. J. Perry, Prof. S. P. Thompson, Colonel R. E. Crompton and Mr. S. Z. de Ferranti. Lord Kelvin having introduced the deputation, Mr. Swinburne gave a clear statement of the case. He pointed out that local authorities had become involved in electrical enterprise through what was in reality only an accident, namely, that the laying of mains involved opening up the streets. As a result they had obtained legal powers which were not always used properly or in the interests of the community. Even a municipality acting in the true interests of its own ratepayers need not necessarily be doing what was best for the country at large. It was, moreover, now possible to carry out electrical undertakings on a scale that was not con- templated when the Acts by which they are governed (the Electric Lighting Acts of 1882-1888 and the Tramways Act of 1870) were passed. They urged, therefore, that the whole question of electrical legislation should be reconsidered by the Government with special reference to the right and advisability of allowing the municipalities to retain their present powers. ‘This question concerned the Government as a whole, but there was also a matter concerning the Board of Trade in particular. It was thought that there should be a larger electrical staff to enable the Board of Trade to deal more satisfactorily with modern developments. Many of the regulations were behindhand, and it was thought desirable that some questions, such as the use of overhead wires, the size of transformers, &c., should be reopened. Other speakers followed, including Colonel Crompton, who cited the case of Hove as one in which the Corpora- tion had done its best to thwart the efforts of the company which was supplying electric light. Mr. Ferranti laid stress on the desirability of allowing the use of overheadwires so that the capital expenditure of pioneering schemes might be diminished, and urged greater flexibility in the Board of Trade regulations gener- ally. It was finally agreed that the Institution of Electrical Engineers should go through the regulations and make recommendations to the Board of Trade on the points which electricians consider require amendment. Mr. Gerald Balfour, in replying on the main question, admitted England’s backwardness, but doubted whether it was entirely, or even chiefly, due to the cause alleged. We had to contend in England with the conservatism of strongly developed interests. He did not question, however, that the existing legislation was capable of amendment, and two Bills had already been drafted, one | dealing with electric traction and the other with electric | lighting. The Traction Bill was to give effect to the recommendations of the departmental committee ap- pointed by the Board of Trade, and he hoped it would prove a satisfactory compromise between the wishes of promoters and municipalities. The Lighting Bill was based on the recommendations of the House of Commons Committee of 1898, which advised considerable modifica- tions of the existing laws. He could not, however, hold out any hope of either Bill being passed this session. Mr. Swinburne asked that the whole question might be considered by a Royal Commission, and Mr. Balfour replied that he would be willing to consult the Cabinet, but could not say, without further consideration, whether he should recommend the suggestion to be adopted. _ It need scarcely be said that this promise is quite insufficient to satisfy the urgency of the case. Indeed, the spirit of the reply to the deputation is not what should inspire statesmen who desire to encourage national progress. It is conceded that the obstacles to electrical development in this country are serious, and that they prevent our electrical engineers from keeping the nation in the forefront of progress. The obvious duty of an NO. 1704, VOL. 66] enlightened Government is to insist that difficulties in the way of industrial advances must be removed ; or, at any rate, encouragement should be given to those who have to overcome them. Instead of this, our statesmen find excuses for the barriers across the road, and are eager to show reason why no attempt should be made to break them down. Such justification as Mr. Gerald Balfour gave for masterly inactivity is almost sufficient to make anyone abandon hope that departmental officials will ever understand the needs of science and technical industries. What do they know of progress whose only desire is not to interfere with vested interests ? Any advances that are made in England are due to the restless men who have in them the spirit of evolution and who force develop- ment in spite of unsympathetic circumstances. But we cannot hope to keep in line with other progressive nations unless the conditions for improvement are made more favourable. In commenting upon the apathetic spirit in which Mr. Gerald Balfour met the deputation, the Times referred to our leeway in electrical industries and expressed the views of many thoughtful men as to the need of making it up. The remarks are worth repro- duction here, because they show that the position taken by ‘the Government is one from which the interests of science and industry cannot be seen. It is not] merely by America that we have been completely beaten in electrical engineering. We are -far behind continental countries as old as ourselves and having quite as many vested interests to deal with. The reason is that every continental Government keeps in touch with the best knowledge of the day, and habitually consults, upon every question involving the ap- plication of science, the highest scientific authorities it can find. Had the Government of this country learned to take that course the position of the nation at this moment would be incalculably better than it is. When it was suggested to Mr. Gerald Balfour that his Board of Trade electrical staff is not adequate for the duties thrown upon it, he was apparently unable to grasp the meaning of the criticism. What is meant is that, instead of relying upon inspectors who from the nature of the case were not originally the foremost men in electrical engineering, and who, again from the nature of the case, are not the men most abreast of the developments achieved since their appointment, the Board of Trade should be guided by the advice of the real experts and pioneers who are actually doing the things which its official experts can only criticise from their bureaucratically narrow standpoint. This nation really has no chance in modern conditions unless official persons generally consent to recognise that there are a great many important subjects about which they know nothing, and which are in a state of such rapid change and development that no student, of the calibre which an official salary will attract, can possibly be and remain in a position to legislate about them. What we want is that the real practical and scientific intellect of the country should be called to the aid of the politicians and their official ‘‘ experts.” It is not by Boards of Trade, with their self-sufficiency, their timidity and their necessary ignorance of the later phases of development, that other nations have adapted their legislation to the progress of science. It is by giving intellect that advisory place in the framing of legislation which it will never seek by the politician’s method of appealing to the ballot-box. The electrical, chemical, physical and biological questions, upon the solution of which so much modern progress and prosperity depend, deserve and demand the habitual consultation of the best men engaged in their study. Men of science and leaders of industrial development are familiar with these opinions, and it is time that our statesmen regarded national needs from the same point of view. Unless this is realised the nation cannot hold its position in the industrial wars of the world. The Duke of Devonshire’s Commission many years ago gave a warning that continued neglect of scientific and technical interests by the Government must lead to disaster, and we have persistently called for reform to prevent the loss that must come unless the views of our JuNE 26, 1902] political leaders undergo a complete change. If the awakening does not come soon, the task of making up for the years of forced inaction will be almost impossible to accomplish. From what has been said it will be seen that no definite hope can be given of an immediately beneficial result accruing from the deputation. It serves, however, to bring the matter somewhat prominently to the notice of the Government and of the general public, and if it accom- plishes nothing more it will in this have paved the way for future reform. It is desirable that the public should be educated to know the advantages which electrical engineers are ready and anxious to confer upon them, and why it is that these have not yet been bestowed. Thirteen years ago Prof. Ayrton, in his oft-quoted Sheffield address, predicted that a time was coming when the Sheffield grinder would work amidst beautiful surround- ings, deriving the power he needed from a_ small electrically driven motor. The time is now ripe for the realisation of that prophecy ; in some few places, indeed, it is already begun, but for its free and rapid develop- ment there are many abuses and much restrictive legisla- tion which must be removed. For electrical distribution the days of the small station supplying a limited area are numbered, and with them the days of effective municipal control. So also with electric traction ; wide-spreading tramways connecting town with town and running far out into the country districts are needed to bring about decentralisation and to help to solve the pressing problem of overcrowding. We can hardly expect the municipalities to effect these changes; the arbitrary boundaries of the areas they control have no reference to the suitability of these areas as units for electrical distribution, and their interests are, moreover, to a certain degree directly opposed to decentralisation. Thus, quite apart from any considerations of the purity of the management or efficiency of municipal electrical undertakings, it will be seen that there is good reason in many cases for looking for better results to the nation from company working. In the train of developments such as would follow the removal of restrictive legis- lation, we may hope to find the improvement of our position as manufacturers of electrical machinery. The country lacks neither opportunities nor electrical engineers capable of making use of them. We may therefore reasonably look to the development of electrical undertakings to confer a double benefit upon the country ; directly, by increasing the comfort and health of the people, and by facilitating commercial work of all kinds; and indirectly by increasing the number and size of electrical factories, and so contributing to the wealth and prosperity of the nation and helping it in the struggle with foreign competitors. REPORT ON THE TEACHING OF GEOMETRY. HE immediate result of Prof. Perry’s Glasgow address has been the appointment of two com- mittees, the work of which is now near to completion. The British Association committee has, we believe, concerned itself with the more general aspects of the problem. The committee of the Mathematical Association, largely com- posed of schoolmasters, is formulating a set of detailed recommendations, of which the geometry section was published in the May number of the Mathematical Gazette (George Bell and Sons). The Mathematical Association committee contains delegates from the chief public schools within easy reach of London ; it has, therefore, something of a representative character. Its recommendations are very definite ; as the editor of the Gazefte remarks, “it is very desirable that mathematical masters and others should fully avail themselves of this opportunity of placing on record their NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE 20) views as to the proposed changes.” The secretary of the committee, Mr. A. W. Siddons, Harrow School, Middlesex, will be glad to receive criticisms of the report. . The study of formal geometry is to be preceded by a substantial introductory course, in which the subject- matter of geometry is to be treated experimentally and inductively. The pupil is to be carefully trained in the use of simple mathematical instruments ; he is to be allowed to convince himself of the truth of geometrical theorems by numerical measurements and calculations. In this way he will make his first acquaintance with the main facts of geometry. When he has thus gained familiarity with the subject-matter, he will be in a position to apply the machinery of logic to his knowledge ; he will be able to enter, with his eyes open, upon the task of consolidating into a consistent whole the facts he knows. Throughout his whole course he is to treat problems of construction in a practical way ; he is not to be content with describing how the thing is done, he is to do it. Passing to the formal study of geometry, Euclid, or rather a skeleton Euclid, is to be retained as a frame- work. Large omissions are recommended, but the logical order is to stand. Theorems are cut loose from the limitations of con- struction by the admission of “hypothetical constructions.” For example, the fons asimorum may be proved by bisecting the vertical angle, and thus dividing the isosceles triangle into two triangles that can be shown to be congruent by Prop. 4. For it is obvious that an angle has a bisector, even though the method of con- structing it with ruler and compass may appear later in Euclid ; the bisector might be found equally well by folding the triangle in two. Constructions are to be taken out of the formal course and treated in whatever order seems advisable. It is clearly absurd to keep to Euclid’s order of constructions unless we are confined to the use of his instruments, an ungraduated ruler and a pair of compasses that cannot be trusted to transfer a distance. The following order is recommended in teaching the theorems of the first three books :—Book i., Book 11. to 32 inclusive, Book i1., Book ili. 35 to the end. The course is to be lightened by the omission of a considerable number of dull and obvious propositions, such propositions being found more especially in Book ii. Definitions are not to be taught ez d/oc at the beginning of each book, but are to make their appearance only when needed. It is suggested that two locus propositions should be added to Book i.—the locus of points equidistant from two points, and the locus of points equidistant from two lines. This will enable the pupil to inscribe and circumscribe circles to triangles at an early stage. Playfair’s axiom is preferred to Euclid’s ; and illustra- tion by rotation is recommended in dealing with angles connected with parallel lines, triangles and polygons. After Book i. we are to pass to Book iii., which by the omission of Props. 2, 4, 5, 6, 10, II, 12, 13, 18, 19, 23, 24 is reduced to very modest dimensions. ‘To cover the ground of the omitted propositions there is to be a pre- liminary discussion of the symmetry of the circle about a diameter, which can be managed experimentally by folding the circle and pricking holes round the semi- circumference. The “limit” definition of the tangent is allowed ; and Euclid’s three propositions 16, 18, 19 are condensed into one—‘‘ The tangent at any point of a circle, and the radius to the point of contact are at right angles to one another.” Book ii. is to be illustrated by algebra ; and in order to simplify the geometrical proofs a rectangle is to be defined as a parallelogram with one of its angles a right angle. The use of the signs + and — is sanctioned. 202 ——_—_—_———— ee For Book iv. we find the proposal ‘that all proposi- tions be omitted, as formal propositions, except 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, and that these be taken with earlier books, the rest of the book being treated as exercises in geometrical drawing.” Coming to Book vi., it is recommended “that an ordinary school course should not be required to include incommensurables ; in other words, that in such a course all magnitudes of the same kind be treated as com- mensurable.” This at once relieves teachers from an enormous task—that of explaining Euclid’s definition of proportion. There is now nothing to be said beyond that the ratio of ato 4 is the fraction a/. To meet this change, two alternative proofs are given for vi. 1, though attention is called to the continental practice of making the proof of vi. 2 self-supporting. With regard to areas, the tendency of the report is to make the treatment algebraic. Euclid vi. 14, 15, 16, 17,°23 contain merely the one fact that the area of a parallelogram is ad sin @; nothing is gained by con- cealing this fact from the student. It is definitely sug- gested that “numerical” trigonometry shall be taught concurrently with Book vi. ‘In connection with the formal course, as soon as the proposition that equiangular triangles are similar has been proved, the sine, cosine and tangent can be defined (if this has not been done earlier in the experimental course). In order to make the meanings and importance of these functions sink deeply into the pupil’s mind, numerical examples should be given on right-angled triangles (heights and distances) ; these should be worked with the help of four-figure tables.” “Tn accordance with the spirit of the above proposals, the committee suggest that the following proposition be adopted :—If two triangles (or parallelograms) have one angle of the one equal to one angle of the other, their areas are proportional to the areas of the rectangles contained by the sides about the equal angles.” “ All statements of ratio may be made in fractional form, and the sign = used instead of the :: sign. In the ordinary school course reciprocal proportion should be dropped, and compounding replaced by multiplying.” The report may be described as an attempt, on con- servative lines, to simplify the study of geometry and to make it interesting. If the attempt is judged to be successful, now is the time to make examiners unstop their ears. G..G: SEISMIC FREQUENCY IN JAPAN. N no country has seismology been more carefully nurtured than in Japan. At the University we find a professor and assistant professor of this branch of science ; in the Meteorological Department there is a bureau controlling more than 1000 observing stations, and, lastly, there is a committee composed of engineers, architects and men of science who, as an aid to carrying on investigations which will lead to a better understand- ing of earthquake phenomeng, are supported by a ‘Government grant. This body, since its establishment eleven years ago, has already published thirty-six quarto volumes in Japanese and eight in English, and it is to the last of these, by Dr. F. Omori, professor of seismology, to which we now refer. Unlike many of the volumes by which it is preceded, which treat of construction to resist earthquake effects and kindred branches of applied seismology, this particular publication deals with ques- tions which are purely scientific. Its title is ‘“ Annual and Diurnal Variations of Seismic Frequency in Japan,” the investigation of other periodicities being left for a future occasion. NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE “may. practically be divided into two groups. [JUNE 26, 1902 The materials analysed are 18,279 entries contained in earthquake registers from twenty-six meteorological stations which are distributed in a fairly uniform manner over the Japanese Empire. These registers, which for the most part are dependent on instrumental observation, are discussed separately, and it is in consequence of this method of treatment that conclusions new to seismology have been reached. The first out of a series of seventy-six curves shows the monthly frequency of earthquakes in Tokio. In plotting this, as in plotting curves for other stations, those months where the ordinary seismic frequency has been affected by “‘after shocks” have been Gmitted ; that is to say, the curves represent the normal frequencies in various districts. These omissions, all of which refer to the settlements which follow destructive earth- / quakes, are carefully epitomised. Dotted curves drawn through the mean position. of monthly curves show annual and semi-annual periods. A comparison of the curves for seasonal seismic frequency shows that these In one group the maximum frequency is in winter, whilst in the other group the maximum frequency isin summer. When we turn to the geographical distribution of the stations the records from which give these curves, it is found that they are distributed over two distinct areas—those which show a winter frequency lie ina district chiefly shaken by earthquakes having an inland origin, whilst those where the greater number of disturbances are noted in summer occupy anarea shaken by earthquakes having a suboceanic origin. In an endeavour to explain this striking result, the annual, monthly and diurnal frequencies are compared with corresponding fluctuations in barometric pressure. The general result arrived at is that the curves showing the winter frequency follow those of changes in baro- metric pressure, from which it may be inferred that an increase in barometric pressure has a marked effect upon the yielding of a land area. With the curves relating to earthquakes of suboceanic origin, it is seen that the annual variation is the reverse of the barometric pressure on Jand. With regard to diurnal variation in seismic frequency, Dr. Omori concludes that this is probably due to corresponding variations in atmospheric pressure, but such frequency is not confined to earthquakes originating on the land. Single barometric fluctuations, even if they amount to 20 mm., are not generally related to any marked increase in seismic frequency. Although the last two observations apparently contra- dict the more important result indicating a relationship between fluctuations in barometric pressure and the seasonal frequencies of earthquakes originating beneath the sea and on the land, arguments are adduced to show how such contradictions may be harmonised. The distinction in the rules which governs the frequency of earthquakes with these distinctive origins, now brought forward for the first time, may probably be emphasised when, rather than analysing the registers from different stations—the entries in which may frequently be common to a number of such stations—an analysis is made of registers of earthquakes classified according to their origins. As illustrative of such materials we may refer to a catalogue of about 9000 shocks, published as vol. iv. of the Sezsmological Journal of Japan, in which each entry is referred to a district from which the shock it represents may have originated. y In conclusion, not only do we congratulate Dr. Omori on this new departure in seismology, but we also con- gratulate the Earthquake Investigation Committee on the admirable manner in which it has presented its results to those outside the pale of eastern ideography. J. MILNE. ee = JUNE 26, 1902 | THE WEST INDIAN VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS. A FEW additional notes referring to the recent volcanic eruptions in the West Indies have been received during the past week. Sir W. T. Thiselton- Dyer has sent us an extract from a letter written on May 29 by Dr. Nicholls, C.M.G., of Dominica, and as it contains testimony from one of the leading scientific men in the West Indies, the statements it contains are of exceptional value. Dr. Nicholls remarks that the volcanic phenomena in both islands were somewhat similar, but in the ejecta from the volcanic vents there were differences. Thus the lava (and its products, viz. pumice, scoria, mud, ash and dust) thrown up from Mont Pelée was of an ande- sitic nature, whilst from the St. Vincent volcano a light -basaltic lava was ejected. Evidence of the hot blast which accompanied the erup- tion has already been given. One of Dr. Nicholls’s friends was a passenger in the s.s. Roddam. “When the red-hot hurricane struck the ship he was enveloped in flames, as his clothes were set alight, and in his agony he jumped into the sea, which was almost boiling, and was not seen again.” ture and the instantaneous destruction of life at St. Pierre, Dr. Nicholls says :— The eruption came suddenly and unexpectedly, and probably in a few minutes the 35,000 persons in the city of St. Pierre were corpses. It would appear that a sudden fissure was opened on the side of the mountain overlooking the city, and near to the Etang Sec on this flank of the volcano a large. vent belched out lava, superheated steam and acid gases down- wards on to St. Pierre and the roadstead. The flashing off into steam of the water imprisoned in the incandes- cent lava converted that lava into sand and dust before it reached the city, and the radiation of heat from molten rock at a temperature of above 1000° C, caused an incredibly hot blast that would create a red-hot hurricane—if I may employ such a term—that would kill people and animals instantly and that*would cause all inflammable matter to burst into flame. This, from what I gather, is what really happened, and I do not think that poisonous gases or electrical phenomena are account- able for the destruction of life. You can imagine what is the enormous heat right over the vent of an active volcano. Well, St. Pierre practically for a short time was in such a position, the vent being directed laterally towards the city until the fissure was closed and the volcanic ejecta were again directed vertically upwards. Many persons were actually burnt in places by hot scorie and mud, but the blast of heat from the volcanic vent appears to me to account in the only satisfactory way for the details I have obtained of the conditions found in the living and the dead. In connection with the eruptions, it is of interest to learn from the Meteorological Office pilot chart of the North Atlantic and Mediterranean for June that a year ago a report was received from Mr. Francis Watts, of the Government Laboratory, Antigua, showing that on May s, 1gol, the schooner Aa/e, from Barbados to Antigua, ran into a violent commotion of the sea 32 miles east- ward of the south end of Martinique. There was no wind, and it was concluded that the phenomenon, which lasted four hours, was caused by a submarine eruption. The report is recalled as possibly bearing upon an early indication of the activity which culminated in the recent disasters. At 6 p.m. on May 9g last, Captain Hernaman, of the Royal Mail Steamer 2a Plata, when Too miles westward of St. Lucia, observed a green coloured sunset, and at midnight dust was falling on board. At 10.30 p.m. on the same date, the ship Amaurus ex- perienced a severe submarine earthquake in 4° 38’ N., 32° 28’ W., the sea being violently agitated, the shock lasting 30 seconds. The Daily Mail correspondent at St. Lucia says it is NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE As to the cause*of this extremely high tempera- | 203 certain that there have been some changes on the sea floor in connection with the eruptions. He adds :— The colonel commanding the Royal Artillery and the colonel commanding the Royal Engineers at St. Lucia both saw an eruption in the sea off that island, the water being shot up into the air, accompanied by rumblings. This occurred two days in succession, and was noted by independent eye-witnesses. Also, at Grenada, in the little harbour, near the Botanical Gardens, the water bubbled up as in a cauldron and rumblings were heard, but at Dominica all was quiet. I may mention that when the Pad/as was at Chateau-Belair on May 21, with Sir Robert Llewelyn on board, I noticed a bubbling in the harbour just twenty yards astern of us, but it was so slight I thought it probably a vent in the bottom of the sea letting off steam, but I called the attention of others to it. Prof. Bonney exhibited a mounted specimen of volcanic dust from Mont Pelée at the meeting of the Geological Society on June rr. Notwithstanding the risk of generalising from a single slide, he expressed the belief that the ejecta of the Soufriére and Mont Pelée are generally similar. Both, compared with specimens from Cotopaxi, are more uniform in size. The travelled dust from the Soufriére is a little smaller than that from the actual summit of the Andean volcano, but coarser than similar material from Chillo (more than 20 miles), Quito (35 miles), Ambato (45 miles), Riobamba (65 miles), and the summit of Chimborazo, about the same. All these vary much more in size and run distinctly smaller, especially the last. That from Mattakava, Hick’s Bay, New Zealand (which fell on June 16, 1886), is rather coarser, more scoriaceous, with fewer mineral-fragments (especi- ally of pyroxene), to which a dirty glass is often adherent. The dust from Barbados, ejected by the St. Vincent Soufriére in 1812, is very much finer-grained, but contains the same minerals, though pyroxene is less abundant. The St. Lucia Weather Report for May states that, from the 15th to the 2oth, the whole island was enveloped in a light hazy mist, the result of volcanic ash suspended in the air. Traces of this ash could be seen on all foliage, it being apparently deposited more freely at night. The harbour master at Bridgetown, Barbados, has collected from captains of ships information relating to falls of volcanic dust encountered at sea, and the follow- ing reports thus obtained appear in the Agricultural News of June 7 :— May 7,8 p.m., schooner Vio/o, from Demerara, met the dust 70 miles S. of Barbados. 1op.m., the Norwegian steamer /a/isman, from Demerara, 150 miles S.S.E. May 8, 2.30 a.m., barque Jupiter, from Cape Town, 830 miles E.S.E. Hour not stated, barquentine amy, from Pernambuco, 250 miles E. May 9 (?8), 4 p.m., ship Wozrovia, from Rio Janeiro, 240 miles S.E. (Bearing and distance in each case from Barbados.) It is to be hoped that all the captains collected samples of the dust, and that these will be available for analysis, as it is desirable to ascertain the characteristics of the ash according to the distance of its descent from the crater from which it was ejected, the coarser particles presumably descending at the shortest distances, the finer at the furthest. Drs. Fleet and Anderson, the Royal Society’s Scien- tific Commission to investigate the outbursts, were due at Barbados on June 9. The Secretary of State for the Colonies had cabled to Dr. Morris, the Imperial Com- missioner, to meet them on their arrival. Reports have been published of additional volcanic and seismic disturbances which have occurred during the past few days. A telegram from Martinique on June 19 states that a column of mud has been ejected by Mont Pelée and has fallen on Basse Pointe, destroying a number of houses and flooding the lower part of the village. 204 A message received at Calcutta on June 19 reports that an earthquake has shaken the whole ridge of the Himalayas from Simla to Chitral. The shock was not very violent, but nothing so extensive has been known before. We have also to record that a violent earthquake occurred at Cassano Al Jonio (Calabria) in the morning of June 22, accompanied by subterranean rumblings. The population was terrified, but no damage was done. THE ROVAL SOCIETY SOIREE. A BRILLIANT company of ladies and gentlemen was present at the Royal Society conversazione last week. Many of the exhibits were the same as on the occasion of the previous conversazione on May 14 (see p. 83), but there were some others in addition, and these are briefly mentioned below. Dr. Morris W. Travers showed apparatus for liquefying hydrogen. Hydrogen, when compressed at the ordinary tem- perature and allowed to expand, becomes warmer, while air under the same conditions becomes colder; at temperatures below -—80° C., hydrogen becomes an imperfect gas, in the same sense as air, and undergoes cooling on free expansion (Joule-Kelvin effect). The gas, under a pressure of 120-150 atmospheres, passes through coils in the interior of the apparatus, which are cooled in solid carbonic acid and alcohol (—78°*5 C.), in liquid air (— 185° C.), and in liquid air boiling under reduced pressure (—200° C.). It then enters a regenerator coil, and expanding at a valve at the bottom is partially liquefied. The liquid collects in a vacuum-vessel at the bottom of the apparatus ; the unliquefied gas passes upwards through the regenerator coil, cooling the gas it contains, and returns to the compressor. Apparatus for obtaining serial sections of fossils, and restora- tions of fossils in wax built up from serial sections, were shown by Prof. Sollas, F.R.S. Prof. F. W. Oliver exhibited Stephanospermum and other fossil Gymnosperm seeds. All the seeds exhibited were from the permo-Carboniferous of Grand’ Croix, near St. Etienne. They were preserved in silica, and showed remarkable preserva- tion of detail. The majority of the sections were of Stephano- spermum akenioides, the seed in which a pollen-chamber was first discovered by Brongniart in 1875. Photographs of the Rocky Mountains of Canada, and objects collected, were shown by Mr. Edward Whymper. The Silchester Excavation Fund Committee exhibited a series of objects illustrative of recent discoveries on the site of the Romano-British city of Silchester, near Reading. Examples of telephotography in the Alps and Himalayas were exhibited by Prof. E. J. Garwood. Dr. F. W. Gamble and Mr. Frederick Keeble had an exhibit designed to show the chromatophores and colour-changes of Crustacea. Mr. W. Gowland showed Japanese pictures of Buddhist divinities and saints by old masters. Mrs. E. Walter Maunder exhibited drawings from two photo- graphs of the corona of 1901, May 18, taken at the Royal Alfred Observatory, Mauritius. A series of photographs illustrative of old customs still extant in Hungerford, Knutsford and Corby was shown by Sir J. Benjamin Stone, M.P. An attempt to reproduce an Aurora Borealis was shown by Prof. W. Ramsay, F.R.S. The spectrum of the Aurora Borealis has been shown to contain lines due to the pressure of krypton ; the great majority of the lines, if not all, are coincident with those of the krypton spark spectrum. An electrode-less discharge in air gives a spectrum in which the leading green line of krypton, 5570°5, is distinctly visible at low pressures. This discharge can be deflected by a magnet, sending out streamers in the lines of magnetic force. The main phenomena of the Aurora are thus reproduced. A model of the exploring vessel Dzscovery was shown by the Joint Antarctic Committee of the Royal Society and Royal Geographical Society. NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 26, 1902 Prof. H. L. Callendar, F.R.S., had on view (1) simple apparatus for determining the mechanical equivalent of heat, and (2) vacuum-jacket calorimeters. z Mr. Edwin Edser and Mr. Edgar Senior showed an experiment illustrating a paradoxical consequence of the wave theory of light. Light enters a glass prism, of which the angles are equal to 90°, 45° and 45°, by one of the mutually rectangular faces, the angle of incidence being equal to zero. It is then reflected from the hypotenuse face at an angle of 45°, which exceeds the critical angle. A photographic grating (3000 lines to the inch) is formed on the hypotenuse face, the rulings being parallel to the axis of the prism. The secondary wavelets which, according to the wave theory, are formed at the clear spaces, produce diffraction spectra, of which the first five or six are visible. If the grating were absent, no light could leave the hypotenuse face of the prism. Thus, light which cannot penetrate the face when the latter is clear is freely transmitted when parts of the face are rendered opaque. . The ‘‘ Grubb” collimating telescope gun sight was shown by Sir Howard Grubb, F.R.S. The West Indian Volcanoes Committee of the Royal Society exhibited specimens and photographs illustrating the fall of volcanic dust at Barbados on May 7 and 8._ The principal con- stituents of the dust are magnetite, hypersthene, augite, plagio- clase (anorthite-labradorite), small pellets of pumice, and fine powder composed of minute mineral»particles and disintegrated pumice, On heating the dust to about 1200° C., the pumiceous constituent fuses, and the mass on cooling forms a vesicular rock allied to hypersthene-andesite, but exceptionally rich in crystals. (1) Microscopic slides are shown illustrating the composition of the dust :—(q) dust as it fell ; (4) magnetite ; (c) hypersthene and augite; (¢) plagioclase; (e) pellets of pumice; (/) thin section of partially fused mass. (2) Photographs of vegetation covered by volcanic dust, taken at Barbados on May 8, by Mr. W. J. Freeman. The specimens were forwarded by Dr. Morris, of the Imperial Agricultural Department of the West Indies, to Prof. Judd, C.B., F.R.S. The charts were lent by the hydrographer of the Admiralty. Specimens of volcanic dust from the West Indies were also shown by Mr. Henry Crookes. Mr. E. J. Bles exhibited living tadpoles of the Cape clawed frog, Xenopus /aevis, Daud. The remarkable transparency allows the course of the nerves, blood-vessels, muscles, &c., of the head to be easily studied in the living animal. A method of feeding, not hitherto described in the Amphibia, can be watched. Bred from specimens kept in Cambridge for more than five years. A series of specimens illustrating the life-history of the Trypanosoma Brucit was shown by Mr. H. G. Plimmer. This organism is the cause of nagana, or the tsetse-fly disease in South Africa. Colonel Bruce, F.R.S., and Mr. H. G. Plimmer, exhibited Apiosoma bigeminum, the parasite found in the blood of Texas fever of cattle. New species of fairy flies(Mymaridze) were shown by Mr. F. Enock. The species are all ovivorous, some laying their eggs in those of the water demons (Dytiscus) ; as many as seventy-two larvee of one species have been found in ome egg of D. mar- ginalis, Living specimens, 27 sz¢z, and possibly some emerging. The Royal Society exhibited a bronze example of the newly founded David Edward Hughes medal, and a medallion of the reverse. Dr. A. Dendy had on view specimens, sketches and photo- graphs of Moriori workmanship from the Chatham Islands. A series of otoliths, chiefly of living British fishes, both marine and freshwater, showing the various forms assumed in the different genera, was shown by Mr. E. T. Newton, F.R.S. Prof. W. M. Flinders Petrie, F.R.S., exhibited a series of worked flints from Egypt. Experiments exhibiting interference between portions of light from independent sources were shown by Dr. G. Johnstone Stoney, F.R.S. During the evening, demonstrations, with the help of the electric lantern, were given by Prof. W. M. Flinders Petrie, F.R.S., on early civilisation in Egypt; Mr. J. Y. Buchanan, F.R.S., a series of lantern slides illustrating the performance of M. Santos Dumont’s steerable balloon and the accident to it on February 14; and Prof. E. B. Poulton, F.R.S., on recent work upon protective resemblance and mimicry in insects, illus- trated by three-colour slides. JUNE 26, 1902] NATURE 205 NOTES. A MEMORIAL edition of the scientific writings of the late Prof. G. F. FitzGerald, F.R.S., will shortly be published in | The volume has been pre- | the Dublin University Press series. pared under the editorial supervision of Dr. J. Larmor, F.R.S., and footnotes in elucidation or correction of the text have been added where necessary. It extends to about 570 octavo pages, together with 64 pages of an introduction, in part biographical and in part historical and explanatory, of Prof. FitzGerald’s relation to contemporary science. As much of his stimulating and suggestive thought was published in journals not readily accessible, just as it flowed from his pen, this substantial collec- | tion of papers will in the main be fresh to physicists. Being a record of the activity of a mind that was always in the van of progress, it will also be of interest as a reminder of the paths of advance of physical science during the last quarter of a century. Ir is beginning to be recognised that scientific knowledge, and a progressive frame of mind are attributes which must be possessed by all who are preparing for the struggle of the future, whether in peace or war. In the debate upon the Navy Estimates in the House of Commons on Friday, the scientific aspect of the problem of naval warfare was mentioned, and we are glad to see that Mr. Arnold Forster referred to the importance of keeping it in mind. As to the part science ought to play, and the respect it ought to receive in the Navy, he remarked that he believed it to be true of the Navy, as of every large department, that we had not yet fully realised the position that science had taken, and was bound to take to a still larger extent, in this country and in the world. He did not know that that was peculiar to the Navy. He thought it was far less | the completion of the canal. true of the Navy than it was of many other great departments | of life. AT the general meeting of the Zoological Society of London held on June 19, the gold medal of the Society was delivered by His Grace the Duke of Bedford, K.G., president, to Sir Harry Johnston, G.C.M.G., K.C.B., in consideration of his great services to zoological science while occupying various | official posts in Africa and especially in commemoration of his discovery of the okapi. After the close of the meeting, the third of the series of zoological lectures for the present year was delivered by Prof. E. Ray Lankester, F.R.S., on the okapi and its position in the natural series. Prof. Lankester’s | | the aborigines ; but the term is said to date only from about the memoir in the Society’s Transactions, which contains a full account of all that is known of ‘‘ the new African mammal” up to the present date, is expected to be ready very shortly. THE annual general meeting of the Réntgen Society will be held on Thursday, July 3. In connection with the Egypt Exploration Fund, an exhi- bition of antiquities found by Prof. Petrie at Abydos, and by Dr. B. P. Grenfell and Dr. A. S. Hunt in the Fayum and El Hibeh, will be on view at University College from July 1 to July 26. THE annual conversazione of the Institution of Electrical Engineers will be held at the Natural History Museum, South Kensington, on July 1. There will be a reception of the foreign delegates to the International Tramways and Light Railways Congress at 9.15 p.m. SINCE May 3, 1832, when Louis Bonaparte, then President of the French Republic, decreed that the Pantheon was again to be considered a Roman Catholic Church, the great pendulum installed by Léon Foucault to afford a proof of the rotation of workmen are now busy making preparation for a new series of demonstrations. The operations will be conducted under the supervision of M. Berget, assistant to M. Poincaré. The pendulum itself is a ball of llead weighing 27 kilogrammes, and was used in 1869 by M. Maumenée for observations in the cathedral of Rheims during several months. The new | demonstrations at Paris will be given in a few days. THE United States Senate has passed a Bill directing the President to purchase all the capital stock, concession, un- finished work and machinery, and other property of the Panama Canal Company for 8,000,000/. The President is further directed to acquire from the Republic of Colombia a strip of land six miles wide along the route, over which the United States shall have permanent control. The Bill next authorises If the Panama Company is unable to give a satisfactory title and Colombia refuses to cede the land, the President is authorised to construct a canal by the Nicaragua route. The Dazly Mail states that since the Mar- tinique disaster the supporters of the Panama Canal have per- sistently declared that the Nicaragua route passed through a volcanic country, and that the canal would be liable at any moment to be destroyed. This argument had a marked in- fluence in gaining votes for Panama. The passage of the Bill does not end the canal controversy. The House of Repre- sentatives recently passed a Bill authorising the construction of a Nicaragua Canal, with only two dissenting votes, but it is believed that the Senate’s decision in favour of Panama will now be accepted. Mr. F. FINN writes to us from the Indian Museum, Calcutta, with reference to the late Prof. V. Ball’s identification of the Catreus of lian with the Himalayan monal-pheasant. This identification Mr. Finn regards as erroneous, and he adduces reasons for considering the Honduras wild turkey as the bird in | question. Possibly specimens of this bird may have been obtained | in AElian’s time by the natives of Hindustan from America by way of China. If, however, this explanation will not hold good, the somewhat startling theory is suggested that the Honduras turkey was once a native of India. In the U.S. Monthly Weather Review for January and February last, Mr. A. Matthews discusses at considerable length the term ‘“‘Indian summer,” and gives references to, and quotations from, numerous works relating toits use. In America this season is connected both by name and popular belief with last decade of the eighteenth century, and has reference to a spell of warm weather occurring in the late autumn. The term appears to have reached Canada in 1821 and this country in 1830. This warm period is frequently referred to in meteoro- logical text-books ; Dr. Buchan points out that if easterly winds have largely predominated in autumn, and south-westerly winds begin to prevail at the end of November, or a little later, the weather is likely to continue exceptionally mild. These conditions occur nearly every year, and the beginning of the warm spell is popularly known in this country as St. Martin’s summer. THE Agricultural News of the West Indian Agricultural Department adopts a suggestion that Coronation day, should be marked throughout the islands as an arbor day. It points out that this is exactly the right season for planting purposes. In many localities the planting of ornamental shade trees would be of great public benefit, and at the same time add to the comfort and amenities of life in the tropics. Particulars are given as to the methods of planting, suitable trees and palms for the purpose being always obtainable at the Botanic the earth has been laid aside. M. de Fonvielle informs us that | Gardens. »NO. 1704, VOL. 66] 206 IN connection with the abnormally cold weather which has prevailed over the British Isles, and to a great extent over Western Europe also, since the closing days of April, con- siderable interest attaches to the temperature of the surface water of the Atlantic during the month of April. The mean results, derived from a total of 4150 observations, are given on the pilot chart for June, just issued by the Meteorological Office. There appears to have been an almost complete absence of ice about the banks of Newfoundland, a fact which is emphasised by the sea water of that region being warmer than usual, the excess ranging upwards to as much as 6° in places. Westward of the thirty-fifth meridian, from 30° to 35° N., the temperature was also rather above the normal, but from the coast of Virginia eastward between these relatively warm patches, along what may be described, roughly, as the Gulf Stream course, there was a deficiency of temperature right across the ocean to our coasts, the eastern half of the Atlantic being below the average. Northward of the fiftieth parallel it would appear that there are no normals available for com- parison with the present series, which is unfortunate, as the condition of the sea immediately to the west of our islands, between the Fastnet and Iceland, probably exercises an appre- ciable influence on our climate. Down to June 16, when the pilot chart went to press, there were still no ice reports of any importance on the banks, the latest being May 8, a piece of ice 4 feet square, one of May 5 relating to bergs stranded on the Newfoundland coast, north of Cape Race. The strait of Belle Isle was clear, but floes were drifting down the Labrador coast, so that steamers could not approach the strait from seaward. Iceland reports show that there has been a good deal of ice off the north-western part of the island. THE result of an investigation by Mr. Maxwell Tall relative to the mean maximum temperature and the rainfall of Jamaica and sunspot frequency has recently been published officially at Jamaica, and has already been mentioned in these columns (p. 159). The temperature observations, a full account of which he gives in the paper, extend over the years 1881 to 1898, and to eliminate minor irregularities Mr. Hall employs for the yearly value the mean of the year and the means of the year each side of this middle year ; thus, to take an example, the value for 1885 is the mean for the three years 1884, 1885 and 1886. The temperature variations found in this manner, when compared with the variation in the spotted area of the sun’s surface, bring out a close relationship between these two phenomena. Thus it is observed that the tem- perature is ata maximum at sunspot minimum and vice versd, and that this variation amounts to about 2°F. With regard to the variation of rainfall as deduced from a discussion of the yearly means of rainfall, Mr. Maxwell Hall has previously shown (NATURE, vol. xlix. p. 399) that up to the year 1887 there was a general resemblance between the sunspot curve and that of rainfall, the maxima and minima of the rainfall variations cor- responding approximately with those of the curve representing the sun’s spotted area, but there were certain irregularities which suggested that the old view that there was most rain at the maxi- mum and least at the minimum of the eleven-year curve was only approximately true. The further discussion of the rainfall observations up to the year 1899 shows, however, that this ap- parent law breaks down completely. When in 1889 and 1890 the rainfall curve should have been at a minimum, in reality it showed a subsidiary maximum, while also when at the sunspot maximum of 1893-4 the rainfall should have been excessive, it was conspicuous by a great deficiency. THE important aid that photography can render to the surveyor has recently been well illustrated by a paper read before the Institution of Mining Engineers by Mr. Arthur O. Wheeler, NO. 1704, VOL. 66] NATURE [JUNE 26, 1902 attached to the staff of the Canadian Topographical Survey. In this paper we have the actual experience of one who has been much engaged in practical surveying, and his notes having reference to the selection of stations and to the photographic processes necessary in the field are as valuable as those which deal with the after manipulation of the photographic enlarge - ments and the production of the contour maps. The applica- tion of the photographic method is based on the consideration of the triangle, the angles at the base of which are formed by lines drawn from the two known stations, at which the perspective view of the country has been obtained in the camera, to the point which is to be projected, and which may be considered the apex of the triangle. Accuracy demands that the triangle should be well conditioned, and reaches its highest value when the angle at the apex approaches a right angle. ‘There will be difficulties connected with the selection of suitable stations, difficulties in the identification of orientation points, which Mr. Wheeler makes no attempt to minimise, but a peculiar feature of the method is that it is best adapted to a country where the actual measurement in the field is tedious or impossible. It was pointed out in the discussion of Mr. Wheeler’s paper that the method did not offer great advantages in a country of gentle slopes and rounded outlines, with relatively small differences in elevation, because of the uncertainty of locating the points on different photographs. But when the country possesses no in- convenient features, other methods are easy of application. Moreover, it was urged that the plotting of the points is more laborious than in the older methods of surveying. Mechanical devices based on the theory of perspective can do much to shorten the office work of plotting, and in any case this delay and expense are more than compensated by the rapidity of the field work and the employment of a smaller number of assistants required to remove obstacles in an untravelled country. The method has been employed practically in Canada, where the Topographical Survey has been carried into regions the severe climate of which renders it desirable to shorten as far as possible outdoor operations. . A CONVENIENT form of rectifier and interrupter for use with alternating currents is described by Dr. Guilleminot in the Archives a’Electricité Médicale for May. The current to be used is led through a vibrating reed, which carries at its free end a contact dipping in and out of a mercury cup. The reed is placed between the poles of a permanent magnet and is magnetised by a coil of wire which surrounds it; the coil is con- nected (in series with self-induction and resistance) as a shunt to the main circuit. A damping arrangement is also attached to the reed. The reed vibrates in synchronism with the alter- nating current, and as the contact only dips into the mercury when the reed is deflected downwards, the main circuit is synchronously opened and closed, thus converting the alter- nating into an intermittent direct current. The great advantage of the apparatus is the ease with which it may be adjusted ; the mercury cup can be raised or lowered, thus regulating the time of closed circuit; the length of free reed can be varied, and the phase of the vibration relative to that of the alternating supply can be altered by varying the self-induction in series with the exciting coil. It is thus possible to open the circuit always at the most suitable point of the wave—which depends, of course, on the purpose for which the current is being used. The apparatus, which is said to give excellent results in Xtray work, is the invention of Prof. Villard, and is made by M. Chabaud. THE Zeitschrift fiir Elektrochemie for May 8 contains an interesting article by Dr. A. Ludwig upon the fusion of carbon, After referring to Moissan's classical work on this subject, and to the famous French chemist’s production of diamonds in the electric furnace, the author gives details of his own work. JUNE 26, 1902] NATURE 207 Theoretical reasoning had led him to the belief that, working under sufficient pressure, it would be possible to melt carbon and to maintain it in the liquid condition, and actual experi- ment verified this theory. At a pressure of 1500 atmospheres, the arc between two carbons inserted in the pressure vessel failed, and not even an E.M.F. of 70 volts sufficed to carry the current across the gap separating them. The author’s explana- tion of this phenomenon is, that the carbon had assumed the third allotropic state, and had in its passage into the liquid and transparent condition become a non-conductor. The difficulty of maintaining it in this condition was, however, great, and in some cases the phenomenon only lasted a few seconds. Attempts were made to obtain diamonds, by sudden cooling of the interior of the pressure vessel by an inrush of water, but although unmistakable diamonds were found amongst the hard grey powder that was obtained, the results were not altogether satisfactory. The apparatus used by the author in these investi- gations has been patented (English Patent No. 16908, 1900), and as circumstances have compelled him to relinquish his own investigations of the subject, he hopes that others may continue the experiments along the lines he has indicated. THE development of the large Beaumont oil-field in Texas, which is situated only sixteen miles from the coast, will | probably lead to oil being much more largely used as fuel for engines than it has hitherto been. The possibility of a cheaper supply of oil is a matter that is of great importance to this country, and may lead to the increased use of motor cars for | suburban traffic and for trade purposes. The oil will be con- veyed from the oil-field to the coast by pipe lines, along which the oil will flow by gravity into tank steamers, the cost of conveyance to this country being not much more than a halfpenny a gallon. It has been found by experiment. that four and a half barrels of oil, or 189 gallons, are equivalent to one ton of the best coal. Oil is now used largely in America as fuel. On the Southern Pacific Railway 300 engines have been adapted to burn oil, and it is anticipated that a very large sum will, in consequence, be annually saved in the working expenses. In Russia no other fuel than oil is used on the 1600 miles of the Trans-Caspian Railway. In the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria, of which we have just received part ii. of vol. xiv., 1902, geology dominates, and zoology is the only other science dealt with. The natural history of the country is attracting particular atten- | : : u hi | issued a catalogue of South African fishes (marine and fresh- tion, as shown by papers on Crustacea, Polyzoa and Mollusca. Mr. T. S. Hall and Mr. G. B, Pritchard discuss a suggested nomenclature for the marine Tertiary deposits of southern Australia. Local names are always desirable for formaticns which cannot be expected to correspond in time with the strati- graphical divisions made in distant regions ; and the authors are to be commended for using names peculiar to South Australia, despite the fact that they introduce the Werrikooian and Jan Jucian formations. Prof. J. W. Gregory gives an account of the geology of Mount Macedon, an isolated mountain ridge, which though forty miles distant is one of the most conspicuous features in the views from Melbourne. pile resting on Ordovician rocks. The igneous outbursts may have commenced in late Cretaceous times, but there is no certain evidence. The mountain, however, probably marks the begin- ning of the great period of volcanic activity of which the last eruptions built up still existing craters, and of which records are preserved in the legends of the Victorian aborigines. THE Journal of the Franklin Institute (vol. cliii. No. 1) contains an account of the half-tone trichromatic process of colour-printing, by Mr. F. E. Ives. Until recently, all the finest colour-printing has been done by the chromolithographic ‘these surfaces might be accomplished photographically. inks and impressions. It has long been thought that, in accord- ance with the trichromatic theory of colour vision, three printing surfaces, colours and impressions might be substituted for the seven to twenty of the lithographer, and that the preparation of The only commercially successful development of this idea at the present time is by the employment of three half-tone process blocks made from a trichromatic negative colour record and printed with three coloured inks in the type process. Up to the present the quality of the product of this process has, however, been so uncertain that the process has been brought somewhat into disrepute. The author shows that conditions can be secured which make it possible to obtain the best results almost automatically. IN the Sczentific Transactions of the Royal Dublin Society (vol. vii.) is a paper by Prof. Joly on sedimentation experiments and theories. The rates of settlement of suspensions from solutions containing ions in various degrees of concentration indicate that above a certain concentration the rate of fall of the surface of the suspension is fairly independent of the degree of concentration. Below certain concentrations a distinct surface | to the descending suspension fails, and the sediment is only seen to collect from the bottom of the vessel upwards. A suspension precipitated at a concentration in the neighbourhood of this critical concentration does not again precipitate with a distinct surface if reshaken. On removing the electrolyte from such an ‘*exhausted ” suspension, it is found that the liquid is as effective as at first in producing surface if a fresh sample of the powder is used. On the other hand, the original powder will not again exhibit the formation of surface when treated with fresh electrolyte of the same strength, but requires a more concentrated solution to do so. The failure is, therefore, to be traced to some alteration in the solid particles, and on testing the fresh powder it is found to be electrically negative towards distilled water, whereas the used powder is neutral or nearly so towards its salt solution. The author advances a theory of the process of sedimentation to account for the observed phenomena. ‘ Shann: “* The Criterion of Scientific Truth. pa E. Te. 220) *Opere matematiche di Francesco Brioschi” . . 221 ‘*Webster’s International Dictionary of the English Language. To which is now added a Supplement ofm25;000 Words and) Phrasestu) s-utsn salen meme Haldane: ‘‘ Education and Empire. Addresses on Wertain' Topics of the Day 2) ). 0.-es aaa Letters to the Editor :— Mr. Marconi’s Results in Day and Night Wireless Telegraphy.—Sir Oliver Lodge, F.R.S.._. . 222 Kinetic Theory of Planetary OSPR Ee —Dr. E. Rogovsky . 222 The Coloured Sunsets. —Dr. ‘William J. Ss. Lockyer; 8 J. Edmund Clark... 222 The Halos of May 1, 8 and 22. _—Rev. T. C. Porter 223 Matter and Motion in Space.—Sir Hiram S. Maxim 223 A Method of Treating Parallels. dase shia: )— Dr. S. W. Richardson .. . 223 The First Fruits of the German eter cue! Eapeae monm by HH. R.°M. . te caves e) clement = oy (mn mmeaerS ByyATeD Elo | 5 eee its Documentary Rural Education in France. The Smithsonian Institution: faistory:/ By H. Rl | See eitement te eure! (Une Arctic Magnetic Observations. By et C. Chree, PRESS bites muiejrcs er te 21217) Coronation oncer to Men os Seience tia ipeane meee Notes. (J/lustrated.) . . 2 Gk Ee Ste eae eee Our Astronomical Column ;— Changes on the Moon PRAMS aes EER Remarkable Naked-eye Nebulosity Scr) ie; Wa Wer oh eee A Theory of Volcanoes . . a, veer SaaS The French Geodetic Mission. to the Equator . aeg ee BR @pbservations of Nova Persel . . -. 5. - = 4 = «= 233 New Variable Stars Seb ch) aio Se! Delay of the Minimum of U ons «ict Lstaeeiate@acteeetata) PEERED Earthquake Notes .. . Senet oo 5 ee! Statistical Methods in Bigloeyn evel eee. A ee Avian Organogeny. ByW.P.P. ... 235 Photography as Applied to Architectural Meagere. ment and Surveying. (J//ustrated.) ...... + 235 University and Educational Intelligence .... . 236 Societies and Academies .. 2 257) 2 «ss = = «238 NATURE THURSDAY, JULY 10, 1902. THE RECORD OF HUXLEY’S SCIENTIFIC WORK. The Scientific Memoirs of Thomas Henry Huxley. Vol. iv. Edited by Sir Michael Foster and Prof. E. Ray Lankester. Pp. 689; pls. 28. (London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd., 1902.) Price 30s. net. HE present volume is the fourth of the promised series, and contains a collection of the scientific memoirs, addresses, and reviews, by Huxley, published throughout the period ranging from the early part of the year 1874 until his death. The first item reproduced is that on the skull and heart of Menobranchus, the last the masterly addendum to the life of Richard Owen, with the tenour of which our readers have long been familiar (NATURE, vol. li., p. 169). When it is said that the intervening memoirs include those on ‘“ Ceratodus and the Classification of Fishes”; on “ The Craniofacial Apparatus of the Lamprey” ; on “ The Classification and Distribution of the Cray Fishes”; on ‘‘ The Cranial and Dental Characters of the Canidze” (with its prophetic passage on the future of the systematist); on “The Application of the Laws of Evolution to the Vertebrata” (than which Huxley never wrote a finer philosophic treatise) ; on “ The Gentians” (which to the systematic botanists, headed by Hooker and the late Prof. Baillon, who heard it read, came as a surprise); and, finally, the last zoological paper which Huxley wrote, “Some further Observations on the Genus Hyperodapedon,” it is evident that some of his very best work is in this volume brought before the reader. By way of general comment, we need only say that the standard of the former yolumes, upon which we have more than once passed favourable judgment, has been maintained, except; perhaps, that plates 1 to 3 have suffered somewhat, from the lack of blue-grey colour bestowed upon their originals. In reviewing the volume which preceded the present one, we took occasion (NATURE, vol. .Ixiv., p. 76) to comment on the imperfection of the published list which the editors originally caused to be circulated in making their intentions known. We are pleased to find that of the three omissions to which we then more particularly drew attention, two have been made good, chief among them being the Survey memoir on “The Crocodilians of the Elgin Sandstones,” which in the present volume monopolises seventeen of the twenty-eight plates pro- vided. One omission upon which we dwelt they have passed over, viz. the Rede lecture on “ Animal Forms,” delivered at Cambridge in 1883 and duly reported in these columns (NATURE, vol. xxviii. p. 187); and we would remark that, if only on account of the absence of this, the words “THE END” with which the present volume closes cannot mark the completion of the editors’ task, if justice is to be done to the life’s record in science of the great man whose teachings the memorialists have de- cided to perpetuate. To proceed, let it be said that, in addition to the omission just named there are at least six other of Huxley’s scientific writings which we consider should NO. 1706, VOL. 66] 241 have found recognition in the present volume. In seeking comparison with other published works dealing with Huxley’s career, we naturally turn to the bibliographic record given in the “ Life and Letters” by his son; and there we find duly listed addresses on “The Hypothesis that Animals are Automata and its History” and on “The Geological History of Birds,” which our editors have either overlooked or withheld. The latter, a Royal Institution lecture, was first delivered in America and published in full in “‘American Addresses”; and it is signi- ficant that of the five addresses this book contains, the only one the present volume bears (¢.e. that on “ The Study of Biology”) was reprinted elsewhere. The address on “Animals as Automata” was reported in NATURE (vol. iv. p. 362), and with elaboration was printed in “Science and Culture,” side by side with the article on “ Sensation and the Unity of Structure of the Sensiferous Organs,” which our editors reproduce. We submit that both it and the three American addresses on “Evolution” should have been included in the present volume, since they give expression to the working of Huxley’s mind on the realisation of a complete evolu- tionary series—z.e. the equine. About the Baltimore address, which the “American Addresses ” volume also contains, opinions may differ. Far more serious, however, is the omission, both from its proper place in vol. ii. and from the present volume, of the great Geological Survey memoir (decade xii.) bearing title ‘‘ Illustrations of the Structure of the Crossopterygian Ganoids,” which, with the Rede lecture aforementioned, is not listed in even the “Life and Letters”; and we are at a loss to conceive by what process other than a too exclusive reliance upon the Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific Papers (which for the period concerned is defective) this oversight, resulting in the omission of one of the most important and far- reaching memoirs Huxley ever wrote, can be explained, especially when it is seen that the editors have duly incorporated its preliminary correlate in its proper place. Nor is this all. Huxley’s lecture before the Fisheries Exhibition at Norwich in 1881 is duly reproduced, but why not that of 1883, which marked the opening of the congresses of the Exhibition at South Kensington, perhaps the more important of the two? This omission is the more unfortunate, since, in the hands of Prof. McIntosh, the chief conclusion reached has but lately become the leading theme in rival controversy among fishery experts. And it is pertinent to this to remark that the memoir on the Belemnitida, to which we alluded in reviewing vol. iii., and which at the outset escaped recognition, similarly contains the striking observation that the genus Belemnites, if a Decapod, is numerically deficient in “arms,” and that this but a month or so ago, in the hands of Huxley’s pupil Crick, has led to a startling generalisation, which we can _ personally confirm. The editors announced in their original prospectus I51 contributions in all—they have printed 163. In doing so they have shown themselves to have been originally lacking by twelve. We have shown that others have yet to be reprinted, if the work is to be “complete” as was originally resolved, and to depict worthily the scientific labours of the great man whose reputation in the domain M 242 NATURE of “exact science” is (according to our editors’ preface) in danger of being underrated. Moreover, it becomes a question whether the memoir on the “‘ Oceanic Hydrozoa” should not be incorporated, to ensure absolute completeness. We are quite aware that the editors, in their preface, give reasons for excluding this ; but we venture to think that if, when they took this step, they had realised the extent of the Survey memoir on the Elgin Crocodiles, and had reflected that the memoir on “The Development of the Elasmobranch Fishes,” despite its bulk, was incorporated in the volumes memorialising the late Francis Maitland Balfour, they might perhaps have acted otherwise. There are thus a possible series of six or seven im- portant scientific communications to be yet reprinted, in order to justify the fulfilment of the memorial. As the matter stands a supplementary volume is imperative, and we leave the plea for it, with respect and full assurance, in the publishers’ hands. The frontispiece to the present volume is a highly successful photographic reproduction of the obverse of the Huxley Memorial Medal. As a likeness it tran- scends the statue ; and it affords us pleasure to remark that the artist (Mr. F. Bowcher) who produced the model is at present engaged upon an enlargement of it, which promises to be even more true to life, and is to be mounted in the Town Hall at Ealing, the place of Huxley’s birth. GyBy RL GEOLOGICAL HISTORY. History of Geology and Palaeontology to the End of the Nineteenth Ceutury. By Warl Alfred von Zittel. Translated by Maria M. Ogilvie-Gordon., D.Sc. London, Ph.D. Munich. Pp. xiii + 562. (London: Walter Scott, Ltd., 1901.) Price 6s. V HAT may be called the archeological side of the history of this science has been often treated ; but what has long been needed is such a history that the serious student can ascertain exactly the position of any branch at the present day, and the more important steps in the advance towards its position. For a task re- quiring such a wide range of knowledge and such a well-balanced and unbiassed mind there is probably no one better fitted than Prof. von Zittel, while to translate, condense and adapt the work to the needs of British readers has been a congenial duty to one of Zittel’s own talented pupils, Mrs. Ogilvie-Gordon. The author, judging from his preface, is himself in doubt as to the possibility of combining the difficult task of writing a work which will satisfy the specialist and also commend itself to every man of culture. Frankly we think that to do this is impossible ; the needs of the two types of readers are so wholly distinct. For even the best class of popular readers something different from the steady and level plod through division after division of the subject is required. There must be what might be called “ picture-writing,” colour, shading, pro- minence, gradation, grouping, and above all perspective. Without these the ion-technical reader cannot see wood for trees; he has no landings on which to pause for NO. 1706, vol. 66] [JULY 10, 1902 breath, and, worst of all, he hardly realises when he has attained a summit and obtained a view. But, cutting adrift the man of general culture, what is there here for the specialist? There is a most con- scientious, concise, complete, and well-balanced record of the chief steps forward in each of the numerous branches of a complex subject, perfect fairness in the treatment of the different workers and of the claims of various nationalities, a remarkable clearness in indicating the general advance of the science as a whole while treating of its many subdivisions, and a powerful presentment of the significance of the inauguration and final proofs of the chief principles of geology. About a quarter of the whole work is devoted to geo- logical knowledge in the ages of antiquity, the beginnings of palzeontology and geology, and the “heroic age” of geology (1790-1820). Under the first head we read that “fanciful hypotheses and disconnected observations can- not be acknowledged as scientific beginnings of re- search”; the next stage brings us to the first mineral maps and sections, the earliest ideas of mineral succes- sion, and to primitive opinions about fossils and vol- canoes, The ‘heroic age” was the time of Werner and Hutton, von Buch and Humboldt, Kant and Laplace, Cuvier and Buckland, and above all of William Smith. We are thus brought to the beginning of the nineteenth century, and henceforward we follow the development of the science under the following heads :—Cosmical Geology, Physiographical Geology, Dynamical Geology, Petrography, Palaontology, and Stratigraphical Geology. The treatment of these branches is singularly even, the weakest, perhaps, being the first and last, while for the strongest it is difficult to choose between the dynamical, petrographic and paleontological sections. The translator has shifted the position of the strati- graphical section and omitted that on topographical geology, we think wisely ; and she has also shortened the work, partly by abridgment and partly by omission. This difficult task has been discharged with considerable skill and discretion, though we might, perhaps, be inclined to cavil at some of the omissions; for instance, the suppression of the “kern theory” of Rosenbusch and the rock-formuleze of Michel-Lévy, to note only two examples. One characteristic of some of the heroes cf geology seems not to have died out at the present day. We read that “Tt was the spoken word of Werner that carried. Of written words no man of genius could have been more chary. His dislike of writing increased as he grew older, . . .” Again, “Hutton’s thoughts had been borne in upon him direct from nature ; for the best part of his life he had conned them, tossed them in his mind, tested them, and sought repeated confirmation in nature before he had even begun to fix them in written words, or cared to think of any- thing but his own enjoyment of them.” And once again, ‘a dinner was arranged ... and William Smith con- sented to dictatea table of the British strata from the Carboniferous to the Cretaceous formation.” Zittel is seen at his best when dealing with the classical works of those masters of the science who have given us JuLy 10, 1902 | its greater principles. The laws enunciated by such men as Suess, Heim, Richthofen, Sorby, Brogger, Lehmann, Smith, Sedgwick and Darwin are given with genuine appreciation and generally illuminated by a brief but telling thumb-nail picture of their lives and achieve- ments. The translator, while suppressing too great detail in foreign work, has helped -English readers by fitting into its place the occasionally omitted work of English- speaking geologists (see pp. 358, 360, &c.). This plan might with advantage have been extended ; for instance, the work of Milne and Davison on earthquakes, of Allport, Bonney and Phillips on petrology, and of Ramsay and Topley in the connexion of geology and geography, might well have received fuller notice; and the application of geology to economic questions still demands its historian, who would have many a strange tale of failure and success to tell. While the chapter on petrography gives the reader a good summary of the chief theories enunciated, the stages of their proof and their significance in the pro- gress of the science, the paleontological section, probably from the magnitude of the subject, is not so instructive, and does not succeed in giving the reader a clear picture of the real meaning of the successive discoveries made. Again, the stratigraphical chapter is at the same time one of the most difficult to treat fairly, and the one which is least balanced in its treatment. The introductory part, while giving considerable weight to discoveries in paleophytology, is admirable in picking out the chief contributions to palzeontology as applied to stratigraphy, and in its pronouncement upon such subjects as the Sedgwick-Murchison controversy. But the detailed por- tion gives less than three pages to the Devonian system, omits all account of the zoning of the earlier Palzeozoic rocks, and then proceeds to devote almost forty pages to the Trias. The translators work has been carefully and con- scientiously done, and the book reads far better than is usually the case with translations. A few slips or ,mis- prints are unavoidable, and here and there an ambiguity of expression has crept in. We read /orulla (66), physician (77), Linnzeus (for /zmaea, 104), on the age of the human race (the antiquity of man, 195), Davis (David, | | 253), Euganian Isles (25¢), microscopic (macroscopic, 309), and aquo-igneous, for which we would venture to suggest the less cacophonous hydrothermal. The publisher is evidently under the impression that the severer form of the German original requires tempering to that shorn lamb the British reader. The translation has been alleviated by portraits of eminent geologists, many of them admirable and some new. Those of Suess and of Zittel are excellent, but we can hardly bring ourselves to believe that that of Hutton is lifelike. Then, in addition to the shortening of some of the drier details, we have the wholesale omission of the bibliographies which accompany each chapter and many sections of the original. We hope and believe that this is a mistake. It is the serious student who will consult this work; to him the bibliographies are essential, and this will drive him to the original. In some future edition we hope to see these restored, and when this is done we would suggest that even the NO. 1706, VOL. 66] NATURE 243 specialist is deserving of, and will certainly be grateful for, anything which helps to pilot him quickly and safely to the haven of his inquiries. Such aid as author and printer can give are his right. The solid mass of print should be broken up by the use of more sections and headings, italics and black-faced type, and above all good headlines to the pages (as in the original), so that a man in search of particular information may find it with the least possible expenditure of time and temper. But all geologists are grateful to Prof. Zittel for his thorough and painstaking labour, for his fairness and breadth of view, and for his wonderful grasp of the whole of his science; and English-speaking geologists are under an especial debt of gratitude to Mrs. Ogilvie- Gordon for her timely, accurate, and _ well-written translation, PLANE SURVEVING. Plane Surveying. A Text and Reference Book for the Use of Students in Engineering and for Engineers Generally. By Paul C. Nugent, A.M., C.E., Associate Professor of Civil Engineering, Syracuse University. Pp. xvi+577. (New York: John Wiley and Sons ; London: Chapman and Hall, Ltd., 1902.) Price 14s. 6d, i dasa book treats of that elementary part of the subject of surveying, especially useful to engineers, which deals generally with surveys of small areas on large scales. Any book on the subject which comes from America is worthy of attention, since American practice differs in many respects from ours, and this text-book is useful for the purpose of comparative study. Amongst the subjects dealt with are linear measuring instruments and the measurement of lines, chain survey- ing, compass surveying, levelling, transit surveying (ze. the use of the theodolite), topographical, hydrographic and mine surveying, and U.S. Government large-scale surveys and resurveys. There are also chapters on the theory of telescope construction, the planimeter, the slide rule and the solar instrument (sun compass), and an appendix on photo-topographic methods. We have a good deal to learn from America in the use of steel tapes, which for many surveying purposes should supersede the chain, and some useful information on the question will be found at the beginning of the book. The method here described of cutting up the ground in a chain (or tape) survey differs from the English system, and the latter is preferable. A great deal of space is given to surveying with the compass; indeed too much space considering the essential in- accuracy of all compass methods ; and on the other hand but little is said about triangulation with a theodolite or traversing with the same instrument, subjects which each deserve a chapter to themselves. In the chapter on topographical surveying we have topographical methods described from the engineering surveyors point of view, and for certain large-scale engineering topographical surveys the methods mentioned are useful. But they are not generally the methods used by surveyors on regular topographical surveys, such as the topographical branches of the Survey of India or the U.S. Geological Survey, and the description given of the 244 NATURE [JuLy 10, 1902 use of the plane-table as a topographical instrument is inadequate. About a dozen pages are devoted to hydrographic surveying, and it is no doubt desirable that the engineer should have a bowing acquaintance with the subject, mainly to enable him to carry out the survey of small inland waters. If he had a larger task on hand, he should consult one of the recognised treatises on the subject. : Ina book on surveying written by a professor of engineer- ing it is remarkable that there is so little mention of the execution of special surveys for engineering purposes, such as railway and canal surveys. The whole theory of plane surveying is so simple that the engineer is far more likely to look up a text-book to discover what is the practical method adopted than to discover the solution of some theoretical problem, and the ideal text-book should largely quote examples of practical methods and expedients. The chapter on mine surveying contributed by Mr. W. S. Hall is, however, an example of the brief discussion of the survey methods used for a special engineering purpose, and appears to be useful and clear. There is a long appendix of some fifty pages on photo- topographic methods and instruments, being a paper by Mr. J. A. Flemer in the Report of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1897. Such asystem has been much advocated in various quarters during the last few years, and it is interesting andingenious. Under certain special conditions, such as those in the Canadian North-West, where the features are bold and open and where the field season is short, and where sometimes only occasional glimpses through the clouds can be had of the higher peaks, the method is efficient and economical. But under ordinary conditions it is neither, and as a method it cannot be said to be established, nor is it likely to be ; and the inclusion of a detailed report on a tentative topographic method in a book devoted to large-scale engineering survey increases the size of the book, but not its value. As regards the nomenclature of the book, we do not like the author's division of surveying into plane survey- ing and geodesy, although authorities can be found in favour of it. The term geodesy should be reserved for those scientific operations of which the object is the determination of the form and size of the earth. Some of the words used are new, e.g. “ declinator,’ meaning the box containing the compass. The northings and southings of a traverse are here called “ latitudes,” and the eastings and westings ‘“‘longitudes.” We are glad to see that the author uses the word “plotting ” and not “platting.” The latter is sometimes found in American technical works and is objectionable in spite of its greater antiquity. GC. F. CLOSE. INSPECTION OF RAILWAY MATERIALS. The Inspection of Railway Materials. By G. R. Bodmer, A.M.Inst.C.E. Pp. ix + 154. (London: Whittaker and Co., 1902.) Price 5s. HE inspection of their products has long been a source of worry to the manufacturers of railway material, be it locomotives, bridges or rails. Consulting engineers have their own ideas as to what the tests NO. 1706, VOL. 66] should be ; few specify alike, with the result that manu- facturers have to make various qualities of material for the same purpose—a state of affairs not conducive to economy of manufacture. The question of material is not the only trouble. Con- sulting engineers very often specify methods of manufac- ture for their material. Interference of this kind in works management is most expensive to the manufac- turer ; it upsets the sequence of the work, delays pro- gress, and in the end has to be paid for by the railway shareholders. A third complaint might be made by manufacturers, and one which very largely adds to the cost of work in many cases, and that is, what kind of man is the inspector? It is on this point the author of this book commences. He says :— “The inspection of railway material is a class of work for which every inexperienced neophyte devoted to the engineering profession imagines himself to be qualified.” The author goes on to say that “in reality, however, many qualifications are required to make a good inspector, and chief among these is experience, the one most likely to be wanting in a young engineer.” With this we thoroughly agree. In certain specifica- tions the general clauses are such that the contractor is entirely in the inspector’s hands, and if the inspector does not know his work the result is disastrous. Much has been written lately on the standardisation of loco- motives, for instance, as a means of shortening the time of delivery ; but given standard tests, non-interference in works practice and a practical man as resident in- spector, there is no necessity to crystallise any design, for when all is said and done a thing of yesterday is old. This book has evidently been written by one who has been through the “‘inspection mill.” There is much evidence of this in the various chapters. Chapter ii. deals with rails, ordinary and tramway, fish plates, &c. We are told that in the case of fairly heavy rails it is possible to inspect four or five at a time. The reviewer could never do more than three continuously. Steel sleepers are dealt with in chapter iii. The in- formation is well up to date, although we cannot agree that the Indian sleeper fitted with punched up lugs can- not be gauged for gauge unless fitted with a length of rail, &c, The author might have explained that with this type of sleeper the position of the keys for normal gauge is outside the rail, for a medium curve one is moved inside, and for a very sharp curve both are placed inside. On tyres and axles we find much useful information, and further on rolled material generally is very fully gone into, the tests being carefully explained. Chapter vii. deals very thoroughly with the condition governing the specifications for steel rails, more particularly discussing the mechanical tests, which vary very largely in present- day practice. The work concludes with a short account of the inspection of finished work dealing with various parts of rolling stock, and fulfils the intention of the author in being a brief guide to the inspection of railway material for the use of engineers. Ni Jee. JuLy 10, 1902] NATURE 245 OUR BOOK SHELF. The Watkins Manual of (Photographic) Exposure and Development. By Alfred Watkins. Pp. 124. (Here- ford: The Watkins Meter Co.; London: George Houghton and Son, 1902.) Price Is. net. THE author is universally known among _photo- graphers as the inventor of the Watkins exposure meters and as having devised methods of exposure and develop- ment whereby the results are rendered more certain than by the older “rule of thumb” procedure. In this manual Mr. Watkins has systematically set forth his methods of timing exposure and development, and as these methods are sound in principle and useful in prac- tice, acomplete and orderly presentation of them as is here given results in a handbook that must be of great value to all serious students of the subject. It is the most welcome photographic manual that we have received for a long time. We should have much preferred it if the author had remained true to his title and not endeavoured to provide a book suitable for two distinct purposes, namely, as an exposition of the procedures that he has introduced and popularised, and also as a guide for the beginner. Any- one who will be instructed by the statements that the lens forms the image and that the plate receives the “lens image,” that a box of plates must be opened only in the dark room, and so on, will be quite unable to appreciate the bulk of the volume. Moreover, the author’s heart is evidently in those sections of the subject that he has made peculiarly his own. In these he is full and clear, and probably no one, however much he may have studied the matter before, will read these parts with- out learning a good deal. The other chapters appear to have been written unwillingly, for in them accuracy is sacrificed for the sake of an apparent simplicity, and the subjects they represent cannot be said to be treated of, they are little more than referred to. In learning to photograph, as in learning to speak, the natural method is first to learn to do what it is desired to do, and finally to learn the grammar or the theory. No one tackles a subject in the opposite direction except under the com- pulsion of a schoolmaster, and then generally he learns the subject badly. In dealing with chemical and physical changes, one must have a mechanical conception of the process, and Mr. Watkins is generally happy in his illustrations. But when he represents the course of development asa simul- taneous reduction to the metallic state of all the particles of silver salt made amenable to the action of the de- veloper by the exposure, so that as the image gradually grows in density these particles are at one stage each one-quarter reduced, later one-half, while finally the whole of each particle is completely reduced, he selects an illus- tration that is not true to fact. Butthis is a mere detail. We heartily commend the book to those who know how to photograph and wish to increase their knowledge and improve their practice. Creal Nature Study and Life. By C. F. Hodge. Pp. xv + 514; illustrated. (Boston, U.S.A.,and London: Ginn and Co., 1902.) Price 7s. THE author of this little volume is convinced that the only true method of nature-study is by making children thoroughly acquainted with living animals and their ways, both in the wild state and in confinement. He will have nothing to do with technicalities as to their structure and classification, leaving these, if theyareeverto be taught at all, for older pupils. The keeping of tame animals as pets, and the history of domesticated animals, so far as known, are regarded as important factors in the scheme. A similar mode of study is pursued in the case of plants, where the pupil is not bothered with a long string of technical names or wearied with details as to their NO. 1706, VOL. 66] structure. Their life and their relations to inanimate sur- roundings are the only things it is sought to teach. The author’s mode of procedure is to induce the members of the class to write down the names of all the animals— both wild and domesticated—with which they are acquainted, to classify them roughly, and then to discuss some of the more important types at length. That the authors method is not a mere empirical suggestion, which may or may not prove successful in the class-room and in the field, is evident from the intro- duction to the volume by Prof. Stanley Hall, of Worcester, Mass., who writes as follows:—‘‘New as his method essentially is, it is now made public only after years of careful trial in the public school grades in Worcester, until its success and effective working in detail is well assured. Thus it has passed the stage of experiment, and js so matured and approved that, with slight local adjustments, it can be applied almost anywhere for children of from six or seven to thirteen or fourteen years of age.” In the United States the success of the method seems indeed to be assured, and there is accordingly every inducement to give it a fair trial in this country. The book is brightly and pleasantly written and well illus- trated. Whether the author is altogether correct in the statement on p. 8, that the mammoth was a third taller and more than twice the weight of “ our elephant,” and that “the mastodon” was larger still, we may be per- mitted to doubt. We are also at a loss to know the particular kind of fossil deer indicated by the name Cervus americanus, a title properly belonging to the existing Virginian white-tailed deer. Rew. Manual of Agricultural Chemistry. By Herbert Ingle. Pp. 412. (London: Scott, Greenwood and Co., 1902.) Price 7s. 6d. net. AGRICULTURAL chemistry deals with a very extensive range of subjects, including the whole of the materials and operations with which agriculture is concerned. The plant, the soil and the animal are each of them subjects sufficient to satisfy a whole generation of workers ; but agricultural chemistry includes all these and much more besides. No book ever has been written, and none probably ever will be, attempting to deal with the entire subject ; the student must, therefore, fill his shelves with a great variety of books, by many writers, if he would have at command the information available on the sub- jects of agricultural chemistry. The present manual represents the course of instruc- tion in agricultural chemistry given at the Yorkshire College, Leeds. The course of instruction is a full one, and the matter has been carefully written out by the lecturer, Mr. H. Ingle. The book thus produced will be heartily welcomed by all students of agricultural chemistry ; it brings together clearly and correctly a great mass of facts which can be found in no other single volume. Especial attention is given to questions con- nected with pure chemistry, organic and _ inorganic, and with physiological and analytical chemistry ; less prominence is given to the problems of practical agricul- ture. Thus we have the percentage composition of crops, but not the composition of average crops per acre ; the subject of rotations is also omitted — Again, under animal chemistry, we have no discussion of the relation of food to animal maintenance, or to the production of work or animal increase. The values of foods for the production of heat are given, but the extent to which these potential values are utilised for animal requirements is not dis- cussed. The epoch-making researches of Kellner and Zuntz on this subject are not referred to. The author describes Grandeau’s method for the de- termination of humus in soil, based on the solubility of this substance in alkalis. Asa good deal of work is being done with this method both in America and in this 246 NATURE [JuLy 10, 1902 country, it may be worth while noting that it does not show the total humus, but only the humic acids. Berthelot has, in fact, shown that even boiling with potash leaves a considerable part of the organic carbon and nitrogen of a soil undissolved. English agricultural writers employ two names for Beta vulgaris—“ mangel” and “mangold”; Mr. Ingle employs the latter. The former spelling is, however, more correct. The word comes from the German de- scription “ Mangel-Wurzel,” or scarcity root, alluding to its resistance to drought. The spelling has probably drifted into mangold from the golden colour common _ to the roots. R. W. By F. Hilde- W. Engelmann, Ueber Aehnlichketten im Pflanzenreich. brand. Pp. iv+66. (Leipzig: 1902.) Price Is. 9d. net. PROF. HILDEBRAND, in his introductory remarks, takes exception to the use of the term “mimicry.” He states that it is applied by zoologists when two very different animals show similar appearances which are of apparent benefit to one, and that the explanation of zoologists infers that these similarities are developed in the struggle for existence. The latter part of this statement is dis- tinctly misleading, as it is doubtful if any zoologists regard such similarities as being developmental. The ob- ject of the book is to show that in the plant world mimicry rarely if ever occurs, and that similarities in plants or plant forms are mainly due to environment or ecological factors. The series of comparative sketches which Prof. Hildebrand has published form light reading, but they might with advantage have been worked up in greater detail. Index to the Literature of the Spectroscope (1887-1900, both inclusive). By Alfred Tuckermann. Pp. 373. Continuation of the previous index by the same author published in 1888. (Published by the Smithsonian Institution, 1902.) IN the previous index, extending from the dawn of spectroscopy (or even earlier, for references are made to papers published in the seventeenth century) to 1886, the author arranged the books and papers under 320 different sections, placed alphabetically. In each section the titles of the papers, the authors’ names, and references to the original papers and abstracts are arranged in the alpha- betical order of the authors’ names. The present contri- bution is divided into two parts, part i. being an authors’ index extending to 188 pages, in which the authors’ names are placed alphabetically and the full title, year of publication and references to the papers and abstracts are given; and part il. a subject-index beginning with history, books, spectroscopy in general, followed by nearly 300 divisions arranged alphabetically. In these divisions the authors’ names are first given alphabeti- cally, followed by the references to the papers with the year of publication, but without any reference to the titles or to contents of the papers which are not given in the titles. Thus under titanium there are five references ; the first is in the Wrenexr Anzezger, and does not appear in the author-index, the second is on ultra-violet spark spectra, the third on titanium as a comparison spectrum, the fourth on the arc spectrum, and the fifth on the shifting of the arc spectrum lines under the influence of pressure. The value of the index would have been enormously increased if the papers had been arranged alphabetic- ally according to the subjects, and with the papers on the same subject placed in order of date instead of according to the authors’ names. Such a system would have entailed more printing, but it would not have caused very much more work in preparation and would certainly have been worth the additional trouble. The list appears to be very complete ; it may be said to be more than complete, for some of the papers in- NO. 1705, VOL. 66] dexed do not deal with spectroscopy. Thus five papers on meteors which we have examined do not contain any refer- ence to spectra, and one on the yellow variety of arsenic does not deal with spectroscopy; several papers are indexed which contain only micrometric measurements of the diameters of planets. It is perhaps ungracious to criticise in this manner a work which must have been very arduous to the author, but the inclusion of papers that do not refer to the use of the spectroscope may be the cause of much loss of time and trouble to workers, and this would not have happened if the subject- index had been prepared in the way above suggested. Dr. Tuckermann must be congratulated on the con- clusion of his work, which, notwithstanding the defects which we have mentioned, cannot fail to be of service to many investigators in this important branch of science. H. M. LETTERS ‘OW RAE IE DIMOR: (Zhe Editor does not hold himself responsible for opinions ex- pressed by his correspondents. Neither can he undertake to return, or to correspond with the writers of, rejected manuscripts intended for this or any other part of NATURE, No notice ts taken of anonymous communications.) Misuse of Coal. NAtuRE of March 20, containing a most interesting com- munication by Prof. John Perry on the ‘‘ Misuse of Coal,” has reached me lately. Surely Prof. Perry takes an insular view of the matter. Like so many Englishmen, alas! he knows not the forest! The greater portion of the world cooks its food and makes itself comfortable on wood fuel, and though all the forests in the world would, according to European ideas, be inadequate to supply by their growth the present expenditure of coal (their fossilised remains), to overlook altogether the sun power which we can fix by growing wood fuel is surely, from even a European point of view, an oversight. Helmholtz com- pared the number of thermal units received by an acre of land in Germany during a year with the number of thermal units produced by burning the vegetable matter elaborated during a year. His calculation was that only the 1/1477th part of the sun’s heat was thus rendered available. On this basis it is possible roughly to calculate the maximum thermal efficiency as firewood of the wattle or Eucalyptus vegetation on the coast of Australia or South Africa. (Inso- lation is for the latitude somewhere about one-sixth greater at Cape Town than in mid-Germany ; practically it is more on account of the clearer atmosphere.) The production of fire- wood is about five times as much ; thus, taking Crottondorf as an example of a’ European forest giving one of the largest yields in timber, we have :— Crottondorf spruce, mean yearly yield 143 cubic feet. Quick-growing Eucalypts, S. Africa, do. 700 ,, Or the maximum South African yield is five times the maximum European yield. But since the average weight of eucalypt wood is three times that of spruce, the heating power produced on an acre of Eucalypts must be set at about fifteen times that produced on an acre of northern and mid-European forest. Thus on the basis of Helmholtz’s calculation a eucalypt plantation can, with the most favourable circumstances, in South Africa or on tropical mountains, store up, say, 15/1500 = I per cent. of the solar energy received on the unit of area. The position in Cape Town to-day is that it is cheaper to plough the ground and plant a forest of quick-growing trees than to import coal from over the sea or by along and expensive land journey. Firewood in Cape Town is worth nearly Is. per cubic foot, and before the railway was extended to the diamond fields firewood there has fetched 1d. per lb., the price at which sugar has been retailed in England. No doubt from a British insular point of view coal at 2/. or 3/. per ton is a terrible misfortune. It certainly increases the cost of running machinery ; but if this does not take place to a prohibitive extent, and if it makes the user of power careful not to waste it, it is not an unmixed evil. And if thereby afforesting is made a paying operation, it is at least open to discussion whether dear coal and good forests would not be better for England than an expenditure of 23,000,000/. sterling on JuLy 10, 1902] imported timber, and the evils, including physical degeneration of the race, and coal fogs in the big cities, which have been shown elsewhere to result from England’s neglect of its forests. The reference to De Wet in Prof. Perry’s communication is un- fortunate: a small quick-moving army would probably have caught him. And surely cheap coal and luxury is not the summum bonum. Rather let us have hamlets of strong forest workers than the luxurious town dwellers of to-day with their decayed muscle and cheap mechanical power! Compare a European engine-driver with the runner castes of India and Japan. The engine-driver shows us perhaps fine inherited muscle, but going to decay for want of use; the Eastern runners show the development of muscle by both use and inheritance. Which would have the best chance of catching De Wet a hundred years hence ? As far back as 1882 the discovery was made by Sir D. Brandis and myself that Eucalypts planted on tropical mountains will produce wood fuel at the rate of 20 tons (dry weight at 60 Ibs. per cubic foot) per acre per year in perpetuity. The eucalypt plantation reproduces itself when cut, without further expense, and its dry timber, heavier than coal (which, as met with com- mercially, weighs 50lbs. to 52 lbs. the cubic foot) has an equal or a higher thermal power, bulk for bulk, than coal. We ob- tained this result as the maximum yield of Zucalyptus globulus on the Nilgiris, Southern India. No doubt there are other instances where higher yields are produced now, and no doubt also when the coal supply is exhausted, selection and experiment will produce a forest vegetation that will produce more than 20 tons per acre per year. The sugar beet and all the fruits and vegetables of civilisation show how the vegetable kingdom can be moulded to suit man’s wants. If a chance tree on a chance mountain in a chance soil can produce the equivalent of 20 tons of coal per acre per year, it seems not unreasonable to suppose that by selection we can produce, say, double this, or 40 tons. To produce this in perpetuity we should probably have to find a tree with the moderate soil requirements of the Conifers. A powerful sun, a heavy rainfall, and a very rapid forced growth would be the essentials of such a production of wood fuel. Looking at a rainfall map of the world, one sees that these conditions are fulfilled over about 8009 million acres of its surface (which is between one-fourth and one-fifth of the total land surface of 35,200 million acres). I take latitudes below 40° and rainfalls above 40 inches. One-half of this area under forest might thus yield the equivalent of 161,000 million tons of coal yearly. This is more than 288 times the world’s present consumption of coal, assuming that coal and eucalypt timber are of approximately equal heating power. On the basis of the actual forest yields of to-day we have half this, or 80,500 million tons. In Germany, one-fourth of the total area is under forest, and this is held on the highest authority to be the suitable proportion for a thickly-peopled civilised country such as Germany. The forest should properly occupy a higher pro- portion in countries where large areas are pestilential and unsuited for human habitation. Putting this, however, aside, and taking the German standard of one-fourth forest, then on the basis of to-day’s maximum yields we should obtain a yearly output of 40,250 million tons. And if to convert the maximum forest yield to an average forest yield we again divide by two, we obtain 20,175 million tons. Lower than this [ do not think we can reasonably go for the class of forest under consideration. it ts a little more than thirty times the world’s present con- sumption of coal. The world’s yearly output of coal recently was 663 million tons, says Prof. Perry. Thus we see that the yield of firewood from the world’s tropical and extra-tropical forests, whenever they are fully stocked and scientifically worked, will yield the equivalent of from thirty times to 122 times the present consumption of coal, or even up to 243 times the present consumption of coal if we succeed by cultivation in doubling present timber yield figures. It may be objected that my figures are far in excess of those representing the yield of European forests and that they require confirmation, No doubt they are far in excess of European figures ; but so also is the intensity of the vegetative process in these latitudes, and so also is the stature of the Sequoias of California, and the Eucalypts of Australia and South Africa above the stature of the biggest spruces and silver-firs of Europe. The Nilgiri figures [have quoted above were formally recorded in two official reports printed and published by the NO. 1706, VOL. 66] NATURE 247 Madras Government in 1882.1 They have since been confirmed by the measurements of forest officers who have subsequently had charge of the Nilgiri plantations. Similar figures have been obtained by myself and other forest officers in South Africa. They have been exceeded in several plantations in Natal, while at Johannesburg they have not been confined to Eucalypts, but have been obtained from Acacéa decurrens, or black wattle, as well as from some other trees. Therefore, ‘‘ when our coal supply is exhausted, when all the races of the world have fought for the waterfalls and places of high tide,” there will still remain that which Englishmen of all the civilised races of the world do most neglect—the forest. . D. E. Hurcuins. Grootvadersbosch, Swellendam, Cape Colony, May 14. Cold Weather in'South Africa, WE have been getting exceptional weather here of late. General French was actually snowed up at Middelburg. A good general idea of the circumstances will be obtained from the telegrams abridged below from the Déamond Fields Advertiser of June 14. Middelburg (Cape), June 11.—For the first time for sixteen years the town is covered to a great depth with snow. King- williamstown, June 11.—A fierce thunderstorm occurred last night, accompanied by heavy rain. Port Elizabeth, June 11.— The train service between Graaff-Reinet and Rosmead is to-day stopped temporarily owing to heavy snowstorms—an unusual experience for South Africa. Cradock, June 12.—An ex- ceptionally heavy fall of snow occurred in the Midlands on Tuesday night and yesterday. Queenstown, June 12.—The rainfall reported during the first five months of the year is the lowest recorded for the same period for the past thirty years. The drought has, however, been broken. Rain started on June 10, and during the night there was a heavy fall of snow. Kokstad, June 12.—There was a heavy snowstorm last night, accompanied by a heavy gale. The snow is several inches deep in the streets. Bloemfontein, June 12.—The weather is unprecedentedly cold. The hills round Thaba *Nchu are covered with snow. Last night snow fell in Bloemfontein. At Kimberley it has been intensely cold, with a low baro- meter, wind, rain and sleet, and afterwards heavy frost. With the one exception of July 12, 1886 (when Kimberley is said to have been under snow for the whole day), the maximum shade temperature registered is the lowest on record. For the eight days ending Sunday, June 15, the temperatures have been :— | | Observatory Screen. Stevenson Screen. | | Max, Min. Max. Min. June 8 72. fo) 34°"0 WSL 3370 » 9 SOnG 39,0 59.8 3801 33) LO | 46°2 380 459 37,8 » I | 454 36°'9 44.9 36-1 oe, He 48°°3 Bison |) 460: 31° 2 pp ele 520i PISO NV S74 24°°2 et 57.0 ZOn0 mal SS.0 26°°0 x» 15 | 62°'0 29° 0 63°°2 28°'0 The maximum temperatures registered on June 10 and 11 are the lowest on record for any June. The maximum registered on July 12, 1886, was 35°°8: There was also a maximum temperature of 45° in July 1891. Both, however, were obtained under a Glaisher screen and are probably a little too low. Minimum temperatures lower than 25° have been registered perhaps three times; the lowest known is probably 20° in July 1888. All these previous instances have been quite transitory, the temperatures in each case being much higher both the day before and the day after. There seems to be no record of a cold spell having the duration of the one in question. Kenilworth, Kimberley, June 16, J. R. Surron. 1 “ Suggestions regarding Forest Administration in the Madras Presi- dency,’ by D. Brandis, C.I.E., Inspector-General to the Government of India (Madras, 1882). ‘Report on Measurements of the Growth of Australian Trees on the Nilgiris,’ by D. E. Hutchins, Dep. Cons, Forests, Mysore (Government Press, Madras, 1883). 248 A SHORT PERIOD OF SOLAR AND METEOROLOGICAL CHANGES} I N continuation of the inquiries referred to in a former paper on Indian rainfall and solar activity,” attention has more recently been devoted to an examination of the variations of pressure over the Indian and other areas. (1) It is well known that in India during the summer months (April to September) and during the winter months (October to March) low and high pressures re- spectively prevail. In the case of the latter, the pressure is found to exhibit very remarkable and definite varia- tions, and is in excess every three and a half years on the average, while at these times of excess of high pres- sure the low pressure during the other six months of the year is deficient ; so that every three and a half years or so the high pressure becomes higher and the low pressure is not so low as usual. (2) Further, this short-period variation which appears in the mean variation of pressure over the whole of India is as well defined in the mean values for individual 1600 1870-0 16800 1099-0 1900.0 Ci Cee es seeded eednans 3000 SUNSPOTS. i000 1000 ° WIDENED LINE 60 CROSSINGS, +20 MEAN LATITUDE+1I0 or SUNSPOTS., oe LATITUDE oe TOTAL SPOTTEO AREA. _ NUMBER or PROMINENCES. PRESSURE. BOMBAY. —-ga00 [ocr.— MARL] 29-8600 PRESSURE. 600 BOMBAY. Cara.— seer.) t 29-7000 ' Hier elaly leihisiyatiess unig iotefeie gisnepsteseinecxda ip aisiAleghelainay | ataxe 1860-0 1870-0 1880-0 1620-0 1900-0 HiGaxs stations such as Bombay (Fig. 1, Curve F), Calcutta, Madras, Nagpur, &c. (3) The view that the variation of pressure in question over India and its neighbourhood is not due to local causes, but is produced by some external, or extra- terrestrial action, is considerably strengthened by an examination of the pressure curve of a very distant station such as Cordoba. Dealing with the pressures at Cordoba during the high-pressure six months, April to September, the curve (Fig. 2, Curves F and E) repre- senting the variation from the mean from year to year is exactly the z7verse of the curve representing the Bombay and other Indian pressures for the same months over the same period of time. The cause, therefore, which raises the mean value for the low-pressure months over the 1**On Some Phenomena which Suggest a Short Period of Solar and Meteorological Changes,” by Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., and William J. S. Lockyer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.A.S. (Read before the Royal Society, June 19.) aa On Solar Changes of Temperature and Variations in Rainfall in the Region Surrounding the Indian Ocean” (Roy. Soc. Proc. vol. Ixvii. p. 409). NO. 1706, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLY 10, 1902 Indian area would appear to lower the mean value of high-pressure months at Cordoba simultaneously. In fact we have a see-saw. (4) Further investigation shows that not only do the pressures of practically the whole Indian area exhibit variations from year to year which present very similar features, but that this is the case with other large areas, Thus, for instance, it is found that the yearly mean pressures for Brussels, Bremen, Oxford, Valencia and Aberdeen (the only pressures that have been at present examined) are all remarkably similar in their variations from year to year ; and it might almost be said that one curve representing the variations from the normal would approximately define the pressures at all these places. The probable extra-terrestrial origin of these short- period variations led to a detailed examination of the records of the phenomena connected with solar spots and prominences, with a view of seeing whether similar vari- ations, indicating changes in the solar activity, could be detected. (5) A preliminary reduction of the Italian observations 1900-0 1870-0 1880-0 7890-0 1900-0 Vebve vedere eb enerdeneedeveedeerrtane ' ' PRESSURE 850> (veanux mean) 9359- e10+ OME AYE Es RAINFALL 7*- (CYBARLY mean) 53~ 42> MADRAS 3." RAINFALL “~ (eerr— pec.) 49° 1A STATIONS §=7°- in a2- IGEVEONI)) 2A) RAINFALL “°° (May—oeT) 2° MALABAR !00- 80- PRESSURE 20-7000 ~ (APR~SEPT) — 200- | BOMBAY 00- (SCALE INVERTID) 600 - PRESSURE 7-00- (APR —8EPT) 6 g0- CORDOBA, 2 ¢.00- 1860-0 1490-0 1900-0 we ’ 4860-0 1870-0 Fic. 2. of prominences observed on the sun’s limb since 1871 was first undertaken. The result of this inquiry indicates that, in addition to the main epochs of maximum and minimum of prominences which coincide in time with those of maximum and minimum of the total spotted area, there are prominent subsidiary maxima and minima having a similar short period, and also coinciding in time (Fig. 1, Curve E), (6) Although these subsidiary prominence pulses are not distinctly duplicated in the curve representing the spotted area of the solar surface, it is to be noted that corresponding pulses are -indicated in the curves which represent the change of latitude of spotted area from year to year ; and in each case an increase in prominence activity is associated with a decrease of latitude of the spotted area (Fig. 1, Curves C and D). (7) A comparison of these solar data with those already referred to relating to terrestrial pressures suggests that these simultaneous outbursts of prominences and changes of the latitudes in which the spots occur about ee JuLy 10, 1902] every three and a half years are the true cause of the pressure changes ; and that the varying intensity of solar activity within the sunspot period of eleven years pro- duces an effect on the pressure and circulation of our atmosphere, thus affecting the whole globe meteoro- logically. (8) The close correspondence between the epochs of these subsidiary pressure variations and those represent- ing prominence frequency suggests, not only their very close relationship, but that the terrestrial pressure quickly answers to the solar changes, while so far as the work has gone it would appear that rainfall ( Fig. 2, Curves A, B, C, D) and snowfall are subsequent effects. (9) It may be remarked that we have already obtained evidence showing that this short-period variation is not the only one acting, but that the eleven-year and thirty- five-year periods apparently influence the short-period variations. But even this does not explain some anomalies already met with, and should the solar origin of these short-period pressure changes be subsequently confirmed, some of them not constant in all localities will have to be explained: and it is possible we may obtain in this way some new knowledge on the atmo- spheric circulation. (10) The period of time included in this survey begins generally with the establishment of the full records of | the Indian Meteorological Department in 1875 and extends to 1895, when the regularity of the widened- line phenomena was broken, as stated in a previous | things and how to deal with them, and to be induced to | leave the learning sought at leisure from books alone | and that is supported only by unrealities of arguments communication. Addendum, dated June 26. In continuing the above researches we have plotted the percentage frequency of the solar prominences derived from the Italian observations for each 10° of solar lati- tude N. and S. of the equator. We find that the epochs of maximum prominence dis- turbance in the higher latitudes are widely different from those near the equator. The latter are closely associated with the epochs of maximum spotted area, the former occur both N. and S. at intervening times. We have, then, two sets of strongly marked promi- nence outbursts occurring at intervals of between three and four years. Both sets are represented closely in the Indian pressure curves. Solar Physics Observatory. LHE FIRST MAGNETICIAN. ge (es booke is not for every rude and unconnynge man to see, but for clerkys and very gentylmen that understand gentylness and scyence.” This quotation from Caxton is prefixed by Prof. Thompson to his notes to the new edition of the “ De Magnete.” Most students of electricity know that William Gilbert of Colchester is the father of the sciences of magnetism and electricity. They may have some idea of the extent of his discoveries and the general character of his work, NATURE but few who have not seen the celebrated book in which | he recorded his results can have really grasped how much Gilbert knew and how thorough and complete were his investigations. “He practised the experimental method of obser- | of the theory of electricity. , | writes, ‘‘a conspicuous force of attraction manifests itself 249 science are due to him and to all who have helped him for enabling them to learn what Gilbert did. It was a happy thought to found the Gilbert Club, and the members of the club who have the chance of possess- ing this splendid volume, the outcome of many years of | patient research and loving labour, are greatly to be envied. The club was founded in 1889 to commemorate Gilbert’s work and to issue a translation in English ; at that date there was none, though one was published in America in 1893 The original edition was issued in 1600, and it was at first hoped that the translation might be ready in time for the tercentenary celebration at Colchester in 1900. This proved impossible, but the work is now complete and the result is admirable. It will be of interest here to give a brief account of the work itself. Starting with the early history of the loadstone, its power of attracting iron known to the ancients and its property of setting in a definite direction discovered in the tenth or twelfth century, Gilbert in the first book of his treatise sets forth the various funda- mental properties of a magnet and of magnetised iron, illustrating them by the experiments now familiar to all, and describing almost in every chapter some new dis- covery or some important law. He is continually appealing to experiment and accurate observation. ““Deplorable is man’s ignorance in natural science,” he writes, “and modern philosophers like those who dream in darkness need to be aroused and taught the uses of and by conjectures” But Gilbert lived too early ; it was more than 200 years before the truth of his maxim was realised. He was quick to appreciate at their true value the in- accurate observations of some who had gone before him. “Albertus Magnus writes,” we are told, “that a load- stone had been found in his day which with one part drew to itself iron and repelled it with the other end ; but Albertus observed the facts badly ; for every load- stone attracts with one end iron that has been touched by a loadstone and drives it away with the other.” Among other things, we may note his observation that “a long piece of iron (even though not excited by a magnet) settles itself toward north and south”; but perhaps the greatest discovery in this book is contained in the last chapter, ‘That the globe of the earth is magnetick and a magnet,” our “ New and unheard of doctrine about the earth” he calls it. The doctrine is proved by the observations and experiments which are the subject of the rest of the treatise. Book ii. deals with a number of examples of magnetic attraction, and in chapter ii., ‘‘On the magnetic coition, and first on the attraction of amber, or more truly on the attaching of bodies to amber,” we find the beginnings “For in other bodies,” he otherwise than in loadstone ; like as in amber, concerning which some things must first be said that it may appear what is that attaching of bodies and how it is different from and foreign to the magnetical actions, those mortals. | being still ignorant who think that inclination to be an vation before Bacon wrote about it ; his methods and | discoveries excited the sneers of Bacon, the praises of Galileo and Kepler.” : The book justifies the high claim put forward on its behalf by its latest editor, and the thanks of men of attraction and compare it with the magnetic coitions,” and so to illustrate electric actions he invents the straw electroscope. He divides bodies into “ electricks,” which are electrified by friction and attract light bodies, and “non-electricks,” the metals and other conductors as | we now call them. The effect of heat and moisture is i “* William Gilbert of Colchester, Physician of London, onthe Magnet, | Magnetic Bodies also, and on the Great Magnet the Earth.” Pp. 246. Published in Latin, 1600. Translated and edited for the Gilbert Club, 1900, with notes by Prof. S. P. Thompson, F.R.S. a NO. 1706, VOL. 66] studied and described, and the distinction between electrical and magnetic attraction fully made out. With amber or other ‘‘electricks,” “if indeed either a sheet of paper or a piece of linen be interposed there will be no movement. But a loadstone without friction o) 50 NATURE [JuLy 10, 1902 or heat whether dry or suffused with moisture invites magneticks, even with the most solid bodies interposed, even planks of wood or pretty thick slabs of stone or sheets of metal. A loadstone appeals to magneticks only, towards electricks all things move.” He has no mercy on those who would make a perpetual- motion machine by means of the attraction of a load- stone. “ But they have been little practised in magnetick ex- periments who forge such things as that... . Oh that the gods would at length bring to a miserable end such | fictitious, crazy, deformed labours with which the minds of the studious are blinded.” Book iii. is on Direction, the property of the magnet to point north and south. At the outset Gilbert recognises that the compass needle deviates from the true North Pole by an amount which varies at different points on the the name given to the property of pointing north and south. Book iv. deals with ‘ Variation,” the angle be- tween the true and magnetic meridian at any point, and though we cannot agree with Gilbert that “the variation is caused by the inequality of the projecting parts of the earth,” or that “the variation in any one place is constant,” we can admire his skill and resource in utilising the scanty material at his disposal and in devising methods to measure the amount of the variation. In Book y. the action of a dipping needle is described and explained, while Book vi. treats of the “ Globe of the Earth the Great Magnet.” Any notice of this edition of the “De Magnete” would be incomplete without some reference to the notes contributed by the editor. During the work of revising and editing the English NW AW Fic. 1.—The Blacksmith making a Magnet. earth. ‘But it must be understood,” he says, “on the threshold of the argument (before we proceed further) that these pointings of the loadstone or of iron are not perpetually made toward the true poles of the world, do not always seek those fixed and definite points or remain on the line of the true meridian, but usually diverge some distance to the east or west.” The fundamental laws of the magnetisation of iron by contact with another magnet by induction either from a loadstone or in the earth’s field are clearly set out. Gilbert knew, too, how to demagnetise a magnet. “Putting the whole iron in the fire,” he writes, ‘ blow the fire with the bellows so that it may be all aglow and let it remain a little longer time red hot. When cooled (so, however, that while it is cooling it does not rest in one position) you will see that it has lost the verticity it had acquired from the stone.” Verticity is NO. 1706, VOL. 66] translation of “De Magnete,” many points, as Prof. Thompson writes, came up for discussion requiring critical consideration and the examination of the writings of contemporary or earlier authorities. The results of some portion of this labour have been collected in the form of notes. The text has with great judgment been printed just as Gilbert left it ; in fact, comparison shows that throughout the English and the original Latin versions run page for page. The notes cover some seventy pages, and are replete with curious and interest- ing information. Take, for example, that relating to the picture of the blacksmith striking the iron while it lies north and south, given on p. 139, which we have repro- duced. It appears that woodcuts containing human figures are rare in the art of the sixteenth century, and Prof. Thompson traces Gilbert’s picture to a book of fables by Cornelius van Kiel, published at Cologne in 1594, Juey 10, 1902] ‘where it is used to illustrate a fable of the blacksmith and his dog. The dog has been omitted in the Gilbert pic- ture, the words Septentrio and Auster have been added and some other details modified, but there is no doubt where the picture came from. ; : Another note of interest is that to p. 165, dealing with the discovery of the mariner’s compass, Its construction, and the wind-rose or chart of the winds marked on the card of the compass. The earliest known examples of the wind-rose are on certain Venetian charts dating back to 1426 or 1436. Not less interesting is the paper which some five years since Prof. Thompson read before the Bibliographical Society on “ Peter Short, Printer, and his Marks.” This, however, is not in this volume. Peter Short, the hitherto unknown printer of the book, used as his mark the device of a serpent entwined round a T-shaped support, and the investigation as to why this mark was used has led to an interesting chapter in the history of the printers of the sixteenth century. But enough has probably been said to convince even an unwilling reader of the value of the book ‘De Magnete” and of the services which the editor and his colleagues have rendered to science by the issue of this English edition. They are to be congratulated on the results of their labour of love, which, though it has cost them many hours of toil, has had so successful an issue. Ie AME RECENT HISTORY OF THE ROVAL SOCIETY. HEN the “Record of the Royal Society ” was first issued in 1897, further editions of that interesting compilation were promised, and the Society has con- sidered the opening of the new century an ‘appropriate time for fulfilling that promise. Although there is not much of especial importance in the history of the Society to chronicle during the four years which have elapsed since the issue of the first edition, no one will quarrel with the Council for having taken this opportunity of issuing a work’ which contains additions of so much interest as does the “ Record” before us. The first edition was noticed in our columns in 1897 (see vol. lvi. p. 343), and the present volume gives us, with | but slight modification, the historical material contained | in the first edition. The work, however, has extended from a manual of 224 pages to a substantial volume of | 427 pages, and this increase in bulk is almost entirely due to the valuable list of the Fellows of the Society elected since its foundation, arranged in chronological order of election, with an alphabetical index. While the main portion of the contents of the first edition remains unchanged, the short period which has | elapsed between the two issues of the ‘‘ Record” has | seen modifications in some old associations of the Society. | than to say that its scheme of management and organi- sation is set out in full in the volume before us, which The Botanic Gardens, Chelsea, formerly known as “ The Physick Garden,” established in 1721, after enduring various encroachments upon its boundaries and sundry risks of absorption into the maw of the London builder, has found salvation in that essentially modern sanctuary for neglected charities, a scheme of the Charity Com- missioners. This garden was granted by Sir Hans Sloane to the Society of Apothecaries in February, 1721, on conditions mentioned in the notice in NATURE already mentioned. In the event of the Society of Apothecaries at any time failing to fulfil these conditions, or converting the garden into buildings for habitations or any other uses Save as a physic garden, the premises were to be held in trust for the Royal Society, by which it was to be held under like conditions, the obligations in this case being to the Royal College of Physicians. The Society of 1“*The Record of the Royal Society of London.” Second edition TQOI. Pp. vi + 427. ‘ 1go2.”" Pp. 265. (London: Harrison and Sons.) NO. 1706, VOL. 66 | NATURE | Gracious Majesty the King on May 251 Apothecaries appears to have carried out the prescribed terms, but in 1861 evinced a desire to be relieved of its charge, which, however, the Royal Society showed no anxiety to assume, and the garden, suffering in the mean- time some curtailment on the building of the Chelsea Embankment, remained under its original tenure until 1898, when the Society of Apothecaries, anxious to be rid of the burden of its maintenance, applied to the Charity Commissioners to draw up a scheme for the administration of the garden. Under this scheme, which was drawn up in consultation with the Council of the Royal Society, the management of the garden is placed in the hands of the trustees of the London Parochial Charities, with a com- mittee of management of seventeen, upon which each of the bodies named in Sir Hans Sloane’s original deed, viz. the Society of Apothecaries, the Royal Society and the Royal College of Physicians, has one representative ; there are also representatives of certain educational authorities, and nine nominees of the trustees above mentioned. The committee is to provide for the main- tenance of botanical specimens of living plants for teaching purposes and for the supply of botanical specimens for external instruction, and may also provide instruction, by means of lectures or otherwise, in botany with especial reference to the requirements of elementary education. Another and more familiar name has disappeared from the list of institutions carried on under the zgis of the Royal Society. The Kew Observatory, built by King George III. on the site of an old monastery in 1769, for observing the transit of Venus which occurred in that year, was handed over by the Government in 1842 to the British Association, who maintained it until 1871. In that year Mr. J. P. Gassiot, F.R.S., executed a deed of trust for the endowment of the Observatory with a sum of 10,000/., the income to be administered by a committee of the Royal Society for the purposes of the Observatory. Such a committee was duly appointed, and assumed control of the Observatory, being subsequently incor- porated under the title of the Kew Observatory Committee. Under the scheme for the establishment of the National Physical Laboratory, the Kew Observatory Committee has been wound up, and the Observatory has become incorporated in the larger institution, of which it forms a department. The conditions of Mr. Gassiot’s endowment are, however, observed by the retention, as a body in- dependent of the governing body of the Laboratory, of the Gassiot Committee of the Royal Society, composed of those Fellows of the Society who are members for the time being of the executive committee of the Laboratory. So much has been written lately in these columns and elsewhere about the National Physical Laboratory that there is no occasion to enlarge upon this subject further also contains the full text of the Gassiot declaration of trust. Another interesting document published in the “Record” is the royal warrant for the board of visitors of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, granted by His 23, 1901. a The list of benefactions is extended by the addition of two bequests received since 1897—the bequest of Sir | William Mackinnon, who left to the Society the residue of his estate, upon trust, for the foundation and endow- ment of prizes or scholarships for the special purpose of furthering natural and physical science and of furthering original research and investigation in pathology. The first award under this bequest was made last year to Mr. J. J. R. Macleod, M.B., for researches in pathological chemistry. The other bequest is one made by the late : ; te “"Year-Book of the Royal Society of London’ | Prof. David Edward Hughes, the income “to be an- nually awarded either in money or in the form of a 2 5 NATURE medal, or partly one and partly the other, for the reward of original discovery in the physical sciences, particu- larly electricity and magnetism, or their applications.” A gold medal, to be called the “Hughes” medal, will be awarded for the first time this year. These bequests involve corresponding obligations, as may be seen under the heading of “The Trusts of the Royal Society,” and the multiplicity and variety of these and similar'responsibilities, duly recorded in the volume under review, appear to have stimulated the Council to something in the nature of a protest and an appeal ; for, by a memorandum facing the first page of the “ Record,” we learn that the Council has arrived at the conclusion that it is neither to the advantage of the Society nor in the interests of the advancement of natural knowledge that the already long list of medals should be added to, and the Council expresses the opinion that no further bequests for awards as prizes for past achievements should be accepted by the Society. The memorandum then proceeds to direct attention to the fact that the funds be- longing absolutely to the Society and available without restrictions for its general purposes are very few indeed, and that the usefulness of the Society has been greatly hampered by the lack of such funds. These facts are familiar to those acquainted with the working of the Society, but outside this circle there seems to exist a general impression, whether it be due to the Royal Society’s ancient and honourable association with the throne, or to its occupying handsome premises in Burlington House, or to its entertainments in the London season, that it is a wealthy body, able to dispense material assistance to all and sundry undertakings in the wide field of natural knowledge. How far this is from the truth may be seen from the statement of the Society’s income published in the ‘“‘ Year-Book.” In this we see that the total regular income of the Society, apart from funds which it administers in a fiduciary character, amounts only to about 5o0o/., and out of this, supple- mented by various small miscellaneous, and vicarious, receipts and a portion of the Government publication grant, provision has to be found for an expenditure which last year amounted to 2572/. onits publications alone, and 1300/. for its “ Catalogue of Scientific Papers,” in addition to all the expenses of establishment and library. Such a condition of affairs, hampering, as we are told it does, the usefulness of the Society, which has been aptly de- scribed by a distinguished foreign savant as “ the mother of learned societies,” and renders almost daily to the nation important services in matters of deep concern to the people in all parts of the Empire, is testimony only too eloquent to the indifference with which the pursuit of science is regarded in this country. Space forbids us to refer at length to other undertakings in which advance is recorded in this volume. One of the most important is the completion of the “ Supplementary Volume of the Catalogue of Scientific Papers,” a volume of 807 quarto pages containing a list of the papers not previously catalogued in the volumes already published, for the period ending with 1883. The Society has already embarked upon the compilation of a similar catalogue for the period 1883-1900. With the completion of this work, however, the Royal Society’s direct responsibilities in this matter will cease, the task being taken up from that point by the organisation, to which attention has more than once been called in these columns, of the “ Inter- national Catalogue of Scientific Literature.” Other matters of more strictly domestic interest are | duly recorded, The Society’s collection of portraits and medals has received some notable additions. The lists of presidents and other officers, and of the recipients of the Society’s medals, are brought up to date. But perhaps the most interesting part of the volume is the list of Fellows of the Society from its foundation up tothe present time. Such a roll of worthies furnishes a NO. 1706, VoL. 66] [JuLY 10, 1902 wealth of suggestion to the student of natural knowledge, and their biographies, if they could be presented to us in due sequence, would form an epitome of the history of scientific advance during the past 240 years which might almost be said to be synonymous with the history of the development of modern England. A word must be added in praise of the interesting series of portraits which is begun in the “ Record,” reproduced from photographs made by Sir William Abney from pictures in the posses- sion of the Society. The present volume contains por- traits of Sir Isaac Newton, Henry Oldenburg, Lord John Somers and Sir James Burrow, and we are promised a continuation of the series in future editions of the work. The principal new feature in this year’s “ Year-Book,” now in its sixth issue, is the incorporation of the complete official list of Fellows of the Society living on January 1, 1902, in place of the abbreviated list which has hitherto done duty in this work. This expanded list has added twenty pages to the size of the handbook, which contains besides, among other current information, the statutes and standing orders of the Society, lists of its Council and its twenty-six standing committees, the regulations for the administration of the Government grant for scientific investigations, the president’s anniversary address and the annual report of the Council, with a statement of accounts and obituary notices of Fellows deceased. Appended to the Council’s report is the report of a committee of the Society upon the vexed question of the organisation of philosophico-historical studies, a subject which has been already much discussed in the Press. Altogether the ‘“ Year-Book” indicates clearly enough how multifarious and important are the activities of the Royal Society. THE FUTURE OF THE VICTORIA UNIVERSITY. URING the next few months the Privy Council will be called upon to come to a decision on a matter vitally affecting higher education in the north of England. The Victoria University, which has been in existence for twenty-three years, has come to a stage in its career when its future must be definitely settled. Liverpool has applied for a separate charter, and Owens College gives its hearty support to the establishment of three distinct and independent universities in place of the present federation. The ambition of Manchester to have an independent university is not of recent growth. In the year 1641 a petition was presented to Parliament asking fora charter, but rival claims were brought forward by the town of York and nothing came of the effort. A fresh start in the same direction was made in 1836, but only resulted in the affiliation of the Manchester Academy to the London University. The more recent attempts of Owens College to establish a university in the city of Manchester will be in the recollection of many readers of NATURE. The opposition of Yorkshire (history repeats itself) was again successful, and led to the foundation of the Victoria University, which has, on the whole, worked well. What, then, are the reasons for its proposed dissolution ? The functions of a university are threefold—to teach, to advance knowledge and to examine. The more inti- mately these three functions are interwoven, the more effectively will the university fulfil its purpose. Their separation has been the great impediment to the progress of university education in this country. This is beginning to be recognised, and the recent efforts of Wales, of Birmingham and of London all tend in the direction of subordinating examination to teaching and of giving a proper place in the university ideal to research and advance of knowledge. The Victoria University was founded in order to es- tablish a greater harmony between teaching andexamining TuLy 10, 1902] NATURE 253 than was possible under the old system, which gave the London University control of the examinations. This worked well for a time, but owing to the growth in the number of students, owing also to the different directions in which the three colleges are developing, we are rapidly ‘drifting back to the old state. Victoria University is now practically an examining body, which unites all dis- advantages, for while on the one hand it controls the teaching too much in some directions, it is unable to secure uniformity of standard inothers.’ This is a funda- mental defect of the federal system, which can only work well during the early growth of the federated colleges, and will always break down as scon as some of the colleges are strong enough to stand alone. As a mere piece of administrative machinery, ‘the federal university must always be clumsy and wasteful. its statutes and regulations must be framed to satisfy the various and sometimes diverging requirements of the different colleges. This can only be done by means of endless meetings and constant compromises. It is the duty of every teacher to give up a portion of his time to administrative work, and he will be glad to do so if satisfactory results may be arrived at without a wasteful expenditure. Every man has only a certain amount of strength and energy, and every hour spent in the com- mittee room is so much taken away from his power of promoting knowledge. Simplicity of machinery is a matter of primary importance in university organisation, and it is not too much to assert that whatever success the Victoria University has achieved, it has done at the expense of taking away a very substantial and unneces- sary amount of time, which its teachers might more profitably have spent in their studies or laboratories. The objections to the splitting of the Victoria University are chiefly based on the assumption that a multiplication of universities is bad in itself. : “ Union is strength” is a good party cry, but the saying is not true when the union is of the kind one gets in a three-legged race. If there are universities in Manchester, Liverpool and Leeds, it is further asked, why not one in Sheffield or in Oldham, Rochdale or Burnley? Such objections are not serious, and savour too much of the political platform. We might as well argue that we should not eat and drink enough because we might possibly eat and drink too much. _ Surely, if a town possesses a college of sufficient standing to supply the highest teaching in its various faculties, it it is established on such financial basis as will secure its permanence and its capability of attracting teachers of eminence in the future, and if there is a sufficient supply of students, no reason can be urged against the creation of a fresh university. Competition and rivalry, it is argued, will lower the standard of a degree. This objection springs from that distrust of the teaching profession which has been one of the chief causes of the backward state of education in this country, and is only now being slowly overcome. Because it is believed that a teacher, if left to him- self, will neglect his dutiés, all kinds of safeguards, ex- ternal examinations and inspections are invented, which may be excellent if intended to help the teacher, but are bound to break down if used to overlook and correct him. The three Dutch universities of Amsterdam, Leyden and Utrecht are nearer to each other than Liver- pool, Leeds and Manchester. Though subject to certain “State regulations as regards curricula, the teachers are entirely free to fix their own standard of examination. Any of these universities could, if it wished, lower its standards and give its degrees on easier terms than the other two. If they do not do so, it is because they are not foolish enough to commit suicide, but desire to attract the best students, and keep them for post-graduate and research work. Rivalry will be found to act as a healthy stimulant and not as a temptation. America is sometimes pointedly referred to as an ex- NO. 1706, VOL. 66] ample of the evil effects of the multiplication of univer- sities, and of the danger which accompanies the complete freedom of power to confer degrees. This freedom has apparently led to the depreciation of degrees in the case of a few institutions which abuse their privilege. But the standard of university education in a country should be judged by its highest and not by its lowest work, and when we think of university education in America we think of Harvard, of Yale, of Cornell and other places of high reputation, and do not trouble about a few insignificant places, which after all do very little harm. If we could secure another half-dozen efficient and progressive universities in England, they would not be too dearly purchased, even if by some mischance one or two were established which did not justify their exist- ence. But there is no fear as regards the immediate question at issue that any lowering of standard will result from the separation of the three northern colleges. In this country it is the old and not the new universities which are tempted to give degrees on insufficient attain- ments, and can do so without loss of prestige. There are, of course, matters in which cooperation is desirable. Different entrance or preliminary examina- tions would obviously be objectionable and complicate the work of the schoolmaster who prepares boys for the university. Unification is here called for, not only as between the three colleges of the Victoria University, but throughout the country. The question of separation should not be mixed up with the no doubt very important question of admission to a university course. A plausible argument against the multiplication of degree-giving bodies is found in the case of medicine, where the degree carries a qualification with it. The fact that this objection has been very strongly urged shows that our present system is not understood, and that separation is called for in the interest of a clearer definition of the meaning of our degrees. Efficiency is most easily secured if the burden of responsibility is placed on the right shoulders. Let each college give its own stamp to its own graduates, and the college will take better care to secure good teaching than while it can shelter itself behind the nondescript “Victoria University.” This holds with special force where the examination, as in medical subjects, is to a great extent of a practical character. It is impossible in these cases to secure equality, and if the public is induced to think that the training or even the examination test is necessarily identical the public is deceived. If separation means the clearer realisation of the nature of the training received, separation is an advantage. It will be to the ultimate good of each institution, if it feels the weight of its responsibility, and is more immediately made to suffer in public estimation for deficiencies in any of its departments. The effect of this feeling of responsibility is very real and swift. Liver- pool has already raised a large sum of money condition- ally on a charter being granted, and Leeds has put down its wants at a high figure. What is all this money wanted for except to make the teaching more efficient? It is wanted just as much whether the Victoria University remains as it is or divides ; but the probable establish- ment of separate universities has roused the feeling of responsibility, and brought the gaps and deficiencies home to the governing bodies and to the public, One further and very cogent argument must be brought forward. University education is often looked upon too much as a matter standing by itself, and without relation- ship to the previous training of the boys at school, or the parallel training in technical colleges. If a coordination of education is desirable, a federal university of colleges situated in three large cities becomes an impossibility. It is not necessary to argue this point in detail. Those who know the conditions of educational facilities in the north of England, will realise that the great diversity 254 which exists in the three towns is bound to render one common organisation so cumbersome that it would neces- sarily check the freedom of development which is essential to success. Speaking for Manchester alone, does it need further argument that a more effective university may be formed by a close cooperation between Owens College, the Municipal School of Tech- nology, the School of Art, the College of Music, and the various theological colleges, than is possible with the present federation, which is confined to Owens College alone? And is it not obvious that the interest in higher education which would be roused by the common feeling of the governing bodies of all these institutions for a great university in Manchester will more effectively secure a high standard of work and a progressive spirit, than the artificial union of three colleges in different towns? In our effort to secure educational freedom we count on the sympathy of all who are truly anxious for educational progress, and we count more especially on the help of those who are now working out a similar problem in the University of London. ARTHUR SCHUSTER. NOTES. WE regret to see the announcement of the death of M. H. Faye, the eminent French astronomer, at the age of eighty- eight years. Dr. J. G. GARsoN has been appointed assistant general secretary of the British Association, in succession to the late Mr. G. Griffith. SPECIMENS of volcanic dust collected in St. Vincent and Martinique, during the recent eruptions, which have been placed by the Colonial Office at the disposal of the Board of Education, are exhibited in the Western Galleries of the Victoria and Albert Museum. To this exhibit there has been added some dust which fell in Barbados, with chemical analyses of the same, and drawings of the minerals which it contains. THE United States Congress has amended the law which pro- vided for the opening of the Universal Exposition at St. Louis, May 1, 1903, by deferring it for one year. This has been done for many reasons, the principal being that, since its inception, the scope of the exhibition has enlarged. Up to the middle of June the money available for the exhibition, including State and national appropriations, amounted to more than 4,000, 000/. A CORRESPONDENT sends usa cutting from the A/azchester Guardian, announcing that Mr. Assheton Smith has consented to present to the University College of North Wales a site on the Menai Straits for the erection of a marine zoological station. A special fund for the erection of this station is being started, and already Mr. H. R. Davies, of Treborth, who has acted as treasurer of the Puffin Island station since 1892, has led off with a handsome subscription. WITH respect to the recent coloured sunsets that have been and are being seen in this country, it is interesting to note that similar phenomena are being observed in Germany. Thus the Berlin correspondent of the Standard writes (July 7) :—‘‘ For some time past, both at sunrise and towards dusk, there has been visible here a remarkable glow of colour on the horizon, the sky exhibiting an appearance of unusual beauty. Men of science put forth the theory that this phenomenon is caused by particles in the air emanating from the fiery mass ejected by Mont Pelée.” The coloured sunsets referred to last week (pp. 222, 230) were noticed at Lewisham on the evening of June 26. Mr. R. McLachlan, F.R.S., writes to say that when facing nearly due east his attention was attracted by a peculiar NO. 1706, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLY.10, 1902 tint in the sky. On proceeding to the front of the house the effect was extremely brilliant, the red predominating. Mr. McLachlan thinks the tint in the eastern sky was probably due to reflection. Mr. A. R. Tankard writes to confirm the obser- vations of remarkable sunsets at Madeira, described by Mr. F. W. T. Krohn in NATuRE of June 26. He says that the peculiar sunset effects were not visible in the district of the Canary Isles and Madeira during April. As the chief eruptions in Martinique and St. Vincent took place in the first two weeks of May, and the curious effects described made their appearance subsequently, namely, in the early days of June, their connection with the eruptions is rendered probable. A NOTE in a recent number of the British Journal of Photo- graphy (July 4) gives a brief account of a balloon voyage of a very uncomfortable nature that was made by Dr. Miethe in company with Lieutenant Hildebrandt. The account, which is taken from the Photographisches Wochenblatt, states that the ascent was made at Tegel in the afternoon at three o’clock, and the balloon came to earth at half-past six between Nieder-Finow and Liepe. At the ascent the balloon passed first through a mist, and then suddenly into a thunder cloud, After attaining a height of 200 metres, the balloon/was suddenly carried to an altitude of 2000 metres, and then as suddenly fell half that distance. Meanwhile the storm was proceeding, but although the travellers did not see the lightning they were deafened with the thunder, and pelted with rain, hail and sleet. In their rapid leaps and plunges the car was frequently on a level with the balloon, and the tow-rope above their heads. The violent rocking of the car also added to the danger. Watches were not thought of, but according to the barograph this frightful experience must have lasted half-an-hour, when, through loss of gas by pressure, the balloon fell from a height of 2200 metres upon a dense wood of beeches, but for which the travellers would probably have lost their lives. One of them descended by the rope, and obtained help from the villagers at Liepe. WE have to record the death by drowning, on Tuesday, July 1, of Mr. A. D. Hogg, a student of the Royal College of Science, London. Mr. Hogg, who had been a botanical assistant to Prof. Bayley Balfour in the University of Edinburgh, his native place, came to London and the Royal College of Science as a National Scholar in the autumn of 1901. Having obtained high qualification in botany, zoology and geology, he recently, pro- ceeded to St. Andrew’s, at the suggestion of Prof. Howes, to study under Prof. McIntosh, in preparation for his return to South Kensington and zoology in the coming autumn. On the evening of his first day in the Gatty Marine Laboratory, seeking quietude and respite from the western sands, which were crowded at the time, he wandered to the mouth of the river to bathe. Not knowing the dangers of the spot, he swam out and was overcome, and in his loss science has become the poorer by an earnest and promising student. ‘Rerorts from Vienna, published in the Daz/y Mazi, state that a severe earthquake lasting twenty seconds occurred at Salonica at 4.20 p.m. on Saturday, July 5. Before the news reached Vienna the instruments at the Laibach Seismological Observatory registered a great disturbance towards the south-east at an estimated distance of 600 miles. Later tele- grams state that the earthquake was felt right across the Balkan peninsula, The shocks began on Saturday afternoon, and con- tinued with frequent intervals until midday on Monday. A very cold wind is said to have accompanied the earthquake. More than 200 houses were wrecked at the village of Bani, three miles from Salonica. Ir is reported that two slight shocks of earthquake occurred jn the neighbourhood of Cheadle, Cheshire, on July 8. JuLY 10, 1902] NATURE 255 WE regret to learn of the death of the Abbé Maze, on June 17, at the age of sixty-six years. He had been for many years one of the editors of our contemporary, Cosmos ; his first con- nection with that journal was as meteorologist after the Franco- Prussian War of 1870-1, and he was for some time secretary of the French Meteorological Society. About twenty years ago he undertook a laborious investigation into the periodicity of rainfall, which he has left uncompleted ; it is said that he had established a double period of 6, and 6 x 7, or 42 years, for the recurrence of similar general phenomena. He was also engaged for many years on a history of the thermometer, and has left in manuscript a large amount of valuable information upon this subject, collected from every available source, and which we hope will eventually be brought to light. THE Morning, the auxiliary ship of the National Antarctic Expedition, sailed yesterday for Lyttelton, New Zealand, ex route to the Antarctic regions, where it is intended to meet the Discovery with supplies, and to render any other services which may be required. From an article in the Z?mes we learn that while the main object of the Morning is to act as tender to the Discovery, still she is well equipped with scientific instruments of various kinds, some of which have been supplied by the Admiralty, including survey instruments, a large photographic equipment, sounding gear, and apparatus for collecting at least the surface fauna of the ocean. Constant meteorological observations will be taken, and in other respects as far as possible the staff on board the Morning will do its best to supplement the work of the Dzscovery. The captain of the Morning and commander of the relief expedition is Mr. William Colbeck, who was one of the staff of the Southern Cross Antarctic Expedition, on which he took the observations and drew the charts. ACCORDING to a recent paragraph in the 77zmes, the arrange- ments for the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, under the leadership of Mr. W. S. Bruce, are making satisfactory pro- gress. The Norwegian whaler Hek/a, which Mr. Bruce recently purchased for the expedition, is to be renamed the Scotia. The ship is now being reconstructed on the Clyde, at Troon, by the Ailsa Shipbuilding Company, under the guidance of Mr. G. L. Watson, the well-known yacht designer. The Scotia is a barque-rigged auxiliary screw steamer of about 400 tons register. New deckhouses are being built, a larger one aft and a smaller one forward divided into a laboratory and cook’s galley. A second laboratory and dark room is to be fitted between decks. The ship is being specially fitted to carry on oceanographical research, both physical and biological. Two drums, each containing 6000 fathoms of cable, for trawling in the deepest parts of the Southern and Antarctic Oceans, are being taken. Mr. Bruce intends to follow the track of Wed- dell and to explore the Ross deep, working eastwards from the Falkland Islands, A NUMBER of papers dealing with various aspects of the recent eruptions in the West Indies appear in the current issues of the geographical and other scientific journals. A short article on ‘‘ Martinique und sein Vulkanismus,” in the June number of Petermann’s Mitteilungen, by Dr. Emil Deckert, is accom- panied by an excellent map of the island. Dr. Michel-Levy, director of the geological survey of France, contributes a paper on the Mont Pelée eruptions, with some admirable geomorpho- logical diagrams, to the Revue générale des Sciences. In the Geographical Journal for July Mr. E. André describes a visit to St. Vincent, and some excellent photographs are reproduced, while Mr. H. N. Dickson gives a narrative of events, advancing the view that the destruction of St. Pierre was caused by a tornado originating in the hot gases issuing from the crater of Mont Pelée. A paper on the Windward Isles, by Dr. J. W. NO. 1706, VOL. 66] Spencer, appears opportunely in the 7yansactions of the Cana- dian Institute ; it is illustrated by a number of plates and six valuable charts showing the contour of the sea-bottom. THE fate of M. Andrée is still a subject of speculation. A Reuter telegram from Winnipeg states that the Rev. Mr. Fairies, an Anglican missionary among the Eskimos within the Arctic Circle, has arrived there and repeats the story, which was brought two years ago by an Eskimo to Port Churchill, that a band of natives found M. Andrée and party 300 miles to the north of Port Churchill. On approaching them M. Andrée fired a gun. The natives interpreted this as a hostile act and set upon the explorers and killed them. The Hudson Bay Company offered a large reward to the messenger to bring some relic. He departed, but neverreturned. Mr. Fairies described an instrument resembling a telescope, which was taken from the outfit and carried with other loot to the Arctic Circle by the Eskimos. THE seventeenth annual meeting of the Photographic Con- vention of Great Britain was opened at Cambridge on Monday, when Sir Robert Ball, the new president, delivered an address on astronomical photography. THE Brazilian Minister and the staff of the Brazilian Legation will attend the meeting of the Aéronautical Society to be held on Thursday next, July 17. The following papers will be read :—‘* The ‘ Peace’ Balloon of the late Senhor Augusto Severo,” by Dr. Carlos Sampaio and Mr. Eric Stuart Bruce ; **Balloon Ascents in Thunderstorms,” by the Rev. J. M. Bacon; ‘© Performance of the Bristol War Balloon during the South African War,” by Captain H. B. Jones, R.E.; and ‘‘ The Cycala Flying Machine,” by Dr. Charles Zimmerman. Tue Sydney correspondent of the Daz/y Maz/ reports that the drought has become intensified in Queensland and in parts of New South Wales, while there has been rain elsewhere. The New South Wales rainfall for June on the coast to the south of Sydney is 95 per cent. below the average of the corresponding month in past years. In the immediate neigh- bourhood of Sydney the deficiency is 91 per cent., on the Hunter River $5 per cent., on the North Coast 93 per cent., on the Darling River $4 per cent., and between the Darling, the Lachlan and the Bogan Rivers 87 per cent. A FEW examples of the practical application of scientific education in Germany are given in the /ourza/ of the Society of Arts. The sugar industry is the first illustration of the progress of industry through science. In 1840, 154,000 tons of beet- root were crushed, from which 8000 tons of raw sugar were produced, showing about 54 per cent. of raw sugar extracted from the root. Twenty years later, 1,500,000 tons were treated, which produced 128,000 tons of sugar, or about 8 per cent. Last year about 12,000,000 tons were crushed, which pro- duced 1,500,000 tons of raw sugar, raising the percentage to 13. This advance is due entirely to scientific treatment. The pro- duction of dry colours, chemicals and dyes in Germany shows a corresponding increase in production and dividend-paying capacity. The great increase of earning capacity is due largely to the constant labour of trained men, who by application of their technical knowledge have so cheapened production that they have succeeded in getting this trade out of the hands which previously controlled it. A great advance has also been made in the scientific instrument industry. The value of the exports from Germany of scientific instruments in the year 1898 was about 250,000/,—three times what it was in 1888—and the work gave employment to 14,000 people. These are a few of the many instances showing the close connection between the scientific education of the German people and their commercial prosperity. 250 NATURE [JuLY 10, 1902 THE United States Weather Bureau has just issued a paper by Prof. Alfred J. Henry on wind velocity and fluctuations of water level on Lake Erie. Continuous automatic records of the variations of level at Amherstburg and Buffalo for December, 1899, to November, 1900, are correlated with wind records at Buffalo for the same period, and the material applied to analysis of seiches of different types, including the ‘fair weather” seiches and those accompanying storms. The period of the smaller seiches is about fourteen hours, that of the larger about sixteen hours. The occurrence of a severe seiche at Buffalo cannot be foretold many hours in advance, but sufficient time could generally be given to warn property interests along the wharves. THE report of the Californian section of the climate and crop service of the Weather Bureau, for April, contains an interesting note ona statement in the article on Francis Drake in the ‘‘ Dic- tionary of National Biography.” Referring to the position of Drake’s anchorage near the Golden Gate in June, 1579, the article says :—‘* The one doubtful point is the account of the climate, which is described with much detail as excessively cold and foggy. (Vaux, pp. 113-118). This is now said to be an exaggeration, but to speak of the climate near San Francisco or anywhere on that coast in July in these terms is not exaggeration, but a positive and evidently wilful falsehood (Greenhow, ‘ History of Oregon and California,’ 1845), credulously inserted by the original compiler of the ‘World Encompassed.’’’ The Weather Bureau station at Point Reyes Light, probably not more than three miles from Drake’s anchorage, amply confirms the correctness of Drake’s description. Fog is specially prevalent during the months June, July and August, and it is generally accompanied by strong north-westerly winds, often reaching a velocity of fifty miles an hour ; a comparison of the records with those from the stations at San Francisco and on Mount Tamalpais shows an astonishing contrast as regards temperature, relative humidity and duration of sunshine. Prof. George Davidson, who was in charge of the work of the Coast Survey in this region, and has published a paper on the “‘ Identification of Sir Francis Drake’s Anchorage on the Coast of California,” says ‘‘that from July 2, 1859, the fog hung over the promontory of Point Reyes for thirty-nine consecutive days and nights.” IN an article in NATURE of April 18, 1901, attention was directed to the commercial uses made of peat in Sweden, where it is coming largely into use as a substitute for coal for steam engines. In a recent number of the Angineer (June 27) an account is given, with illustrations, of the peat fuel works at Stangfiorden, in Norway, where electricity generated by water power has been in use since 1898 for the manufacture of peat for fuel, which is of the more interest because it is reported that negotiations are now in progress for the introduction of this system for the development of one of the water powers on the west coast of Ireland. So far peat fuel and moss litter are the only two products that have been obtained from a very limited number out of the numerous peat bogs to be found in this and other countries. The chief difficulty in manufacturing peat fuel jis the extraction of the water, which comprises about 85 per cent. of the whole bulk, and which must be removed before the remaining carbonaceous matter can be rendered available for fuel. At Stangfiorden the wet peat is brought direct from the bog to the factory in boats of 100 tons capacity ; the material is removed from these by electric agency and submitted to a preliminary operation of drying and pressing. The briquettes thus formed are then transported on small iron trolleys with shelves to the interior of the drying chamber. Warm air is driven through this by electric fans. From the drying chamber the blocks are taken on the same trolley to the retorts, where they are packed round spiral resistance coils and the electric NO. 1706, VOL. 66] heating agent set in operation, The peat yields—besides the fuel briquettes, which form 33 per cent. of the whole—tar, charcoal, creosote, sulphate of ammonia and other bye-products. The electric power is derived from five 80-kilowatt dynamos coupled direct to five turbines of 128 H.P. The plant is capable of turning out 1000 centners of air-dried peat a day. The fuel burns well, yields little soot or ash, and is readily disposed of in Bergen and other towns. FROM a paper communicated by Prof. Héfer to the Vienna. Academy of Sciences it appears that spring waters from a large number of different petroleum districts either contain no sul- phates or at most a minimal quantity of these salts. Under the influence of the petroleum and marsh gas, the sulphates have probably undergone reduction. It is pointed out that the absence of sulphuric acid in waters from petroleum provinces may be advantageously made use of in a practical way for ascertain- ing the whereabouts of petroleum deposits or inversely for determining the source of the waters in question. MEssrs. SANDERS AND CROWHURST have sent usa catalogue of the photographic apparatus which is made and sold by them. The list contains almost everything ‘that a photographer can desire ; many useful novelties are included. Messrs. A. W. PENROSE AND Co, are making Mr. Alex. Tallent’s diffraction spectroscope camera, an account of which instrument is given in a small pamphlet published by Messrs. Penrose. The main feature of this camera is that we have in a small compass a light, compact, handy and inexpensive spectro- scope, ready for use at any moment. Such an instrument is rendered possible only by the introduction of the Thorp diffrac- tion prism-grating, which does away with the necessity of a train of prisms to obtain large dispersion and what is also am important item, the outlay of considerable expense. The compactness of the instrument is due chiefly to the fact that the prism-grating forms a direct vision system. The instrument, a full account of which is given in the pamphlet, only costs from forty-five to sixty-three shillings, according to the require- ments of the user, and will be found very serviceable in many directions, such as the composition of various light sources, colour sensitiveness of plates, examination of dark-room filters, &c. The plate which accompanies the text describes better than words the different uses to which the instrument can be applied, and the scale on which the spectra are obtained. A COMPARATIVE study of the permeability of living and dead animal membranes by measurement of the electrolytic resistance has recently been made by Mr. G. Galeotti, and the results are published in Lo Sperimentah, Archivio di Biologia norm. e patol., vol. lvi. The living membranes were first investigated, and then after remaining in chloroform vapour for some time were again placed in the electrolytic cell and the resistance of the solution measured as before. Various salt solutions were employed, the strengths of these being in the majority of cases one-tenth normal. The author finds that the resistance of membranes, which in the animal body separate solutions of different nature and concentration from one another, is ten to forty times greater in the living condition than when the membranes are dead. The resistance of membranes, which have no functions of this character in the animal system, is, on the other hand, unaltered by the action of chloroform vapour. The conclusion is drawn that membranes of the first class, for example, from the czecum of the rabbit and the bladder of the turtle, behave as semipermeable membranes in the living con- dition, but this semipermeability is lost when the cells are dead. Membranes of the second class, on the other hand, act simply as diffusion membranes, and the permeability of these is the same whether living or dead. JULY 10, 1902] ALTHOUGH the question as to whether the nitrogen of the albuminates present in the animal body is partly set free in the form of free gaseous nitrogen has been experimentally studied on several occasions, yet the conclusions drawn by different investigators working under different conditions are by no means concordant. The first series of such investigations was carried out by Regnault and Reiset, who found, in the great majority of their experiments, a considerable increase in the quantity of nitrogen in the respired air. About one hundred experiments were made and animals of totally different classes were subjected to investigation. Seegen and Nowak, with an improved apparatus which permitted of the experiments being continued over much longer periods of time, obtained results which agreed with those of the first observers. Hans Leo, working under different conditions, concluded, on the other hand, that nitrogen, as a product of the decomposition of albuminates, is not set free from the animal system. In Leo’s latest experiments, the bodies of the animals under investigation were immersed in water, and under these conditions it was found that the alteration in the amount of nitrogen of the air was scarcely perceptible. To promote the further investigation of this subject, Prof. J. Seegen has placed 6000 kronen at the disposal of the Vienna Academy of Sciences, which sum is offered by the Academy as a prize for the solution of the question. The formulation of the problem reads :—‘“‘ Es ist festzustellen, ob ein Bruchtheil des Stickstoffes der im thierischen Korper umgesetzten Albuminate als freier Stickstoff in Gasform, sei es durch die Lunge, sei es durch die Haut ausgeschieden wird.” Papers sent in for competition are to be written in German, French or English, and should be sent to the office of the Acadeniy before February 1, 1904. THE American Naturalist for June contains an article, by Mr. W. R. Coe, on the Nemertean worms parasitically infesting certain crabs, in the course of which the new genus Carcinomertes is described. MODERN refinements of description render it of the utmost importance that skins of small mammals should be made up on one uniform plan. Mr. G. S. Miller has accordingly pub- lished in the Budéletins of the U.S. Museum a revised edition of directions for making such preparations, with abstracts in German, French and Spanish. AMONG other articles, part 4 of vol. Ixxi. of the Zeztschr7ft fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie contains one by Dr. K. Escherich on the development of the nervous system in flies, and a second, by Prof. P. Bachmetjew, on the effects of heat on the develop- ment of the pupe of butterflies and moths. The nerves of the skin form the subject of a third communication, by Dr, Tretjakoff. THE thoroughness of American methods is well exemplified in a review of the horned larks (Otocoris), by Mr. H. C. Oberholser, forming No. 1271 of the Proceedings of the U.S. Museum. In addition to four maps illustrating the distribution and breeding areas of these larks, this memoir contains photo- graphs showing the different kinds of country inhabited by the various local races of certain species. These birds vary so much according to environment that their classification and identification are the despair of the systematist. The manner and degree of this variation—and not the mere identification of specimens—should be the aim of the investigator. In the June issue of the American Naturalist Mr. J. F. McClendon describes the life-history of the insect commonly known as U/ula hyalina, a near relative of the so-called ant- lion of Europe. The larva ‘‘ hides in some slight depression or under the edge of a stone, with its body covered with sand and its mandibles widely extended so as to touch the fringe of NO. 1706, VOL. 66] NATURE 257 hairs on each side of the head. Its brown colour simulates the colour of the sand. Its body is hidden by the covering of sand, and the head is somewhat concealed by its peculiar covering of hairs, so that small insects may crawl, unawares, too near the extended mandibles. In this case the larva thrusts out its head and snaps the mandibles together, pinioning the victim on the curved points. It then proceeds to suck out the juices of its prey like an ant-lion.” AN appendix to the twentieth annual Aefort of the Scotch Fishery Board contains notes on the digestive tract of salmon and sea-trout kelts from the Tweed by Mr. J. K. Barton, illus- trated with some beautiful reproductions from photographs of microscopic preparations. The author is of opinion that sea- trout continue to feed to within a shorter interval of their entering fresh-water than is the case with salmon, although when in the rivers both fishes are equally abstemious. No trace of the desquamative catarrh of the mucous coat which has been sup- posed to characterise the intestines of river fish was observed. It must be left for subsequent examinations to determine whether salmon-disease is due to the fungus Saprolegnia, or whether the presence of that fungus is merely the precursor of death owing to other diseased conditions. MUCH interest attaches to an article in the American Naturalist for June on aggregated colonies in madreporiform corals, by Dr, J. E. Duerden. The fact that coral larvz will occasionally attach themselves to the cups of adult corals of the same species has been noticed by previous observers. The author finds, however, that in certain West Indian corals an analogous process is quite a common method of formation of composite corals, the larvee of Siderastrzea frequently fixing themselves close together in small groups upon some con- venient base. In course of time they grow together to form a colony, which thus differs from an ordinary colony in consisting of several individuals. Such an aggregate colony may be dis- tinguished, for a time at least, from one of the ordinary type, by the fact that the component items are not in communication at the base. THE search for the missing link forms the subject of an article, by Mr. R. S. Baker, in this month’s /d/er, mainly based on the discovery of ‘‘ Pithecanthropus” and Prof. Haeckel’s expedition to Java in search of further remains of that mysterious creature. The author traces the gradual “evolution” of the conception of the origin of one group of animals from another, and illustrates his subject with excellent portraits of Darwin, Haeckel, Huxley and Wallace. We are afraid that the illustrated table of man’s descent will be apt to prove a stumbling-block to the uninitiated, and that the gorilla, gibbon, opossum, iguana, &c., will be regarded as among man’s direct ancestors. The inclusion of marsupials in man’s genea- logical tree is, we fear, an error which it will take some time to eradicate from popular writings. The author would have done well to have shown his proof to some zoological friend, which would have resulted in the elimination of the sentence as to the association of Pithecanthropus with the elephant, rhinoceros, hyzena, &c. What may be the animal designated in the same sentence as “the gigantic pangolin” we are at a loss to conceive. A BRIEF summary of progress in archeological and ethno- logical research in the United States during last year is given by Prof. F. W. Putnam in a reprint from vol. xiv. of the Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society (1901, pp. 461-470). Since the paper was read at the annual meeting of the Society in October 1901, the Carnegie Institute has been founded at Washington, and the broad spirit in which it has been organised gives satisfaction to all who are anxious to extend 258 the boundaries of scientific knowledge. Referring to the Institute, Prof. Putnam remarks: ‘‘The scope of this founda- tion embraces all the sciences, and its purpose is the en- couragement and patronage of research. Such an instituticn will have the power to render incalculable service to American archeology and ethnology, where so much needs to be done without loss of time.” WE have received the first two numbers of a series of occasional reports on the agriculture and forest culture of German East Africa, issued by the Central Government at Dar-es-Salam, and published by Carl Winter at Heidelberg. These reports, which are to be continued as occasion requires, contain the results of valuable scientific investigations by officials, dealing with such matters as the tse-tse fly, analyses of soils, climato- logy, &c. Extracts of reports from numerous civil and military stations are given, and accounts of exploring journeys into less-known regions of the colony. THE current issue of the British Medical Journal (July 5) is a special vaccination number, and contains several interesting contributions on Jenner’s life and works, and on small-pox and vaccination. Much valuable material—scientific, clinical and administrative—connected with the disease and its remedy, is described by writers of recognised authority. Messrs. DucKkworTH AND Co. will publish immediately a book on ‘‘ European Fungus-Flora,” by Mr. George Massee, principal assistant at the Royal Herbarium, Kew. The work will be a synopsis of the European Agaricacez, giving the specific characteristics of 2750 European species, of which 1553 are British. Messrs. DAWBARN AND WARD have commenced the publi- cation of a series of practical handbooks designed to be of service to dwellers in the country. The first book of the series, on ‘* Outdoor Carpentry,” by Mr. S.; Walter Newcomb, gives brief instructions, with plans, sketches and details, for con- structing rustic work of many kinds. Among the subjects of future volumes will be water-supply and distribution, sanitation and drainage, and planning gardens, grounds and outbuildings. THE English Illustrated Magazire for July contains an article upon the supposed portrait of Christ on the Holy Shroud of Turin, translated from the French, and based upon Dr. Vignon’s work on ‘‘Le Linceul du Christ.” The article leaves the question whether the markings upon the shroud were really produced by the body of Christ undecided, but it is held that there is sufficient evidence for the belief that the image was naturally imprinted upon the shroud by the action of vapours arising from a human body. Another article in the magazine, by Mr. J. J. Ward, gives an instructive illustrated account of May-flies and related insects. THE ‘‘ Technolexicon,” or technical dictionary, to be pub- lished by the Society of German Engineers, has previously been referred to in these columns. The editor, Dr. Hubert Jansen, Berlin (N.W. 7), Dorotheenstr. 49, is anxious to include in the dictionary all technical terms used by French, German and English engineers, so that the dictionary shall contain equiva- lent words and expressions in each of the three languages. Collaboration is invited from societies, individuals and engineer- ing works. The editor would be glad to receive technical catalogues, price lists, hand-books, or lists of words and terms for which correct renderings cannot be found in ordinary dictionaries. The work will be so useful when ready that all who are able to contribute to its completeness should do so. THE additions to the Zoological Society’s Gardens during the past week include two White-eared Conures (Pyrrhura leucotis) from Brazil, presented by Lady Lindsay ; two Peregrine Falcons (Halo peregrinus), European, presented by Dr. R. Lawton Roberts; a European Pond Tortoise (Zmys orbicularis), WO. 1706, VOL. 66] NALIURE [JULY 10, 1902 European, presented by the Earl of Dudley ; a Common Viper (Vipera berus), British, presented by Mr. E. Ball; two Snowy Egrets (Ardea candidissima) from America, two Vinaceous Amazons (Chrysotis vinacea), two Red-tailed Amazons (Chrysotis brasiliensis) from Brazil, seven Roofed Terrapins (Kachuga tectum) from India, a Black Sternothere (Sternothoerus niger) from West Africa, a Wrinkled Terrapin (Chrysemys scripta: rugosa) from the West Indies, a Blue-tongued Lizard (7i/igua scéncotdes) from Australia, a Madagascar Tree Boa (Coral/us madagascariensis) from Madagascar, deposited; a Proboscis Monkey (Wasalis /arvatus) from Borneo, two White Storks (Ciconza alba), European, purchased. OUR ASTRONOMICAL COLUMN. Tue PerropicaL Comet or TEMPEL-SwiFr (1869-1880),— This object is one of the most interesting of the somewhat numerous class of comets which at aphelion pass just outside the orbic of Jupiter and perform their revolutions in periods ranging from about 5 to 9 years. First seen by Tempel in 1869 November 27, the character of the orbit was not deter- mined until its independent discovery by Lewis Swift in 1880 October 10. It was then found to be moving in an orbit of short period for the elements deduced by Bruhns, for the apparition of 1869 very closely resembled those obtained by Chandler for the return of 1880, and the latter pointed out the true character of the orbit early in 1880 November. Messrs. Schulhof and Bossert, of Paris, also published elements indi- cating a periodic time of 54 years. The average period for the four returns which occurred between 1869 and 1891 was 2099 days, or 5 years and 183 days. At every alternate return, however, the comet is invisible. The perihelion is reached at a distance of about 10,000,000 miles outside the earth’s orbit, and the three previously observed perihelion passages having occurred between November 6 and 18, the conditions were extremely favourable, the longitude of the comet’s perihelion being 43° and the longitude of the earth on November 6 being 43°. The comet and earth were, in fact, mutually situated in or near those parts of their orbits which make the nearest approach to each other. At alternate returns such as in 1875, 1886, 1897, 1908 and 1919, the earth is on the opposite side of the sun to the comet when the latter passes through perihelion. In such circumstances the object is alto- gether beyond reach, for at one of these unfavourable returns it is placed nearly 200,000,000 miles from the earth, whereas under the best conditions, similar to those which prevailed during the apparition in 1880, the distance may be less than one-tenth of that mentioned, As in 1869, 1880 and 1891, so in 1902, the comet will be very favourably visible in the autumn and winter months, and it will probably be re-detected in one of our large telescopes in about September next. The object will be by no means con- spicuous, nor is it likely to display any attractive variety of aspect, but any moderately good telescope will show it as a large faint nebulosity. One of the best known of the ever- increasing group of Jovian comets, it will be sure to attract considerable attention during its forthcoming return, not so much, perhaps, on account of its visible characteristics as from the example it affords of a numerous class of bodies and from the interesting history attached to its previous appearances. Mr. Tessurtr’s OpseERVATORY AT Winpsor, N.S.W.— The annual report of this observatory for 1901 shows that much useful work was done last year. Measures of the positions of Venus, Ceres, Parthenope, Melpomene and Diana were made and the results forwarded to the Astronomésche Nachrichten (Band clvi. p. 105). Under ‘‘Comet Observations” we find that 273 determina- tions of the position of Comet I. 1901 were made between May 3 and June 13, 1901, and the full results were published in the Astronomische Nachrichten (Band clvi. p. 95 and Band clvii. p. 187). Encke’s comet was fruitlessly sought on the evenings of October 2 and 8. During twenty evenings the measures of twenty-eight double stars were made and the results published in the Monthly Notices ®.A.S. (vol. Ixi. p. 51). The tables of meteorological observations show a temperature above, and a rainfall below the average, the year 1901 being the driest year recorded (excepting 1888) since 1862. JuLy 10, 1902] NATURE 259) Many astronomers will regret the necessity for the inclusion of the following paragraph in the report, for it announces a great loss to observational astronomy generally, and especially to that of the southern hemisphere :— ‘‘In consequence of the author’s advancing years, it is probable that there will bea considerable relaxation in his efforts for the year 1902.” EXTENSION OF THE KATHODE RADIATION HYPOTHESIS TO NeEBUL«&®.—At the meeting of the Académie des Sciences held on June 23, M. Janssen presented a note from M. Deslandres, in which the latter extends the kathode ray hypothesis, which he had already proposed in order to explain solar phenomena, to nebule. The author says that the hypothesis of Arrhenius which attributes the light emitted by nebulz to electrified particles, and also that of Nordman which attributes it to Hertzian rays gathered from space, are both wrong, for if they were true, the terrestrial atmosphere itself would, at night-time, display similar light; therefore, he adds, the light must be in the nebulz themselves. PERSONAL EQUATION IN THE MEASUREMENT OF SPECTRO- scopic NEGATIVES —In a note to the Memorie della Societa degli Sp-ttroscopiste Italiani, M. Hasselberg makes some interesting statements on the part that the personal equation of the observer plays in the measurement of photographic spectra. (uoting the note on this subject, by Mr. Reese, in The Lick Observatory Bulletin, No. 15, wherein it was demon- strated that the tendency in the case of Mr. Reese was to place the dark lines of the spectrum negative, as contrasted with the bright lines, a little too much to the right of the field of the microscope, M. Hasselberg goes on to demonstrate that in his own case the tendency is exactly opposite. Consequently, he finds that, in general, his personal equation makes his wave- lengths come out systematically less than those published by Rowland for the same lines. The author gives three sets of measurements of metallic spectra which he has observed, compares them with the analo- gous values obtained by Rowland, and, after meaning the differences to eliminate accidental errors, he finds that there remains a systematic difference of +0°007 Angstrém units, and this he ascribes to purely physiological causes. In the third table given by M. Hasselberg he compares his measurements of the lines in the tungsten spectrum : (1) when the lines are brought to the centre of the field from the left to the right, and (2) when they are brought to the centre from the right to the left, and here he finds that in the first case his values are too great, whilst in the second case they are too small. The author concludes by pointing out that, although these errors are very small, yet they are too pronounced to be neg- lected, and shows that by a curious coincidence his personal error would, if introduced into the determination of radial velocities, produce a difference of exactly 1 kilometre per second from the true velocity. APPARENT DEFORMATIONS OF THE SUNS DISC NEAR THE HORIZON. ALTHOUGH curious deformations of the apparent shape of the sun and moon near the horizon have been noticed from the earliest times, observations are not very frequently made, and the apparent changes of the appearances of these bodies when near the horizon cannot be said to be very commonly known. Among the earliest descriptions of this phenomenon may be mentioned one during ‘‘ The strange and dangerous voyage of Captaine Thomas James, in his intended Discovery of the Northwest Passage into the South Sea,” London, 1633. He states :—‘‘ I obserued the Sunne to rise like an Ouall, alongst the Horizon: I cald three or foure to see it, the better to confirme my Judgement: and we all agreed, that it was twice as long as it was broad.” On March 26, 1632, James obs-rved the same phenomenon at the time of the rising of the moon. Biot, in his ‘‘Traité élémentaire d’Astronomie physique,” writes :—‘‘ C’est encore par un effet de la réfraction atmo- sphérique que le Soleil 4 horizon parait ovale et aplati dans le sens vertical, méme dans les temps les plus calmes et les plus sereins. Tous les points de son disque sont alors élevés par Veffet de la réfraction, mais ils le sont inégalement : les points inférieurs le sont plus que les supérieurs, parce qu’jls sont plus prés de l’horizon, ow la réfraction est plus forte. te disque du Soleil doit donc alors sembler aplati, dans le sens vertical. ” NO. 1706, VOL. 66] Among more recent papers upon this phenomenon may be mentioned one by Lieut. F. Krifka, entitled, ‘‘ Refractions- erscheinungen der aufgehenden Sonne” (AZefeorologische Zett- schrift, 1891, p. 101). During the trigonometrical survey of Brno in Bohemia, Colonel von Sterneck directed attention to the remarkable shape of the rising sun, and careful observations were taken by himself with a telescope, and by Lieut. KyYifka with the naked eye, until the sun rose above the horizon. Illustrations are given of the shape and colour of the sun during fifteen phases ; the colour was first a deep red and gradually faded into yellow as the sun regained its globular appearance. The forms were very curious, some resembling a basin with a projecting lid ; others appeared very much like the shape of a mushroom, with its stalk ; Jater, an oval shape was assumed. Fic. r. Duming the voyage of the Belgian Antarctic ship Be/gica, M. H. Arctowski, a member of the scientific staff, made frequent observations of the phenomenon in question between Rio de Ia Plata and the Straits of Magellan, both when the sun was rising and setting, and he has communicated the results in an interest- ing paper published in the Budletiz de la Société belge d’Astronomie, accompanied by outline sketches. The descrip- tion given of the phenomenon seen on November 23, 1897 (Fig. 1), off the coast of Patagonia is typical of other observations. On approaching the horizon the lower portion of the sun became flattened, and continued to become more deformed as it descended. At about 3° above the horizon there was a thin film of cloud, and the part of the sun which was still above the level of this little cloud preserved its regular shape. Gradually the lower part assumed a triangular shape, a little point or stem appeared, and became enlarged as it touched the horizon. The sketches show that all the zone comprised between the fine belt of cloud and the horizon possessed the property of deforming the sun’s disc, and that in every case the cloud was the principal seat of the deformations. After the sun had set it was scarcely possible to see the cloud. The sketches very closely resemble the Bohemian illustrations already mentioned. The accompanying figure (Fig. 2) isa reproduction of a photo- graph showing deformation of the setting sun, taken by Prof. W. Prinz, of the Royal Observatory of Belgium, at Uccle, near Brussels, and communicated to the Memorie della Soczeta degli Spettroscopisti italiani, by Prof. A. Riccd. The dark back- ground is drawn exactly circular, in order that the defor- mation of the sun’s disc may be seen more clearly. In this case the ratio of the vertical to the horizontal diameter is 75:84 mm. = 0°893. 2€0 OCEANOGRAPHICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN SOUTH AFRICAN WATERS. ‘THE observations published in the pamphlet of which the title is given below are the first of a series undertaken in connection with the fishery investigations recently inaugurated at the Cape. They include observations made in March and April, 1900, by the Government steamer eter Faure, con- sisting of temperatures and analyses of water samples from points to the west of the Cape Peninsula; observations of | surface temperature made on February rr to 18 and March 3, | 1898, at intervals of about five miles, to a distance of fifty miles west of Cape Town, andona voyage to St. Helena Bay ; daily records of air and sea temperatures taken at Robben Island in Table Bay, and at Roman Rock in Simon’s Bay during the three years 1898-1900; temperatures and analyses of water samples taken at intervals on passages of the Govern- ment trawler between Table Bay and Simon’s Bay, and of mail steamers between Table Bay and Cape Hangklip. An extended series of observations is now in progress over the whole of the South African coast. The investigation of which this forms the beginning is, with- out doubt, one of the most valuable and important of its kind ever attempted. The preliminary international work which has been carried on in the North Sea and the Baltic during the last nine years, and is now about to take definite shape as an organised system of research, has shown that adequate hydro- graphical observations are of the utmost value, not only in them- selves as determining the circulation of waters, but in their relation to climatology and to fishery work of all kinds. Similar research in South African waters has the additional interest of dealing with a region where the current system is not only un- usually complex, but is very strongly and clearly developed ; and the fact that the services of a special ship are available renders the opportunity of studying the relations existing amongst the different current elements unique. Unfortunately, however, the methods employed in the present series of observations seem to leave much to be desired. Nothing is said about the thermometers employed in taking tem- peratures, or about their corrections, and the observations at different depths are made with little reference to the changes of temperature ; many of them are unnecessary, and there are frequent gaps which leave the true form of the temperature curve undetermined. The curves and sections shown suggest that the boundaries between masses of water are often very sharply defined, and that a high degree of accuracy, in the instruments employed, in their working, and in the determinations of ship’s position, is essential. The laboratory analyses of the samples of water collected are still more unsatisfactory. In most cases the chlorines have been determined, by a method not stated, and the results are, for a reason left unexplained, expressed in grains per gallon, thereby rendering them incomparable with any other determinations except those of county analysts. A study of the chlorine values in relation to their geographical dis- tribution does not inspire confidence in the accuracy of the deter- minations, and the uncertainty increases on comparison with the values in columns headed ‘specific gravity” and ‘‘ oxide.” No account is given of the methods by which the specific gravity determinations have been made, nor is there any statement as tothe temperatures to which they are referred, and we find, for example, such records as the following :— Temp. Specific Chlorine in grains 2193 gravity. per gallon 63°00: oJ 1°02712 1412°0 O3KOM ver 102696 1414°5 63/0 1'02700 1409°5 6370 1‘02700 1422°0 63:0 1°02696 1402°0 630 1°02723 1414°5 The determinations of sulphuric oxide, which are, presumably, also stated in grains per gallon, give, on a series of averages (p. 215), values of the chlorine ratio ranging from 11°8 to 12°2, and on a single set (p. 213) from 10°4 to 131. Such determi- nations fall distinctly short of the standard required for work of the kind, and as there is no continuity in the variations, we must regard the whole of the tabular matter in the paper _1“Cape of Good Hope. tions in South Africa. the Sea around B.Sc., Ph.D. NO. 1706, VOL. 66] Department of Agriculture. Marine Investiga- Observations on the Temperature and Salinity of the Cape Peninsula.” By J. D. F. Gilchrist, M.A., NATURE sulphuric | [JuLY 10, 1902 with considerable suspicion. Finally, we note that in a region where meteorological observations are of the greatest interest and value, a specially equipped scientific expedition makes its barometer readings ‘‘ direct from Aneroid.”” We direct attention to these points because the importance of the work imperatively requires that it should be thoroughly well done when there is an opportunity of doing it at all. The detailed reports on methods, published by participants in the | international work already mentioned, and the tables produced by Knudsen under the direction of the International Committee, leave no excuse for doing it otherwise. A NEW FORM OF SEISMOGRAPH. N the Bollettino della Socteta Sismologica Italiana (vol. vii. No. 7), Dr. G. Agamennone gives a detailed description of a seismograph, consisting of two horizontal pendulums each of which carries a mass of 14 kg. and.a vertical spring seismo- graph with a mass of 2kg., which write their records side by side on a band of smoked paper 25 cm. broad. oa A reference to the accompanying figure shows the manner in which these three well known pieces of apparatus, which stand on abed plate 55 cm. square, arearranged. The screws w alter the inclination of the vertical axes of the horizontal pendulums and hence their period. The screws U are to give horizontal ad- justment for the same. By shifting the position of the weights MM, assuming the same to coincide with centres of oscillation, the multiplication of the writing pointers, which are at the ex- tremities of arms attached at 45° to those carrying the weights, may be made twice that of the movement of the ground. It is | almost needless to remark that with so small an amplification the instrument is only intended to record earthquakes which can be felt and are severe. When such an earthquake occurs, the electromagnet F is brought into action to release the clock- work, and the smoked paper then moves beneath the writing pointers at a rate of 25 metres per hour—a speed sufficiently high to give an open diagram of vibrations with periods of 1/1oth second. But is it not desirable to record vibrations with a frequency greater than 10 per second, and in addition to obtain a trace of the preliminary tremors? Dr. A. Cancani, who uses films which move continuously at a rate of 6 metres per hour, obtains something to show the latter, but the rate is not suffi- ciently high to give open records of movements the period of which is very short. Then again, it must not be overlooked that the large movements of severe earthquakes are undulatory | in character, and both horizontal pendulums and vertical spring —] JuLy 10, 1902] NATURE 261 seismographs are simply swung from side to side or up and down under the influence of the tilting of their supporting bed plate. Dr. Agamennone’s new arrangement will no doubt give records which are valuable, but the seismograph which is suitable to record all forms of earthquake motion has yet to be designed. I INH UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL INTELLIGENCE. CAMBRIDGE.—During the long vacation, beginning on July 7, courses of lectures will be given as follows :—Mathematics and astronomy, by Sir Robert Ball, Mr. Richmond, and Mr. Coates; practical histology, by Dr. Hill and Dr. Barclay- Smith; pharmacology, by Prof. Bradbury and Dr. Dixon; osteology, by Dr. Barclay-Smith ; geology, by Mr. Marr ; crystallography, by Mr. Hutchinson ; chemistry, by Mr. Fenton; metallurgy, by Mr. Dootson ; analysis of foods, &c., by Mr. Purvis; practical physics, by demonstrators in the Cavendish Laboratory ; pathology and morbid histology, by Prof. Woodhead and Mr. Strangeways-Pigg ; bacteriology and preventive medicine, by Dr. Nuttall ; animal parasites, by Mr. Shipley ; medicine, by Dr. Humphry and Dr. Lloyd-Jones ; surgery, by Dr. Griffiths and Mr. Wherry ; hygiene, by Dr. Anningson. THE Nature-Study Exhibition to be held at the Royal Botanic Gardens will be opened on July 23 by the Duchess of Devonshire, the Duke of Devonshire being in the chair. A number of interesting conferences have been arranged in con- nection with the exhibition. Among the subjects to be brought forward in addresses and short papers are:—‘‘The Study of Nature,” by Lord Avebury, F.R.S. ; ‘‘Seasonal Studies in Natural History,” by Prof. J. Arthur Thomson; ‘‘ Nature- Study in Elementary Schools,” by Prof. C. Lloyd-Morgan, F.R.S. ; ‘£ Visual Instruction,” by Prof. Bickmore ; ‘‘ Nature- Study in Colleges and Higher Schools,”’ by Prof’ Miall, F.R.S. ; “* Plant-Life as Nature-Study,” by Mr. Scott Elliott ; ‘* School Gardens,” by Mr. T. G. Rooper; ‘‘Geology as a Branch of Nature-Study,” by Prof. Grenville Cole; ‘‘ The Training of Teachers in Nature-Study,” by the Rev. Canon Steward ; and ‘The Relation of Nature-Study to School Work and to the Home,” by Sir Joshua Fitch. MANUFACTURERS and others interested in paper-making have been invited to give their support to a scheme for the establishment of special scientific and technical instruction in connection with this industry at the Battersea Polytechnic. It is suggested that the scheme should provide for both day courses (extending over two or three years) and evening classes for employés who cannot be spared during the day ; and that it should include thorough and systematic scientific and techni- cal instruction (theoretical and practical) in chemistry and engineering so far as is necessary for the science of the subject and helpful for its practical carrying out, combined with experimental work in a laboratory or workshop specially fitted up for the actual manufacture of paper and complete testing of the finished product. Such a department when organised would naturally become a centre of research in questions connected with the paper-making and cellulose industries. The circular states that the paper-makers in the North of England have taken up the question in a very practical way and are supporting one of the large technical colleges, where they have put down a small model paper machine, which has been made in Germany, no English manufacturer being found willing to undertake the making of it. THE Calendar of the Tokyo Imperial University for 1901-1902 shows that provision is made for the study of many branches of pure and applied science. In the College of Engineering, practical work and excursions are arranged outside the College, in addition to the laboratory work. In connection with the College of Science there are museums of zoology, geology and anthropology, anda herbarium. At the Astronomical Observa- tory the principal work carried on consists of observations of position and the compilation of almanacs. The director of the Botanic Garden is prepared to exchange seeds with foreign botanists or institutions. Earth-movements are continually studied at the seismological observatory, and on the occurrence of a great earthquake an expedition is at once sent to make all possible investigations. The Marine Biological Station is situated on the extremity of the peninsula jutting out between the Bay of Sagami and the Gulf of Tokyo ; it thus has access to localities NO. 1706, VOL. 66] rich in remarkable animal forms. Though the station is primarily intended for the use of instructors and students of the University, its facilities are extended to other persons who are qualified to avail themselves of the opportunities of research there afforded. The College of Agriculture is a very active part of the University, and the numerous investigations carried on in the experimental farm have often been noticed in NATURE. Connected with the zoological laboratory of this department are four buildings for the study of. silk-worm culture, containing all the apparatus required for experiment and research. Rooms are also provided for special work in the study of the pebrine disease —the most formidable obstacle to silk-worm culture. SEVERAL matters of interest are mentioned in the report of the Council of the City and Guilds of London Institute, a copy of which has been received. Important extensions have been made at the Central Technical College, among them being additions to the electrical department in order to bring it up to the present requirements of the electrical industry. The total cost of the extension of the College, including equipment and all structural additions and alterations, both for the College and for the department of technology, is estimated at 10,000/., and the additional annual cost at about 1000/. The Institute has recently received from the University of London an offer to devote 1425/. a year to the department of engineering in the Central Technical College, subject to certain conditions. This amount is the larger part of a grant made to the University by the Technical Education Board of the London County Council for improving and extending the teaching of engineering in the metropolis. It involves the appointment of the professor of engineering of the College as a ‘‘ transferred teacher”’ of the University, and it is a recognition by the University that the College occupies the foremost position among engineering colleges in the metropolis. The organisation and work of the College have not otherwise been affected by reason of its inclusion as a school of the University. At the Technical College, Fins- bury, the only change recorded in the educational scheme is the addition of a laboratory class in electrochemistry for second- year chemical students. The development of the use of elec- tricity in the chemical industries has shown the necessity of making more complete the training which has been given to chemical students in this branch of physics. A copy of an address on the University of London, delivered by Dr. E. H. Starling, F.R.S., at University College, London, on June 5, has been received. Some of the prominent points brought forward in the address have already been described (p. 164), and are the same as those stated in these columns on more than one occasion. What are wanted in London are great University centres, adequate to the higher intellectual needs of the seven million inhabitants. The main features of the University of London sketched by Prof. Starling are as follows :—‘‘ Under the control of the Senate, but administered by local councils appointed by the Senate, would be these four or more centres, by which the main teaching and research of the University in all Faculties would be carried out. In addition to these centres there would be a number of schools of the Univer- sity which would preserve their autonomy, but would direct their teaching according to the requirements of the University. Such schools would be essentially post-graduate in character, in that it would be their office to gratt on the general training in method, acquired within the walls of the University itself, the special professional training necessary to fit the man for the pursuit of medicine, law, commerce, administration, &c. The relation of the Polytechnics to the University will require careful consideration. In any policy decided upon, it must be remembered that the whole object is the improvement of the mental training of our fellow citizens and not the distribution of degrees. It is vital to the welfare of the country that as many as possible of its inhabitants should have received a thorough university training, and be competent to use their brains in solution of the new problems which must continually meet them, whatever their trade or profession. The whole pro- gress of the nation depends on the mental equipment of its members. At no time more than the present have the words of Bacon on this subject been so full of counsel; ‘If any man thinks philosophy and universality to be idle studies, he doth not consider that all professions are from thence served and supplied. . . . For if you will have a tree bear more fruit than it used to do, it is not anything you can do to the boughs, but it is the stirring of the earth and putting new mould about the roots that must work it.’” 262 NATURE [JuLy 10, 1902 SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. LONDON. Royal Society, May 15.—‘‘ A Note on the Recrystallisation of Platinum.” By Walter Rosenhain, B.A. (Cantab.), B.C.E. (Melbourne). Communicated by Prof. Ewing, F.R.S. The author has observed phenomena in platinum analogous to those of recrystallisation in other metals previously described by Prof. Ewing and himself (Pz, 7vans. A. 1900, vol. cxcv.). It is well known that platinum which has received a prolonged exposure to high temperature becomes brittle and that its surface, if it has been exposed to flame, shows crystalline markings. This has been ascribed to the action of carbon, but the author ascribes it to a process of recrystallisation and subsequent surface etching by the fame. Evidence in favour of this view is drawn from the micro-structure of this ‘‘ brittle” platinum, from its behaviour on etching with aqua-regia, and from its mode of fracture when hot. The micro-structure is shown to be that characteristic of recrystallised metals, the action of aqua-regia is found to brighten the flame-etched surface, and the fracture follows lines characteristic of the surface crystals, thus proving that the surface pattern truly represents the structure of the whole thickness of metal. The author points out that cold- worked metal is very apt to undergo recrystallisation at high temperatures, and that in several well-known cases brittleness results from such a process; he _ believes, therefore, that recrystallisation accounts for all the phenomena except the sur/ace markings, and these he ascribes to an etching action of the flame in which the temporary formation of a carbide may play a part. June 19.—‘‘On an Approximate Solution for the Bending of a Beam of Rectangular Cross-section under any System of Load, with Special Reference to Points of Concentrated or Discontinuous Loading.” By L. N. G. Filon, B.A. (Cantab.), M.A., B.Sc. (Lond.), King’s College, Cambridge, Fellow of University College, London, and 1851 Exhibition Science Rah Scholar. Communicated by Prof. G. H. Darwin, BSR:S: The paper investigates the elastic equilibrium of a long bar of rectangular cross-section in cases where the problem may be treated as one of two dimensions, the plane of the strain being the vertical plane through the axis of the bar. General solutions in arbitrary functions are first obtained. These, on being applied to the particular case, lead to series involving hyperbolic sines and cosines. These series, when the length of the bar is made infinite, degenerate into integrals which can be expanded in ascending powers of the radius vector from any point, within a certain circle of convergence. The properties of these series and integrals in the neighbourhood of points of concentrated or discontinuous load are specially considered. By means of these solutions, arbitrary conditions of stress over the top and bottom faces of the beam can be satisfied. Various cases, including those of a doubly supported beam carrying a central isolated load, of a block resting upon a smooth rigid plane and pressed by a knife edge on its upper surface, of a beam under two equal opposite loads not in the same straight line, and of a bar under tension produced by knife-edge “ grips” on either side, are considered. The corrections that must be applied to the expressions given by de Saint Venant for stresses in the free parts of long bars, when we approach the points of application of concentrated loads, are investigated at length. It is found that, at distances fiom the sections where such load is applied of the order of the larger diameter of the cross-section, these corrections, z.e. the local perturbations, become insensible. Finally, solutions in finite terms are discussed, and such a solution is obtained for a beam carrying a uniform load. Physical Society, June 20.—Prof. S. P. Thompson, president, in the chair.—Mr. G. F. Herbert-Smith exhibited the three-circle goniometer recently constructed for the British Museum from his designs. In this form of goniometer the advantages of the earlier forms are combined : as with the two- circle or theodolite goniometer, a crystal is only once adjusted during the whole of the observations, and as with the one-circle goniometer observations are made in zones, and full advantage may be taken of the zonal characters of crystals and of the simple formulce depending thereon.—A paper on the heat evolved or absorbed when a liquid is brought. in contact with a finely NO. 1706, VOL. 66] divided solid, was read by Mr. G. J. Parks. Pouillet discovered the fact that when a powder is put into a liquid which does not exert any solvent or chemical action upon it, there is, in general, a rise of temperature. The objects of the present investigation were to obtain a relation between the quantity of heat evolved and the area of the surface exposed, to find the rate of variation of heat evolved with temperature, and to apply to the results the laws of thermodynamics. From the results of his experiments the author states that when silica, sand or glass is brought into contact with water at approximately constant temperature, the heat evolved is proportional to the area of the surface exposed by the solid, and the amount of heat developed per square centimetre is approximately ‘00105 calorie when the temperature isnear 7°C. Assuming that the phenomenon of Pouillet is reversible, and that it is due to a pressure at the surface of the powder, the author has, by the application of the laws of thermodynamics and the results of his experiments, arrived at the conclusion that at 7° C. the surface-pressure of water and silica diminishes at the rate of 157 dynes per centimetre for an increase of temperature of 1°C. Experiments made at different temperatures indicate that the heat evolved is roughly propor- tional to the absolute temperature. Experiments were also made which showed a fall of temperature on putting a finely divided solid into mercury.—A paper by Prof. R. W. Wood, on a remarkable case of uneven distribution of light in a diffraction grating spectrum, was read by the Secretary. It is a well-known fact that in the spectra formed by diffraction-gratings the light is unevenly distributed, that is, the total light in any one spectrum will not recombine to form white light. The author has been examining a most remarkable grating in which the drop from maximum illumination to minimum occurs within a range of wave-lengths not greater than the distance between the sodium- lines. In other words, the grating at a certain angle of incidence will show one of the D lines, and not the other. Experiments with polarised light have proved that these anomalies are only exhibited when the direction of vibration (electric vector) is at right angles to the ruling. The paper gives a detailed account of the appearance of the spectra at different angles of incidence when the grating is in air and when it is immersed in different liquids. It is shown that the phenomena are not due to interference between disturbances coming from widely separated lines, and the author suggests that the matter must be referred to the form of the groove.—A paper by Prof. R. W. Wood, on the electrical resonance of metal particles for light waves (second communication), was read by the Secretary. In a previous paper the author has shown that granular deposits of the alkali metals exhibit brilliant colours by transmitted light. These colours were referred provisionally to the electrical resonance of the minute particles for light waves. The present paper gives an account of experiments made with gold and silver films to determine whether the resonance is molecular, or whether it is an electrical vibration of metallic masses, smaller than the light waves, though of the same order of magnitude. Further investigations on the dispersion of the films and a more careful study with polarised light will doubtless throw light on the matter.—Prof. H. L. Callendar showed a simple apparatus for measuring the mechanical equivalent of heat. Royal Microscopical Society, June 18.—Dr. Henry Woodward, F.R.S., president, in the chair.—The secretary read a note from Mr. Nelson on some high-power photo- micrographs of Pleurosigma angulatum, Surivella gemma and Coscinodiscus asteromphalus, taken by Mr. F. E. Ives.—Mr. A. Hilger exhibited a new photo-measuring micrometer attached to a microscope designed specially for accurately measuring the distances between the lines of the spectrum, but it could also be used for various laboratory purposes.—Messrs. Watson and Sons exhibited and described a new two-speed fine adjustment for microscopes. They also exhibited a microscope fitted with a new holder by which metallurgical specimens could be held in any position while under examination.—Messrs. Carl Zeiss exhibited their epidiascope, a projection apparatus by means of which large brilliantly illuminated pictures of objects can be shown on a screen. Objects such as ordinary lantern slides and transparencies up to 9 inches square, opaque objects, such as photographs, drawings, prints, bones, medals, butterflies in their natural colours, \c., were shown in illustration of its capa- bilities. A simplified form of microscope was then attached to the instrument, and micro-slides were projected on the screen, giving pictures about 6 feet diameter, with great brilliancy and sharpness of definition.—Prof. Marcus Hartog gave a short JuLy 10, 1902] account of the structure of Acinetines, from observations on a species (Choanophrya infundibulifera) epizoic on Cyclops. He demonstrated that the spiral marking of the tentacles was due to a double-threaded constriction, that in protrusion and retrac- tion there was no torsion, but only an opening and closing of the spiral, and that the tentacles were continued deep into the endosarc of the creature. —Mr. C. F. Rousselet read his paper on the genus Synchz ta, with a description of five new species. — Mr. Walter Wesché gave a brief vésemé of his paper on unde- scribed palpi on the proboscis of some dipterous flies, with remarks on the mouth-parts in several families. Specimens showing the palpi on several species were exhibited under microscopes. Zoological Society, June 17.—Prof. G. B. Howes, F.R.S., vice-president, in the chair.—Mr. R. I. Pocock exhibited and made remarks upon the nest of a gregarious spider (Stegodyphus dumicola) sent home by Captain Barrett-Hamilton from Vredefort Road, Orange River Colony, South Africa.—Mr. Oscar Neumann exhibited specimens of some new and interesting mammals which he had discovered during his recent journey through Eastern Africa, and called special attention to some monkeys of the genus Cercopithecus, and to various species of hyraxes (Procavia).—Dr. Walter Kidd read a paper on certain habits of animals as traced in the arrangement of their hair. It was an attempt to interpret, in terms of certain characteristic habits, the departures from a primitive type of hair-arrangement. Short-haired mammals, chiefly ungulates and carnivores, were considered. The habits referred to were divided into passive (those of sitting and recumbent postures) and active (chiefly those of locomotion), and these were shown to match closely the variations observed in the direction of hair in the animals concerned.—Mr. F. E. Beddard, F.R.S., described the carpal organ which he had observed in a female specimen of Hapalemur griseus that had lately died in the Society’s Gardens. He pointed out that this organ in the female differed in some details from that in the male. —Mr. R. I. Pocock read a paper on some points in the anatomy of the alimentary and nervous systems of the false scorpions of the order Pedipalpi.icA communication from Mr. H. J. Elwes, F.R.S., called attention to Mr. Lydekker’s recently published description of a new elk, Ades dedfordiae, based on some unpalmated antlers and a skull of an elk from Siberia, and offered a remark that he thought it unadvisable to found a new species, or even a subspecies, on the material. Mr. F. E. Beddard, F.R.S., read a paper, prepared by himself and Miss Fedarb, descriptive of a new ccelomic organ in the earth- worm, Pherelima (Pertchaeta) posthuma, which consisted of a series of sac-like structures on the floor of certain segments in the middle of the body.—Mr. Beddard also described some new species of earthworms belonging to the genus Polytoreutus, and made some remarks on the spermatophores of that genus.—A communication from Miss Igerna B. J. Sollas contained an account of the Sponges obtained during the ** Skeat Expedition’ to the Malay Peninsula in 1899-1900. The collection contained examples of twenty-nine species, eleven of which had proved to be new and were described in the paper.—Mr. G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S., enumerated the eight species of fishes of | which specimens were contained in a collection made Mr. S. L. Hinde in the Kenya district of East Africa. new and were described by the author.—A communication from Mr. A. L. Butler contained a list of the species of batrachians —thirteen in number— that had been added to the Malayan fauna since the publication, in the Society’s Proceedings in 1899, of Captain Flower’s paper on the reptiles and batrachians of the Malay Peninsula. Geological Society, June 18.—Prof. Charles Lapworth, F.R.S., president, in the chair.—The Great Saint-Lawrence- Champlain-Appalachian fault of America, and some of the geological problems connected with it, by Dr. Henry M. Ami. The extent, earth-movements and striking characteristics of this fault-line and of the geological formations which occur along this line of weakness in the earth’s crust, with special reference to the formations in British North America, were discussed.—At this stage of the proceedings, Mr. E. T. Newton, F.R.S., took the chair at the president’s request.—The Point-de-Galle Group (Ceylon): Wollastonite-Scapolite-Gneisses, by Mr. A. K. Coomaraswamy. The chief rock-types vary from basic pyroxene- sphene-scapolite-rock, through intermediate rocks composed of pyroxene, scapolite and wollastonite, with felspar and quartz subordinate or abundant, to acid types made up of orthoclase- NO. 1706, VoL. 66] NATURE | chlorine or fluorine. Four of them were | | properties 263 microperthite or coarse-grained quartzo-felspathic rocks. They differ in several respects from the normal types belonging to the Charnockite series. —On the Jurassic strata cut through by the South Wales direct line between Filtonand Wootton Bassett, by Prof. S. H. Reynolds, and Mr. Arthur Vaughan. In this section a thin bed of typical Cotham Marble is followed by the ‘* White Lias,” and that by the Lower Lias, which in this district attains a thickness of about 200 feet. Linnean Society, June 19.—Mr. W. Carruthers, F.R.S., vice-president, in the chair. —Dr. W. G. Ridewood described a new genus of Copepoda occurring parasitically in the suprabranchial cavity of the lamellibranch Lyonsiella, and for which, on account of the great inflation of the thorax, he proposed the name Obesiella. He showed that the systematic position of Obesiella was next to Ascomyzon, in the family Ascomyzontidze. —Mr. George Massee described some of the results of modern methods of investigation in mycology, illustrating his remarks by means of lantern slides. He pointed out the errors of some observers who urged the suppression of genera wholesale on the evidence of a few species, and pleaded for the retention of familiar names until a clear case for their suppression had been established on evidence furnished by pure cultures.—Mr. W. P. Pycraft read the second part of his contribution towards our knowledge of the morphology of the owls. This dealt with the osteology. After drawing attention to the close resemblances between the skeleton of the striges and that of the accipitres among the falconiformes, and pointing out the homoplastic character of these resemblances, he proceeded to discuss briefly the more important characters of the several genera, and of the nestling skull, which exhibited some curious relations between the squamosal, parietal and alisphenoid bones. The modifications referred to appear to fall under two heads. Especial stress was laid upon the relations ofthe squamosal. In some forms this bone was barely visible in the inside of the skull, whilst in others almost its entire inner surface was exposed, thus taking a prominent part in the formation of the cranial cavity. Paris. Academy of Sciences, June 30.—M. Albert Gaudry in the chair.—On the structure and history of the lunar crust, remarks suggested by the fifth and sixth numbers of the photo- graphic atlas of the moon, published by the Observatory of Paris, by MM. Loewy and P. Puiseux.—New researches on the liquid hydride of silicon, Si,H,, by MM. H. Moissan and S. Smiles. The vapour density of this liquid silicon hydride has been determined at 100° C. by Gay Lussac’s method, and has been found to be 2°37. The formula Si,H, requires 2°14. The compound is not decomposed on heating to 100° C. ; it is very soluble in ethyl silicate, but is only slightly soluble in water. The compound possesses very strong reducing pro- perties, acting instantly on solutions of mercury perchloride, silver nitrate and gold chloride. The most remarkable property of this new hydride is its action on saturated compounds rich in An attempt to determine its solubility in carbon tetrachloride gave rise to a violent explosion imme- diately the two liquids came into contact, and the very stable sulphur hexafluoride gave rise to a similar reaction with detona- tion, —On some new properties of amorphous silicon, by MM. H. Mcissan and S. Smiles. When liquid silicon hydride is de- composed by a series of electric sparks, amorphous silicon is obtained in a new form. It differs from the amorphous silicon prepared by the method of Vigouroux in possessing reducing towards potassium permanganate, sulphate of copper, mercury perchloride, and chloride of gold. These differences are attributed by the [authors to the different state of division. —On appendicitis and its causes, by M. Lannelongue. A discussion of the history of appendicitis and its relations to other diseases of the intestines and peritoneum. Appendicitis is a microbial enteritis, rarely associated with a single micro-organism, several species usually being found in association. —The action of the X-rays on very small electric sparks, by M. R. Blondlot. It was discovered some years ago that the sparking distance for a given potential is increased under the influence of the X-rays ; in the present paper a new action is described. Two pieces of metal are placed a small fraction of a millimetre apart, and kept at a potential difference slightly greater than that necessary to produce a spark in the absence of the X-rays. If this spark interval is now exposed to these rays, the spark becomes distinctly brighter. Suppress the X-rays, and the 264 spark returns to its original condition.—Signor Schiaparelli was elected a Foreign Associate in the place of the late Baron Nordenskiéld.—On a class of functional equations, by M. Ivar Fredholm, —On the integration of differential systems which ure completely integrable, by M. E. Cartan.—On injection motors, by M. L. Lecornu. A thermodynamical analysis of the Diesel petroleum motor.—On the liquefaction of air, by M. Georges Claude. A description of an improved machine for the economical production of liquid air. Worked by an engine of 30 B.H.P. about 20 litres of liquid air per hour is produced, and from a second engine worked by the escaping gases about 6 B.H.P. is obtained, thus producing about 1 litre of liquid air per 1 B.H.P.—Remarks on the above paper, by M. d’Arsonval. It is pointed out that, although the theoretical possibility of the method used by M. Claude has always been conceded, the attempts of Siemens and Solvay were failures, and Linde, in fact, definitely stated that such an arrangement could not possibly work. The results obtained after two years’ work are very promising.—Remarks by M. Cailletet on the same subject.—The precautions necessary in the use of Ruhm- korff coils in radiography, by MM. Infroit and Gaiffe. It was noticed in comparing radiographs taken by the aid of induction coils with those taken by the use of static machines that the latter were always perfectly sharp whilst the former were often wanting in clearness. This effect has been traced to the action of the magnetic field of the coil on the kathode flux of the bulb. On removing the Crookes tube to a sufficient distance from the coil, this effect was obviated. —The action of self-induction in the extreme ultra-violet portion of spark spectra, by M. Eugéne Neéculcéa. Details are given of the measurements with lead and zinc.—On the speed of the ions in a salt flame, by M. Georges Moreau.—On the magnetic properties of the ferro- | silicons, by M. Ad. Jouve. The points of inflections on the curves given point to the existence of two definite compounds of iron and silicon in the alloys studied and no more, Fe,Si and FeSi.—The centre of gravity of binary accords, by M. A. Guillemin.—On the double nitrites of iridium, by M. E. Leidié. The preparation and properties of the double nitrites of iridium with potassium, sodium and ammonium are described. —On the constitution of the aloins ; comparison with the gluco- sides, by N. E. Léger. The aloins appear to belong to a new class of compounds, glucosides not split up by dilute acids. — On two new sugars extracted from manna, manneotetrose and manninotriose, by M. C. Tanret.—The action of carbon bisul- phide on the polyvalent amino-alcohols, by MM. L. Maquenne and E. Roux. The polyoxyamines are attacked on warming with carbon bisulphide, giving cyclic combinations containing only a single atom of sulphur, probably oxazolines.—On the estimation of lecithin in milk, by MM. F. Bordas and Sig. de Raczkowski.—The mechanism of the synthesis of leucine, by MM. A. Vila and E, Vallée.—On the application of hot air as a method of heating non-volatile liquids in the form of spray, by M. J. Glover.—Variations in the state of refraction of the human eye according to the illumination, by M. Auguste Char- pentier.—On the effects produced by the section of the semi- circular canals from the point of view of their stimulation and their paralysis, by M. Louis Boutan.—On the brain of the Phascolosome, by M. Marcel A. Hérubel.—On the existence of elements corresponding to a primitive form of the sieve tubes in Gymnosperms, by M. G. Chauveaud.—On the density of sea-water, by MM. Thoulet and Chevallier. New SoutH WALEs. Linnean Society, April 30.—Mr. J. 11. Maiden, president, in the chair.—The gummosis of the sugar-cane, by Mr. R. Greig Smith. From the gum of diseased stalks, Bacterium vascularum, Cobb, was isolated and purified. Under suitable conditions of nutrition, temperature and acidity, the bacterium produces, in the laboratory, a gum or slime which is chemically identical with | the gum obtained from diseased canes. The gum is therefore not a pathological secretion of the plant, but is undoubtedly of microbic origin. For the formation of gum, saccharose or NATURE leevulose is necessary ; dextrose is not so useful, and the other | commonly occurring sugars and carbohydrates are useless. Of the saline nutrients, phosphate is essential, and potash can be replaced by calcium or magnesium ; sodium salts act as decided poisons to the microbe. The specific characters of the bacterium are described. —On a Gyrocotyle from Chimaera Ogilbyz, and on Gyrocotyle in general, by Prof. W. A. Haswell, F.R.S.—Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, No. 8, by Mr. J. H. Maiden NO. 1706, vol. 66] | JULY 10, 1902 and Mr. E. Betche.—Further remarks upon the mechanism of agglutination, by Mr. R. Greig Smith, Macleay bacteriologist to the Society. GOTTINGEN. Royal Society of Sciences.—The Nachrichten (physico- mathematical section), parts ii. and iii. for 1902, contain the following memoirs communicated to the Society :— February 8.—Lothar Heffter; On the theory of real curve- integrals. Walther Borsche : Xanthene derivatives from p-nitrophenol. O. Kellogg: On the theory of the integral fe equation 4 (s,/) — A(s,¢7) =u | ; A (s, 7) A (x, ¢) dr. 0 February 22.—W. Nernst and A. Lessing: On the migration of galvanic polarisation through platinum and palladium plates. R. Straubel: Experiments on thermoelectric effects in tourmaline. March 8.—J. O. Miiller: On the minimal property of the sphere. E. Wiechert : Observations at Gottingen of the polar light. A. Schoenflies: On a fundamental theorem of the analysis of position, J. Elster: Dr. V. Cuomo’s measurements of the distribution of atmospheric electricity in the open air at Capri. May 3.—H. Ebert: Report of observations on atmospheric electricity at Munich in the year 1901-2, F. Exner: Report of observations on atmospheric electricity at the stations of the Vienna Academy. CONTENTS. PAGE The Record of Huxley’s Scientific Work. By Gass. HH. 241 Geological History” 242 Plane Surveying. By Major C. F. Close 243 Inspection of Railway Materials. By N. J. L. 244 Our Book Shelf :— Watkins : ‘*The Watkins Manual of Ws lg Exposure and Development.”—C. 245 Hodge: ‘‘ Nature Study and Life.’ BER TE) oe 245 iigle : © Manual of Agricultural Chemis*ry. “RW. 245 Hildebrand: ‘‘ Ueber Aehnlichkeiten im Pflanzen- reich” See rigct Wa Teer occu tS) Tuckerman: “ Index to the Literature of the Spec- troscope (1887-1900, both inclusive).”.—H. M.. . 246 Letters to the Editor :— Misuse of Coal.—D. E. Hutchins . . 246 Cold Weather in South Africa.—J. R. Sutton . 247 A Short Period of Solar and Meteorological Changes. (lWith Diagrams.)—Sir Norman Lockyer, K.C.B., F.R.S., and Dr. William J. S. Lockyer 248 The First Magnetician. (///ustrated.) By R. T. G. 249 Recent History of the Royal Society . 251 The Future of the Victoria University. By Prof. COUT SCHUStET,, Ha Css ame acnstts ye) enue ene Notes : . 254 Our Be tacnomicall Conant i The Periodical Comet of Tempel-Swift (1869-1880) . 258 Mr. Tebbutt’s Observatory at Windsor, N.S.W. . . 258 Extension of the Kathode Radiation Hypothesis to Nebule . 259 Personal Equ ation in the Measurement of Spectro: scopic Negatives . . 259 Apparent Deformations of the Sun’ s Dice) near the Horizon. (J//lustrated.) . 259 Oceanographical Inveatientions in South Recon Waters falas Soe 3 ZA) A New. Form ei Scismograph, lieastr cre.) Ry io MSG 260 Tiaversity and Educational Geren gence 261 262 Societies and Academies .. . NATURE THURSDAY, JULY 17, 1902. MECHANICS OF ENGINEERING. The Mechanics of Engineering. By Prof. A. Jay DuBois, C.E., Ph.D., Yale University. Vol. i., Kine- matics, Statics, Kinetics, Statics of Rigid Bodies and of Elastic Solids. Pp. xxxiv + 634. Price 31s. 6d. Vol. ii. Stresses in Framed Structures and Designing. Pp. xxiii + 609. Price £2 2s. (New York: Wiley and Sons ; London: Chapman and Hall, Ltd., 1902.) HIS manual forms one of a number of publications which are being prepared by professors and instruc- tors of Yale University and issued in connection with the Bicentennial Anniversary. Dealing first with vol. i., the first 4oo pages of the book, about two-thirds of the whole, are devoted to what may be considered as the preliminary work of developing the principles of the mechanics of solids. In substance this part corresponds with the author’s treatise on the “Elementary Principles of Mechanics,” published in three volumes, entitled “ Kinematics,” “Statics” and “Kinetics.” The treatment is mainly analytical, graphical methods being reserved for the later chapters, in which the practical application of the principles is dealt with, and for the second volume. In the section dealing with the fundamental and derived units of measurement, the author rightly insists on the importance of constantly keeping in mind the dimensions of the various quantities, and of checking equations from time to time by inserting the dimensions and applying the principle of homogeneity. The old difficulty as to the use of the same word found to denote both mass and force is partially over- come by writing Ib. when mass is referred to, and pound when force is meant. There is thus a distinction to the eye if not tothe ear. This convention, however, is not adhered to in the latter parts of the work. In the development of the subject the reader is con- stantly reminded of the very useful fact that the various directed quantities which appear are vectors, and follow the vector law. But we think it would have tended to increased clearness of view if the author had brought into greater prominence the distinction between vectors the representative lines of which have different degrees of freedom, or, as they have been named, between unlocalised vectors, vectors localised in lines, and vectors which are localised at points. The authors fundamental definition of a vector as a directed quantity merely, with the frequent inference that any quantity which has magnitude and direction is a vector and therefore obeys the vector laws, is open to criticism. The reader will find that its application to the resolution and composition of angular displacements on pp. 58 to 60 is not very clear or convincing. Stated in this form it is liable to lead to slips like the one we “notice on p. 186 :— “Tf a rigid body has angular acceleration about an axis through its centre of mass, the resultant is a force couple in a plane at right angles to this axis. And con- versely,” &c. In the chapter on central forces the author touches on planetary motions and on harmonic motion. The latter NO. 1707, VOL. 66] 265 might with advantage be treated more fully in any sub- sequent edition, considered from the vector point of view, and with some reference to Fourier’s theorem. In treating of friction, only the simple approximate laws of solid friction are considered. Academic calcu- lations are made as to the action and efficiencies of machines like the wheel and axle, the different systems of pulleys, the screw, &c. Some useful lessons, not revealed in the treatise under review, would be learnt by any student who had the opportunity of putting the results of these calculations to the test by actual experi- ments in a laboratory. In the chapter on impact there are some practical observations on pile driving and onthe limiting pressures which may be put on pile and earth foundations. The section on the development of principles is brought to a close by a discussion of the action of the gyroscope and spinning top, and the statement of the equations of motion of a rigid body in their general form. In the part dealing with the practical applications of principles, the subject-matter treats mainly of questions specially interesting to the civil engineer. This is naturally to be expected, having regard to the position and qualifications of the author. There are two short chapters relating to framed struc- tures and bending moments, evidently curtailed in anti- cipation of vol. ii. Then follows an interesting discus- sion on masonry structures, dealing with earth and water pressures, and including the design of masonry dams and retaining walls. The closing section of the volume, comprising about 150 pages, relates to the “Statics of Elastic Solids,” and deals with the design of such details as ties, riveted joints, pins and eye-bars, shafts, beams, springs and long columns ; and the first volume concludes with an ap- plication of the principle of least work to the swing bridge, the metal arch, the stone arch and the suspension bridge. The discussion of the theory of elasticity is meagre and disappointing. The various formule are established without giving the reader any clear insight with regard to the assumptions made and to the consequent limitations to the practical applications of the formula that are ob- tained. Consequently there is a tendency to interpret the results of the calculations as if they had the same certainty as demonstrations in geometry, and sometimes the proof given is quite illusory. For instance, the inves- tigations on pp. 509 to 511 on the strengths of shafts need thorough revision. The work of St. Venant in regard to the torsion of shafts of other than circular sec- if tion is entirely ignored. The formula ‘- +, applicable to circular shafts only, is taken as if it were true for all forms of section, and is actually applied to square and rectangular shafts. As another example of misleading theory, we think the working of example 3, p. 491, relating to a plate girder, should be entirely recast. In other portions of the subject the author is more happy. He applies the method of strain energy and the principle of least work to framed metal arches, in a manner readily lending itself to cases of travelling loads. He also investigates temperature stresses in the two- hinged and the continuous arch. We think he is right N 266 in also applying the same methods and principles to stone arches and to stiffened suspension bridges, and that the results so obtained are probably more to be depended on than corresponding results by older writers based on other assumptions. However, in structures of this class, liable to be self-strained, and with important factors necessarily omitted or only roughly guessed at in any estimate of the straining actions, we should not be inclined to set the same value on the results of the cal- culations that the author seems to attach to them. The remarks made on p. 519, in reference to calculations for a four-leg table, probably apply largely to this case, and indicate the more appropriate attitude of mind in regard to the value to be assigned to the results. Whilst pointing out that much of vol. i. will seem inadequate to an English engineer, we are glad to draw attention to the large number of practical examples scattered throughout its pages, and in many cases fully worked out. In fact, many students might refer to these with advantage, although they will have to look else- where for a more thorough discussion of the principles involved. The second volume consists of the author’s well-known treatise on “Stresses in Framed Structures,” eleven editions of which have already appeared, the present re- vised edition being the first under the new title. Some of the subject-matter of vol. i. is repeated in vol. ii., so as to make the latter complete in itself. Students and engineers on this side of the Atlantic who are interested in bridge building will wish to possess this volume, in which modern American practice is very fully dealt with. In developing the subject, the author gives numerous examples of the design and con- struction of details, worked out numerically and profusely illustrated by diagrams and drawings. Towards the end, the author quotes a standard specification for bridge work, in compliance with which he works out in detail a complete design of a typical structure, giving all the calculations, and accompanying the discussion by plates comprising a full set of working drawings. The volume concludes wish special chapters by experts on shop drawings, office work and inspection; on the erection of bridges ; and on lofty commercial buildings, in th construction of which steel enters largely. SURFACE-FEEDING DUCKS. The Natural History of the British Surface-feeding Ducks. By J. G. Millais, F.Z.S. Pp. xiv + 107. With 6 Photogravures, 41 Coloured Plates, and 25 other ..uStrations, (London: Longmans, Green and Co., 1902.) Price 6 guineas net. Rr first feeling of a reader on closing Mr. Millais’s “ Natural [History of the Surface-feeding Ducks” will be surprise that one individual—though naturalist, sportsman and artist in one, and blessed, as the author has been from boyhood, with exceptional opportunities— should have been able single-handed to collect direct from Nature so much new and interesting information about familiar birds. The next will be, perhaps, a touch of regret that it should have been given to the public in a form and at a WO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLY 17, 1902 price (six guineas net) which must limit its readers to the favoured few who have broad bookshelves and sub- stantial balances at their bankers, or who may be living within reach of rich libraries. But the tyranny of custom has decreed that a mono- graph of bird or beast, if it is to take rank as a serious contribution to scientific literature, must dress up to the part, and appear in the form and type of a family Bible ; and Mr. Millais, prudently no doubt, has judged it wise not to fly in the face of the conventionalities. The result is a richly illustrated and beautifully got-up quarto volume weighing nearly nine pounds—about as much as a couple and a half of well-fed mallard—de- scribing the life and changes of plumage of seven species of ducks more or less common in England, with pictures and shorter notices of three others which, as rare occa- sional visitors, have been admitted to the list of British birds. Mr. Millais has much that is interesting to tell of the courtships and varying habits of feeding of the ducks he writes about ; of their contrivances for escaping the notice of birds of prey ; and of their every-day life. But it is to the wonderful plumage changes during the period of the drake’s “eclipse,” when at a time of help- lessness he assumes the inconspicuous dress of his mate, that he has more especially devoted his attention. The conclusions he has arrived at add another to the marvels which every fresh discovery in natural history has revealed. Birds, as everyone knows, periodically renew their feathers, some oftener than others ; but all, or nearly all, probably at least once a year. As a rule—though often when undergoing the change they mope and show other- wise signs of the need of a tonic—the moult is effected without seriously incapacitating them. Geese and most kinds of ducks are an exception, and, at least in the case of the males, for a time commonly completely lose the power of flight. Why this,should be so, science has never yet been able to suggest. But it is, incidentally, where the birds most congregate, of immense advantage to human beings. It is during the moult that the Samoyedes, without much more exertion than is involved in driving sheep into a pen, lay in their most important winter stores. The most interesting chapters in Mr. Trevor Battye’s “Tcebound in Kolguev” are those in which he describes the great autumn goose drives in which he took part, when the birds, unapproachable at any other time, were knocked on the head by thousands to be salted down for future consumption. Nature has been a little more pitiful to the ducks than to the geese, and for their protection has arranged that, during the week or two that the duck is practically flight- less, he shall doff his conspicuous colouring, and mas- querade in the unobtrusive dress of the female. In the case of the mallard, the colour even of the legs and beak is changed, Nature in most of her processes works economically. In the matter of the drake’s ‘“‘eclipse” she is reckless. The strain put on the bird’s system, for no other apparent reason than to avoid startling contrasts and produce the desired results gradually, is almost incredible. Two-thirds of the mallard’s feathers (viz. those of the head, neck, breast and parts of the back and scapulars), JuLy 17, 1902] NATURE 267 writes Mr. Millais, as the results of close observation, “between June 15 and October 10, undergo @ double moult, that is to say, the feathers are actually shed twice, whilst one-third (viz. the long scapulars, wings, tail and back feathers) are renewed only once, and during all the time, both in the shedding of the old feathers and the assumption of the new, there is a process of constant sympathetic change of colour.” Mr. Millais has something even more strange to tell. ““T am convinced,” he writes, “that a bird has full power to command the moult as it will, and also”— stranger still—to infuse or withhold colouring matter as it thinks necessary.” The Lord of creation “‘ cannot make one hair black or white.” His conclusions, startling as they may be, are those of a thoughtful and observant man who has conscientiously devoted many years to a close study of a fascinating subject. It is not, as a rule, until the drake has completely assumed the duck’s brown dress, harmonising as it does with the colour of the dying reeds, that the quills are shed. The operation is got through without an hour’s waste of time. “I have known them” (Mr. Millais must speak for himself again) “all come out together in one day, the new flush starting at once.” The duck has others to think of besides herself. If she, like her mate, were to be deprived of flight-power, it would often be at the risk of her brood, and so her wing feathers are shed, like those of most birds, gradually, and she seldom, if ever, quite loses the use of her wings. If she hasa second brood to look after, and is thus occupied later than usual with family cares, even this compara- tively harmless wing moult is postponed for a more convenient season—as Mr. Millais believes, if we read him rightly—by a direct action of will on her part. It is a wonderful story, but nothing in Nature is incredible merely because incomprehensible. Mr. Millais has a very simple answer to a question which has puzzled many others than scientific naturalists. When ducks and other birds which usually nest on the ground change their habits, as they often do, and lay in trees, how do the young ones—wdifugae who leave the nest as soon as they are hatched—manage to get down? At the mother’s call, he says, they throw themselves down and alight unhurt. The explanation is good so far as it goes, and may, not improbably, be in most cases true. But it would be rash to accept it as of universal application. Three young birds found dead at the foot of a tree in a park in Sussex led this spring to the discovery of a moorhen’s nest at a very considerable height from the ground. The young birds were all well nourished and had been apparently killed by the fall. Woodcocks have been more than once seen by trust- worthy witnesses in the act of carrying their young, and ’ there is no reason to suppose that ducks and other birds cannot on occasion as easily do the same. There are many other directions in which, if space permitted, it would be pleasant to follow Mr. Millais’s lead. But enough has, perhaps, been said already to show that his book is original and very interesting. The pictures are all excellent. NO. 1707, VOL. 66] { is the pencil sketch by the author, facing p. 60, of the beak of a shoveller, with its strange spoonbill tip and the hanging bristles, in which—as in a sieve, or in the great mouth-fringes of the whalebone whale, to compare small things with large—dainty morsels are trapped as the bird skims the water as he paddles about with extended neck. “Here” (the quotation is from the note attached to the sketch) ‘“‘we see a wonderful provision of Nature. The comb-like teeth or /aminae of the surface-feeding ducks are developed in proportion to the extent to which the particular species feed on the surface or otherwise. An omnivorous and somewhat coarse feeder like the mallard only possesses them in a very rudimentary form, whereas the shoveller, which is constantly skimming the surface for fine substances, has them greatly developed in both upper and lower mandibles.” Mr. Thorburn contributes eight full-sized coloured plates. He is still, among English bird-artists, an easy first. But in some of his pictures, notably Plates xxx. and xxxvii., garganeys chasing water-beetles, and the pintails, Mr. Millais has run him close. The only fault to be found with a beautiful book is that in choosing his subjects for illustration the author has, perhaps, ridden his- hobby “Eclipse” a little too hard. The best work, excepting in the case of the few rare visitors figured, which are, strictly speaking, scarcely British, is confined almost entirely to birds in immature or transitional plumage. In a book of natural history, destined to take a well-earned place for some years to come as the standard work on our surface-feeding ducks, a few plates might with advantage have been spared, if only as a sop to unscientific bird-lovers, for ducks and drakes at their best. T. DicBy PIGOTT. A FRENCH TEXT-BOOK OF ZOOLOGY. Traité de Zoologie Concréte. Par Yves Delage et Edgard Hérouard. Tome 1i., 2° Partie, Les Coelen- térés. Pp. x + 848. (Paris: Libraire C. Reinwald, 1901.) HE volumes of the “Traité de Zoologie Concréte ” already published are so well known and have been so acceptable to zoologists that the present volume, dealing with the Coelenterata, scarcely requires any re- commendation. While it leaves little to be desired in such important matters as abundance and excellence of illustrations, bibliography, index and glossary, the chief merit of the “ Traité de Zoologie Concréte” must be attri- buted to the logical and systematic method of exposition adopted by its authors. The majority of zoological text- books, following the German model, give a brief and insufficient definition of each class or order of the animal kingdom, and this is succeeded by a discussion of the organology and embryology of the class or order that is generally so diffuse as to leave the student in a state of hopeless uncertainty as to what are the characteristic structural features of the group in question. Recognising the importance of fixing clear and definite ideas of struc- tural relations in the student’s mind, MM. Yves Delage and Hérouard have adopted the time-honoured plan of illustrating the anatomy of each important group of Among the most interesting | animals by a description of a morphological type, which 268 serves as a standard to which all the other members of the group may be referred. The method is familiar enough, but has fallen into discredit because previous authors have made too little use of 1t and have confined themselves to the description of one or two animals as examples of a large class, whence it has resulted that students have too frequently formed narrow conceptions of animal structure and have underestimated the wide range of variation of which animals belonging to the same class are capable. The “Traité de Zoologie Concréte” has the merit of having avoided this error by describing a morphological type, not only for each class or subclass, but also for each order, suborder, and even for each tribe. Thus a general description is given of the morphological type of the order Octanthida (Alcy- onaria) ; Kophobelemnon is taken as a type of the sub- order Pennatulidz ; Renilla, Umbellula, Kophobelemnon, Pennatula and Gceendul are taken as the morphological types of the five tribes into which the Pennatulidz are divided, and a sufficient description of the families and genera included in the tribe follows the description of each type. This system is consistently adopted through- out the work, and as the types are illustrated by well- designed schematic drawings, the essential characters of all the subgroups are brought in the clearest possible manner before the mind. The book gives evidence of a minute acquaintance with zoological literature, and the numerous illustrations are largely copied from treatises of ‘a recent date. In the latter respect, the volume on the Ccelenterata is considerably in advance of other text-books, for it is only too frequently the case that old and sometimes obsolete illustrations are copied from book to book, while more recent work is ignored. The classification adopted does not depart widely from accepted lines. The Coelenterata are divided into two branches, Cnidarea and Ctenarea, the latter being co- extensive with the Ctenophora. Though some authors would separate the Ctenophora from the Coelenterata on the ground that they have an embryonic mesoblast, MM. Delage and Hérouard give sufficient reasons for retaining them in the phylum in which they have so long been classed. The Cnidarea are divided into two classes, Hydro- zoaria and Scyphozoaria, the former including all the forms usually classed under Hydrozoa, except the Scyphozoa, which have been placed along with the Anthozoa in the class Scyphozoaria. The union of these two groups is a step in advance, abundantly justi- fied by recent anatomical and embryological researches. In the class Hydrozoa it is noticeable that the Siphono- phora are raised to the rank of a subclass, the other subclass, Hydrophora, including the Hydride, the Hydro- medusze, the Trachymedusz and Narcomeduse. The grounds for this distinction are probably sufficient, but it is open to question whether the classification of the Siphonophora adopted in this work is an improvement on that of Heckel, and one cannot but regret that the authors’ love of symmetry or their anxiety to satisfy the claims of priority should have led them to abandon well- known and generally accepted names for others which are unfamiliar. For example, the order Chondrophorida sounds strange to most ears; the name is due to NO. 1707, VOL. 66] i NATURE [JuLY 17, 1902 Chamisso, but has never come into general use, and that of Disconecté is preferable because better known. Again, in the Scyphozoaria the name Octanthide, derived from the Octactinia of Ehrenberg, is preferred to Alcy- onaria, though the latter is in general use and there is no good reason for abandoning it. The name Actin- anthidz, again, is substituted for Zoantharia, without sufficient reason, and the classification of the order is open to many objections. It scarcely seems consistent to class Edwardsia and Tealia under the Hexactinide, though the authors justify the inclusion of the former genus because of Faurot’s discovery of micromesenteries completing the first cycle of six pairs in certain species. The division of madreporarian corals into Hexacorallidze and Tetracorallide is quite unjustifiable in the present state of our knowledge, and in spite of their sharp criti- cism of Miss Ogilvie’s work on the microscopic characters of the corallum (p. 602), the authors might have given her the credit of having demonstrated the unity of structure in recent and so-called rugose or tetracorallid corals. Indeed, they are open to the charge of inconsistency in this respect, for they have borrowed largely from her figures and adopted her possibly erroneous views on the mode of formation of the corallum, but have refused to accept some of her most important and well-grounded conclusions. It is scarcely possible, at the present time, to retain the groups Aporina and Porina (Aporosa and Perforata of Milne-Edwards), though it must be con- fessed that no acceptable alternative has been offered, and MM. Delage and Hérouard, while retaining a dis- credited classification, give a very good summary of the various schemes that have been proposed by different authors. ; Knowing the previous writings of M. Delage, one is not surprised to find that, in discussing the origin of atolls and barrier-reefs, he takes the opportunity of making a double attack on the Darwinian theories of the formation of coral reefs and natural selection. It is tobe regretted that he allows himself to write so dogmatically on these subjects, for it is by no means the case that the theory of natural selection has been abandoned by zoologists in general as a “hypothése séduisante,” attrac- tive but inadmissible. He would seem to have over- looked the school of statistical zoologists, whose work, so far as it has gone, has done much to strengthen the opinion that natural selection is by far the most potent factor in the evolution of species. Finally, when the complete results of the boring at Funafuti are published, M. Delage will probably be obliged to admit that the great English naturalist was not far wrong also in his speculations on the origin of atolls and barrier reefs. G. C. BOURNE. WAVES AND SOUND. Wellenlehre und Schall. Von W. C. L. van Schaik. Translated into German by Dr. Hugo Fenkner. Pp. xi+358. (Brunswick: F, Vieweg and Sohn, 1902.) Price Mk. 8. O portion of physics is more difficult to treat in an elementary way than that of sound ; the conse- quence is that though advanced treatises of magnificent quality exist, an elementary text-book in English which JuLy 17, 1902] NATURE 269 is less severe than these, but which is something more than a mere description of acoustic phenomena, is still a desideratum. Where attempts have been made to supply the want the result is not successful, owing chiefly to the clumsy methods employed in “ getting round” the calculus. We are not upholders of the doctrine that the calculus should be “got round”; it is much better, we think, to “get through” it. Experience in teaching others has taught us that pupils find no difficulty in grasping its elements, and this is the case whether they are taught analytically or geometrically. Why then should we seek to devise elaborate methods of eluding the calculus—methods which in most cases we would never think of employing ourselves, and which, moreover, are usually only adapted to the particular problem for which they are devised—when a straightforward intro- duction to the methods we use ourselves would clear the ground and render the student’s progress easy, and enable him the sooner to be his own path-finder instead of needing to rely on the guidance of others ? The book under review cannot supply this want in England, for it is a translation into German (from the Dutch) ; the substance of the book is in the above respect, however, entirely to our mind. No calculus is employed in name; but the notion of it is everywhere. Velocity is the limiting value of a ratio and so is acceleration, and their values are found by the usual direct methods employed in proving the initial theorems of the calculus. We would have gone a step further and given the process a name, in order to suggest to the student to what branch of mathematics these and similar theorems belong. But the notion is the main thing. There is nothing here which a man will discard at a future time, having learnt a better way ; though he will, of course, learn to abbreviate the logical statements of the process into the mere symbols d@x/d¢ and @2x/d7?. Without making a full analysis, the following subjects dealt with may be briefly stated :—In the mathematical treatment: simple harmonic motion—waves and their composition, with a proof of all the simple theorems. Fourier’s theorem is given, but not proved; it is illustrated, however. The dynamical equation to simple harmonic motion is given, and the motion deduced by showing that it satisfies the equation. Even the case of a restoring force involving second as well as first power of displacement is given, on account of its importance in connection with the Helmholtz theory of the production of combination tones. The equation to damped motion is treated as an article for faith ; its properties, however, are lucidly described. | Although the experimental phenomena are mainly is not | collected together, the mathematical portion wholly free from experimental illustration, For example, we specially note a device which should be found useful for illustrating the behaviour of forced oscillations with different degrees of damping. Perhaps the most interesting section is that dealing with the interference and diffraction of waves. This might be amplified by an account of recent experiments imitative of Lloyd’s mirror and diffraction from two apertures (Young’s experiment) ; and, in particular, an account of Rayleigh’s brilliant application of the principles of diffraction in restricting the spreading of sound to one | NO. 1707, VOL. 66] plane by suitably shaping the aperture of the fog horns employed in coast signals would form an _ excellent additional illustration. The last chapter is concerned with movements of air in pipes, concluding with an account of the secondary motions usually developed, such as the small striations in the cork figures in a Kundt’s tube, which were in- vestigated by Walther Konig and others (Konig is mentioned without being discriminated from R. Kénig). These are highly interesting, though many will no doubt consider them rather out of place in an elementary book. There is no mention of Riicker’s important experiments in connection with combination tones. OUR BOOK SHELF. Malarial Fever, its Cause, Prevention and Treatment. Containing full Details for the use of Travellers, Sportsmen, Soldiers, and Residents in Malarious Places. By Ronald Ross, F.R.S., Walter Myers Lecturer in the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine. Ninth edition, revised and enlarged. Pp. 68. (London : Published for the University Press of Liverpool by Longmans, Green and Co., 1902.) Price 2s. 6d. THIS little book is an enlargement of a previous work by the same author, and should prove of the utmost use to those for whom it is written. The exact knowledge concerning the epidemiology of malaria which has been attained during the last six or seven years has made clear the principles upon which the disease may be pre- vented in the individual and perhaps exterminated in the locality. The wide dissemination of these principles and of the facts upon which they are based is the next obvious step in the campaign against malaria, and the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine has done good service in the publication of this work. Within the short compass of some seventy pages we find a lucid and succinct account of the nature and life-history of the malarial parasite, of the habits and life-histories of the gnats which serve as its definitive hosts, of the precautions to be taken to avoid infection, and of the elementary treat- ment of the disease should it be acquired. In short, nothing is wanting that should enable an intelligent man, even if devoid of any scientific training, to escape malaria, even where it is most virulently endemic. The writer’s wide experience, and the important share which he has taken in building up our knowledge of the disease and its propagation, are a sufficient guarantee of the accuracy of his information and of the practical value of his rules for guidance. There is a consensus of practical experience that, by attention to the rules here set forth, aman may safely pass through countries where malaria of the most dangerous type prevails. We recommend the book heartily to all who have occasion to sojourn in such lands. Velocity Diagrams. Their Construction and Uses. Intended for all who are interested in Mechanical Movements. By Prof. C. W. MacCond, A.M., Sc.D. Pp. iii + 116; 83 figures. (New York: John Wiley and Sons; London: Chapman and Hall, Ltd., 1902.) Price 1.50 dollars. IN this book some examples of plane motions of machines are worked out. The title well describes the scope and contents of the work and the very modest aims of the author. The main problem to which the discussion is directed is :—Given a skeleton drawing of a mechanism and the speed of the driving point, to find graphically the corre- sponding speed of the driven point, and to show the latter all throughout the cycle by means of a rectangular, 270 NATURE [Juty 17, 1902 curve of speed plotted on a time base. The author believes that this curve exhibits the kinematic action of the machine more clearly and directly than any other form of diagram. Beginning with the composition and resolution of velocities, it is shown how the constraints of slides, pivots and rigidly connected points affect the ordinary rules for vectors, and one or two simple special rules are established. These are applied systematically to selected mechanisms such as pruning shears, quick return motions, direct-acting and oscillating cylinder engines, epicyclic trains of wheels, the pilgrim-step motion, &c., until the reader becomes quite familiar with the process. No attempt is made to give more than a cursory and very limited account of the plane motions of mechanisms, consequently many important theorems and constructions of a general nature find no place. Simple harmonic motions, and harmonic analysis, often so useful, are not considered. Acceleration is only incidentally referred to in showing how an acceleration-time curve can be determined graphically from a velocity-time curve. The author has evidently imposed severe restrictions as to the amount of ground to be covered. But so far as the subject is dealt with, the methods and demonstrations are very clear and convincing, and the diagrams are well drawn and beautifully printed. Spiderland. By Rose Haig Thomas. Pp. vili + 227. (London: Grant Richards, 1902.) Price 55. THIS is a charming little book, based on the authoress’s original observations on a variety of animals and plants, and cast into a poetic form likely to interest children in natural history. It is dedicated as follows :—“To my Son, whose wondering child-eyes first taught me to look deeper into the workings of Nature, and to all the Children I know and shall never know, I dedicate these simple tales.’ As we remarked when reviewing elsewhere the first edition, printed for the author in 1898, which com- prised only the first twelve tales, whereas twelve more are added inthe present edition, the book reminds us of the “ Episodes of Insect Life,” on the one hand, and Mrs. Gatty’s ‘‘ Parables from Nature” on the other. The mode of treatment resembles that of the former book, and the general style the latter. A great variety of subjects are dealt with, and only one or two of the stories relate to spiders ; among others, we note such titles as “ The Tree Frogs,” “Pistil the Peace-maker” (a more elegant set- ting of the old fable of the “Stomach and the Limbs”) ; “ Thomisa Citrina, the Robber-Mother” ; ““ The Wedding of the Fly Ophrys” ; “The Green Caterpillar” (a study somewhat resembling one of Mrs. Gatty’s, but dealing with a more mournful phase of caterpillar life, an ichneumoned caterpillar) ; ““Hymen, the Worker Ant” ; “Nimble Nat, the Gay Grasshopper”; “Cocky: a London Love-Tale” (sparrows) ; ‘‘ The Romance of the Water Beetle” ; ‘The Lemming,” &c. The remarks on the lemming are interesting, and will be new to many readers. Here and there we meet with a trifling over- sight ; the authoress has travelled in France and Norway, and has forgotten to note that processionary caterpillars are not British ; and the auditory organs (hardly “ears ”) of grasshoppers are situated, not in the hind legs, but in the front legs. Children are easily interested in natural history and insect life ; and a poetical view of some of its phases, such as Mrs. Thomas has here given, is likely to prove more attractive to them than a purely didactic book, like “ Uncle Philip’s Conversations with Children,” which was almost the first book on natural history read to the present writer in his childhood. Naturally, the stories written by Mrs. Thomas are not all of equal merit ; but most of them are excellent, and we regret that our space will not allow us to give a sufficiently long quotation to afford a fair idea of the style of her book. W. F. K. NO. 1707, VOL. 66] Tuberculosts as a Disease of the Masses, and How to Combat It. By S. A. Knopf, M.D., of New York. Adapted for English use by J. M. Barbour, M.D. Pp. 76 ; 25 figures. (London: Rebman, Ltd., 1902.) Price 1s. net. IN plain, simple language, devoid of technicalities, Dr. Knopf presents an accurate account of the causes of tuberculosis, some details of the symptoms ofa few of its many phases, and indicates the chief hygienic principles which underlie the present-day methods of treatment. He emphasises the fact that tuberculosis is a con- tagious and therefore a preventable disease, that the child of a tuberculous mother is not itself necessarily tuberculous, although it frequently acquires the disease —the maternal kisses often being the channel of infec- tion—that man may derive the infection from animals and that he may in turn transmit the disease to them, and above all that ¢zderculosis is a curable disease. The author fully explains the duty of the consumptive to himself and to his fellows, and points out in no uncer- tain manner the real danger attendant upon the habit of spitting elsewhere than in a proper receptacle by the subjects of this disease. He also gives much excellent and useful advice with regard to the practice of calis- thenics by, and the inculcation of habits of cleanliness in, the young, and the value of fresh air and sunshine as factors in the prevention and cure of tuberculosis, as well as many suggestive hints on the home care of consumptives. We are not surprised to learn that this essay was. awarded the first prize (200/.) offered by the “ Inter- national Congress for the Study of the Best Way to Combat Tuberculosis as a Disease of the Masses,” which met at Berlin, and that it has already been published in five languages besides English. It is an excellent treatise, and should be in the hands of every individual, sick or well, who has at heart the physical welfare of his fellow mortals. The Teachers Manual of Object Lessons in Geography. By Vincent T. Murché. Pp. xvi + 334. (London : Macmillan and Co., Ltd.) Price 3s. 6d. How great has been the improvement in methods of teaching during recent years can be measured to some extent by a comparison of newly published books intended for use in public elementary schools with those in circula- tion twenty years ago. The old implicit reliance on the child’s faculty for memorising is fortunately giving place to an appeal to his observation and incipient reasoning powers. Mr. Murche’s latest addition to his already extensive series of books on elementary science is marked by his usual clearness of exposition and by that helpful- ness for which he is justly highly esteemed by teachers in elementary schools. But the bewildering miscellany of type, with its frequent transitions from Roman_ to italics and from these to Clarendon and capitals, makes the volume a trying one to read and raises the question of the possibility of such over-emphasis defeating the object in view. It is unfortunate that in explaining volcanic activity the author speaks of “ dense volumes of flame and smoke” which “burst out from the crater,” and that he instructs the teacher to explain “that ages ago this earth on which we live was a burning mass like the sun.” This seems to indicate a want of clearness as to the nature of smoke and burning ; it will certainly give the child a wrong idea. But the book should do a great deal to improve the teaching of geography. William Gilbert of Colchester: a Sketch of his Magnetic Philosophy. ‘sy Charles E. Benham. Pp. 96. (Col- chester: Benham and Co., 1902.) Price 2s. net. THE immediate occasion of the appearance of this little book is the issue to the subscribers of the Gilbert Club of the English translation of “De Magnete.” The author JuLy 17, 1902 | NATURE 271 has attempted, and with real success, to show what manner of man Gilbert was, wherein lay his genius, what were his merits, and what also were his faults and failings. Mr. Benham dwells on the circumstance that, although Gilbert’s actual discoveries were few and crude, he must be judged rather by the spirit of hiswork. ‘“‘ He was not the builder of sciences, but the architect of a truly scientific spirit ; and his life-work consisted in the doc- trine, new to England, that all scientific knowledge must be founded on practical experiment and observation alone, instead of upon speculations and theories evolved out of inner consciousness.” The successive chapters of the book deal with the old magnetic philosophies, mag- netic motions and electric force, the magnet’s “ directive virtue,” the variation of the compass, the dip and “ orbes of virtue” of the magnet, the life of the Universe (in which Gilbert, although no Manichean, was clearly a believer) and the Copernican theory. The author is particularly happy in his treatment of this last topic ; but throughout the analysis of Gilbert's work is accurate and discriminating. The book is illustrated with a picture of Gilbert’s terrella, and another of his tombstone in the church of Holy Trinity, Colchester. The Vocal System based on the Fundamental Laws of Language. By G. Lionel Wright. Pp. 20. (Pub- lished by the Author, Upper Belgrave Road, Clifton, Bristol.) Price rs. net. IT is now recognised that teaching to read is not the simple matter which it was once thought to be. In recent years one system has followed another in rapid succession, and each has claimed in turn that by its introduction the time taken by the child to learn to read the mother tongue was much reduced. There seems to be a chance that these experiments may eventually reduce the difficulty of this first step in human education toa minimum. Mr. Wright proposes to make extensive use of the blackboard and of wivd voce methods of instruction, and to start teaching the child to read by making him learn the five vowels. When this has been accomplished, the learner is introduced, by carefully graduated steps, to certain combinations of vowels and consonants, which are clearly indicated in this brochure, and by following which Mr. Wright claims that children may read at the age of six. A somewhat minute examination of the contents of the pamphlet leads us to think that Mr. Wright would be well advised in making his instructions to the teacher much more detailed and explicit if he is anxious that his system should become widely adopted, for at present the teacher will be, at several points, at a loss to know the next step in the course of work. The Lake Counties. By W. G. Collingwood. (Dent's County Guides.) Pp. xii + 392; illustrated. (London : J. M. Dent and Co.) Price 4s. 6d. net. Tuis little volume—the fourth of the series to which it belongs—will be found invaluable to all who visit the Lake District. In addition to being an excellent guide, with a number of itineraries and many maps, it contains four chapters on the natural history of the district, the birds being described by Miss Armitt, the butterflies and moths by Canon Crewdson, the flora by Mr. S. L. Petty, and the geology by Prof. Hull. In the chapters on fox- hunting, angling and shooting, the sportsman will find abundant matter for interest, according to his particular taste. This volume fully maintains the high reputation of its predecessors, and is, in fact, all that a guide should be. Those tourists who wish to go more deeply into the natural history of one of the most interesting and beautiful districts in England will find all they want in the more pretentious volume by the late Mr. Macpherson entitled “Lakeland.” Reals NO. 1707, VOL. 66] LETTERS TO THE EDITOR. (Zhe Editor does not hold himself responsible for opinions ex- pressed by hts correspondents. Neither can he undertake to return, or to correspond with the writers of, rejected manuscripts intended for this or any other part of NATURK No notice zs taken of anonymous communications. Symbol for Partiai Differentiation. Pror. PeRRy’s difficulty (NATURE, May 15, p. 53) is with- out doubt a real one, and is deserving of serious consideration. In connection therewith the following extract from a paper at present passing through the press may be found interesting, at least on the historical side. It is in reference to a memoir of Jacobi’s published in the year 1841 in the twenty-second volume of Crelle’s Journal :— “The subject of the notation of differential-quotients is then entered on at some length (pp. 320-323), and the decision made to use 90 in the manner which soon afterwards came to be familiar. The insufficiency of this notation is not forgotten, however, although its advantages over the different devices of Euler and Lagrange are recognised, his illustrative example being the case of 02/0x where z is a function of x« and z, and z is a function of « and y. He puts the whole matter in a nutshell when he says that it is not enough to specify the function to be operated on and the particular independent variable with respect to which the differentiation is to be per- formed, but that it is equally necessary to indicate the involved quantities which are to be viewed as constants during the operation.” To this the following footnote is added :— ““T may state in passing that in 1869 when lecturing on the subject I found it very useful to write px, ¥, z 5) Ts, t; uU,U 4 $(% 92) » Slt mr), 2... and then indicate the number of times the function had to be differentiated with respect to any one of the variables by writing that number on the opposite side of the vinculum from the said variable; thus in place of 13 2 x, Vs a meant the result of differentiating once with respect to «, thrice with respect to y, and twice with respect to s. ‘* Using this notation to illustrate Jacobi’s example, we see that if it were given that aa z= ox, u we should have dlace 0:/Ox = px, u ; but that if it were given that c=ox,u and u= Wry then we should not be certain as to the meaning of 02/0., as it would stand for a eee 21: 1. px, u or Px, w+ Px, u. Wx, y according as # or y was to be considered constant.” Cape Town, S.A., June 5. THOMAS Murr. I am glad to think that a pure mathematician sees the diffi- culty met with by users of mathematics. I wish that men who write to me privately would publish their remarks. One cor- respondent says: ‘‘I think ‘the mathematicians’ made a rather stupid blunder when they introduced 9@ for partial differentiation. This way : nearly all differential coefficients ave partial ; even a complete one (assumed complete) may become partial by exten- sion of the field of operation. So an old investigation of Kelvin’s, for example, using d throughout, is, by ‘the mathematicians,’ replaced by the same using 0 throughout, except one or two here and there! What is the use? It gives a lot of trouble, and as printers haven’t always 0’s, or proper sized 0’s, it makes bad work. It should have been @ itself that was introduced for the exceptional use, thus making next to no alteration in the classical investigations.”” These are, indeed, my own views, but as my pupils go forward to University examinations I 272 advise them to adopt the fashion which is likely to please the examiners. In thermodynamics we cannot easily adopt Mr. Muir’s sug- gestion. Take the simplest case of unit quantity of mere fluid. v, p, t, and @ are such that they are all known if any two (except in certain cases) are known. Any one may be expressed as a function of any other two. My symbol (2) is quite adv |p definite. But to adopt Mr. Muir’s suggestion I must say :— = i Let E = fv, pthen fx, p is what my symbol means. Inas- much as my letters stand for the same quantities irrespective of the letters of which they are functions, I use one letter “ where on Mr. Muir’s suggestion I must use & as fv, p or Lv, ¢ or Wu, » or XP, ¢ or 6, » or &, g or six distinct symbols if T have to express any differential coefficient of #, and if I have to express all the differential coefficients of 7 I must use other six symbols ; altogether I must use thirty of these curious symbols instead of five common letters, and, furthermore, I must keep them all in my head. JOHN PERRY. The First Magnetician. WHILE thanking you and ‘‘R. T. G.” for the exceedingly kind appreciation of the Gilbert Club’s English translation of ““De Magnete”’ (p. 249), I write to express the wish that the notice had mentioned the names of those who have collaborated in the production of this version. They are the late Mr. Latimer Clark, the late Sir B. W. Richardson, Rev. A. W. Howard, Prof. R. A. Sampson, Dr. Joseph Larmor, Sec. R.S., Prof. Meldola, F.R.S., Mr. Edward Little, Mr. G. T. Dickin and Rev. W. C. Howell. To the last-named a special recog- nition is due for indefatigable and critical care during the long final révision and ‘press correction. July 14. SILvAnus P. THomeson. “*Fox-shark’”’ or ‘Thrasher’? (Alopecias vulpes) in the English Channel. ON July 2a fine specimen of this shark was captured several miles south of the Eddystone Lighthouse by fishermen in search of mackerel. The fish was taken at a depth of about 40 fathoms, and did a large amount of damage to the mackerel nets before it could be hauled on board and killed. The shark was brought to the Plymouth Museum and purchased for the collection. It may be worth while to state that the spiracles, which Couch says he was unable to detect, are distinctly visible in this specimen. It is scarcely surprising that they should be sometimes overlooked, for though our fish is 13 ft. (thirteen feet) 7 in. (seven inches) long (of which the tail occupies seven feet), the spiracles are only 1/12th (one-twelfth) of an inch long by 1/16th (one-sixteenth) of aninch wide. Each is situated exactly 24 (two and a half) inches behind the eye, and a line from the spiracle to the tip of the snout passes just above the centre of the pupil. E. ERNEstT LOWE. Plymouth Museum, Plymouth. THE TRAMWAYS EXHIBITION AT THE AGRICULTURAL HALL. aye: International Tramways and Light Railways Exhibition which came to an end on Saturday last must be regarded as having been very successful from all points of view. The opening ceremony was per- formed by Mr. Gerald Balfour on July 1, and was accompanied by the usual luncheon and speeches. Mr. Gerald Balfour alluded, as might have been expected, to the recent deputation to his Department on the subject of electrical legislation, but he did not evince any sign of having become convinced of the necessity for speedy reform. In other respects the speeches were not of much interest ; the same may be said to be true toa certain extent of the proceedings of the International Tramways and Light Railways Congress, which held its meetings on July 1 and 2.. The Congress, which was the NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLy 17, 1902 twelfth held by the Union internationale permanente de Tramways, was the first to be held in London; the papers read and discussed dealt with the management and technical details of tramway schemes, and were most of them contributed by the engineers or managers of continental tramways. Many of them were very valuable, especially as they were based on the results of wide practical experience, but we doubt if they would prove of great interest to the readers of NATURE. The exhibition itself contained a number of very attractive exhibits. Although primarily a general exhibi- tion of all things pertaining to tramways, there was much on view which was of the greatest interest to those having nothing to do with traction. It was also very noticeable that the exhibition resolved itself practically into one of electric tramways. Of course, there was much that was not electrical—such, for example, as rails, points, &c.—but these are all part of the equipment of an electrical system. And perhaps the general impres- sion with which one left the hall, that a “tramway” was necessarily the same thing as an “electric tramway,” was of more interest, as a sign of the times, than were any of the individual exhibits. Several different types of car were on view; the one which, not unnaturally, attracted the most attention was that constructed by Messrs. Dick, Kerr and Co. for the London County Council. This is the first of one hundred cars being built for the Council’s South London Tram- ways. ‘The car is double-decked, and has a total seating capacity of sixty-six (twenty-eight inside and thirty-eight outside), and is equipped for the conduit system to be used on the South London lines. The Westinghouse Company exhibited a car which ran over a fully equipped trolley line laid along the total length of the hall, a distance of more than 300 feet. Power was obtained for running this from a 75 kw. direct-current generator (500 volts), driven by a Westinghouse three-cylinder gas engine. The car was fitted with the Westinghouse magnetic brake. This brake has atriple action, acting as a wheel- brake, a track-brake and an axle-brake ; it is energised by current derived from the car motors, which work as generators whilst the car slows down, the necessary energy being derived from the momentum of the car. The action of the brake is therefore independent of the main current supply. A notable feature of the exhibition was the Bremer arc lamp, exhibited by the Westinghouse Company. This lamp was used for part of the lighting at the Natural History Museum on the occasion of the Institution of Electrical Engineers’ conversazione. Unfortunately, it did not create a very favourable impression there, as the lamps kept flickering; those at the Agricultural Hall seemed to be burning much better. The carbons used in the Bremer lamp are saturated with certain minerals which volatilise and become incandescent in the arc; they are, moreover, arranged nearly parallel to one another instead of vertically one above the other ; the ends project a little below a protecting hood, meeting at an angle of about 20°, and the arc is kept at the tips by means of a magnetic deflecting device. The position of the arc, the materials used in the composition of the carbons, and the reflecting power of the conical hood, combine to produce a highly efficient light. It is said that the lamp is three times as efficient as an ordinary arc. The colour of the light is also much pleasanter and warmer than that of the ordinary arc, and the light appears to fill the globe much better, with the result that it produces somewhat the effect of a golden ball of light. Another similar arc lamp exhibited was that of the Union Electric Company. This, which is called the “Flame” arc lamp, has vertical carbons like an ordinary lamp; the carbons are, however, cored with a mixture of certain fluorides, and the upper one passes through a JuLy 17, 1902] dome-shaped hood, which is fixed a little above the arc itself. A rather long arc is burnt, and the effect is very similar to that produced by the Bremer lamp, only the light is of a slightly different colour. This lamp is also said to be three times as efficient as an ordinary arc. We have not space at our disposal to describe the ex- hibits fully. There is one other, however, which deserves special comment on account of its ingeniousness and possibly great importance. This is the Partridge ““Sparklet” fuse, exhibited by Messrs. Elliott Brothers. This fuse is designed more especially for high-tension circuits carrying heavy currents. When the fuse in such a circuit goes an arc forms, and in order to prevent this burning, either a very long fuse or some form of oil fuse is used. In Mr. Partridge’s “Sparklet” fuse a short length only is used, and the terminals of the fuse wire are connected to an ordinary sparklet such as is now a familiar article for making soda-water. The arc when it forms burns between the two sparklets, and in a very few seconds one or other of these is burnt through ; the carbon dioxide immediately rushes out through the hole and blows out the arc. It will readily be understood that the more current the circuit is carrying, and the more power there is in the arc, the sooner will the sparklet burn through, and also the hole being larger the more certain it will be in its action. At the Agricultural Hall a model fuse was shown working a circuit of 2500 volts. The current was small, only about 6 amperes, the power being therefore about 15 kilowatts ; yet the arc was blown out in less than three seconds. Two sparklets are used, oneat each end of the fuse, in case one should be defective ; but this precaution has never been found necessary during all the experiments and trials that have been carried out. For the past eighteen months the apparatus has been in practical use, and has proved, it is said, thoroughly satis- factory. Mr. Partridge is certainly to be congratulated on a very ingenious idea ; it remains to be seen whether it will prove a sufficient cure for all the troubles that are likely to be met with now that large-power high-tension circuits are becoming common. M. S. THE ASTROGRAPHIC CHART. je is probably well known, even to those who are not astronomers, that an astronomical enterprise of con- siderable magnitude was initiated fifteen years ago, and is steadily, although somewhat slowly, progressing to- wards completion. In the year 1887 a conference of astronomers met at Paris to consider the best means of cooperating to make a complete map of the heavens on a large scale, and with all possible attention to accuracy, by photography. As the outcome of this conference, eighteen observatories of various nationalities undertook the work, the whole sky being divided up into eighteen zones ; a zone assigned to each observatory with due regard to its geographical position. A standard pattern of photographic telescope was chosen, and all the eighteen observatories obtained instruments of the required type and set to work. The enterprise being in several respects entirely new, it has been necessary to guide the procedure in the light of experience acquired; and conferences assembled at Paris in the years 1889, 1891, 1896 and 1900 to report progress and compare notes. At the last of these conferences a second enterprise was undertaken. The small planet Eros, discovered in 1898, was to make a particularly close approach to the earth in the winter of 1900-1, thus affording an opportunity, the like of which would not recur for thirty years, of determining the solar parallax ; it was felt that, although the main object of the association of observatories (viz. the formation of the Astrographic Chart) was not yet attained, still the advantages to astronomy which would result from utilising this exceptional opportunity were too great to be neg- NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE 273 lected, and it was resolved that the cooperating obser- vatories should add to their programme the photographic observation of the little planet during the months October 1900 to February or March 1gor. In connection with this second enterprise it has been found necessary to circulate a large amount of statistical material, such as approximate positions of the planet on different dates and of all the well-known stars lying near his path in the heavens, lists of the observations made at the different observatories, so that one might know how to match plates with another, and so on. The energy of the director of the Paris Observatory (who has from the first acted as director of the whole work) in printing and circulating this material has been most noteworthy. We have recently received the wmf circular relating to Eros, which is itself a pamphlet of 200 pages quarto, and re- presents a vast amount of work. In the first place, M. Loewy discusses, in two long memoirs (supple- menting a former one already published), what accuracy is obtainable from measures of photographic plates and what precautions are necessary to obtain that accuracy. The discussion is concerned with a number of minute details, and involves the adjustment of conflicting ad- vantages, so that there is room for difference of opinion in the conclusions ; but there can be but one opinion of the value of the material patiently collected and tabulated by M. Loewy, which can be examined in the light of any hypothesis preferred. The second part of the ninth circular gives, among other useful information, ephemer- ides of the planet Eros and of the sun, calculated to eight significant figures for every six hours—almost a new departure in such work, the only precedent being afforded by the investigations of Sir David Gill on the planets Victoria, Iris and Sappho, whereby he clearly showed that eight figures were necessary to represent the accuracy of heliometer measures. To advance one decimal place is of course a step of the gravest import- ance, and to Mr. Hinks, of the Cambridge Observatory, belongs the credit of being the first to show that an accuracy can be obtained from photographic measures of the Eros plates of the same order as that which led Sir David Gill to ask for an eight-figure ephemeris. The appearance of so much important literature in connection with this second enterprise, the photographic observation of the planet Eros, naturally suggests a glance at the state of affairs with regard to the main work, the Astrographic Chart itself. It is, as remarked in the first sentence of this article, some fifteen years since the work was initiated, and it should by this time be possible to form an estimate of the probable outcome and the approximate date of completion. It must be confessed that the original estimate of the time required has already been seriously exceeded. In the letter which summoned the conference of 1887 it is stated that :— “Ce grand travail . . . pourrait étre facilement exécuté en quelques années si dix ou douze observatoires bien répartis sur le globe pouvaient se partager convenable- ment la tache.” The phrase “quelques années” is somewhat indefinite, but it may be assumed that those who assembled in 1887 would have been shocked to learn that after a lapse of a dozen years scarcely one-fifth of the work projected had been accomplished. Indeed, many who are tolerably familiar with the general course of events may be startled to hear this statement made ; and yet a glanceat the last comprehensive report available (see R.A.S. Monthly Notices, vol. |xi. p. 280) shows it to be only too true. It was decided to work on such a scale that 11,000 plates would be required to cover the sky, and this number was to be repeated four times, twice with short exposures (of 6 minutes, 3 minutes and 20 seconds), and twice with long exposures (40 minutes). The plates of the first series (catalogue plates) were to be measured, and the measures printed and published; those of the second series 274 (chart plates proper) to be reproduced in facsimile. In June, 1900, the state of affairs was as follows :—15,000 of the 22,000 catalogue plates had been ¢aken, but only 4000 had been measured ; and the measurement is of course by far the most serious part of the work. Of the 22,000 chart plates required, less than 4ooo had been taken, and only a small portion of these had been reproduced and published. So that the fraction of the whole programme accomplished in a dozen years can certainly not be put higher than one-fifth. Does this mean, then, that it will take sixty years to finish the whole? It is earnestly to be hoped that this would not be a legitimate inference, and fortunately there are good sound reasons why it should not be. The years immediately succeeding 1887 were naturally devoted to experimental work, of which a large amount has been necessary. This was foreseen at the outset ; witness, for instance, the words of the veteran Otto Struve in his opening address :— “En effet, ’Astronomie pratique posséde aujourd’hui, dans la Photographie, un instrument de la plus haute valeur et qui, probablement avec le temps, facilitera énormément nos études épineuses. Mais restons sobres dans nos prévisions. Pour le moment, nous ne devons regarder la Photographie que comme un instrument trés précieux, sais dont Pétude reste encore a compléter.” But it will probably be agreed that the amount of work necessary to “complete the study” has exceeded expec- tation. Beyond the preliminary experiments which might have been foreseen by an individual worker, much time has been spent in a well-meant endeavour to secure uni- formity in the work, which has, after all, not been very successful. Thus a large part of one year was lost in attempts to devise an obscuring screen which should diminish the light received from the stars in a known ratio, and ultimately secure uniformity in the limiting brightness (or rather faintness) of the stars charted ; but this attempt was at last abandoned in favour of the simpler method of fixing a definite time of exposure, which might have been adopted from the first. Or going further back in the history, it must be remembered that although a standard pattern of telescope was adopted in 1887, it took a considerable time, not only to make the eighteen instruments required, but for the makers to find out how to make them. Thus it would be fair to estimate that in 1900 the work had been in actual progress, not for a dozen years, but for less than half that period ; so we need not fear that the completion of the work is still half a century off. Nevertheless, he would be sanguine who should reduce this prospective limit below twenty years, unless some very drastic measure is adopted in the near future. Some of the cooperating observatories are well advanced with their work, but others are far behind. In 1900 there were actually three which had not started at all, and these have been struck off the list and replaced by three new ones. We have good reason for antici- pating energetic action from these new comers, but it must be remembered that they start a dozen years at least behind their colleagues. This great delay in the execution of the work has been prominently mentioned because it demands most serious attention if the original scheme is to be carried out in any real manner. Even without the addition of the Eros work there was sufficient cause for anxiety; with that important and unforeseen addition there is reason for alarm. It is to be hoped that the dangers may be realised and obviated within the next few years. But when we turn to the contemplation of what has been accomplished, there is good reason for satisfaction. To take first the series of catalogue plates, with short exposures of a few minutes only. Each observatory has to take about 1200 of these, and the area of the NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLy 17, 1902 sky covered by each is a square of two degrees in the side, so that sixteen full moons arranged in solid square formation would just about cover this area. On each plate there are some 300 or 400 star- images on the average ; but this is an average from which the deviations are large. A plate exposed near the Milky Way, even for a few minutes only, shows thousands of stars, whereas if the telescope be pointed to a region distant from the Milky Way, the number may fall below 100. Taking the average as 350, there are on the 1200 plates which form the share of one observatory some 400,000 star-images ; and it is the business of that observatory, after taking the plates, to measure carefully the relative positions of all these images and publish the results. Moreover, it has been found advisable to make these measures at least twice over, so that we may put the total number at something like a million. It will readily be conceded that this is a gigantic piece of work for a single observatory to carry out, and it is a great thing to be able to say that some of the observatories are already in sight of its accomplishment. Others, as has been admitted, have not yet commenced the work, but they will enter upon it with all the advantages of follow- ing an example already set, and we may consider that the greatest difficulties have been overcome. This portion of the work affords another reason for satisfaction. Mention has been made of some pre- liminary experimental work which produced no positive result, but other such investigations have had more fortunate ‘issues, especially the research on the best method of measuring the plates. In 1887 there were at least three different methods which might be adopted, and corresponding to each of these there was a choice of patterns for the instrument to carry it out. The proper method for measuring stellar photographs has now been practically settled, and though there is diversity of opinion as to the best actual instrument, the relative advantages of the different forms are becoming tolerably well known. It will be realised how definite an advance has here been made when it is remembered that an eminent astronomer, in reviewing the possibilities in 1887, dismissed the method which has since been universally adopted as obviously inferior to the others and not worthy of consideration. The test of experience had, in fact, not been applied, and the result of its application may be regarded as a valuable scientific asset. Let us turn now to the other set of plates, the chart plates as they are called, similar in every way to the catalogue plates, except that they are exposed to the sky for a much longer time (forty minutes at least, in- stead of three or six), and hence contain thousands of stars instead of hundreds. It is proposed that these plates shall be reproduced on paper by some process which depends on the automatic action of light only, and is thus free from the imperfections incidental to human agency. The exact process has not been formally specified, and it is open to any observatory to circulate ordinary contact prints, for instance, if such can be made without losing too many of the fainter star-images. Up to the present time, however, the only reproductions of chart plates which have been published are in helio- gravure. The French observatories (Paris, Algiers, Toulouse, Bordeaux) and the Observatory of San Fernando, in Spain, have produced and circulated most beautiful enlargements (twice the linear dimensions) of some of their chart plates made by heliogravure, and there are many reasons why we may hope that their example will be universally followed. To begin with, the charts are really beautiful to look at—as might be expected from the French, they have produced some- thing zesthetically satisfactory. Secondly—a matter of infinitely more importance astronomically—the charts Juty 17; 1902] NATURE 275 are wonderfully accurate. It has been shown that the places of stars can be measured from them with an accuracy almost equal to that obtainable from the original glass negatives. Finally, they are presumably permanent—far more so than the glass negatives, unless the toning process recently suggested by Sir William Crookes is adopted and found as successful as is expected. Against these manifest advantages is, un- fortunately, to be set the costliness of the process. It is estimated that to reproduce its 1200 plates in this way each observatory must have a sum of about 10,000/. at command, independently of the actual time spent in the work. This sum is large, but not prohibitive. Five observatories are apparently already provided with it ; in the interests of uniformity in a magnificent piece of work, may it be hoped that in some way or other the remaining shares will be taken up? If the paper repro- ductions were (as it was at one time supposed they would be) mere playthings of no scientific value, such expendi- ture might have been deprecated. But it has been demonstrated that they are accurate beyond expectation, that, in fact, an observatory provided with copies of this kind for the whole sky could in a few minutes obtain the place of any star down to the 14th magnitude with an accuracy equal to that with which the best meridian observations can be made. It seems probable that the outlay is as good a one as can be made with our present imperfect knowledge of the requirements of the future. The consideration of what this means in actual weight of paper brings home to us in a striking manner the magnitude of the whole enterprise. If the 22,000 maps are completed in the style adopted by the French, the sheets when piled one on the other would form a column thirty feet high and weighing nearly two tons! The most elaborate star atlas which has been produced up to the present time can be bound as a single, though rather large, volume, which could be added to any library with- out sensible disturbance. But not so with a copy of the Astrographic Chart ; it is a matter for the serious con- sideration of each fortunate possessor where and how he shall store the sheets and ensure their preservation. There is not likely, of course, to be any real difficulty in doing this, the point is only mentioned here to illustrate the novelty of the departure rendered possible by photography. As there is an obvious danger of not being able to carry out this vast programme (for which, it will be remarked, not only scientific labour, but much hard cash is required, and the latter may not be easy to extract from reluctant Governments), it is reassuring to know that there is at least one good alternative. We might carry out the work much more economically with a different type of instrument, though at the cost of some obvious advantages. The type selected in 1887, a refracting telescope of 114 feet focal length, allows us to photograph an area of the sky at one exposure limited to two degrees square, and 11,000 plates are required to cover the whole sky. Two other types were considered and rejected. The first was the reflecting telescope, with a concave mirror in place of a lens. The area satisfactorily photographed at one exposure with a re- flector is even smaller, and the number of plates required for the whole sky consequently greater. Though the reflector has distinct advantages in cheapness and in light-grasping power which have recommended it for other classes of work, there is no doubt that it was rightly rejected for the Astrographic Chart; all our experience subsequent to 1887 has tended to confirm this view. The third possibility open to the conference of 1887 was the use of a doublet lens, such as is familiar in an ordinary camera. The lens of a camera is made up of two lenses (each of which is itself double) separated NO. 1707, VOL. 66] by a definite interval, where a “stop” may be inserted. A photograph could be taken with one of thése lenses alone, but only a comparatively small portion of the picture near the centre would be in good focus ; the com- bination is made to give a larger “field.” If such a doublet lens is used to photograph the sky, we get a much larger field at one exposure, and can cover the sky with fewer plates. The claim has recently been made that twenty or thirty plates would suffice to cover the sky instead of 11,000! Of course the results would be on a correspondingly smaller scale, and this extreme procedure is not to be contemplated as an alternative to the large and accurate charts with which a start has already been made. But if we could reduce the 10,000/. required to (say) 1000/., we are in the region of the possible or even the probable, and this only means reducing the number of plates required in the ratio of one to ten, or increasing the area covered by each in the same ratio. We may take it as fairly well established that a doublet will satisfactorily cover a field at least ten times as large, in area of the sky, as the single lenses at present in use for the work of the chart. The question naturally arises whether these facts were realised in 1887, and if so, how the single lens came to be preferred to the doublet. The discussion on the type of instrument to select took place on April 18, 1887, and the proces-verbaux are given on pp. 36-43 of the official account of the conference. Twenty-six distinguished astronomers were present, and eighteen of them took part in the debate. Zhe photographic doublet was not even mentioned. At the present time this circumstance is almost bewildering. At the end of the volume a letter 1s printed from Prof. E. C. Pickering (who most un- fortunately was not able to attend the conference) advocating the use of the doublet, and giving detailed suggestions for the whole work which commend them- selves, in the light of subsequent experience, as admir- able. But his views received no attention ; the debate was confined almost entirely to the relative advantages of reflectors and refractors, and the proper size to be adopted for the latter, and it must be confessed that an opportunity was lost. Since that time Prof. Pickering, using doublets, has charted the whole sky himself many times over, while the associated observatories have not yet accomplished a third of their programme. It must not be forgotten that their programme includes much more than the mere charting of the sky, viz. the measurement of some plates and the reproduction of others ; but even making this allowance, the discrepancy between what he has done single-handed and what has been done on the plan preferred at Paris in 1887 is sufficiently serious. The fact is that astronomers generally were afraid of the doublet in 1887, and some of them have not yet lost their mistrust. They were afraid that so fair a promise was too specious; that, in fact, the gain in extent of field over the refractor must be accompanied by a corresponding loss in accuracy. At the time no definite information was forthcoming on this point, and it must be admitted that even now our knowledge is far from complete. It is not so easy as it might seem to test pictures of the stars for the minute accuracy necessary to an astronomer, and it may still be proved that the choice of the refractor in 1887 was, from the point of view of getting the greatest attainable accuracy, a wise one. But, on the other hand, it has been shown that the mistrust of the doublet was largely unjustifiable ; its accuracy is of a high, if not of the very highest, order. It is not even now too late to follow the excellent advice which was offered in 1887 only to be ignored. By adopt- ing the doublet the chart plates might be completed in a reasonable time and at a reasonable cost, though on a smaller scale. H. H. TURNER. 276 NATURE [JuLy 17, 1902 SOME NEW FORMS OF GEODETICAL INSTRUMENTS. HE optical principles involved in gun-sighting apparatus, described in the issue of NATURE for | January 9, 1902 (p. 226, vol. Ixv.), have been further developed by Sir Howard Grubb, F.R.S., and applied to some new forms of geodetical instruments. In the gun- sighting apparatus alluded to,a virtual image of an illuminated cross is optically projected on to the object aimed at, and both the cross and the object are easily seen without any refocussing or straining of the eyes. In the case of the gunsights and also the present instru- ments, light traverses a plate of glass coated with a very — thin film of galena; by this means reflection of light from the surface of the glass is greatly increased, while but little transmitted light is shut off. The process of depositing galena is due in the first instance to Prof. J. Emerson Reynolds, F.R.S.; it is described in the Proc. Chem. Soc. for 1884, under the heading ‘“ The Synthesis of Galena by means of Thiocarbamide.” The process has been modified by Mr. G. Rudolf Grubb and applied with great success to some new forms of surveying instruments. Fic. 1. been designed to take the place of the standard instru- | ments of the engineer, namely the level and the theo- dolite, but to place in the hands of comparatively inexperienced observers, a ready means of making a rapid survey with an accuracy as great as can be attained in plotting a survey on paper. In the case of ordinary surveying, for example, in road making and in the con- veyancing of property, the accuracy of the survey is limited by the degree of precision with which it can be actually plotted on paper with a pencil giving fine lines. When the theodolite is used, the readings are first entered in the field book and then afterwards plotted on paper, the angles being set off with a protractor. the new instrument, the survey 1s continuously plotted as the instrument is being used. In Fig. 1 the new form of plane table is shown. The central pillar, through which the successive bearings are taken, is shown in section in Fig. 2 ; it is mounted on a triangular base, or set square, which can be rotated about a point situated in the centre of the paper on the plane table. The instrument is used thus. The sight tube is rotated until its fixed line coincides with a given object, a line is then ruled, it is again moved through some angle till the line coincides with a second fixed object, and another line is ruled along the NO. 1707, VOL. 66] These instruments have not | By means of edge of the set square, the process being repeated until the position of the last fixed object is recorded. Then the whole plane table is moved to a fresh station at a measured distance from the first station, and similar observations are made on the same fixed objects ; the intersections of the two sets of bearings give the points G00 ERS SSSSecoc He r iN ss tee 4 " ! u ' Sige en) We al a) 1 ' ' i i ‘ ' t 1 beewe-s---- -- required for the survey. In the case of the survey of a small area, the instrument is not shifted to a new station, but the distances corresponding to the ruled lines are determined by reading the number of divisions which appear in the field of the instrument between two marks Fic. 3 of known distance apart on a staff held at a fixed point. The instrument thus becomes a telemeter, and by means of a suitable scale the distance along any given direction is found and marked on the paper. The actual method | of using the instrument is as follows :—The staff man JuLy 17, r902} NA TORE py, walks rounda field and successively plants his staff upright where a change in the directions of the boundary occurs ; at each point the observer at the plane table rules the direction line and marks the distance, repeating the operation for each successive point, so that the survey of the field is made during the time taken by the staff man in walking round the field and making the necessary halts at each point for the observation to be recorded. The scale and view photographed through the plane table instrument is shown in Fig. 3. The same optical principle has also been employed by Sir Howard Grubb in the construction of a level to be used in making rapid estimates of gradients in road making and laying out property. The observer sees at the same instant a fiducial mark, the bubble of the level, and an arc marked with degrees projected on to the field of view. The excellent optical device has also been utilised in the construction of a prismatic compass and a clinometer. M. HERVE FAYE. LL who have taken any interest in the advance of science, more particularly in the direction of astro- nomy and meteorology, will hear with regret of the death of M. Hervé Faye, which sad event was announced last week. A long course of scientific industry has marked his career, and a great distance seems to separate the workers of to-day from the epoch when Faye and many others, whose names are now but a matter of history, laboured strenuously and successfully to make the paths for their successors more easy and of more rapid attain- ment. Nearly sixty years have passed since M. Faye first came prominently before the world as the discoverer of a comet, to which his name has always been attached, and it will serve to make us appreciate the advance ac- complished in one lifetime if we recall the fact that this was the first elliptic comet the period of which was determined by calculation alone, without any assistance drawn from observations made at previous returns. Faye, at that time an assistant in the Paris Observatory, recognised the necessity of computing an elliptic orbit, but the credit of determining the first orbit of considerable eccentricity from a few days’ observations belongs to Goldschmidt, who was stimulated to the task by Gauss. Then the information and the methods of the Zheoria Motus had not filtered through a score of text-books and come into the hands of numberless computers, whose deftness of calculation had been whetted by the discovery of hundreds of asteroids, the orbits of which stood in need of determination. But it will be rather on his philosophical writings | than his scientific observations that the reputation of Faye will rest and be honoured by his countrymen. It | may be that to some of his theories a general assent has | not been given, and that in some cases later discoveries have modified the views the distinguished physicist expressed, but no doubt will be entertained concerning the clearness and ability with which those views have | been uttered, or of the influence they have had on French thought. Ever since the time that Laplace in a few pregnant sentences sketched the plan on which the solar system might have been constructed, the subject has been a favourite speculation among French physicists. M. Faye has not been able to resist the temptation to attack this subject, and though, like all attempts at | universe. construction, the scheme of M. Faye fails to meet all the difficulties which beset the problem, yet it is a most suggestive contribution to the subject, and should prove an incentive to further inquiry. In some respects ‘this cosmogonic theory contrasts very favour- ably with that of Laplace, and in others, as was natural, it falls behind that of his great predecessor ; but this is NO. 1707, VOL. 66] not the place to enter into any details or criticisms of the argument developed. In recalling, however, the services which M. Faye rendered, one would not willingly for- get this finished essay (“Sur ?Origine du Monde”), in which is given, with much that is suggestive, a lucid explanation of the state of our knowledge of the solar and stellar systems. Similarly, it would be out of place to discuss here the views he expressed on the constitution of the sun, the causes of sun-spots, the behaviour of solar prominences or the chemistry of the sun generally. All these are sub- jects that fell under Faye’s notice and which he treated broadly and philosophically, but necessarily without the facts and knowledge that later observations have brought to light. In cosmical physics and chemistry he was to a great extent a pioneer, and if his theories are in some cases for this reason insufficiently supported by exact observation, they are generally characterised by a breadth of view and thoroughness of conception that contrasts favourably with contemporary opinion. In the discussion of problems connected with cosmical meteoro- logy, or with the motions of our own atmosphere, he was, perhaps not so happy, and his writings on cyclonic motions, the laws of storms, the behaviour of tornadoes, and the exceptional phenomena which we occasionally experience will probably be soon forgotten. Not so, how- ever, with such works as the “Cours d’Astronomie nautique” and other mathematical books with which he has enriched French literature, and which are models of arrangement and of clearness of expression. One could with difficulty recall the numerous services which M. Faye rendered to his Government or the acknowledgments that he received from foreign scien- tific bodies. He was, of course, Membre de l'Institut and besides a seat at the Bureau des Longitudes which he had occupied since 1862, in succession to Biot, - he was called by Marshal MacMahon to fill in his Cabinet the office of Minister of Instruction, at a time when it was thought not impossible that M. Faye might have become Director of the Paris Observatory in suc- cession to Le Verrier. He was elected a Foreign Asso- ciate ofthe Royal Astronomical Society so long ago as 1848, while Belgium, Venice, the United States of America enrolled him among the members of their scientific societies. Full of years and distinction he is removed from us, and with him another link that con- nects the science of to-day with the science of the past. W. E. P. NOTES. THE new botanical laboratories of the Chelsea Physic Garden are to be opened by Earl Cadogan at a garden party there on Friday, July 25. A REuTER telegram from Kronstadt in yesterday’s 7zmes reports that on July 14 the Italian cruiser Car/o Alberto received, for the first time, messages by wireless telegraphy from the Poldhu station in Cornwall. These are the first experiments in wireless telegraphy over a distance of 1600 English miles in a straight line by land, and the results are said to have been most successful, the messages received having been very distinct. Amonc the Civil List Pensions announced in a Parliamentary Paper just issued are the following :—Mr. W. H. Hudson, in recognition of the originality of his writings on natural history, 150/.; the Rev. Dr. John Kerr, F.R.S., in recognition of his valuable discoveries in physical science, 1007; Mrs. S. C. Tones, in recognition of the services rendered by her late husband, Principal John Viriamu Jones, to the cause of higher education in Wales, 757. ; and Mr. H. Ling Roth in considera- tion of his services to anthropology, 70/. me 278 NATURE TuouGH the damage done in Salonica by the earthquake which occurred there on the afternoon of July 5 (see p. 254) was not great, some of the surrounding villages suffered con- siderably. At Guvezno 150 houses were wrecked and at Karajere fifty houses were destroyed. A new spring burst out at the mineral baths of Langaza. The shock was recorded at the observatory of Laibach, which is about 560 miles north-west of Salonica, and also in Birmingham, about 1440 miles in the same direction. THEcurrent number of the Bulletin de la Société d' Encourage- ment pour Industrie Nationale contains the programme of prizes proposed by the Society for the present year. Among these may be noticed a prize of 2000 francs for the invention of acement capable of agglomerating diamond dust for mechanical purposes, another of 3000 francs for a steamsuperheater fulfilling certain conditions, and one of 2000 francs for any important progress in the mechanical transmission of work. In chemistry a prize of 1000 francs is offered for the utilisation of a bye-product, and medals for publications useful to chemical industry or metal- lurgy. A prize of 2000 francs is offered for an apparatus suit- able for domestic use capable of sterilising drinking water by boiling, one of 2000 francs for a study of the alcoholic ferments and diastases, and one of 1000 francs for freeing the vine from an insect parasite. In political economy, a prize of 3000 francs is offered for a study of the effects of trusts and industrial syndicates generally upon production and sale. SEVERAL eruptions of Mont Pelée occurred last week. On July 9 a disturbance began at 7.30 p.m. and continued until mid- night. From the 7zmes we learn that a column of black smoke streaked with lightning was first observed, and that this was ap- parently followed by flame, which set fire to the ruins of St. Pierre. Stones and ashes fell for 25 minutes on Morne Rouge and Fonds St. Denis. Drs. Anderson and Fledd were thought to have been overwhelmed by the ejected matter, but they arrived safely at Fort de France on July 11. They were on board a sloop which was lying off St. Pierre when the eruption occurred. A message from St. Thomas states that three loud detonations were heard from the Soufriére, St. Vincent, between 8 p.m, and 9 p.m. on July 9. Advices from Barbados state that loud detonations were also heard there on the night of July 9, in a westerly direction. A telegram from Fort de France states that about midnight on July 12 there was a third violent eruption of Mont Pelée. Large quantities of stones and ash fell on Morne Rouge, Macouba and Ajouba Bouillon. The French scientific mission, which arrived the day before from Guadeloupe, whence it had been recalled by the Governor, left on July 13 for St. Pierre. M. F. A. Foret describes, in the Journal Suisse of July 10, some brilliant sky effects observed by him at Morges on July 5 directly after sunset. A brilliant disc of light of a whitish- yellow colour appeared thirty degrees above the sunset point a quarter of an hour after the sun had set, and lasted for a quarter of an hour. Ten minutes later a purple circle sixty degrees in diameter appeared, and sunk lower and lower as the sun increased its distance below the horizon. While this circle was visible the sky was brightened by an after-glow. The red sunset effects observed at Jamaica on May 25, Madeira on June 10, and Bombay about June 25 had not been seen at Morges on July 8. In the July number of the Bulletin de la Société Astronomique de France, M. Flammarion gives the first instalment of a history of the West Indian volcanoes, with special reference to Mont Pelée and the recent eruptions. The article is illustrated by photographs and charts, and contains letters of pathetic interest written a day or two before the great eruption, which show NO. 1707, VOL. 66] [JuLy 17, 1902 that at least some of the inhabitants of St. Pierre, including several members of the Société Astronomique, feared the possibility of a disaster several days before the final catastrophe occurred, Mr. PreReONT MORGAN has bought and presented to the Paris Museum of Natural History the collection of precious stones formed by Mr. Kunz, of New York, for the Buffalo Exhibition of last year. He has also sent to the American Museum of Natural History in New York a large star sapphire and a beautiful yellow sapphire. These gems will be added to the collection of precious stones previously presented by Mr. Pierpont Morgan to the Museum. THE expedition to the Malay Peninsula undertaken by Mr. N. Annandale and Mr. H. C. Robinson with the aid of grants from the Government Grant Fund and Edinburgh University, has now concluded its field work, and it is hoped that a pre- liminary notice of its more important results may be presented to the British Association at Belfast. A complete series of an- thropometrical measurements, representing more than 300, indi- viduals of the various races ‘‘ wild” and “‘ civilised”’ inhabiting the Siamese Malay States and Perak, has been obtained, with numerous photographs and about thirty authenticated skeletons and skulls, nearly two-thirds of which belong to the primitive peoples known as ‘‘ Sakais,” ‘‘Semangs,” and ‘‘ Orang Laut ” respectively. Studies have been made of the religions, burial customs, and sociology of these races, and collections of their clothing, weapons, utensils, and magical and musical implements made. The zoological results comprise extensive notes on mimicry and kindred phenomena and a series of photographs of insects and other animals in their natural surroundings as well as general collections from both high and low levels. Ir was recently reported that Dr. Doberck was retiring from the directorship of the Hong Kong Observatory ; but we under- stand this is not the case and that he is merely home on sick leave. A TELEGRAM from the Viceroy of India, dated July 12, re- ports :—‘‘ Good rain has fallen over the greater part of India, but fall light in Burma, in Southern India, Southern Punjab, in parts of Rajputana and Sind.” A BririsH and Colonial Industrial Exhibition will be held at Cape Town for a period of four months from November 1903. All the necessary funds have been guaranteed, and a site adjoining the Botanic Gardens has been chosen. It is important that British manufacturers should participate in a scheme which offers a good opportunity of bringing their products and wares before the South African public, especially in view of the inroads made by foreign competitors in the South African market. When the exhibition is open the industries of farm- ing, dairying, and wine growing will be busy in schemes for a fresh start. The exhibition of the latest and most up-to-date appliances, tools, mechanism and machinery should, therefore, lead to very extensive business, and the opening of new and permanent trade outlets for Imperial manufactures. THE preliminary programme of the nineteenth congress of the Sanitary Institute, to be held in Manchester on September 9-13, has now been issued. The president of the congress is Earl Egerton of Tatton. Dr. W. N. Shaw, F.R.S., will deliver the lecture to the congress and Sir W. J. Collins will deliver the popular address. The three sections and _ their presidents will be :—(1) Sanitary science and _ preventive medicine, Sir James Crichton-Browne, F.R.S. ; (2) engineer- ing and architecture, Sir Alexander Binnie; (3) physics, chemistry and biology, Prof. A. Sheridan Delépine. There will be eight special conferences of municipal representatives, | JuLy 17, 1902] NATURE 279 port sanitary authorities, medical officers of health, engineers and surveyors to county and other sanitary authorities, veterinary inspectors, sanitary inspectors, domestic hygiene, and hygiene of school life. In connection with the congress, a health exhibition of apparatus and appliances relating to health and domestic use will be held, as a practical illustration of the appli- cation and carrying out of the principles and methods discussed at the meetings. THE announcement that the meteorological observatories on Ben Nevis and in Fort-William will have to be closed at the beginning of October next, in consequence of the want of funds to keep them in operation, will be received with regret by many meteorologists and other men of science. During the last four years the liberality of Mr. Mackay Bernard, of Dunsinnan, made the continuation of the work at the observatories possible, but there is no hope, in the opinion of the directors, that the observatories can be continued as permanent institutions except by assistance from the State. From the commencement of the work, in 1883, until now, the total cost has been fully 24,000/. Of this sum nearly 17,000/. has been received by the directors in the form of subscriptions. The balance of the expenditure has been met by a payment of 100/. a year, since 1883, from the Meteorological Council for the Ben Nevis Observatory, and of 250/. a year from the same body, since 1890, for the Fort-William Observatory. These two contributions constitute all that can be regarded as State aid. The directors have received definite intimation that, whether the observatories are continued or not, the latter sum —z250/.—is to cease to be paid at the end of this year. In con- nection with this subject we notice that Sir John Stirling-Max- well has notified the Lord Advocate that he will put a question this week in the House of Commons as to whether any applica- tion has been made through the Scottish Office for assistance for the observatory from the public purse, and whether, if such application has been refused, he will state the grounds of refusal. ArT the Aéronautical Congress held recently at Berlin it was concluded that no ascent should take place at a higher level than 7 or § kilometres without placing the observers within a closed car, ‘‘nacelleclose,” as was suggested,in 1871, by Mr. Louis Tridon. At that time a motion to this effect was rejected on account of the faith it places in the life-sustaining properties of pure oxygen. The scientific committee of the Aéro Club discussed this same subject on June 30 and came to the same conclusions. Dr. Henocque, professor of physiology at the College de France, said that the foregoing principles will be observed in the ascents now in preparation by the French Society of Physiology. He held that the atmosphere should be divided into three zones ; that in the first, up to 4 or 5 kilometres above the sea-level, life was possible without the use of additional gas. For the third zone, at a level less than 10,000 metres, it would be necessary to resort to the closed car, or to an aérial diving suit. The ascents which Dr. Henocque arranged to take place on July 15, were to be executed entirely in the first zone. Investigation was to be made of the effects of the ascents within the limits of a depression consistent with life, or not ruinous to health, and in accordance with a series of observations made at the Eiffel Tower Dr. Henocque hopes to show that in this zone the ascents may be considered as beneficial to the general health, invigorating the lungs and likely to afford a remedy against some pulmonary affections. The conditions of life are not the same as when mountaineering, owing to the greater velocity due to the elevation and the absence of all muscular fatigue when the aérial traveller is comfortably seated in the car of a balloon. ACCORDING to the 77es, there is likelihood of large supplies of electrical and mining machinery being required shortly for NO. 1707, VOL. 66] | be built. Johannesburg, where an ex ensive electric tramway system is to There is a desire to place orders as far as possible with British firms, but freights are very heavy, and British machinery requires therefore to be made lighter. Prompt delivery and lower prices are also needed to meet American and German competition ; it is said that several orders have recently been secured by foreign firms at very low prices in order to secure a firm footing in the market. A NEW oxygen-acetylene burner has been devised by M. Fouche (says the Azgéneer, July 11) which not only has a much higher temperature, but also the admixture of ether vapour is prevented. The ratio of the mixture {is 1 volume of acetylene to 1S volumes of oxygen, and the flame, which is 6 mm. long, has a greenish dart in the centre witha point at a very high temperature. Iron and steel, it is claimed, can be easily welded without either oxidising or carburising the iron. In an Appendix iii. to the Weekly Weather Report for the year 1901, the Meteorological Council has recently issued a very useful set of tables showing for the stations which furnish returns for that Report and the monthly summaries, (1) the average maximum, minimum and mean temperatures for each month, and for the whole year for thirty years (1871-1900) ; (2) the average monthly rainfall and number of rain-days for thirty- five years (1866-1900) ; and (3) the average number of hours of bright sunshine and percentages of possible duration for twenty years (1881-1900). These tables are in continuation of those issued in the preface to the Weekly Weather Report for 1895, and furnish at a glance valuable information on the clima- tology of each of the districts into which the British Islands have been divided for the purpose of weather forecasts. Mr. W. E. Cooxr’s report on meteorological observations made under his direction at the Perth Observatory and other places in Western Australia during the year 1900 contains an excellent collection of monthly and yearly climate and rain maps referring to the colony. One series of the maps shows for every month the mean pressures and temperatures and the mean maxi- mum temperatures at day and minimum temperatures at night ; also the annual means of the same records. In another series the amount of rainfall for every month of the year is shown graphically in each square degree of the colony, with the average rainfall for that district ; and the distribution of the rainfall for the whole year is shown in the same way in a separate map. Mr. Cooke reports that the astronomical buildings of the Perth Ob- servatory are now finished and the instruments in adjustment. The observatory is pledged to take a share in the preparation of the International Photographic Catalogue of Stars, but owing to want of assistants, it is difficult to obtain time for the work. The meteorological observations are, however, kept up at a fair number of stations, and the results for various localities through- out the State obtained since 1875 have been examined, tabu- lated and discussed, and will shortly be available in a volume entitled ‘* The Climate of Western Australia.” Mr. Kumacusu Minakata sends us from Japan two specimens, mounted as microscopic slides, of a fresh-water alga which he collected in a pond at Wakayama Shi, Japan. He desired to obtain an opinion as to the species, which he believed to be Pithophora Oedogonia, Wittrock, var. vaucheriotdes, Wolle, of which he possessed a quantity of specimens personally collected near Jacksonville, Florida, between 1891-92, well agreeing in detail with those submitted. He also remarked :— “Since the publication of Wittrock’s elaborate monograph of the Pithophoraceze, 1877, has any species, besides P. Kewenszs, been ever reported from any other part of the Old World?” Prof. Howes, to whom we submitted the specimens, says in reply :—‘‘I have no doubt that the Japanese identification is 280 correct. Mr. Rendle, with a former pupil of mine, Mr. W. West, jun., has described as new for Britain a variety of the genus from a canal in Manchester, where it was assuredly introduced (see Journal of Botany, vol. xxxvii., 1899, p. 289). I take his word as final. Mr. Minakata may be referred to the above-cited paper for the answer to: his second question. P. Kewensis must have also been introduced, as it has never been found again.” Pror. T. Levi Civita has contributed to the Azma/les of the Faculty of Sciences of Toulouse a paper having an important bearing on the recent discussions as to the production of a magnetic field by moving charges. In a previous paper on that subject, Prof. Righi had examined the possible sources of error in various experiments, from those of Rowland down to the recent observations of Cremieu and Adams, and had pointed out that some uncertainty was introduced by the presence of the conductor used to shield the magnetic needle from electrostatic action. This remark has led Prof. Levi Civita to undertake a mathematical investigation of the effect of an infinite plane- conducting screen on the magnetic field produced by an electro- static charge moving uniformly parallel to the plane. The results which are embodied in the present paper show that if a is the ratio of the velocity of translation to that of light, then up to the order of a®, the electric and magnetic forces on the side of the screen opposite to the moving charge are derivable from a potential. The electric force is negligible, while the mag- netic force is reduced to a certain fraction, less than one-half, of what it would be at the same point if the conductor were removed. The magnetic force is not, however, entirely screened by the conductor except in the limiting case when the sheet has infinite conductivity. THE unique construction of the ‘Cooke’ photographic lenses, made by Messrs. Taylor, Taylor and Hobson of Leicester, has given rise to possibilities of variation of their focal lengths by the user, that are both interesting and useful. The replace- ment of the back component by a lens of greater focal length, increasing the focal length of the objective by about 50 per cent. we referred to some time ago, the alternative back lens being known as an ‘extension lens.’’ Messrs. Taylor, Taylor and Hobson have now formulated a method by which the focal length may be reduced. This is effected by unscrewing the front component. One complete turn shortens the focal distance of a five-inch lens by nearly half an inch. Such a difference is of little use with reference to the resulting alteration in the scale of the image, though it may sometimes be convenient. But when applied as an alternative to the use of rack-work and other devices for increasing the distance between the lens and the plate for focussing purposes, as in the use of hand-cameras for comparatively near objects, this range is ample. Without moving either the objective as a whole or the plate, less than half a rotation of the front component of an objective of five inches focal length will alter the distance of the object that is in focus from infinity to three yards. The makers take advantage of this fact in a new issue of their lenses, in which a scale is engraved on the mount so that objects at infinity, ten, six, four and three yards’ distance may be brought into focus by this simple means. Within this range the defining power of the objective from corner to corner of a quarter plate, using the full aperture of 7/6°5, is so little affected that the deterioration of* the image at the edges of the plate can only be detected by means of a magnifier. The advantages of this method of focussing are that it is more simple from a constructional point of view than others now in use, saving the weight of those parts hitherto necessary simply for focussing purposes, and that as the lens and plate may be rigidly fixed in their relative positions, there is less risk of instability or misplacement with the con- NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE [JuLy 17, 1902 sequent deterioration of definition, The same principle is applicable when the ‘‘ extension lens” is employed, thus further increasing the range of adjustment possible. Messrs. R. FRIEDLANDER UND SouN, of Berlin, have issued two catalogues of floras, one of European, the other of exotic plants. ACCORDING to the Report for 1901, the Manchester Micro- scopical Society continues to do excellent work, although the hon, secretary has to deplore a diminished attendance at the meetings. Nature Notes for July contains a notice of Mr. E. N. Buxton’s efforts for the re-afforestation of a large part of the old Hainault Forest, which was deforested about 1850. The cost will be about 20,0007. for the Lambourne and Hainault lands, and 7000/. for the Grange Hill Forest. It is proposed to ask the great City Corporations and the Essex County Council to bear the main cost, although much financial help is expected from private beneficence and local bodies. In a paper published in vol. Ixxi. of the /ournal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal Mr. F. Finn notices certain instances of what he terms ‘‘abrupt variation ” in Indian birds. Among them he notices a not uncommon colour-phase in the ruff, and for the birds displaying this peculiarity he proposes the name Pavoncella pugnax leucoprora; this, it may be mentioned, is not in accordance with modern practice, which restricts sub- specific titles to local geographical forms. The author also calls attention to a domesticated cock in the Indian Museum, de- scribed many years ago by Blyth, which has partially assumed the female plumage, and appears to be the only known example, at least in India, of such an abnormality. THE failure of pea crops forms one of the more important items in the Az//etin issued this year by the authorities of the agricultural experiment station at Fort Collins, Colorado. It was discovered that the soil was permeated with the hyphz of a Rhizoctonia, similar to, if not identical with, that which is de- structive to potatoes. Peas are more resistant to the attacks of this fungus than potatoes, but under certain conditions, such as in a heavy soil which holds the water and while the plants are young, the fungus gets the better of the struggle. In the case of seeds taken from diseased potato plants, treatment with solu- tions of corrosive sublimate or formalin has been found to prove efficacious, and probably this will also hold good for peas. A Rhizoctonia was also found to be the cause of disease on black- berries. Injurious effects of spraying apple trees with Bordeaux mixture are reported, causing malformation of the fruit. These and other pathological effects are illustrated by excellent plates produced from photographs. CAPTAIN STANLEY S. FLOWER has issued his Report, for 1901, on the Zoological Gardens at Ghizeh, near Cairo, which are now placed under the Public Works Department of the Government of Egypt. The Report gives an excellent account of the condition and progress of this instituton, which seems to have prospered greatly under Captain Flower’s directorship. The Gardens, which extend over about 50 acres, are beautifully treed and kept up; they are situated at Ghizeh on the left bank of the Nile, and are connected with Cairo by tramway, They contain living examples of about 700 species of mammals, birds and reptiles, and a great variety of plants. The number of visitors increases every year, and was 52,711 in 1901. The latest additions to the buildings are an elephant house, a lion house and a large aviary, besides other smaller structures. It is stated that examples of forty-five different species of wild birds were observed within the Gardens in 1gor. JuLy 17, 1902] UsEFUL suggestions for laying out, planting and cultivating a garden and grounds are given by Mr. T. W. Sanders in the second number of the series of rural handbooks in course of publication by Messrs. Dawbarn and Ward. Seven plans are given for laying out plots varying in area from a quarter of an acre to ten acres; and anyone free to follow the designs set forth, and capable of waiting patiently for the trees and shrubs to develop, may act with advantage upon the concise instructions which Mr. Sanders gives. A CHEAP edition (price 6d.) of Laing’s ‘‘ Modern Science and Modern Thought,” revised and brought up to date, with a biographical note by Mr. Edward Clodd, has been issued for the Rationalist Press Association by Messrs. Watts and Co- With reference to the revision which the advance of knowledge during the last seventeen years has rendered necessary, Mr. Clodd remarks :—‘‘ The portions thus affected are those dealing with the continuity of Paleolithic and Neolithic man in Con- tinental Europe ; with the recent discovery of remains, probably of an intermediate form between man and ape, in Java ; and with the remarkable discoveries in Babylonia, which appear to accord to that empire on earlier civilisation than that of Egypt.” Mr. BENJAMIN Kipp is leaving England shortly for South Africa, in connection with studies on which he is engaged. Since the publication of ‘‘ Principles of Western Civilisation ” he has been occupied with articles of some length for the ‘‘ En- cyclopedia Britannica.” One of these deals with the applica- tion of the doctrine of evolution to society. The article on sociology in the new edition will be contributed by Mr. Kidd. THE question as to whether tellurium or iodine possesses the larger atomic weight has given rise to many researches since Mendeléeff pointed out that the conclusion drawn from the periodic system was opposed to the experimentally determined facts. This work has hitherto been principally devoted to tellurium, partly because as the rarer and lesser known element tellurium might possibly contain elements of higher atomic weight, but chiefly because the work of Stas in regard to iodine appeared so convincing that further determinations of this con- stant for iodine would be superfluous. Since all the work done on tellurium tends to show that its atomic weight is decidedly higher than that of iodine, Prof. Ladenburg has attacked the question from the other side, and has redetermined the atomic weight of iodine, using methods of purification differing from those adopted by Stas; the result is in almost absolute agree- ment with the usually accepted figure, so that the discrepancy between the conclusions of the periodic law and the results of experiment still remains unexplained. THE current number of the Serichte containsa paper by Dr. W. Marckwald on polonium, the radioactive constituent of bismuth. The discoverers of these radioactive elements, M. and Mme. Curie, after numerous attempts to isolate this element, concluded that polonium is a species of active bismuth, and that there is as yet no proof that it containsa new element. Dr. Marckwald, after numerous fruitless experiments, has succeeded in obtaining a minute amount of polonium in a manner which would appear to exclude the possibility of its identity with bismuth. Starting with some kilograms of residues from pitch- blende, about 1 per cent. of strongly radioactive bismuth oxy- chloride was obtained, and it was proved that this activity remained unchanged after several months. The acid solution of this was then treated with a stick of pure metallic bismuth, the metal becoming after some time coated with a black de- posit. It was found that the activity of this deposit, as measured by the electroscope, far exceeded that of the original solution, the residual solution having lost its activity during the deposi- tion. No deposit was seen when a second stick of bismuth was NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE 281 placed in this exhausted solution. The total weight of polonium obtained was only 5 milligrams, corresponding to an amount not exceeding I gram per ton of pitchblende. The author hopes to be able to obtain sufficient material to carry out an atomic weight determination. ALTHOUGH the fact of the existence of a gaseous antimony hydride has been known for many years, it is only comparatively recently that it has been obtained in the pure state, and the accounts of the stability of the pure hydride differ considerably. Thus, according to Olszewski, who first succeeded in solidifying the gas, decomposition with separation of antimony occurs readily even at — 90°C. The current number of the Berzchte contains a paper on this subject by A. Stock and W. Doht. In order to obtain as richa gas as possible, they made a careful study of the composition of the gas evolved from a series of alloys of antimony with zinc, sodium, calcium and magnesium, and they found that the magnesium alloy was much the best for the purpose. Thus, whilst thezinc-antimony alloys never yielded a gas containing more than I per cent. of the hydride, an alloy of one part of antimony with two of magnesium gave hydrogen con- taining from 10°4 to 14 per cent. of the antimony hydride. From this mixture the pure gas was easily solidified out with liquid air, melting at — 88° C. and boiling at — 17°C. The solid melts to a clear liquid, and evaporates without leaving any trace of antimony, and, in fact, the gas may be kept at the ordinary temperature for some hours before decomposition sets in. THE additions to the Zoological Society’s Gardens during the past week include a Brown Capuchin (Cebus fatwel/us) from Guiana, presented by Madame Delmas; two Ocelots (Fe/zs pardalis), two Common Boas (Soa constrictor) from South America, presented by Captain W. H. Lacy; two Giraffes (Giraffa camelopardalis, 8 2) from Kordofan, two Cheetahs (Cynoelurus jubatus), three Secretary Vultures (Serpentarius reptilivorus) from Africa, presented by Colonel Mahon ; a Green Woodpecker (Gecznus viridis) British, presented by Mr, J. T. Jones ; a Roseate Cockatoo (Cacatua rosezcapzl/a) from Australia, presented by Miss Ina King; five Lions (young) (eds /o), two Grévy’s Zebras (Zguus grevyz, 9 9) from Southern Abyssinia, a Campbell’s Monkey (Cercopithecus campbellz) from West Africa, five Pratincoles (Glareola pratincola), European, two Lesueur’s Terrapins (MZalacoclemmys Jlesueuri), two prickly Trionyx (Zrionyx spinifer), an Alligator Terrapin (Chelydra serpentina) from North America, two Striated Snake-head Fish (Ophiocephalus striatus) from India, two Egyptian Geese (Chenalopex aegyptiacus) from Africa, deposited ; an Ourang- Outang (Simia satyrus) from Borneo, two Golden-backed Woodpeckers (Brachyplernus aurantius), an Indian Roller (Coractas indica) from India, two White-eyebrowed Guans (Penelope superctliaris) from South-east Brazil, purchased ; a Duke of Bedford’s Deer (Cervus xanthopygtus) born in the Gardens. OUR ASTRONOMICAL COLUMN. BRIGHT METEOR OF JULY 13.—Several correspondents send particulars of a brilliant meteor observed over a wide area last Sunday evening, July 13, about 10.30. According to charts sent by Prof. F. J. Allen from Cambridge, and Mr. A. Macrae from Crouch End, the meteor, which was probably sporadic, first appeared at an altitude of about 40°, and travel- ling in a N.E.-S.W. direction crossed a line joining Jupiter and Markab at right angles, at about 25° from the former. The meteor travelled very quickly and was intensely bright. Prof. Allen says :—‘‘ It illuminated the landscape like a considerable flash of lightning, though the moon shone and incandescent lights were near.” Its colour is given as ‘‘ violet-white.” Mr. C. Waterer, of Margate, also remarks :—‘‘It lighted up the whole 282 landscape in a remarkable manner, and seemed to glow with a peculiarly steady light.” Mr. C. G. Osborne, who saw the meteor at Godalming, says that the light was so brilliant that people ina large hall thought a flash of lightning had occurred. The trail, which was about 10° long and lasted for 15-20 seconds, is described as being of a violet and blue colour, and before extinction it became quite sinuous. The Rev. F. J. Jervis-Smith, who observed the meteor at Iffley, near Oxford, sends the following notes of his ob- servation :—‘‘ Time, 10.30 p.m., July 13. Approximate angle subtended by total length of luminous path about 15°. Line of flight downwards and nearly vertical. Bearing E.S.E. Angle between its highest point and the horizon about 45°. Time of duration about 2} seconds.” Mr, Walter E. Besley, director of the meteoric section of the British Astronomical Association, states in the Zzes that the course of the meteor was from R.A. 311° and north declination 21° to R.A. 3104° and north declination 163°. DISCOVERER OF NovA PERSEI.—At a meeting of the Société Astronomique held on July 4, M. Flammarion informed the members that it was one of their number, M. A. de Borissiak, a student at Kieff, who first observed Nova Persei. This ob- server recorded the Nova as being equal in magnitude to ‘8 Geminorum at $ p.m. February 21, 1901 (Pulkowa time), and, taking into account the difference of longitude, this was about Sh. 4om, before Mr. Anderson discovered it. The Russian Government has presented M. Borissiak with a special medal for this discovery (Budletin de la Soctélé Astronomigue de France, July). Nova PERSEI.—The fourth report (June 1902) of the Variable Star Section of the British Astronomical Association, is devoted to a memoir in which Colonel Markwick has gathered together all the observations of the members on the magnitude, colour, light curve and spectrum of Nova Persei. The memoir contains several maps and charts of the region about the Nova, some very good light curves compiled, from many observations, by Mr. J. E. Gore and a series of excellent photographs of the Nova itself obtained by Mr. Alex. Smith at Dalbeattie, using a 52-inch doublet at various foci, sometimes with full aperture and sometimes with only half (z.e. a semicircular) aperture. Hone Kone Double STAR OBSERVATIONS.—Nos. 3798-99 of the Astronomische Nachrichten axe mainly devoted to the observations of 200 double stars made by Mr. W. Doberck at Hong Kong. Mr. Doberck describes his instrument, which seems to be an ancient one, and shows how the somewhat necessarily large errors have been eliminated. He insists that observations of the same double star should be separated by fairly long intervals in order to render them quite independent of each other, and contends that stellar objects should always be designated by the initial and number of the discoverer, and not by any reference to a general catalogue. OBSERVATIONS OF THE VARIABLE STAR x” CYGNI DURING 1899.—M. Blum publishes in the Bzletin de la Société Astro- nomigque de France an account of the observations of this star made during 1899 by MM. Ed. de Perrot and P. Sella. The two sets of results and the curves plotted therefrom show very fair agreement, and M. Sella deduces the following con- clusions from them :— (1) The star is visible to the naked eye 3 days before and 30 days after the theoretical times. (2) It increases to maximum (4°7) very rapidly, viz. in 17 days, but decreases very slowly. (3) There exists a second maximum (4°8) about 28 days after the first, a third maximum (5°0) 16 days later than the second, and a fourth maximum about 18 or 19 days later than the third. The respective dates of observation were May 10, June 7, June 23 and July 11-12. The complete range of variability of this star is about 8 magnitudes. ROTATION OF THE BRIGHTER FIXED STARS, AS A WHOLE, WITH RESPECT TO THE FAINTER STARS.—In No. 3800 of the Astronomische Nachrichten, Sir David Gill communicates a preliminary note on the apparent rotation of the brighter fixed stars, taken as a whole, in regard to the fainter fixed stars, taken as a whole. After comparing the common data given in the Cape Cata- logues of 1880 and 1900, Newcomb’s Fundamental Catalogue NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE NN [JuLy 17, 1902 for 1900, Taylor's and other catalogues, and carefully correlating and eliminating the personal errors therein, the author arrives at the conclusion that the remaining discrepancies can only be accounted for by supposing the above-mentioned rotation. The author urges that the greatest care should be taken to eliminate all the errors in reducing plates for the Astrographic Chart, and suggests that the Repsold-Struve method for magni- tude correction, described by Cohn in the Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 3766, should be used. PHOTOGRAPHIC MAGNITUDE OF STARS.—In a note to the Paris Académie des Sciences, M. Prosper Henry points out the effect of the influence of magnitude in causing errors, small but effective, in the reduction of stellar negatives. Dissatisfied with the final utility of the method proposed by Sir David Gillin the Budletin du Comité de la Carte du Ciel, he pro- poses a method where duplicate images of the same region are obtained very near together on the same negative, the one with a very short exposure, the other with a long exposure, and then by means of a formula in which the only variables are 7, g’ and g, he finds the quantity — ” which is the variation of thetscale fora difference of one magnitude in the scale of magni- tudes adopted, ¢’ — g being the difference in magnitude between the images obtained by the two different exposures. One advan- tage of this method is that it is mot necessary to reduce the coordinates of the plate to right ascension and declination, neither is it necessary to correct for refraction unless the two exposures were made very far apart, and at some distance from the meridian. MARINE BIOLOGY IN WALES. S announced last week, Mr. G. W. Duff Assheton-Smith, of Vaynol Park, Bangor, who has for many years taken a warm interest in the zoological department of the University College of North Wales, has offered a site to the College for a marine zoological station, on condition that the maintenance of the station when erected is assured. The fine zoological collection at the College bears ample testimony to Mr. Assheton-Smith’s interest, as he has frequently enriched it with valuable specimens from his menagerie at Vaynol. The site spoken of is on the Menai Straits, about midway between Bangor and the suspension bridge. Sheltered and beautifully situated, it is from every point of view the best site in the locality on which to place such an institution. Besides giving the site with his rights to the foreshore, Mr. Assheton-Smith will also give the necessary facilities of access through his property. In the laboratory, aquarium and enclosures, which will be features of the station, investigations and experiments in connection with our fisheries will be instituted and carried out. The Menai Straits possess a peculiarly rich fauna, and material is always available for investigation and experimental purposes. A brief note on the steps which have led up to this development may not be out of place. When, in 1892, the Liverpool Marine Biological Committee decided to vacate the station on Puffin Island and to take up its headquarters at Port Erin, Prof. Herdman offered, on behalf of his committee, to dispose of the Puffin Island station to Prof. White. Being un- willing to allow an institution of this nature so near to his college tolapse, and at ithe same time being desirous of con- tinuing the work of the station as far as possible, Prof. White, with the cooperation of some of his colleagues, provided the money to acquire it. With the assistance of friends he also raised a small income for the maintenance of the building, for carrying on the work and for the publication of reports. A com- mittee for investigating the fauna and flora of the coast of North Wales, and for spromoting the sea fisheries, was formed and the work began. An account of the work accomplished is given in the various reports which have been issued. The inaccessibility of the island, and other obvious difficulties connected with an isolated position, frequently presented them- selves, and these led Prof. White to cast round for a more suit- able situation, with the result as noted. In addition to the promise of a site, the College obtains the professional services of an accomplished architect—Mr, Harold Hughes, of Bangor—free. Mr. Hughes took much in- terest in the Puffin Island station, and both he and Prof. White made some interesting excavations to elucidate the past history Juty 17, 1902] of the island. A start has been made in raising the building fund, and Mr. Henry R. Davis, of Treborth, who acted as hon. treasurer of the Puffin Island station since 1892, has made a handsome contribution. It is hoped that his example will be largely followed. With regard to maintenance, hopes are entertained that some money from Government sources will be available. A year ago the College approached the Board of Trade with a view of obtaining a grant to enable it to undertake systematic investiga- tions in connection with fisheries, and recently the College put forward its claims for support before the Ichthyological Committee of the Board. FORESTRY. THE opening paper in the Zyansactzons of the Royal Scottish Arboricultural Society, 1901 (vol. xvi. part iil.) is by Mr. J. S. Gamble, C.I.E., F.R.S., and gives a full account of the Forestry Exhibition in Paris in 1900, in the ‘‘ Palais de Foréts, de la Chasse et des Cueillettes,” the latter term practically meaning productions of various kinds, from baskets and fishing- rods to sponges and Russian caviare. The chief exhibit by the French Government was a series of models, photographs, pamphlets, &c., on the reclamation of mountain sides, including a large diorama representing a hill-side before—and several years after—reclamation. All these illustrate the magnificent work done by France in the last forty years, during which nearly 640 square miles of country have been reafforested at a cost of about two and a half million pounds. Mr. Gamble refers to the necessity of such work being under- taken in the Himalayas, where landslips due to forest denudation have wrought wholesale destruction. He _ in- stances hill-slopes which he once knew as covered with fine forests, but which are now bare and scored with landslips, while their gentle streams have been converted into torrents. The “sufficient for the day” policy of Indian administrators con- stantly neglects the work of preserving mountain forests, which is done seriously and systematically and with the best results in France, Austria and Hungary. The possession of a world-wide empire should induce us also to undertake such an obvious duty. More has been done in India to fix shifting sands, chiefly by means of casuarina plantations along the Coromandel coast, here also following the great French work in Gascony, where 260 square miles have been reclaimed and planted with maritime pine. The Germans have also afforested nearly the whole North German coast with Pinus sylvestris. A great feature of the International Sylvicultural Congress held at Paris during the progress of the Exhibition was M. Mélard’s paper on the world’s annual excess of imports over exports of timber, which he estimated at 3,437,115. in 1898, the chief importing countries being Britain, showing an annual excess of imports !over exports of 20,523,758/., and Germany, 13,741,240/., and the chief exporting ones Austria-Hungary, having an excess of exports over imports of 7,941,422/., Sweden, 7,927,080/., Russia, 5,361,285, and Canada, 5,077,756/. Alluding to the enormous imports of timber into the British Isles, M. Mélard notes that we have annually to build houses, factories and workshops for an increased population of 300,000, more than equal to that of Bordeaux, the third town in France. The large imports of timber into Germany, where 26 per cent. of the country is forest, much of which is scientifically managed, is a remarkable proof of the recent great economic development of that country. The second paper in the 7vamsactions is a reprint of Dr. Schlich’s lecture at the Society of Arts, London, on February 27, 1901, on the world’s timber supply, which gives more recent figures than M, Mélard’s. Dr. Schlich had broken ground on this subject in March, 1897, in a lecture at the Imperial Institute; in the present paper he gives very full Statistics, and sums up with the statement that plenty of hard- wood is still available, but that coniferous wood (soft-wood), which forms 85 per cent. of the total demand, can be con- tinuously provided only by Sweden, Russia and Canada. Sweden, where the forests are well managed, may be able to increase its yield to 1,500,000 tons, out of a total demand of about 9,000,000 tons of coniferous timber, but the Russian supply is precarious; the great stand-by for coniferous timber will be Canada, if the Dominion Government does not lose time in introducing a rational management of the Canadian forests. NO. 1707, VOL. 66] NATURE 283 There are two useful papers by Mr. R. C. Munro Ferguson, M.P., the first on the arboricultural adornment of towns, with a list, by Prof. Bayley Balfour, of the shrubs and trees flourish- ing in the Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh. It is not, says Prof. Balfour, the low temperature of Edinburgh that retards the growth of woody plants, but winds blowing during cold weather deprive the plants of their water, so that, given shelter, a large number of trees and shrubs may be grown. Mr Ferguson’s second paper is entitled ‘‘ Hints on the Training of Foresters.”” The advice given is excellent, and should be read by all young woodmen. Schools for woodmen might with advantage be established in the Crown woodlands adjoining the Forest of Dean and the New Forest, as well as near Edin- burgh, but the great requisite for this country in forestry education is that it should be available at our universities, so that land owners, land agents and future colonial administrators may be taught the importance of forestry. At present it takes several years to teach a new colonial governor not to devastate woodlands, and as soon as he has learned the lesson and pre- pared a useful forest scheme he has to go, and his successor frequently upsets all he has done. Several useful papers follow by different authors, chiefly estate woodmen, and in one of these, by Mr. D. A. Glen, on “Forestry in Kent and Sussex,” the following passage occurs :— ““In many of these woods, not only the dead leaves, but every bit of herbage and vegetable undergrowth is carefully raked together and carted away to make litter, which, after it has been well rotted in the cattle-sheds, is utilised as manure for the hop-fields.” This practice is apparently also followed in Hampshire, and the future ruin of these impoverished wood- lands is as certain as those treated similarly near Nuremberg, where the Scotch pine has become a dwarf tree rarely exceeding 12 feet in height. Paper No. 41 of the Zyamsactions is an account of a deputa- tion last October to the President of the Board of Agriculture. This has been followed by the appointment by Mr. Hanbury of a Departmental Committee, ‘‘ to,inquire into and report as to the present position and future prospects of forestry, and the planting and management of woodlands in the United Kingdom, and to consider whether any further measures might with advantage be taken, either by the provision of further edu- cational facilities, or otherwise, for their promotion and en- couragement.” Mr. Hanbury’s committee is admirably selected, and the best results may be anticipated from its deliberations if only money is forthcoming to carry them out. Colonel Bailey, R.E., the Instructor in Forestry at Edin- burgh, gives some ‘‘ Notes on the Forests of Norway,” chiefly compiled from an official publication, which will be very useful to the members of the Royal Scottish Arboricultural Society in their proposed excursion to Norway this year. Last year’s excursion was to woodlands near Glasgow, an account of which and several useful notes and queries on forest questions close this volume. The Society is to be congratulated on the excellent work done under its auspices. While the Royal Scottish Arboricultural Society has been in existence for forty-eight years and contains more than goo members, the English sister society is twenty years old and contained 513 members when the last volume of its transactions was published. These transactions, in the first place, deal with last year’s ‘excursion to some interesting woodlands within easy reach of Peterborough. Then follow the two prize essays, to each of which a silver medal was awarded, the former by Mr, J. Price, on forest roads, with diagrams, a most useful paper, and the latter by Mr. A. Deane, of the Warrington Museum, giving descrip- tions of the structure of British woods, with beautiful repro- ductions of photographs of transverse sections of each species. Other interesting papers follow: ‘‘Arboreal Tunnelters” (leopard moth, hornet clearwing, goat moth and wood wasp), by Mr. C. Morley; and on an oak canker due to a species of Stereum, which the author considers to be new, and proposes to call Stereum querctnum, by Mr. M. C. Potter, Professor of Botany at the College of Science, Newcastle. Sir Hugh Beevor contributes the financial history of a four- acre mixed plantation, calculating the rate of interest at 4 per cent., which Sir J. Hooker considers forestry should pay before it will attract attention from investors. The financial history of this plantation is summarised in the following statement, which is of sufficient general interest for reproduction in the pages of NATURE. 284 NATURE [JuLy 17, 1902 (1) I\comr. (1) EXPENDITURE. Annual recurrent Income per acre :— Annual recurrent Expenditure per acre :— Sporting Rent Lo 7 10 Tithe Rent Charge ... Nee as, Bs Poy to St Wand) Tax ..